Sharp MX m266n SM

1 : ‘15/Aug. 2 : ‘16/Jun.
SERVICE MANUAL
CODE: 00ZMXM316/S3E
DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL
SYSTEM
MX-M356N/M356U 1
MX-M266N/M316N/M265N/M315N
MX-M265U/M315U
MX-M266N A/M316N A/M365N A 2
MODEL MX-M265NE/M315NE
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
[2] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
[5] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
[6] SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
[7] TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
[8] FIRMWARE UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
[9] MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
[10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
[11] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
[12] ELECTRICAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
[13] OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Parts marked with " " are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.
This document has been published to be used

SHARP CORPORATION for after sales service only.
The contents are subject to change without notice.
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING [6] SIMULATION

1. Precautions for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 1. General and purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
2. Warning for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 2. Starting the simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
3. Note for installing site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 3. List of simulation codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
4. Note for handling PWB and electronic parts . . . . . . . . . .ii 4. Details of simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
5. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii [7] TROUBLESHOOTING
6. Note for handling the drum unit, the developing unit . . . iii 1. Error code and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7. Screw tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii 2. JAM and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
8. Relation between model names and names 3. Image send communication report code . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
in the manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
4. Dial tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE
[8] FIRMWARE UPDATE
1. System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1. Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
2. Option list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
2. Update procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
[2] SPECIFICATIONS [9] MAINTENANCE
1. Basic specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 1. Maintenance list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
2. Copy functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 2. Other related items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
3. Printer function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 3. Display of maintenance execution timing. . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
4. Image send function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
[10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
5. FAX function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
1. Disassembly and Assembly table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
6. Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2. Disassembly and assembly of each unit . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
7. Dimensions and weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
[11] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS
1. Operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
1. Supply system table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
2. RSPF section (31opm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
2. Maintenance parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3. RSPF section (56opm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
3. Developer/Drum life end definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
4. Scanner section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
4. Production number identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
5. Manual paper feed section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
5. Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
6. Paper registration section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE
7. Paper feed tray section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
1. External view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
8. Paper exit section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
2. Internal structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
9. Duplex section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
3. Automatic document feeder and document glass . . . . 4-3
10. OPC drum section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18
4. I/F connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
11. Toner supply section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20
5. Operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
12. Developing section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-21
6. RSPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
13. Transfer section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23
7. Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 14. Fusing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25
8. Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 15. Fan and Filter section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27
9. Solenoid/Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
[12] ELECTRICAL SECTION
10. Drive motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
11. Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
2. Power line diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
12. Fan/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
3. Actual wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
13. PWB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
[13] OTHERS
14. Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
1. HDD/SD card memory map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
[5] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS
2. Necessary steps when replacing the PWB, HDD and the
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
SD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
2. Adjustment item list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
3. HDD/SD card SIM format operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
3. Details of adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
4. SERVICE WEB PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
5. Details and operation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
6. TOOL LIST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
MX-M316N
NOTE FOR SERVICING Service Manual
It may cause an explosion, a fire or an electric shock.
* Do not damage, break, or stress the power cord.
* About a main unit illustration, it may differ from a target model.
Do not put heavy objects on the power cable. Do not stress, forc-
ibly bend, or pull the power cord.
1. Precautions for servicing It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
* When servicing, disconnect the power plug, the printer cable, the * Keep the power cable away from a heat source.
network cable, and the telephone line from the machine, except Do not insert the power plug with dust on it into a power outlet.
when performing the communication test, etc.
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
It may cause an injury or an electric shock.
* Do not place liquids or foreign metallic objects inside the
* There is a high temperature area inside the machine. Use machine.
extreme care when servicing. It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
It may cause a burn. * Do not touch the power cord, insert the phone jack, operate the
* There is a high voltage section inside the machine which may machine, or perform service on the machine with wet or oily
cause an electric shock. Be careful when servicing. hands.
* Do not disassemble the laser unit. Do not insert a reflective It may cause an electric shock.
material such as a screwdriver in the laser beam path.
It may damage eyes by reflection of laser beams. 3. Note for installing site
* When servicing with the machine operating, be careful not to
Do not install the machine at the following sites.
squeeze you hands by the chain, the belt, the gear, and other
driving sections. * Place of high temperature, high humidity, low temperature,
* Do not leave the machine with the cabinet disassembled. low humidity, place under an extreme change in temperature
and humidity.
Do not allow any person other than a serviceman to touch inside
Paper may get damp and form condensation inside the machine,
the machine. It may cause an electric shock, a burn, or an injury.
causing paper jam or copy dirt.
* When servicing, do not breathe toner, developer, and ink exces-
For operating and storing conditions, refer to the specifications
sively. Do not get them in the eyes.
described later.
If toner, developer, or ink enters your eyes, wash it away with
water immediately, and consult a doctor if necessary.
* The machine has got sharp edges inside. Be careful not to dam-
age fingers when servicing.
* Do not throw toner or a toner cartridge in a fire. Otherwise, toner
may ignite and burn you.
* When replacing a lithium battery on a PWB, only use the speci-
fied replacement battery.
If a battery of different specification is used, it may cause a * Place of extreme vibrations
machine malfunction or breakdown.
It may cause a breakdown.
* When carrying a unit with PWB or electronic parts installed to it,
be sure to put it in an anti-static-electricity bag.
It may otherwise cause a machine breakdown or malfunction.
CAUTION
DOUBLE POLE/NEUTRAL FUSING
(200V series only)
2. Warning for servicing

* Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that * Poorly ventilated place
meets the specified voltage and current requirements. An electrostatic type copier will produce ozone.
Avoid complex wiring, which may lead to a fire or an electric The quantity of ozone produced is designed to a low level so as
shock. not to affect human bodies. However, continuous use of such a
It may cause a fire or an electric shock. machine may produce an ozone smell. Install the machine in a
well ventilated place.
* If there is any abnormality such as a smoke or an abnormal
smell, interrupt the job and disconnect the power plug.
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
* Be sure to connect the grounding wire. If an electric leakage
occurs without grounding, a fire or an electric shock may result.
To protect the machine and the power unit from lightening,
grounding must be made.
* When connecting the grounding wire, never connect it to the fol-
lowing points.
- Gas tube
- Lightning conductor
- A water pipe or a water faucet, which is not recognized as a
grounding object by the authorities.
- Grounding wire for telephone line
MX-M316N NOTE FOR SERVICING - i

* Place of direct sunlight. 4. Note for handling PWB and electronic
Plastic parts and ink may be deformed, discolored, or may parts
undergo qualitative change.
When handling the PWB and the electronic parts, be sure to
It may cause a breakdown or output quality problems.
observe the following precautions in order to prevent against dam-
age by static electricity.
* When in transit or storing, put the parts in an anti-static bag or an
anti-static case and do not touch them with bare hands.
* Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium

The organic photo-conductor (OPC) drum used in the machine
may undergo qualitative change due to organic gases such as
ammonium.
Installation of this machine near a diazo-type copier and blue
print machine may result in poor quality output.
* When and after removing the parts from an anti-static bag (case),
use an earth band as shown below:
* Put an earth band to your arm, and connect it to the machine.
* Place of much dust

When dust or contaminants enters the machine, it may cause a
breakdown or poor quality output.
* Place near a wall

The machine will require ventilation.
If ventilation is not proper, poor output or machine failure may
result.
11-13/16" * When repairing or replacing an electronic part, perform the

(30cm) procedure on an anti-static mat.
11-13/16" 17-23/32"
(30cm) (45cm)
* Unstable or irregular surface

If the machine is dropped or tips over, it may cause injury or
machine malfunction.
Use an optional desk or an exclusive-use desk.
When using the optional desk, be sure to fix the adjuster and lock
the casters.
MX-M316N NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii

1 : ‘15/Aug.
5. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU Screw kinds and tightening torques
Normal screws, set screws (including step screws)
When repairing or replacing, be sure to observe the following
items.
Tightening Tightening Tightening
* When repairing or replacing the LSU, be sure to disconnect the Screw Material to be
torque torque torque
diameter fixed
power plug from the power outlet. (Nm) (kgfcm) (lbft)
* When repairing or replacing the LSU, follow the procedures M2.6 Steel plate 0.8 - 1.0 8 - 10 0.6 - 0.7
described in this Service Manual. M3 Steel plate 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
* When checking the operations after repairing the LSU, keep all M4 Steel plate 1.6 - 1.8 16 - 18 1.2 - 1.3
the parts including the cover installed and perform the operation Tapping screws (for iron)
check.
* Do not modify the LSU. Tightening Tightening Tightening
Screw Material to be
* When visually checking the inside of the machine for the opera- torque torque torque
diameter fixed
(Nm) (kgfcm) (lbft)
tion check, be careful not to allow laser beams to enter the eyes.
M3 Steel plate 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
If the above precaution is neglected or the LSU is modified, ones (Plate thickness
safety may be at risk. 0.8mm or above)
M4 Steel plate 1.6 - 1.8 16 - 18 1.2 - 1.3
6. Note for handling the drum unit, the (Plate thickness
0.8mm or above)
developing unit M3 Steel plate 0.6 - 0.8 6-8 0.4 - 0.6
When handling the OPC drum unit, and the developing unit, strictly (Plate thickness
observe the following items. less than 0.8mm)
M4 Steel plate 1.2 - 1.4 12 - 14 0.9 - 1.0
If these items are neglected, a trouble may be generated in the (Plate thickness
copy and print image quality. less than 0.8mm)
Drum unit
Tapping screw (for plastic)
* Avoid working at a place with strong lights.
* Do not expose the OPC drum to lights including interior lights for Tightening Tightening Tightening
a long time. Screw Material to be
torque torque torque
diameter fixed
* When the OPC drum is removed from the machine, cover it with (Nm) (kgfcm) (lbft)
light blocking material. (When using paper, use about 10 sheets M3 Plastic resin 0.6 - 0.8 6-8 0.4 - 0.6
of paper to cover it.) M4 Plastic resin 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
* Be careful not to attach fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign
material on the OPC drum surface.
Developing unit 8. Relation between model names and
* Be careful not to leave fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign names in the manual
material on the developing unit.
Fusing unit
Model name Name in the manual
* Be careful not to "leave" fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign MX-M266N/MX-M265N/MX-M265U 26cpm machine
material on the fusing roller. MX-M316N/MX-M315N/MX-M315U 31cpm machine
If these items are neglected, a trouble may be generated in the MX-M356N/MX-M356U 35cpm machine 1
copy and print image quality.
7. Screw tightening torque

The screws used in this machine are largely classified into three
types.
These types are classified according to the shape of the screw
grooves and use positions.
The table below shows the types of the screws and the tightening
torques depending on the use position.
When tightening the screws for repair or maintenance, refer to the
table.
However, for the other conditions of tightening screws than speci-
fied on this table, or under special circumstances, the details are
described on the separate page. Refer to the descriptions on such
an exception.
CAUTION: Especially for the screw fixing positions where there is
an electrode or a current flows, use enough care to
tighten securely to avoid loosening.
MX-M316N NOTE FOR SERVICING - iii

1 : ‘15/Aug. 2 : ‘16/Jun.
MX-M316N
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE Service Manual
1. System configuration
A. N model
1 MX-M316N/M266N/M315N/M356N
MX-M316N A/M266N A/M356N A
2 MX-M315NE MX-M265N/M265NE
DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL
SYSTEM SYSTEM
MX-TR18
JOB SEPARATOR
MX-TR17
EXIT TRAY UNIT
MX-FN26
FINISHER
MX-CS12
500 SHEET PAPER TRAY
MX-CS13
AR-DS19 MX-CS12
HIGH STAND 500 SHEET PAPER TRAY
AR-DS20
LOW STAND
MX-PK11 MX-PF10 MX-FX11 MX-FWX1 AR-SU1 MX-FR48U

PS3 EXPANSION KIT BARCODE FONT KIT FACSIMILE EXPANSION INTERNET FAX EXPANSION STAMP UNIT DATA SECURITY KIT
KIT KIT
MX-M316N/M266N/M315N
/M265N
MX-USX1 MX-USX5 MX-US10 MX-US50 MX-USA0 MX-AMX1

SHARPDESK 1 LICENSE SHARPDESK 5 LICENSE SHARPDESK 10 LICENSE SHARPDESK 50 LICENSE SHARPDESK 100 LICENSE APPLICATION
KIT KIT KIT KIT KIT INTEGRATION MODULE
MX-AMX2 MX-AMX3 MX-HD14 MX-EB13 MX-FR50U MX-HD15

APPLICATION EXTERNAL ACCOUNT HARD DISK EXPANSION KIT USB WIRELESS LAN DATA SECURITY KIT HARD DISK EXPANSION KIT
COMMUNICATION MODULE MODULE ADAPTER
MX-M316N/M266N/M315N
/M265N MX-M356N MX-M356N
MX-M315NE/M265NE MX-M316N/M266N/M315N/ MX-M316N/M266N/M315N/
M265N/MX-M316N A/M266N A/ M265N/MX-M316N A/M266N A/
M356N A/M315NE/M265NE M356N A
MX-M316N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 1

1 : ‘15/Aug. 2 : ‘16/Jun.
B. U model
2 MX-RP19 MX-VR12 MX-RP20

REVERSING SINGLE PASS DOCUMENT COVER REVERSING SINGLE PASS
FEEDER FEEDER
MX-TR18 MX-M315U MX-M265U MX-M356U

DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL
JOB SEPARATOR SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM
MX-TR17
EXIT TRAY UNIT
MX-FN26
FINISHER
MX-CS12
MX-CS13
AR-DS19 MX-CS12
HIGH STAND 500 SHEET PAPER TRAY
AR-DS20
LOW STAND
MX-PB16 MX-PK11 MX-PF10 MX-NSX1 MX-FX11 MX-FWX1

PRINTER EXPANSION KIT PS3 EXPANSION KIT BARCODE FONT KIT NETWORK SCANNER FACSIMILE EXPANSION INTERNET FAX EXPANSION
EXPANSION KIT KIT KIT
AR-SU1 MX-FR48U MX-USX1 MX-USX5 MX-US10 MX-US50

STAMP UNIT DATA SECURITY KIT SHARPDESK 1 LICENSE SHARPDESK 5 LICENSE SHARPDESK 10 LICENSE SHARPDESK 50 LICENSE
KIT KIT KIT KIT
MX-M315U/M265U
MX-USA0 MX-AMX1 MX-AMX2 MX-AMX3 MX-HD14 MX-EB13

SHARPDESK 100 LICENSE APPLICATION APPLICATION EXTERNAL ACCOUNT HARD DISK EXPANSION KIT USB WIRELESS LAN
KIT INTEGRATION MODULE COMMUNICATION MODULE MODULE ADAPTER
MX-M315U/M265U
MX-FR50U MX-HD15
DATA SECURITY KIT HARD DISK EXPANSION KIT
MX-M356U/M315U/M265U MX-M356U/M315U/M265U

1 : ‘15/Aug. 2 : ‘16/Jun.
2. Option list
N model U model
1 Model MX- MX- MX- MX- MX- MX- MX- MX-
Name
name M356N M316N M266N M265N M315N M356U M265U M315U
Document REVERSING SINGLE PASS
MX-RP20 STD STD STD — — OPT — —
feeder FEEDER
REVERSING SINGLE PASS
MX-RP19 — — — STD STD — OPT OPT
FEEDER
MX-VR12 DOCUMENT COVER — — — — — OPT OPT OPT
Paper Feeder 2nd
STD STD STD OPT STD STD OPT STD
Drawer
MX-CS12
500-SHEET PAPER 4th
OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
TRAY Drawer
3rd
MX-CS13 OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
Drawer
Stand AR-DS20 LOW STAND OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
AR-DS19 HIGH STAND OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
Paper Exit MX-TR17*1 EXIT TRAY UNIT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
Device MX-TR18*2 JOB SEPARATOR OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
MX-FN26*3 FINISHER OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
Printer MX-PB16 PRINTER EXPANSION KIT STD STD STD STD STD OPT OPT OPT
MX-PK11 PS3 EXPANSION KIT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT*4 OPT*4 OPT*4
MX-PF10 BARCODE FONT KIT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT*4 OPT*4 OPT*4
Image Send NETWORK SCANNER
MX-NSX1 STD STD STD STD STD OPT OPT OPT
EXPANSION KIT
MX-FX11 FACSIMILE EXPANSION KIT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
MX-FWX1 INTERNET FAX EXPANSION KIT OPT*5 OPT*5 OPT*5 OPT*5 OPT*5 OPT*5 OPT*5 OPT*5
AR-SU1 STAMP UNIT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
Authentication MX-FR48U DATA SECURITY KIT — OPT*7 OPT*7 OPT*7 OPT*7 — OPT*7 OPT*7 2
/Security MX-FR50U DATA SECURITY KIT OPT OPT*7 OPT*7 OPT*7 OPT*7 OPT OPT*7 OPT*7
Application MX-USX1 SHARPDESK 1 LICENSE KIT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
MX-USX5 SHARPDESK 5 LICENSE KIT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
MX-US10 SHARPDESK 10 LICENSE KIT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
MX-US50 SHARPDESK 50 LICENSE KIT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
MX-USA0 SHARPDESK 100 LICENSE KIT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
APPLICATION INTEGRATION
MX-AMX1 OPT*5 OPT*5 OPT*5 OPT*5 OPT*5 OPT*5 OPT*5 OPT*5
MODULE
APPLICATION
COMMUNICATION MODULE
EXTERNAL ACCOUNT
MODULE
Other MX-HD14 HARD DISK EXPANSION KIT — OPT*8 OPT*8 OPT*8 OPT*8 — OPT*8 OPT*8 2
MX-HD15 HARD DISK EXPANSION KIT OPT OPT*9 OPT*9 OPT*9 OPT*9 OPT OPT*9 OPT*9
2
MX-EB13*6 USB WIRELESS LAN ADAPTER OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
—: Connection not allowed

STD: Equipped as standard
OPT: Installable option
*1: Need Inner Finisher (Cannot install together with Job Separator).
*2: Cannot install together with Paper Exit Tray Unit/Inner Finisher.
*3: Cannot install together with Job Separator.
*4: Need MX-PB16.
*5: Need HDD.
*6: Available for limited destination.
2 *7: This model will be integrated to FR50U from April, 2016.
2 *8: Middle East only. (This is only for the limited models. Regarding
the details of this machine, refer to SMEF.
2 All models except the above models have been discontinued
since December, 2015.
*9: All destinations except Middle east

1 : ‘15/Aug.
MX-M316N
[2] SPECIFICATIONS Service
D. EngineManual
resolution
Resolution Copy Writing
1. Basic specifications 600 x 600dpi
Print Writing
A. Engine Specification 600 x 600dpi
1,200 x 600dpi (PCL/PS)
Photo conductor OPC (Diameter: 30mm) Gradation * Copy Writing
Recording Electronic photo (Laser) (256 levels) 600 x 600dpi x 1bit
Development Dry-type dual-component magnetic Print Writing
brush development Sharp Advanced Printing Language:
Charging Charged saw-tooth method 600 x 600dpi x 1bit
Transfer Transfer roller PCL:
Separation Separation claw method 600 x 600dpi x 1bit
1,200 x 600dpi x 1bit
Cleaning Counter blade
PS:
Fusing Heat roller
600 x 600dpi x 1bit
Waste toner disposal Toner cartridge collection 1,200 x 600dpi x 1bit
Toner supply during operation N/A
Outer color Pastel white (Natural wave pattern) *: The dither and error diffusion methods using 8bit input will be
performed.
B. Engine speed (ppm)
E. Scanner section
Tray 1 - 4
(1) Resolution/Gradation
26cpm 31cpm 35cpm
1 Paper size
machine machine machine Scanning Monochrome
A3 15 17 20 Resolution (dpi) Platen 600 x 600dpi
11x17 14 17 19 600 x 400dpi
8K 16 19 21 600 x 300dpi (default)
B4, 8.5x13, 8.5x13.5, 8.5x13.4, 8.5x14 16 20 22 RSPF 600 x 600dpi
A4, B5, 8.5x11, 16K, A5R, 5.5x8.5R 26 31 35 600 x 400dpi (default)
A4R, 8.5x11R, 16KR 18 24 27 Exposure lamp White LED
B5R 21 24 30 Reading gradation 10bit
Output gradation BW: 1bit
Manual paper feed Grayscale: 8bit
Full Color: each color RGB 8bit
26cpm 31cpm 35cpm
1 Paper size
machine machine machine (2) Document table
A3 14 17 18
11x17 14 16 17 Type Document table fixed system (Flat bed)
8K 15 18 19 Scanning area 297 x 432mm
B4, 8.5x14 16 19 20 Original standard Left rear reference
8.5x13 17 20 22 position
8.5x13.5, 8.5x13.4 16 19 21 Detection Yes
A4, B5, 8.5x11, 16K, A5R, 5.5x8.5R, 23 27 29 Detection size Automatic detection (Detection types can be
A5, 5.5x8.5 changed in the system settings)
A4R, 8.5x11R, 7.25x10.5R 19 22 24 Dehumidifying Supplied as a service parts
16KR 19 22 25 heater
B5R 21 24 26 (Scanner section)
Extra 14 16 17
Custom 14 16 17
C. Printable area
A3 Wide N/A 16K 191 x 263mm
A3 293 x 413mm 12 x 18 N/A
B4 253 x 357mm 11" x 17" 275 x 425mm
A4 206 x 290mm 8.5" x 14" 212 x 349mm
B5 178 x 250mm 8.5" x 13" 212 x 323mm
A5 144 x 203mm Executive 180 x 260mm
Postcard 92 x 140mm 8.5" x 11" 212 x 272mm
8K 266 x 383mm 5.5" x 8.5" 136 x 209mm
8.5x13.5 212 x 336mm 8.5" x 13.4" 212 x 333mm
Custom Min.: 96mm x 141mm; Max.: 297mm x 432mm
Max. range AB: 416x293mm (600dpi: 9826dot x 6920dot)

Inch: 428x275mm (600dpi: 10110dot x 6496dot)
Void Area Top 1 to 4mm
Bottom 1 to 5mm
Front/Rear Total 6mm or less
Image Loss Top 4mm or less
Front/Rear Total 6mm or less
Image missing Top 4mm or less, Bottom 4mm or less,
width Front/Rear Total 6mm or less
MX-M316N SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 1
1 : ‘15/Aug.
F. Document feeder
Model MX-M316N / MX-M266N / MX-M356N / MX-M356U MX-M315N / MX-M265N / MX-M315U / MX-M265U
1 Type RSPF (Reversing single pass feeder)
Scan speed Monochrome Color (A4/8.5" x 11") Monochrome Color (A4/8.5" x 11")
(A4/8.5" x 11") (A4/8.5" x 11")
Copy Single: NA Single: NA
56-sheet/min. 31-sheet/min.
(600 x 400dpi, 4bit) (600 x 400dpi, 4bit)
38-sheet/min. 25-sheet/min.
(600 x 600dpi, 4bit) (600 x 600dpi, 4bit)
Double: Double:
20-page/min. 16-page/min.
(600 x 400dpi, 4bit) (600 x 400dpi, 4bit)
17-page/min. 13-page/min.
(600 x 600dpi, 4bit) (600 x 600dpi, 4bit)
FAX Single: 56-sheet/min. NA Single: 31-sheet/min. NA
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit) (200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
Double: 20-page/min. Double: 16-page/min.
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit) (200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
Internet FAX Single: 56-sheet/min. NA Single: 31-sheet/min. NA
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit) (200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
Double: 20-page/min. Double: 16-page/min.
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit) (200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
Scanner Single: 56-sheet/min. Single: 56-sheet/min. Single: 31-sheet/min. Single: 31-sheet/min.
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit) (200 x 200dpi, 8bit) (200 x 200dpi, 1bit) (200 x 200dpi, 8bit)
Double: 20-page/min. Double: 20-page/min. Double: 16-page/min. Double: 16-page/min.
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit) (200 x 200dpi, 8bit) (200 x 200dpi, 1bit) (200 x 200dpi, 8bit)
Original setup Upward standard (1 to N feeding standard)
direction
Original standard Center standard (Rear one-side standard for random feeding)
position
Original transport Sheet-through method
method
Paper detection Inch-1 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
size Inch-2 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
Inch-3 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
AB-1 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5
AB-2 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5
AB-3 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5, 8K, 16K, 16KR
AB-4 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5
AB-5 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.5", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5
Long paper 1000 mm (Monochrome binary only)
Internet Fax 600 x 600 dpi: Max. 800 mm.
When scan 400 dpi or more, long paper is not available.
Mix paper feed Enabled
(Same series, same
width paper)
Random feeding Enabled

(feeding of different Only the following combinations of 2 size types are allowed:
types / different A3 and B4; B4 and A4R; A4 and B5; B5 and A5; and 11-inch and 8.5-inch. AMS available. 2-sided scanning is disabled during random
widths) feeding.
Original copy weight Single: Single:
Thin paper: 9 - 13 lb bond (35 - 49 g/m2) Thin paper: 9 - 13 lb bond (35 - 49 g/m2)
Plain paper: 13 - 32 lb bond (50 - 128 g/m2) Plain paper: 13 - 32 lb bond (50 - 128 g/m2)
* Thin paper mode (41 pages/minute * Thin paper mode (27 pages/minute
(A4, 8.5" x 11", 600 x 400dpi) / 27 pages/minute (A4, 8.5" x 11", (A4, 8.5" x 11", 600 x 400dpi) / 18 pages/minute (A4, 8.5" x 11",
600 x 600dpi) is set up for the thin paper. 600 x 600dpi) is set up for the thin paper.
Duplex: 13 - 28 lb bond (50 - 105 g/m2) Duplex: 13 - 28 lb bond (50 - 105 g/m2)
Max. loading Max. 100 sheets (21lbs Bond, 80g/m2), or Max. height: 1/2 inch, 13mm or less
capacity of
documents
Un-acceptable Transparency, second original paper, tracing paper, carbon paper, thermal paper, paper with wrinkles, folds, or breakage, pasted paper,
originals for feeding. cutout document, document printed with ink ribbon, documents with perforation other than 2- or 3-holes (Perforated document by punch
unit is allowed.)
Detection Yes
Paper feeding Right hand feeding
direction
Finish stamp Option
Reliability MCBJ/MCBF: Same as the main unit
Life Same as the main unit
Power Source Provided from the main unit
1 : ‘15/Aug.
G. Paper feed section
(1) Basic specifications
1 MX-M316N / MX-M266N / MX-M315N / MX-M315U / MX-M356N /
MX-M356U
Type Standard 2-stage paper feed tray + multi manual paper feed
tray
Full option 4-stage paper feed tray + multi manual paper feed
tray
Dehumidifying N/A
heater
MX-M265N / MX-M265U
Type Standard 1-stage paper feed tray + multi manual paper feed
tray
Full option 4-stage paper feed tray + multi manual paper feed
tray
Dehumidifying N/A
heater
Multi
Tray Tray 1 Tray 2 Bypass
Tray
Paper Standard 500 sheets 500 sheets 100 sheets
capacity paper (80g/
m2)
Paper size Refer to “Size of paper which can be fed”.
Paper size detection No Yes
(Guide adjustment and size
input)
Paper type setting Refer to “Size of paper which can be fed”.
Changing of paper size Switched by the user Switched by
the user
(Guide
adjustment)
Universal handle Yes -
Default Inch system 8.5" x 11" -
paper size AB system A4 -
setting
Detection of remaining N/A (Only paper availability is detected)
paper
Paper size display window Yes -
(2) Extra paper capacity
Paper type Paper feed tray Manual feed tray

Envelope NA AB system: 10 sheets
Inch system: 5 sheets
Transparency NA 40 sheets
Heavy paper NA 30 sheets (Max. 200g/m2)
Tab paper NA 30 sheets (Target)
Others NA 1 sheet
(3) Size of paper which can be fed
Paper Feeding Section

Standard Tray Optional Tray
Bypass
Tray 2*7 Tray 3 Tray 4
Tray 1 Tray
MX-CS12 MX-CS13 MX-CS12
Paper Size 12 x 18 (A3W) 305x457 - - - - -
11" x 17"(Ledger) 297x432 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8.5" x 14" (Legal) 216x356 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8.5" x 13.5" (Asian Legal) 216x343 Yes*5 Yes*5 Yes*5 Yes*5 Yes*5
8.5" x 13.4" (Mexican Legal) 216x340 Yes*5 Yes*5 Yes*5 Yes*5 Yes*5
8.5" x 13" (Foolscap) 216x330 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8.5" x 11"(Letter) 297x216 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8.5" x 11"R(Letter-R) 216x279 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
7.25 x 10.5R(Exective-R) 184x266 - - - - Yes
5.5" x 8.5"(Incoice-R) 216x140 - - - - Yes
5.5" x 8.5"R(Incoice-R) 140x216 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
A3 297x420 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
B4 257x364 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
A4 297x210 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
A4R 210x297 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
B5 257x182 Yes - Yes Yes Yes
B5R 182x257 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
A5 210x148 - - - - Yes
A5R 148x210 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
B6R - - - - Yes
8K 270x390 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
16K 270x195 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
16KR 195x270 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
A6R - - - - Yes
Envelope*1 Envelope*1 - - - - Yes
Custom*2 Custom*2 - - - - Yes
Paper Type Thin paper 13 - 16 lb bond (56 - 59g/m2) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Plain paper 16 - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Recycled paper Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Color paper Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Letter head Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Pre-printed Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Pre-punched Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Heavy paper 28 lb bond - 110 lb index (106 - 200g/m2)*6 - - - - Yes
110 lb index - 140 lb index (201 - 256g/m2) - - - - -
Envelope - - - - Yes
Transparency - - - - Yes
Label*3 - - - - Yes
Tab paper*4 - - - - Yes
User settings 1-7 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
*1: Supported envelop types:

Monarch/Com-10/DL/C5/Custom
* Custom envelope size is configurable by Sim setting (default: hidden)
*2: Custom size
AB system (mm) Inch system (inch)

Min. Max. Min. Max.
Bypass tray X 140 432 5-1/2 17
Y 100 297 5-1/2 11-5/8
Long size paper from the bypass tray: max. 1,200mm is configurable by Sim.
*3: Supported label paper: SF-4A3F
*4: Supported tab paper:
A4 tab width: 12 - 20mm
8.5" x 11" tab width: 6.1 - 17mm
*5: Need to set from Sim
*6: Brazil: 220g paper feeding is stated.
*7: Standard for MX-M316N / M266N / M315N / M315U.
H. Paper exit section
(1) Exit Capacity
Output Location Center Job Separator Right Side

(Option) (Option)
Output Capacity A4 / 8.5x11 no-shift: 500 sheets (80g/m2) Upper tray: 100 sheets (80g/m2) 100 sheets (80g/m2)
Other: 300 sheets(80g/m2) Lower tray:
A4 / 8.5x11 no-shift: 500 sheets (80g/m2)
Other: 300 sheets(80g/m2)
Output paper size / weight Refer to “Size of paper which can be discharged”.
Shifting function Yes Upper: No No
Lower: Yes
Output paper detection No Upper: Yes No
Lower: No
Exit tray full detection Yes Upper: No (detection by count-up) Yes
Lower: Yes
(2) Size of paper which can be discharged
Output Section
Center Tray Finisher
Duplex Right Finisher
Job
Exit Tray Offset Exit Tray w/offset w/staple
Separator
Paper 12 x 18 (A3W) 305x457 - - - - - - - -
Size 11 x 17 297x432 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8.5 x 14 216x356 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8.5 x 13.5 216x343 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8.5 x 13.4 216x340 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8.5 x 11R 216x279 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
7.25 x 10.5R 184x266 - Yes Yes Yes*4 - Yes*4 - -
5.5 x 8.5 216x140 - Yes Yes - - Yes*4 Yes*4 -
5.5 x 8.5R 140x216 Yes Yes Yes Yes*4 - Yes*4 - -
A3 297x420 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
B4 257x364 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
A4 297x210 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
A4R 210x297 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
B5 257x182 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
B5R 182x257 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes - Yes
A5 210x148 - Yes Yes - - Yes*4 Yes*4 -
A5R 148x210 Yes Yes Yes Yes*4 - Yes*4 - -
B6R - Yes Yes - - Yes*4 - -
8K 270x390 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
16K 270x195 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
16KR 195x270 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes - Yes
A6R - Yes Yes Yes - Yes*4 - -
Envelope*1 - Yes Yes - - Yes*4 - -
Extra - Yes Yes - - Yes*4 - -
Custom*2 Yes Yes Yes - Yes Yes*4 - -
Paper Thin paper*9 13-16 lb bond (55 - 59g/m2) - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes*4 Yes*4 Yes*5
Type Plain paper 16-28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Recycled paper Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Color paper Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Letter head Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Pre-printed Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Pre-punched Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Heavy paper 28 lb bond - 110 lb index - Yes Yes Yes - Yes*6 Yes*6 Yes*7
(106 - 200g/m2)*6
110 lb index -140 lb index - - - - - - - -
(201 - 256g/m2)
Envelope 75 - 90g/m2 - Yes Yes - - Yes*4 - -
Transparency - Yes Yes - - Yes*4 - -
Label - Yes Yes - - Yes*4 - -
Tab paper - Yes Yes*8 - - Yes*8 - -
User settings 1 - 7 Yes*3 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes*3 Yes Yes
*1: Supported Envelop types:

Monarch/Com-10/DL /C5/Custom
Custom envelope size is supported by Sim. Not displayed at the default setting.
1 : ‘15/Aug.
*2: Custom size
AB System (mm) Inch System (inch)

Min. Max. Min. Max.
Bypass tray X 140 432 5-1/2 17
Y 100 297 5-1/2 11-5/8
Duplex X 182 432 7-1/4 17
Y 148 297 5-1/2 11-5/8
Long size paper (bypass tray only): support up to 1,200mm by Sim

* Long size paper ejection is from center tray/inner finisher
*3: Comply to “Paper type setting”
*4: Can be input but alignment is not supported
*5: Can be input and stapled but alignment is not supported
*6: Alignment of heavy paper more than 129g/m2 is not supported
*7: Only front/back cover is available.
*8: Can be fed but not covered under warranty.
*9: A4 paper (grain long) corresponding to 58g/m2
I. Operation panel L. Warm-up time

Size 7 inch Warm-up time 20sec. or less
Form Dot matrix LCD, Touch panel Pre heat Yes
Display dot number 800 x 480 dots (WVGA) Jam recovery time*1 10sec. or less
LCD backlight LED backlight
LCD contrast adjust Yes * Result may change depending on conditions.
Angle/position adjustment No tilting mechanism *1: Conditions: Leave the machine for 60 sec. after door open,
standard condition, Polygon stops.
J. Controller board
CPU ARM11: 600MHz
2. Copy functions
ARM9: 400MHz/during 1W energy save mode: A. First copy time
75MHz
Interface 35cpm
IEEE1284 Parallel No Engine 26cpm machine 31cpm machine 1
machine
Ethernet 1port Scan Speed 31 56 31 56 56
Interface 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T Platen 4.3 sec. 4.3 sec. 4.3 sec. 4.3 sec. 4.0 sec.
Support Protocol TCP/IP (IPv4, IPv6), IPX/SPX, Ether Talk RSPF 7.0 sec. 7.0 sec. 7.0 sec. 7.0 sec. 6.7 sec.
USB 2.0 (high 2port
speed) (host)*1 (Simultaneous use of the front/rear ports is * Measuring Conditions
enable.) Feed the A4 (8-1/2 x 11) sheet in landscape from tray 1, with the
USB 2.0 (high 1port polygon rotating condition.
speed) (device)
Value might vary depends on the machine settings/conditions
USB-HUB (host) Internal: 4port
* Main unit USB Front Port B. Job Speed
* Main unit USB Rear Port
* Key board USB Port
26cpm 31cpm 35cpm
* IC Card Reader Engine
machine machine machine 1
Serial I/F 1port
S to S 26cpm (100%) 31cpm (100%) 35cpm (100%)
(For coin-operated
machines) * Defines the copy speed of when the main unit and a document
feeder are used in combination.
*1: The USB port can be disabled by Sim
* S to S: copying 1 set of an 11-sheet original in A4 / 8.5" x 11"
K. Memory/Hard disk/SD card memory (not including the first copy)
Monochrome: 600 x 400dpi (default)
ICU (Reus) PWB
SD card HDD*2
Memory*1
4GB 2GB OPT (250GB)
*1: Memory expansion is not available

*2: HDD capacity may vary depending on the procurement condi-
tion.
Memory area Boot/Program area

(SD card) FAX data storage area
Without HDD With HDD
512MB 1GB
3. Printer function
A. Printer driver supported OS
Sharp
Custom
Custom Advanced
OS PCL6 Custom PS PPD PC-FAX TWAIN
PCL5e Printing
SPDL2
Language
Windows 98 / Me No No No No No No No
NT 4.0 SP5 or later No No No No No No No
2000 No No No No No No No
XP No No No No No No No
XP x64 No No No No No No No
Server 2003 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Server 2003 x64 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Vista CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Vista x64 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Server 2008 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Server 2008 x64 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Windows 7 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Windows 7 x64 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Server 2012x64 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Windows 8 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Windows 8x64 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Windows 8.1 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Windows 8.1x64 CD-ROM No CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Mac 9.0 No No No No No No No
X 10.2 No No No No No No No
X 10.3 No No No No No No No
X 10.4 No No No CD-ROM No No No
B. PDL emulation/Font
PDL (Command) Installed font Option font
PCL6 compatibility N model: STD European outline font = 80 styles Barcode font = 28 styles
U model: OPT Line printer font (BMP) = 1 style
ESC/P(VP-1100) compatible, - European BMP font -
ESC/P_super compatible =2 style (Roman, Sans-serif)
Postscript3 compatibility OPT - European outline font = 136 styles
4. Image send function B. Support system

A. Mode Mode Scanner Internet Fax/ Direct SMTP
Corresponding SMTP/ SMTP-SSL POP3 server
Mode Sub mode With HDD Without HDD server / Protocol FTP (TCP/IP)*2/ FTPS SMTP server
Scanner E-mail Yes Yes SMB *1 ESMTP server
FTP server Yes Yes HTTP/HTTPS
Shared folder Yes Yes (Supported protocol of
(SMB) Sharp OSA)
Desktop Yes Yes
*1: Network environment for SMB
USB Memory Yes Yes
Windows
Internet Fax/ Direct - Yes No
SMTP Server2003, Server2003x64,
Fax - Yes No Vista, Vistax64, Server2008, Server2008x64, Windows7,
Data input E-mail Yes Yes Windows7x64, Windows8, Windows8x64
(metadata) FTP server Yes No Server2012, Windows 8.1, Windows 8.1x64
Shared folder Yes No
Mac
(SMB)
Desktop Yes No OSX 10.4, 10.5, 10.6, 10.7, 10.8, 10.9, 10.10
Remote PC scan - Yes No *2: Support Passive/Active Mode
C. Support image Mode Scanner Internet Fax/
Direct SMTP
Mode Format/ Item Support Magical scan Yes N/A
Compression (Area division + Suppress
method Selection of image quality Yes Halftone
Scanner File format TIFF Yes (B&W only)
(Mono 2 gradation) PDF Yes
PDF/A Yes Other Image Processing Functions
Encrypted PDF Yes
Mode Scanner Internet Fax/
XPS Yes
Direct SMTP
File format Color TIFF Yes
Moire reduction mode Yes N/A
(Color/ Gray scale) JPEG Yes
CPT (notes’ security) Yes N/A
PDF Yes
Scanning QR codes N/A N/A
PDF/A Yes
Encrypted PDF Yes E. Specifying Addresses
High compression PDF No
Address Specifying Method
XPS Yes
Compression Non-compression Yes Item Content
method G3 (1-dimentional)= MH Yes One-touch Yes
(Mono 2 gradation) (Modified Huffman)
Group key Yes
G4= MMR (Modified MR) Yes
Direct input Yes (e-mail/SMB/ Internet Fax
Compression JPEG (high/ middle/ low) Yes (Entry from the soft keyboard, (including Direct SMTP)/fax)
method High compression PDF No externally-connected keyboard or *Addresses of FTP/Desktop cannot
(Color/ Gray scale) Black Letter Emphasis No 10 keypad) be input directly.
2-color high compression No Selection from the LDAP server Yes
PDF Display the address information N/A
Internet File format TIFF-FX (TIFF-F / TIFF-S) Yes stored in the LDAP server directly in
Fax (Monochrome) the key list.
Direct File format TIFF-C No
SMTP (Color/ Gray scale) Other Address Specifying Method
Compression Non-compression No
method G3 (1-dimentional)= MH Yes Function Description Scanner Internet
(Monochrome) (Modified Huffman) Fax/
Direct
G4 = MMR (Modified MR) Yes
SMTP
Compression TIFF-C (high/ middle/ low) No
Setting of the The default address can be set Yes No
method
default address in the scanner mode. The user
(Color/ Gray scale)
can send only by setting an
Fax Compression MH/ MR/ MMR/JBIG Yes
original and touching the start
method
key.
(Monochrome)
Apply E-mail The e-mail address of the Yes No
File per page (Setting of the number of pages available) Yes
address of the authenticated user is
user for login automatically set as the default
D. Image Processing (Scan to Me) address.
Color Mode The setting whether address
selection by this function is
Item Scanner Internet Fax/ applied or not shall be
Direct SMTP prepared for broadcast with
B&W Yes Yes Fax/Internet Fax addresses.
Grays scale Yes N/A The setting whether it is
Full color Yes N/A enabled for users to cancel the
address selection by this
Auto Color Selection (ACS) Yes N/A
function at any time or not shall
Resolution be prepared.
And it has the function to
Level Scanner Internet Fax/Direct SMTP prohibit to choice address
except the user who log in.
1 100x100 dpi 200x100 dpi
Accept “!” in the It accepts that it forbids to input Yes No
2 200x200 dpi 200x200 dpi
address of Scan “!” in the address of Scan to
3 300x300 dpi 200x400 dpi
to SMB folder SMB folder.
4 400x400 dpi 400x400 dpi Prohibit the It prohibits to input the next Yes No
5 600x600 dpi 600x600 dpi broadcast address for making to send
transmission of only the user who log in at
Exposure/Original Type Home Directory Scan to Home Directory.
Resend Addresses can be selected Yes N/A
Mode Scanner Internet Fax/
from the latest 8 destinations in
Direct SMTP
the sending history.
Halftone reproduction Equivalent to 256 gradations Selections from FTP/Desktop/
Exposure Auto Yes Yes SMB sending history is N/
Adjustment A.Support in order of number
Original document Text 5 levels 5 levels of sending is N/A.
type (Selectable in Text / Photo Yes N/A
manual mode) Text / Yes N/A
Printed photo
Photo Yes N/A
Printed photo Yes N/A
Map Yes N/A
Address Book 5. FAX function
Registration
(1) Mode
Item Content
FAX FAX to e-mail/FTP
Max. number of registrations Total: 1000 keys
*FTP/Desktop/SMB addresses shall
(2) Support image
be the same as those for other
modes. Maximum 1000 addresses
Mode FAX
shall be able to be registered.
Compression method MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
Number of addresses can be Max. 500 addresses
registered in one Group key
(3) Support image
Number of addresses can be 5000 addresses (included in the
registered by inputting directly in 1000 keys) Mode FAX
Group keys
Compression method MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
LDAP searching when address Yes
book registration (4) Image processing
Address book registration in the N/A
sending history screen Mode FAX
Speed dial (quick key) Yes (Call by inputting a registration Original scanning color B/W
number from the 10-key pad) Halftone reproduction Equivalent of 256 steps
Density adjustment Auto + 5 steps
F. Program
Selection of image quality Half tone (Black-white only) ON/OFF
Item Content
Resolution (depends on file Standard character (203.2 x 97.8dpi)
Number of registrations Registered up to: 48 (Group/Individual can be
format/transmission method) (half tone not allowed)
registered.)
Fine (203.2 x 195.6dpi)
G. Information to Be Sent Super fine (203.2 x 391dpi)
Ultra fine (406.4 x 391dpi)
Mode Scanner Internet Fax/Direct
SMTP (5) Specification of Addresses
Subject Select from the list.
Mode FAX
Direct entry (80 one-byte/two-byte characters;
Number of lists: 30) Address specification Specification by one-touch/group/
direct address entry.
File name Select from the list.*1
Entry from 10-key. (Fax)
Match the subject
Selection from LDAP server
Direct entry (80 one-byte/two-byte characters;
Number of lists: 30) Number of One-touch address key Total (number of key):
registration Maximum 1000
Outbound message Yes*3
(message body) Number of Group (1 key) address Number of Group (1 key) address
registtation registration : maximum 500
Outbound message Select from the list*3.
Number of Group key registration :
selection Direct entry
5000 (Total address number
Number of letters in an 1800 one-byte characters (900 two-byte
included in /1000 key)
outbound message characters) *3
Program 48
Pre-Setting Mail Yes Yes
Direct entry of addresses Entry by 10-key, # key
Signature*2
Chain dial Yes (pause key)
*1: N/A for USB Memory Scan Resend Call up nearest 8 addresses. *1
*2: A text message can be set to be automatically added in the Destination confirmation Yes
body of outbound messages. It cannot be edited Shortcut for address selection Use the 10-key to call up registered
(quick key) numbers of addresses.
at the time of sending.
Disable direct entry transmission *2 Yes
*3: When no HDD, N/A Disable PC- Fax sending Yes
*1: Except for FTP, Desktop, SMB, USB memory, Broadcast.

*2: When disabled, the address registration is not allowed either.
(6) Specification of Multiple Addresses
Mode FAX
Broadcast Yes (500 destinations)
Request of serial transmission Yes
* Broadcast transmission is allowed. (Monochrome only)
(7) Transmission function Mode FAX
Staple function of received data Yes
Mode FAX Auto wake up print Yes
Memory transmission 94 destinations in all Received data print hold *1 Yes
On-hook Yes Color toner print when black toner No
Quick online transmission Yes runs out.
Direct transmission Yes
(Switching: Memory transmission *1: This function saves all received data in memory and starts out
Direct transmission) put after password entry. (Confidential reception is excluded.)
Automatically-reduced Yes Setting only on the reciver side.
transmission
(9) Report/list function
Rotated transmission Yes
Scaled transmission Yes
Mode FAX
Enlargement/reduction is allowed
Image sending activity report Yes
only from a fixed size to another.
Time-specified output
Reduction may be done on the
Output with memory full
receiver side with Fax/Internet Fax
* Maximum of 200 times including
sending.
both transmission and reception
Recall mode Error Yes
Transaction report Yes
Busy Yes
Address/phone number table Yes
Number/time to be set up through
Group table Yes
system setup
Program table Yes
Long original transmission Yes
Maximum of 1000mm (single side Memory box table (F code) Yes
only/black-white 2 values only) Communication original contents Always print/Upon error/no print
Confidential transmission (Sharp No print
mode) List of allowed or rejected Yes
Relay broadcast transmission No reception numbers
(Sharp mode) Table of control record for each No
Large capacity original mode Yes account
Scanning of thin paper Yes
(10) Other Functions
Mixed originals feeder Yes (Random + MIX)
Default date sender transmission Yes (ON only) Mode FAX
Preview No Time specification Yes
Side erase Yes Polling reception Yes
Bulletin board transmission Yes
(8) Reception function
Up to 100 registrations allowed with
bulletin board, confidential and relay
Mode FAX
broadcast all combined. (Free area :
Automatic reception Yes 1 registration)
Manual reception No Setting of the number of
Switching from manual reception to transmission: 1/no limit.
automatic reception. (Allowed only Cover sheet function No
for France and Japan)
Transmission message No
Memory reception Yes
Sender print Yes
Fixed size reduced reception Yes
Sender selection Yes
Specified size scaled reception No
Page number print Yes
Rotated reception Yes
Date print Yes (Date can be expressed
Setting of received data print Equal size print (partition not alternatively)
condition allowed)
Polling protection function Yes
Equal size print (partition allowed)
Page partition transmission Yes
Equal or reduced size print
Page connection No
2-sided reception Condition setting through system
setting Confidential (receiver unit) Yes (F code method)
2-in-1 reception No Relay broadcast instructions Yes (F code method)
Automatic reduction setting upon Yes Fax to e-mail (F code) *1 Yes
receiving A3 Edge erase Yes
Automatic reduction setting upon Yes (Other than North America and Center erase Yes
receiving letter Inch destinations) 2 in 1 Yes
Reception from a specific number Specified numbers only Card shot Yes (Equivalent or enlargement up to
not allowed, or allowed. (50 numbers /20 digits) the paper width. The maximum
(Allow/Reject) enlargement is not allowed to exceed
External phone connection Yes 400%)
remote Forward data transmission/ Yes
Confidential reception (Sharp No reception (Document Admin) Data transmission by PC-Fax/
mode) PC-Internet Fax is allowed, too.
Received data bypass output Yes
*1: This function means that e-mail address setteing on F code
Index printing No
relay broadcast allowed.
Transfer function upon disabling Yes (1 receiver (of transfer)
of output. registration)
Internet Fax/Fax to e-mail Yes
(Transfer of Internet Fax/Fax
reception data to e-mail, inbound
routing)
Exit tray setting Yes
Insertion of job separator sheet No
1 : ‘15/Aug.
(11) Transmission Method (15) Telephone functions
Mode FAX Mode FAX

Transmission time 2 seconds level (super G3/JBIG), On-hook function Yes
6 seconds level (G3 ECM) Hold No
Modem speed Automatic fall-back : 33.6kbps 2.4kbps Setting of pause time Yes (1 ? 15 seconds)
Intercommunication Super G3/G3 Telephone transmission during No (External telephone transmission
Communication line General membership telephone line power outage allowed)
(PSTN), independent business line Tone pulse switching Tone, Pulse, Auto (North America/
(PBX), F net. Taiwan)
(R-key for PBX setting: Germany/France) * For the other destinations, set with
ECM Yes the soft switch.
(12) Record Size (16) Sound settings
Mode FAX Mode Item FAX

Maximum record width 293mm On-hook sound Sound volume setting 1-9
Record size A3 ? A5/11" x 17" ? 5.5" x 8.5" Sound volume for calling Sound volume setting 1 - 9, No
Line monitor sound Sound volume setting 1 - 9, No
(13) F code communication Reception sound Sound volume setting 1 - 9, No
Transmission success sound Sound volume setting 1 - 9, No
Mode FAX
Transmission and reception Sound volume setting 1 - 9, No
Sub-address Yes (20 digits) error sound
Password Yes (20 digits) Sound setting for end of Sound volume setting Large/middle/
original reading (image send) small/no sound
(14) Registration-related settings
(17) Others
Mode FAX
One-touch/group *1 1000 destinations
E-mail Use of LDAP allowed Mode FAX
FTP Up to 500 registered addresses for PC-FAX Yes
Desktop each group dial. FAST Yes (SEC only)
SMB Registered name in 18 full-size Network FAST No
FAX character (36 half-size characters) Distinctive ring detection Setting for each destination
One-touch dial receiver number
registration: within 64 digits for
receiver number + sub-address + 6. Power consumption
passcode (including "/").
The full configuration can be operated with the rated power source.
Program Registration of addresses (groups),
settings (density, image quality) and
100 V type 200 V type
special functions in one set is
Maximum rated power 1.44 kW 1.45kW
allowed. (48 of them)
Consumption*1
Number of memory boxes Registration of bulletin board/
TEC value 26cpm machine 1.8 kWh 1.8 kWh
confidential/relay broadcast is
allowed up to 100. 31cpm machine 2.1 kWh 2.1 kWh
Registration name: 18 characters 35cpm machine 2.2 kWh 2.2 kWh 1
Number of sender registration 1 (default) with 20 characters Fax waiting power consumption is 1W Yes No
Number of sender selection Total: 18 registrations (20 *Condition of Standing by Network:
registration characters) (Sender selection: In Connect with TCP/IP protocol only
addition to default, 18 registrations
allowed) Time to move into Preheat mode 1 minutes (default)
Registration of polling approval 10 numbers/20 digits Recovery time from Preheat mode 10 seconds
number Time to move into sleep mode 1 minute 11 minutes
Registration of Fax system No (Default) (Europe)
number (Sharp mode) 1 minute
Registration of Fax polling No (Other)
approval ID number (Sharp mode) * After the remote job is done: 1
Fax relay ID registration (Sharp No second (Default)
mode) Recovery time from Sleep mode 20 seconds
Quick key (short cut registration) *2 Yes (001 ? 1000)
*1: At power-on timing
Import/export of address book Yes (By storage backup)
(with condition of dehumidify heater turned OFF)
Black list (for France) No
*1: Since scan/Internet Fax/Fax uses the common address book,

the number of addresses allowed for registration is the sum
total of all modes.
*2: Quick key is the function to select an address based on the
registered number of each address within the book for address
selection. Users should be able to select a quick key number.
1 : ‘15/Aug.
7. Dimensions and weight
MX-316N/ MX-M266N/ MX-M315N/ MX-M315U/ MX-M265N/ MX-M265U
1 MX-M356N/ MX-M356U
Outer dimension W620 x D617 x H680 mm W620 x D617 x H580 mm
(Included operation panel) When the OC is installed: When the OC is installed:
W620 x D617 x H700 mm W620 x D617 x H600 mm
When the RSPF is installed: When the RSPF is installed:
W620 x D617 x H830 mm W620 x D617 x H730 mm
Footprint W620 x D617 mm
Dimension occupied by the machine W938 x D617 mm
(when the bypass tray is extended)
Weight When the RSPF is installed: When the RSPF is installed:
Main Unit 51 kg (100V type / 200V type) 45 kg (100V type / 200V type)
(including photoreceptor / not including When the OC is installed: 45 kg When the OC is installed: 39 kg
consumables)
[3]CONSUMABLE PARTS
1. Supply system table
A. North America, Middle America, South America
No. Item Content Life Model name Remarks
1 Toner cartridge (black) Toner cartridge x1 27.5K MX-315NT Life setting by A4 (8.5" x 11") 6% document
2 Developer (black) Developer x1 100K MX-312NV
3 Drum Drum x1 100K MX-312NR
B. Europe, Australia and New Zealand

1 Toner cartridge (black) Toner cartridge x1 27.5K MX-315GT Life setting by A4 (8.5" x 11") 6% document
2 Developer (black) Developer x1 100K MX-312GV
3 Drum Drum x1 100K MX-312GR
C. Asia and Hong Kong

1 Toner cartridge (black) Toner cartridge x1 27.5K MX-315AT Life setting by A4 (8.5" x 11") 6% document
2 Developer (black) Developer x1 100K MX-312AV
3 Drum Drum x1 100K MX-312AR
D. Middle East, Africa, Taiwan, Israel and Philippines, Korea

1 Toner cartridge (black) Toner cartridge x1 27.5K MX-315FT Life setting by A4 (8.5" x 11") 6% document
2 Developer (black) Developer x1 100K MX-312FV
3 Drum Drum x1 100K MX-312FR
MX-M316N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 1

2. Maintenance parts list
A. North America, Middle America, South America
1 Upper heat roller kit Upper heat roller x1 150K MX-313UH
Fuser gear x1
Upper heat roller bearing x2
Upper cleaning pad x1
Fusing separation pawl (upper) x4
2 Lower heat roller kit Lower heat roller x1 300K MX-312LH
Fusing separation pawl (lower) x1
Fuser bearing (lower) x2
3 Maintenance kit Drum separation pawl unit x2 100K MX-312KA
Cleaner blade x1
MC unit x1
4 Drum frame unit Drum frame unit x1 300K MX-312DU * The life of the toner reception seat attached
to the drum frame is 300K, and it can be
used up to 3 times.
(Supplied as a drum frame unit.)
5 Transfer roller unit Transfer roller unit x1 150K MX-312TX
6 Paper feed roller kit Paper feed roller kit x1 100K MX-312RT
7 Paper feed roller kit Paper feed roller kit x1 100K MX-312MR
8 Fusing unit Fusing unit (120V heater lamp) x1 150K MX-312FU1
9 Fusing unit Fusing unit (200V heater lamp) x1 150K MX-312FU
10 Toner filter unit Toner filter unit x1 100K MX-312TF
11 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 5000 staples x 3 MX-SCX1
* The other maintenance parts than the above are supplied as service parts.
B. Europe, Australia and New Zealand

Fuser gear x1
Cleaner blade x1
MC unit x1
4 Drum frame unit Drum frame unit x1 300K MX-312DU * The life of the toner reception seat attached
to the drum frame is 300K, and it can be
used up to 3 times.

C. Asia and Hong Kong
Fuser gear x1
Cleaner blade x1
MC unit x1
4 Drum frame unit Drum frame unit x1 300K MX-312DU * The life of the toner reception seat
attached to the drum frame is 300K, and it
can be used up to 3 times.
D. Middle East, Africa, Taiwan, Israel and Philippines, Korea

Fuser gear x1
Cleaner blade x1
MC unit x1
4 Drum frame unit Drum frame unit x1 300K MX-312DU * The life of the toner reception seat
attached to the drum frame is 300K, and it
can be used up to 3 times.
3. Developer/Drum life end definition

* When the developer/drum counter reaches the specified count.
* When the developer/drum rpm reaches the specified count.
When either of the above reach the specified count, it is judged as life end.
when correction or warm-up operation is performed as well as output operation, the developer and the drum rotates.
Therefore, the developer/drum consuming level cannot be determined only by the copy/print quantity. When, therefore, the rpm reaches the
specified amount, it is judged as life end.
To check the drum and developer life, use SIM22-13.
Number of rotations
Developer/drum counter
(Rotations)
Developer/drum 100K 550K

1 : ‘15/Aug.
4. Production number identification <Drum>
The laser print indicates the model conformity code and the date
<Toner cartridge> (year, month, day) of production.
The label on the toner cartridge shows the date of production.
Label position
Internal product name 1 2 3 4 5 6 1

Incompatibility
1 Alphabet
Destination
Indicates the model conformity code. L for this model.
2 Number
Indicates the end digit of the production year.
3 Number or X, Y, Z
Indicates the month of packing.
Version No.
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
Production year/month/day (6 digits) 4, 5 Number
Serial No. in production day (5 digits) Indicates the day of the month of packing.
6 Factory code (Only for some destination)
Production place (1 digits)
<Developer>
5. Environmental conditions
(Humidity)
85%
60%
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
The lot number is of 8 digits. Each digit indicates the content as fol- 20%
lows.
10 C 30 C 35 C
The number is printed on the right under side of the back surface of
the developer bag. (Temperature)
1 Alphabet
Indicates the production factory.
2 Number
Indicates the production year.
3, 4 Number
Indicates the production month.
5, 6 Number
Indicates the production day.
7 Hyphen
8 Number
Indicates the production lot.

MX-M316N
[4] Service Manual
EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE
1. External view
1 2 3 4 5
When a output tray unit is installed
13
9 10 11 12 When a finisher is installed
No. Name Function/Operation

1 Job separator tray (Upper tray) (optional) Print jobs and received faxes are delivered to this tray.
2 Automatic document feeder This automatically feeds and scans multiple originals. Both sides of 2-sided originals can be automatically
scanned.
3 Output tray (center tray) Output is delivered to this tray.
4 Operation panel This is used to select functions and enter the number of copies.
5 Front cover Open this cover to switch the main power switch to "On" or "Off" or to replace a toner cartridge.
6 USB connector (A type) Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed).
This is used to connect a USB device such as USB memory to the machine.
For the USB cable, use a shielded cable.
7 Exit tray unit (right tray)*1 When installed, output can be delivered to this tray.
8 Finisher*1 This can be used to staple output.
9 Tray 1 This holds paper.
10 Tray 2 This holds paper. (Only for NV models, this is the option.)
11 Tray 3 (when a paper drawer is installed)*1 This holds paper.
12 Tray 4 (when a paper drawer is installed)*1 This holds paper.
13 Main power switch This is used to power on the machine.
When using the fax or Internet fax functions, keep this switch in the "on" position.
*1: Peripheral device.
MX-M316N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 1

2. Internal structure
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9

1 Toner cartridge This holds toner for printing. The toner cartridge must be replaced when indicated on the operation panel.
2 Upper cover of machine (when a second Open this cover to remove jam paper when a paper jam occurs in the output of the job separator or the optional
paper exit unit is installed) finisher.
3 Fusing unit Heat is applied here to fuse the transferred image onto the paper.
4 Right side cover Open this cover to remove a misfeed.
5 Right side cover release lever To remove a paper misfeed, pull and hold this lever up to open the right side cover.
6 Photoconductive drum This drum has a photoconductive coating on its surface.
The images are formed on top of this photoconductive surface.
(The photoconductive coating is green in color.)
7 Right cover of paper drawer (when a Open this to remove a paper misfeed in tray 3 or tray 4.
paper drawer is installed)
8 Paper tray right side cover Open this to remove a paper misfeed in tray 2.
9 Bypass tray Use this tray to feed paper manually.
When loading a large sheet of paper, be sure to pull out the bypass tray extension.

3. Automatic document feeder and document glass
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 Paper feed roller This roller rotates to automatically feed the original.
2 Document feeding area cover Open this cover to remove an original misfeed or clean the paper feed roller.
3 Original guides These help ensure that the original is scanned correctly.
Adjust the guides to the width of the original.
4 Document feeder tray Place originals in this tray. 1-sided originals must be placed face up.
5 Original exit tray Originals are delivered to this tray after scanning.
6 Scanning area Originals placed in the document feeder tray are scanned here.
7 Original size detector This detects the size of an original placed on the document glass.
8 Document glass Use this to scan a book or other thick original that cannot be fed through the automatic document feeder.

4. I/F connectors
2
3
4
When a fax expansion kit is installed

100V Type 200V Type
7
8

1 Service-only connector This connector is for use only by service technicians.
Connecting a cable to this connector may cause the machine to malfunction.
Important note for service technicians:
The cable connected to the service connector must be less than 118" (3 m) in length.
2 LAN connector Connect the LAN cable to this connector when the machine is used on a network.
For the LAN cable, use a shielded type cable.
3 USB connector (B type) Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed).
A computer can be connected to this connector to use the machine as a printer.
For the USB cable, use a shielded cable.
4 USB connector (A type) Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed).
This is used to connect a USB device such as USB memory to the machine.
5 Connector for the finisher only Connects the finisher.(At the time of optional wearing)
6 Power plug
7 Extension phone jack When the fax function of the machine is used, an extension phone can be connected to this jack.
8 Telephone line jack When the fax function of the machine is used, the telephone line is connected to this jack.

5. Operation panel
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18

1 Touch panel Messages and keys appear in the touch panel display.
Touch the displayed keys to perform a variety of operations.
When a key is touched, a beep sounds and the selected item is highlighted. This provides confirmation as you
perform an operation.
2 [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key Press this key to display the system settings menu screen. The system settings are used to configure paper
tray settings, store addresses for transmission operations, and adjust parameters to make the machine easier
to use.
3 [HOME] key Touch this key to display the home screen. Frequently used settings can be registered in the home screen to
enable quick and easy operation of the machine.
4 [JOB STATUS] key Press this key to display the job status screen. The job status screen is used to check information on jobs and
to cancel jobs.
For details, see the chapters for each of the functions in this manual.
5 PRINT mode indicators * READY indicator: Print jobs can be received when this indicator is lit.
* DATA indicator: This blinks while print data is being received and lights steadily while printing is taking place.
6 IMAGE SEND mode indicators * LINE indicator: This lights up during transmission or reception of a fax or Internet fax. This also lights during
transmission of an image in scan mode.
* DATA indicator: This blinks when a received fax or Internet fax cannot be printed because of a problem such
as out of paper.
This lights up when there is a transmission job that has not been sent.
7 [CLEAR] key Press this key to return the number of copies to "0".
8 [STOP] key Press this key to stop a copy job or scanning of an original.
9 Main power indicator This lights up when the machine's main power switch is in the "on" position.
10 [POWER] key Use this key to turn the machine power on and off.
11 POWER SAVE key indicator Use to switch the machine to "Auto power shut-off" mode, which is a power save function.
[Power save key] blinks when the machine is in an auto power shut-off mode.
12 DATA NOTIFICATION indicator (Green) The indicator lights solidly or blinks to indicate the status of a job.
13 [LOGOUT] key Press this key to log out after you have logged in and used the machine. When using the fax function, this key
can also be pressed to send tone signals on a pulse dial line.
14 Numeric keys These are used to enter the number of copies, fax numbers, and other numerical values. These keys are also
used to enter numeric value settings (except for the system settings).
15 [#/P] key When using the copy function, press this key to use a job program. When using the fax function, this key can be
used when dialing.
16 Error indicator Lights solidly or blinks to indicate the status of the error.
17 [CLEAR ALL] key Press this key to return to the initial operation state.
Use this key when you wish to cancel all settings that have been selected and start operation from the initial
state.
18 [START] key Press this key to copy or scan an original. This key is also used to send a fax in fax mode.

1 : ‘15/Aug.
6. RSPF
A. Sensors and detectors
1 (1) MX-M316N/M266N/M265N/M315N/M356N
MX-RP19/RP20
SCOV
SPPD1 SPED SPLS2
SPPD2 SPLS1
SPWS
SOCD
SPPD3 SPPD4
Signal name Name Type Function/Operation Note

SCOV RSPF cover open/close detector Micro switch Detects open/close of the RSPF cover.
SOCD RSPF open/close sensor Transmission type Detects open/close of the RSPF unit.
SPED Document sensor Transmission type Detects document empty in the RSPF paper feed tray.
SPLS1 Paper size detector 1 Transmission type Detects the document length in the RSPF paper feed tray.
SPLS2 Paper size detector 2 Transmission type Detects the document length in the RSPF paper feed tray.
SPPD1 Document transport sensor 1 Transmission type Detects paper feed and the document size in random
paper feed.
SPPD2 Document transport sensor 2 Transmission type Detects paper pass.
SPPD3 Document transport sensor 3 Transmission type Detects paper pass.
SPPD4 Document transport sensor 4 Transmission type Detects paper exit and switchback.
SPWS Document size detector Volume-type resistor Detects the document width.

1 : ‘15/Aug.
B. Motors, clutches, solenoids and PWB
1 (1) MX-M316N/M266N/M356N
MX-RP20
SRRC
SPFM
SPM (SPUM) SPRS
Signal name Name Type Function/Operation

SPFM RSPF transport motor Stepping motor Transports a document.
SPM/SPUM RSPF paper feed motor Stepping motor Feeds a document.
SPRS Paper exit roller pressure control solenoid Magnetic solenoid Controls ON/OFF of the transport power of the paper exit roller. (Releases the
(RSPF) paper exit roller pressure when reversing paper.)
SRRC Registration roller clutch (RSPF) Magnetic clutch Controls the registration roller. (Controls the timing of document transport.)

1 RSPF driver PWB Drives the motor, the solenoid, and the clutch in the RSPF section.
(2) MX-M265N/M315N
MX-RP19
SRRC
SPFM
SPRS
SPUC
Signal name Name Type Function/Operation

SPFM RSPF transport motor Stepping motor Transports a document.
SPRS Paper exit roller pressure control solenoid Magnetic solenoid Controls ON/OFF of the transport power of the paper exit roller. (Releases the
(RSPF) paper exit roller pressure when reversing paper.)
SRRC Registration roller clutch (RSPF) Magnetic clutch Controls the registration roller. (Controls the timing of document transport.)
SPUC Reverse clutch Electromagnetic Controls ON/OFF of the transport power of the transport roller 3 and the
clutch paper exit roller when discharging a document and reversing it to transport to
the resist roller.

1 RSPF driver PWB Drives the motor, the solenoid, and the clutch in the RSPF section.

1 : ‘15/Aug.
C. Rollers
1 (1) MX-M316N/M266N/M265N/M315N/M356N
MX-RP19/RP20
6 5 4 2 3 1
7 8 10 9 11 12

1 Document pickup roller (RSPF) Feeds a document to the paper feed roller.
2 Paper feed roller (RSPF) Feeds a document to the transport section. Makes a buckle on paper between the registration roller and this
roller to correct the start position of document skew and document image scan.
3 Separation roller (RSPF) Separates a document to prevent double-feeding.
4 Transport auxiliary roller (RSPF) Reduces friction between a document and the paper guide to transport the document smoothly to the
registration roller.
5 Registration roller (Drive) (RSPF) Transports a document to the transport roller 2. / Controls the transport timing of the document and adjusts
the document scanning timing.
6 Registration roller (Idle) RSPF) Apply a pressure to a document and the registration roller to provide the transport power of the transport
roller to the document.
7 Transport roller 2 (Idle) (RSPF) Apply a pressure to a document and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller
to the document.
8 Transport roller 2 (Drive) (RSPF) Transports a document transported from the registration roller to the document scanning section.
9 Transport roller 3 (Idle) (RSPF) Apply a pressure to a document and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller
to the document.
10 Transport roller 3 (Drive) (RSPF) Transports a document transported from the document scanning section to the paper exit roller.
11 Paper exit roller (Idle) (RSPF) Apply a pressure to a document and the paper exit roller to provide the transport power of the paper exit roller
to the document.
12 Paper exit roller (Drive) (RSPF) Discharges a document. Switchbacks the document and transports it to the registration roller when scanning
the back surface.

1 : ‘15/Aug.
7. Sensor
1 A. MX-M316N/M266N/M315N/M315U/M356N/ B. MX-M265N/M265U
M356U
1 1
2 2
12 12
11 11
3 3
10 10
13 13
14 14
17 17
4 4
18 18
16 16
5 5
7 7
15 19 9 8 6
8 6 20
21
15 19 9 22
23 20
No. Name Code Function and operation No. Name Code Function and operation
1 Scanner home MHPS Detects the scanner home 1 Scanner home MHPS Detects the scanner home
position sensor position. position sensor position.
2 Paper size detection OCSW Detects generation of the paper 2 Paper size detection OCSW Detects generation of the paper
trigger sensor size detection trigger signal. trigger sensor size detection trigger signal.
3 Toner motor sensor TM_CO Detects the rotation of the toner 3 Toner motor sensor TM_CO Detects the rotation of the toner
UNT motor. UNT motor.
4 Temperature sensor/ TH_RA/ Machine temperature/humidity 4 Temperature sensor/ TH_RA/ Machine temperature/humidity
Humidity sensor HUD_RA detection Humidity sensor HUD_RA detection
5 Manual paper feed MTOP1 Manual feed tray position 5 Manual paper feed MTOP1 Manual feed tray position
tray empty sensor 1 detection tray empty sensor 1 detection
6 Manual paper feed MTOP2 Manual feed tray position 6 Manual paper feed MTOP2 Manual feed tray position
tray empty sensor 2 detection tray empty sensor 2 detection
7 Manual feed length MPLD1 Manual feed paper length 7 Manual feed length MPLD1 Manual feed paper length
detection sensor 1 detection detection sensor 1 detection
8 Manual feed width MPWD Manual feed paper width 8 Manual feed width MPWD Manual feed paper width
detection sensor detection detection sensor detection
9 Manual feed paper MPED Manual feed paper empty 9 Manual feed paper MPED Manual feed paper empty
empty sensor detection empty sensor detection
10 Shifter home position SHPOS Shifter home position sensor 10 Shifter home position SHPOS Shifter home position sensor
sensor detection sensor detection
11 1st paper exit sensor POD1 1st paper exit detection 11 1st paper exit sensor POD1 1st paper exit detection
12 1st exit tray full TFD1 1st exit tray full detection 12 1st exit tray full TFD1 1st exit tray full detection
detection sensor detection sensor
13 Paper exit POSD Paper transport detection 13 Paper exit POSD Paper transport detection
divergence detection divergence detection
14 Thermistor TH_UM/ Fusing temperature detection 14 Thermistor TH_UM/ Fusing temperature detection
TH_US TH_US
15 Thermostat RDTCT Fusing section abnormally high 15 Thermostat RDTCT Fusing section abnormally high
temperature detection temperature detection
16 Paper in sensor PPD1 Paper transport detection 16 Paper in sensor PPD1 Paper transport detection
17 1st tray (paper tray) C1SS 1st tray (paper tray) empty 17 1st tray (paper tray) C1SS 1st tray (paper tray) empty
detection detection detection detection
18 Paper feed tray 1 C1LUD This detector detects when the 18 Paper feed tray C1LUD This detector detects when the
upper limit detector tray in paper feed tray 1 upper limit detector tray in paper feed tray reaches
reaches its upper limit. its upper limit.
19 Paper feed tray 1 C1PED Detects paper empty in Paper 19 Paper feed tray 1 C1PED Detects paper empty in Paper
paper empty detector feed tray 1 paper empty detector feed tray 1
20 Toner density sensor TCS Detects the toner density in the 20 Toner density sensor TCS Detects the toner density in the
developing unit. developing unit.
21 Paper feed tray 2 C2LUD This detector detects when the
upper limit detector tray in paper feed tray 2
reaches its upper limit.
22 2nd tray paper pass C2PFD 2nd tray paper pass
sensor
23 Paper feed tray 2 C2PED Detects paper empty in Paper
paper empty detector feed tray 2

1 : ‘15/Aug.
8. Switch
A. MX-M316N/M266N/M315N/M315U/M356N/ B. MX-M265N/M265U
1
M356U
1 1
4 2
3
1 Power switch MAIN SW Turns ON/OFF the main 1 Power switch MAIN SW Turns ON/OFF the main
power source. power source.
2 Side door/Front DSWR/ Side door/Front cover open 2 Side door/Front DSWR/ Side door/Front cover open
cover switch DSWF detection cover switch DSWF detection
3 2nd tray (paper tray) C2SS 2nd tray (paper tray) empty
detection detection
4 2nd side door cover DSW_C2 Side door open detection
switch

1 : ‘15/Aug.
9. Solenoid/Clutch
M356U
4 4
2 2
1 1
3 3
6 7 5
1 1st tray paper feed C1PUC Paper feed roller drive 1 1st tray paper feed C1PUC Paper feed roller drive
clutch clutch
2 PS clutch RRC Main unit paper feed 2 PS clutch RRC Main unit paper feed
3 Manual paper feed MPFC Manual paper feed clutch 3 Manual paper feed MPFC Manual paper feed clutch
clutch clutch
4 Paper exit gate POGS1 Paper exit gate switcher 4 Paper exit gate POGS1 Paper exit gate switcher
switching solenoid switching solenoid
(Option) (Option)
5 Separation pawl PSPS Separation pawl operation 5 Separation pawl PSPS Separation pawl operation
solenoid solenoid solenoid solenoid
6 2nd tray paper feed C2PUC Paper feed roller drive
clutch
7 Paper feed transfer PTRC2 Paper feed transfer clutch
clutch

1 : ‘15/Aug.
10. Drive motor
M356U
2 2
8 8
7 7
5 5
6 6
3 3
4 4
1 Polygon motor PM Drives the polygon mirror 1 Polygon motor PM Drives the polygon mirror
2 Scan motor MIM Drives the scanner unit 2 Scan motor MIM Drives the scanner unit
3 ADU motor ADUM Reverse pass for paper 3 ADU motor ADUM Reverse pass for paper
transport transport
4 Tray lift motor C1LUM Tray paper lift 4 Tray lift motor C1LUM Tray paper lift
5 Main motor MM Main drive 5 Main motor MM Main drive
6 Toner motor TNM Toner supply 6 Toner motor TNM Toner supply
7 Shifter motor OSM Shifter drive 7 Shifter motor OSM Shifter drive
8 Paper exit reverse POM Duplex paper switching and exit 8 Paper exit reverse POM Duplex paper switching and exit
motor motor motor motor
9 Tray lift motor C2LUM Tray paper lift

1 : ‘15/Aug.
11. Lamp
M356U
1 1
2 2
No. Name Function and operation No. Name Function and operation
1 Copy lamp Image exposure lamp 1 Copy lamp Image exposure lamp
2 Heater lamp Fusing heat lamp 2 Heater lamp Fusing heat lamp

1 : ‘15/Aug.
12. Fan/Filter
M356U
2
2
5
5
3
3
6*1
4 4
1
1
1 DV cooling duct LSUFM Cools the inside of the unit. 1 DV cooling duct LSUFM Cools the inside of the unit.
2 Power supply cooling PSFM1 Cools the inside of the unit. 2 Power supply cooling PSFM1 Cools the inside of the unit.
fan 1 fan 1
3 Ozone exhaust fan OZFM Cools the inside of the machine 3 Ozone exhaust fan OZFM Cools the inside of the machine
and discharges the ozone. and discharges the ozone.
4 Paper exit cooling FUFM Cools the fusing section and 4 Paper exit cooling FUFM Cools the fusing section and
fan the paper exit section. fan the paper exit section.
5 Ozone filter Absorbs ozone generated in 5 Ozone filter Absorbs ozone generated in
the image process section. the image process section.
6*1 Ozone filter Take in an odor to exhaust.
*1:Destination North America and Mexico only

1 : ‘15/Aug.
13. PWB
M356U
8 8
13 13
9 9
6 6
10 10
4
7 1 7 4
1
5 5
12 12
2 2
3 3
14 11 14 11
15
1 CCD PWB Scans document images and performs A/D 1 CCD PWB Scans document images and performs A/D
conversion of the scanning signal. conversion of the scanning signal.
2 High voltage PWB High voltage control 2 High voltage PWB High voltage control
3 KEY PWB Outputs the key operation signal. 3 KEY PWB Outputs the key operation signal.
4 LED drive PWB Copy lamp control 4 LED drive PWB Copy lamp control
5 LED PWB-F Irradiates a manuscript with light for CCD to 5 LED PWB-F Irradiates a manuscript with light for CCD to
read a manuscript image. read a manuscript image.
6 LED PWB-R Irradiates a manuscript with light for CCD to 6 LED PWB-R Irradiates a manuscript with light for CCD to
read a manuscript image. read a manuscript image.
7 LVDS PWB Converts the display data signal to the LCD 7 LVDS PWB Converts the display data signal to the LCD
display signal. Controls the touch panel. display signal. Controls the touch panel.
8 MFP control PWB Controls image data (compression, 8 MFP control PWB Controls image data (compression,
decompression, and filing), and controls the decompression, and filing), and controls the
whole machine. whole machine.
9 ORS LED PWB Drives the LED for the document size 9 ORS LED PWB Drives the LED for the document size
detection. detection.
10 ORS-PD PWB Outputs the document size detection signal. 10 ORS-PD PWB Outputs the document size detection signal.
11 PCU PWB Controls the engine section. 11 PCU PWB Controls the engine section.
12 DC power supply DC voltage control 12 DC power supply DC voltage control
PWB PWB
13 SCN CNT PWB Controls the scanner and the operation 13 SCN CNT PWB Controls the scanner and the operation
section. section.
14 USB I/F PWB USB I/F 14 USB I/F PWB USB I/F
15 Tray interface PWB 2nd tray control

1 : ‘15/Aug.
14. Roller
M356U
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
11 11
7 7
12 8 12 8
13 9 13 9
14 14
15 15
16 10 16 10
17
18
19 20 21
1 Paper exit roller Paper exit roller 1 Paper exit roller Paper exit roller
2 Paper exit follower　 Paper exit roller 2 Paper exit follower　 Paper exit roller
roller roller
3 Transport roller Paper transport roller 3 Transport roller Paper transport roller
4 Transport follower Paper transport roller 4 Transport follower Paper transport roller
roller roller
5 Upper heat roller Fuses toner on paper. (with the Teflon 5 Upper heat roller Fuses toner on paper. (with the Teflon
roller) roller)
6 Lower heat roller Fuses toner on paper. (with the silicone 6 Lower heat roller Fuses toner on paper. (with the silicone
rubber roller) rubber roller)
7 DUP transport Duplex paper transport 7 DUP transport Duplex paper transport
follower roller follower roller
8 DUP transport roller Duplex paper transport 8 DUP transport roller Duplex paper transport
9 Bypass tray paper Picks up paper in bypass tray. 9 Bypass tray paper Picks up paper in bypass tray.
pick up roller pick up roller
10 Bypass tray Separates a document to prevent double- 10 Bypass tray Separates a document to prevent double-
separation roller feeding. (Bypass tray) separation roller feeding. (Bypass tray)
11 Transport roller Transfer images on the drum onto paper. 11 Transport roller Transfer images on the drum onto paper.
12 Resist follower roller Synchronize the paper lead edge with the 12 Resist follower roller Synchronize the paper lead edge with the
image lead edge. image lead edge.
13 Resist roller Synchronize the paper lead edge with the 13 Resist roller Synchronize the paper lead edge with the
image lead edge. image lead edge.
14 1st tray pick-up roller Picks up paper from the tray. 14 1st tray pick-up roller Picks up paper from the tray.
15 1st tray paper feed Transports the picked up paper to RESIST 15 1st tray paper feed Transports the picked up paper to RESIST
roller section. roller section.
16 1st tray separation Separates a document to prevent double- 16 1st tray separation Separates a document to prevent double-
roller feeding. (1st tray) roller feeding. (1st tray)
17 Transport follower Paper transport roller
roller
18 Transport roller Paper transport roller
19 2nd tray pick-up Picks up paper from the tray.
roller
20 2nd tray separation Separates a document to prevent double-
roller feeding. (1st tray)
21 2nd tray paper feed Transports the picked up paper to RESIST
roller section.

MX-M316N
[5] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS Service Manual
1. General
Each adjustment item in the adjustment item list is associated with Unnecessary adjustments can be omitted. Even in this case, how-
a specific Job number. Perform the adjustment procedures in the ever, the sequence from the smallest to the greatest Job number
sequence of Job numbers from the smallest to the greatest. must be observed.
However, there is no need to perform all the adjustment items. Per- If the above precaution should be neglected, the adjustment would
form only the necessary adjustments according to the need. not complete normally or trouble may occur.
2. Adjustment item list
Job No. Adjustment item list Simulation

ADJ 1 Adjust the developing unit 1A Developing doctor gap adjustment
1B MG roller main pole position adjustment
1C Toner density control reference value setting 25-2
ADJ 2 High voltage values check 2A Check the main charger grid voltage 8-2
2B Check the developing bias voltage 8-1
2C Transfer current adjustment 8-6
ADJ 3 Image lead edge position, 3A Print image off-center automatic adjustment (Print engine) (Each paper feed tray) 50-28
image loss, void area, image off- 3B Copy mode image lead edge position, image loss, void area, image off-center, sub scanning 50-28
center, image magnification direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment (Scanner) (Document table mode)
ratio adjustment (Automatic 3C Copy mode image lead edge position, image loss, void area, image off-center, sub scanning 50-28
adjustment) direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment (Scanner) (RSPF mode)
ADJ 4 Scan image distortion 4A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism adjustment
adjustment (Document table 4B Scan image (sub scanning direction) distortion adjustment
mode) 4C Scan image (main scanning direction) distortion adjustment
ADJ 5 Scanner image skew adjustment (RSPF mode) 64-2
ADJ 6 Scan image focus adjustment 48-1
ADJ 7 Print lead edge image position adjustment (Printer mode) 50-5
ADJ 8 Image density adjustment 8A Scanner calibration (CCD calibration) 63-3 (63-5)
8B Copy / Image send / 8B Monochrome copy density adjustment (for each monochrome copy 46-2
FAX image quality (1) mode) (separately for the low-density area and the high-density area)
adjustment (Individual (No need to adjust normally)
adjustment) 8B Automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode document density 46-19
(2) scanning operation (exposure operation) conditions setting (Normally
no need to set)
8B Document low density image density reproduction adjustment in the 46-32
(3) automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode (No need to adjust
normally) (Background density adjustment in the scanning section)
8B Copy/Scan low density image density adjustment (for each mode) 46-63
(4) (No need to adjust normally) (Effective only for the color scan
function)
8B Monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode color document reproduction 46-37
(5) adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
8B RSPF mode (Copy/Scan/FAX) density adjustment (No need to adjust 46-9
(6) normally)
ADJ 9 Paper size sensor adjustment 9A Manual paper feed tray paper size (width) sensor adjustment 40-2
9B RSPF paper feed tray document size (width) sensor adjustment 53-6
ADJ 10 Document size detection 10A Document size sensor detection point adjustment 41-1
adjustment 10B Adjust the sensitivity of the original size sensor 41-2
ADJ 11 Touch panel coordinate setting 65-1
ADJ 12 Print image position, void area, 12A Print image print area adjustment (Print engine) (Manual adjustment) 50-10/50-1
off-center adjustment (Print 12B Print image off-center adjustment (Print engine) (Manual adjustment) 50-10
engine) (Manual adjustment)
ADJ 13 Scan image magnification ratio 13A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (main scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) 48-1
adjustment (Manual adjustment) (Document table mode)
13B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (sub scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) (Document 48-1/48-5
table mode)
13C Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (main scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) (RSPF 48-1
mode)
13D Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (sub scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) (RSPF 48-1
mode)
ADJ 14 Scan image off-center 14A Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment) (Document table mode) 50-12
adjustment (Manual adjustment) 14B Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode) 50-12/50-6
ADJ 15 Copy image position and image 15A Copy image position, image loss, and void area adjustment (Manual adjustment) (Document table 50-1
loss adjustment (Manual mode)
adjustment) 15B Image scanning position adjustment (Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode) 53-8
15C Copy image position, image loss, void area adjustment (Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode) 50-6
ADJ 16 Finisher adjustments (alignment, staple position) 3-10
MX-M316N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 1

1 : ‘15/Aug.
3. Details of adjustment
ADJ 1 Adjust the developing unit

1-A Developing doctor gap adjustment
1) Remove the doctor cover. A
9.1mm
1-C Toner density control reference value

setting
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
2) Loosen the developing doctor fixing screw A. * When developer is replaced.
3) Insert a thickness gauge of 1.5mm to the positions of three CAUTION: Be sure to execute this adjustment only when developer
screws on the developing doctor as shown. is replaced. Never execute it in the other cases.
1) Toner cartridge installation
Shake the toner cartridge 4 - 5 times horizontally.
1
R
Toner cartridges must be installed to execute this setting
A (Toner density control reference value setting)
Because of the structure of this machine, if SIM25-2 is exe-
C cuted without the toner cartridges installed, the waste toner
A
transport pipe of the process UN may be locked.
F
A
CAUTION: This is performed only when a new toner cartridge is
installed.
4) Tighten the developing doctor fixing screw.
5) Check the clearance of the developing doctor. If it is within the
specified range, then fix the doctor fixing screw with screw 4㹼5
lock.
* When inserting a thickness gauge, be careful not to scratch the
developing doctor and the MG roller.
<Adjustment specification>
Developing doctor gap

F/C/R: 1.5 +0.1mm
-0.15mm
1-B MG roller main pole position adjustment 2) Press the lock release lever and insert it along the guide in the
machine until it locks securely.
1) Put the developing unit on a flat surface.
2) Tie a needle or pin on a string.
3) Hold the string and bring the needle close to the MG roller hor-
izontally. (Do not use paper clip, which is too heavy to make a
correct adjustment.) (Put the developing unit horizontally for
this adjustment.)
4) Do not bring the needle into contact with the MG roller, but
bring it to a position 2 or 3mm apart from the MG roller. Mark
the point on the MG roller which is on the extension line from
the needle tip.
5) Measure the distance from the marking position to the top of
the doctor plate of the developing unit to insure that it is
9.1mm. CAUTION: Before installation, clean and remove dust and dirt from
If the distance is not within the specified range, loosen the fix- the toner cartridge.
ing screw A of the main pole adjustment plate, and move the 3) With the front cabinet open, enter SIM25-2.
adjustment plate in the arrow direction to adjust.

4) Close the front cabinet.

7(67 6,08/$7,21 12 &/26( 5) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, [EXECUTE] key is high-
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
$7'(9($'-
lighted (in black) and the developer adjustment is started. (The
adjustment is automatically performed for 3 minutes.)
6) When the developer adjustment is completed, [EXECUTE] key
returns to the normal state (in white), and the developer adjust-
ment value is displayed.
CAUTION: If the operation is interrupted within 3 minutes, the
adjustment result is not reflected.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during the operation,
the operation is stopped and [EXECUTE] key returns to
(;(&87(
the normal display.

EXECUTE
EXECUTE If [EE-EU] or [EE-EL] is displayed, setting of the refer-
or INTERRUPT ence toner density control value is not completed nor-
mally.

Troubleshoot the cause, remove the cause, and per-
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17 form setting again.
7&6
Error
Error name Detail of error
display
EE-EL EL abnormality Sensor output level than 78
EE-EU EU abnormality Sensor output level over 178
7) Cancel SIM25-2 with [CA] key.

CAUTION: When not replacing the developer, do not execute
(;(&87(
SIM25-2.
Adjustment completed

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
$7'(9($'-
(;(&87(
Abnormal end

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
7&6(((/
(;(&87(

1 : ‘15/Aug.
3) Enter the main charger values of items A/B under TS_OFF/
ADJ 2 High voltage values check ON.
When [OK] key is pressed, the set value is saved.
2-A Check the main charger grid voltage　 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the voltage entered in the
procedure 3) is outputted for 30sec.
setting
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed again, the output is stopped.
This check must be performed in the following cases: 1
Stop it in a short time to affect the drum surface. (less than five
* When the MC/DV high voltage power PWB is replaced.
seconds)
* U2 trouble has occurred.
* The PCU PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
1) Enter the SIM 8-2 mode.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( 2-B Check the developing bias voltage setting
0+9*5,'6(77,1*$1'287387
$˖ ˖&23<*% This check must be performed in the following cases:
$˖ %˖ ˖35,17(5)$;*%
˷ ̚˹
* When the MC/DV high voltage power PWB is replaced.

76B2)) 76B21 (;(&87( 2. ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'96(77,1*$1'287387
$˖ ˖ &23<'9%
UTE $˖ %˖ ˖ 35,17(5)$;'9%
˷̚ ˹
OK

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
0+9*5,'6(77,1*$1'287387
$˖ ˖ &23<*%
$˖ %˖ ˖ 35,17(5)$;*%
76B2)) 76B21 (;(&87( 2.
˷ ̚˹
OK

76B2)) 76B21 (;(&87( 2. ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
'96(77,1*$1'287387
$˖ ˖&23<'9%
$˖ %˖ ˖35,17(5)$;'9%
2) Select an item to be checked. ˷̚ ˹
1 Default value
Butt Setting
Item Display Content
on range 26 31 35
TS_ A COPY GB Charging/grid 0 - 750 575 575 605
OFF bias set value in
a copy job
(Toner save
mode OFF) 76B2)) 76B21 (;(&87(
(;(&87( 2.
B PRINTER Charging/grid 0 - 750 575 575 605

FAX bias set value in
GB a Print/FAX job
(Toner save
mode OFF)
TS_ A COPY GB Charging/grid 0 - 750 495 495 495
ON bias set value in
a copy job
(Toner save
mode ON)
B PRINTER Charging/grid 0 - 750 425 425 425
GB bias set value in
a print job
(Toner save
mode ON)

1 : ‘15/Aug.
2) Select an item to be checked.
2-C Transfer current adjustment
Butt Setting Default value This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
1 Item Display Content
on range 26 31 35 * When the TC high voltage PWB is replaced.
TS_ A COPY Developing bias 0 - 650 400 400 430
OFF DVB set value in a
copy job (Toner * The PCU PWB has been replaced.
save mode * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
OFF)
B PRINTER Developing bias 0 - 650 400 400 430
FAX set value in a
DVB Print/FAX job
6,08/$7,21 12 &/26(
7(67
(Toner save 7+96(77,1*$1'287387
mode OFF) $˖ ˖ 7&3/$,163;:
TS_ A COPY Developing bias 0 - 650 320 320 320 $˖ %˖ ˖ 7&3/$,1'3;:
ON DVB set value in a ˷ ̚ ˹ &˖ ˖ 7&3/$,163;1
'˖ ˖ 7&3/$,1'3;1
copy job (Toner (˖ ˖ 7&3/$,163;1
save mode ON) )˖ ˖ 7&3/$,1'3;1
B PRINTER Developing bias 0 - 650 250 250 250 *˖ ˖ 7&+($9<:
DVB set value in a +˖ ˖ 7&+($9<1
print job (Toner ,˖ ˖ 7&+($9<1
-˖ ˖ 7&2+3:
save mode ON) .˖ ˖ 7&2+31
/˖ ˖ 7&2+31
3) Enter the developing bias values of items A/B under TS_OFF/ (;(&87( 2.
ON.
When [OK] key is pressed, the set value is saved. 10-key
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the voltage entered in the EXECUTE
procedure 3) is outputted for 30sec. EXECUTE
or after 30 sec.
1 Stop it in a short time to affect the drum surface. (less than five
seconds) 7(67
6,08/$7,21 12 &/26(
7+96(77,1*$1'287387
$˖ ˖ 7&3/$,163;:
$˖ %˖ ˖ 7&3/$,1'3;:
˷ ̚ ˹ &˖ ˖ 7&3/$,163;1
'˖ ˖ 7&3/$,1'3;1
(˖ ˖ 7&3/$,163;1
)˖ ˖ 7&3/$,1'3;1
*˖ ˖ 7&+($9<:
+˖ ˖ 7&+($9<1
,˖ ˖ 7&+($9<1
-˖ ˖ 7&2+3:
.˖ ˖ 7&2+31
/˖ ˖ 7&2+31
(;(&87( 2.
2) Select an item to be adjusted.
Setting Default value

1 Item/Display Content
range 26 31 35
A TC PLAIN SPX W Primary transfer bias reference value Plain paper Front surface 5 - 35 18 18 20
B TC PLAIN DPX W Back surface 5 - 35 16 16 16
C TC PLAIN SPX N1 Front surface 5 - 35 22 22 24
D TC PLAIN DPX N1 Back surface 5 - 35 20 20 22
E TC PLAIN SPX N2 Front surface 5 - 35 26 26 28
F TC PLAIN DPX N2 Back surface 5 - 35 24 24 26
G TC HEAVY1 W Heavy paper 5 - 35 14 14 16
H TC HEAVY1 N1 5 - 35 18 18 20
I TC HEAVY1 N2 5 - 35 22 22 24
J TC OHP W OHP 5 - 35 10 10 10
K TC OHP N1 5 - 35 14 14 14
L TC OHP N2 5 - 35 14 14 14
M TC ENVELOPE W Envelope 5 - 35 14 14 16
N TC ENVELOPE N1 5 - 35 18 18 20
O TC ENVELOPE N2 5 - 35 22 22 24
P TC THIN W Thin paper 5 - 35 14 14 16
Q TC THIN N1 5 - 35 18 18 20
R TC THIN N2 5 - 35 22 22 24
S TC LABEL W Label paper 5 - 35 14 14 16
T TC LABEL N1 5 - 35 18 18 20
U TC LABEL N2 5 - 35 22 22 24

1 : ‘15/Aug.

range 26 31 35
V TC TAB W Primary transfer bias reference value Tab paper 5 - 35 14 14 16
W TC TAB N1 5 - 35 18 18 20
X TC TAB N2 5 - 35 22 22 24
Y TC POSTCARD N2 Post card 5 - 35 26 26 24
Z TC ADSORPTION W 0 - 100 50 50 50
AA TC ADSORPTION N1 0 - 100 50 50 50
AB TC ADSORPTION N2 0 - 100 50 50 50
AC TC INTERVAL BIAS W 0 - 100 50 50 50
AD TC INTERVAL BIAS N1 0 - 100 50 50 50
AE TC INTERVAL BIAS N2 0 - 100 50 50 50
AF TC FRONTEDGE 0 - 100 60 60 60
AG TC BACKEND SPX 0 - 100 90 90 90
AH TC BACKEND DPX 0 - 100 80 80 80
3) Enter the adjustment value (specified value), and press [OK] key.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the electric current entered in the procedure 3) is outputted for 30sec and the set value is saved.
By setting the default value (specified value), the specified output is provided.
ADJ 3 Image lead edge position, 3-A Print image off-center automatic
adjustment (Print engine)
image loss, void area, image (Each paper feed tray)
off-center, image magnification 1) Enter the SIM50-28 mode.
ratio adjustment

(Automatic adjustment) ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
The following adjustment items can be executed automatically with 2&$'- 63)$'-
SIM50-28. 6(78335,17$'- 5(68/7

'$7$
* ADJ 12
Print image position, image magnification ratio, void area, off-
center adjustment (Print engine) (Manual adjustment)
* ADJ 13
Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Manual adjustment)
* ADJ 14
Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment)
* ADJ 15
Copy image position, image loss adjustment 2) Select [SETUP/PRINT ADJ] with the key.
(Manual adjustment) 3) Select [ALL] with the key.
Menu in SIM50-28 mode

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
Display/Item Content 7(67
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
OC ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image /($' 2))6(7
magnification ratio adjustment (Document table mode) $//
SPF ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image

magnification ratio adjustment (RSPF mode)
SETUP/ Print lead edge adjustment, image off-center (each paper
PRINT ADJ feed tray, duplex mode) adjustment
RESULT Adjustment result display
DATA Display of data used when an adjustment is executed

CAUTION: By pressing [LEAD] or [OFFSET] key, the following

items can be executed individually.
* [LEAD]: Print image lead edge image position adjustment
* [OFFSET]: Print image off-center adjustment
When [ALL] is selected, both of the above two items are
executed simultaneously.

4) Select a paper feed tray to be adjusted.
3-B Copy mode image lead edge position,

image loss, void area, image off-center, sub
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
&/26(
scanning direction image magnification
0)7 &6 &6 $'8 ratio automatic adjustment (Scanner)
&6 &6 (Document table mode)
1) Enter the SIM50-28 mode.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
2&$'- 63)$'-
6(78335,17$'- 5(68/7
'$7$
(;(&87(
5) Press [EXECUTE] key.

The adjustment pattern is printed out.
6) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.
CAUTION: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document
guide.
In this case, put 5 sheets of white paper on the printed

adjustment pattern. 2) Select [OC ADJ] with the key.
3) Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the key.
(Any paper size will do.)

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
0)7 &6 &6
(;(&87(

The adjustment pattern is printed out.
7) Press [EXECUTE] key. 5) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.
The following item is automatically adjustment. CAUTION: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document
* Print image lead edge image position adjustment guide.
* Print image off-center adjustment In this case, put 5 sheets of white paper on the printed
adjustment pattern.
8) Press [OK] key.
The adjustment result becomes valid.
Perform procedures 4) to 7) for each paper feed tray.

6) Press [EXECUTE] key. 2) Press the [SPF ADJ] key.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&( $872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
3/($6(:$,7 6,'( 6,'(
$//
12:(;(&87,1*
5(35,17 (;(&87(
3) Proceed to one of the three screens for selecting the cassette

The following item is automatically adjustment.
used to print RSPF adjustment patterns by selecting the corre-
* Copy lead edge image reference position adjustment, image sponding button:
off-center, sub scanning direction image magnification ratio
SIDE1: RSPF adjustment for the front side
automatic adjustment
SIDE2: RSPF adjustment for the back side
7) Press [OK] key.
ALL: RSPF adjustment for both the front and back sides
The adjustment result becomes valid.
4) Select one of the cassettes that can be used to print RSPF

adjustment patterns. (Multiple selection is not allowed.)
5) Press the [EXECUTE] key, and the machine starts self-print of
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
6,08/$7,21&203/(7( RSPF adjustment patterns.
3/($6(386+&$.(<
* The screen shows a message indicating that the machine is
self-printing RSPF adjustment patterns.
When self-print finishes, the next screen appears where you
can start RSPF adjustments.
6) RSPF adjustment patterns are loaded into the RSPF.
(Set so that the pattern surface faces up.)

3-C Copy mode image lead edge position,

image loss, void area, image off-center, sub
scanning direction image magnification
ratio automatic adjustment (Scanner)
(RSPF mode)

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
2&$'- 63)$'-
6(78335,17$'- 5(68/7
'$7$
* By pressing the [REPRINT] key, you can return to the cas-

sette selection screen and have the machine self-print
RSPF adjustment patterns again.
7) Press the [EXECUTE] key, and the machine starts reading
RSPF adjustment patterns (for the front side).

reading and calculating RSPF adjustment patterns (for the
front side).
The machine starts calculating the adjustment amount (for
the front side) after it has read the patterns for the front side.
After the machine has finished calculating the adjustment
amount for the front side, the next screen appears where
you can have the machine start reading RSPF adjustment
patterns (for the back side).

Adjustment Item List
* RSPF original leading edge adjustment (front side) ADJ 4 Scan image distortion
* RSPF original off-center adjustment (front side) adjustment
* RSPF original sub-scan magnification adjustment (Document table mode)
(front side)
8) RSPF adjustment patterns are loaded into the RSPF.
(Set so that the pattern surface faces down.) * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
* When the copy image is distorted.
4-A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism

adjustment
Before execution of this adjustment, remove the document table
glass.
1) Remove the lamp unit, and then loosen the screws which are
fixing the scanner unit A and the drive wire. Release the scan-
ner unit A from the drive wire.

RSPF adjustment patterns again.
9) Press the [EXECUTE] key, and the machine starts loading
RSPF adjustment patterns (for the back side).
reading RSPF adjustment patterns (for the back side).
The machine starts calculating the adjustment amount (for
the back side) after it has read the patterns for the back side.
After the machine has finished calculating the adjustment
amount for the back side, the next screen appears where
2) Turn the scanner drive pulley manually and shift the scanner
you can view the results of the adjustments.
unit B to bring it into contact with the stopper.
Adjustment Item List
When the scanner unit B is in contact with the two stoppers on
* RSPF original leading edge adjustment (back side) the front and the rear frames simultaneously, the parallelism is
* RSPF original off-center adjustment (back side) proper.
* RSPF original sub-scan magnification adjustment
(back side)
10) The adjustment result screen appears.
This screen shows the current values along with the previous
values in parentheses.
RSPF adjustment patterns (for the front and back sides)
again.
* To have the machine start re-reading the RSPF adjustment
patterns (front and back sides), press the [RESCAN] key.
* To return to the top menu without saving the adjustment val-
ues into EEPROM and RAM, press the [RETRY] key.
* To display the data used for adjustment, press the [DATA]
key.
11) To save the adjustment values into EEPROM and RAM and If this requirement is not met, do the following steps.
return to the top menu, press the [OK] key.
* To return to the result screen, press the [BACK] key.

3) Loosen the fixing screw of the pulley angle on the front frame 6) With the scanner unit B in contact with both stoppers, fit the
side of the scanner unit B. edge of the scanner unit A with the right edge of the frame, and
fix the scanner unit A with the fixing screw.
4) Adjust the position of the pulley angle on the front frame side
of the scanner unit B so that it is in contact with two stoppers
on the front and the rear frames simultaneously.
5) Fix the pulley angle on the front frame side of the scanner unit
B.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained from the above proce-
dures, perform the following procedures. 4-B Scan image (sub scanning direction)
Loosen the fixing screw of the scanner unit drive pulley which distortion adjustment
is not in contact. 1) Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below.
Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, turn the scanner (Draw a rectangular with four right angles.)
unit drive pulley manually and adjust so that the scanner unit B
is in contact with both stoppers on the front frame and the rear L
frame simultaneously. (Change the relative position of the
scanner unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.) Fix the scanner
unit drive pulley fixing screw.
L L
L = 10mm
2) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu-

ment table. (Shift the test chart edge 30mm from the reference
position as shown below.) With the document cover open,
make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper.
30mm

3) Check for distortion in the sub scanning direction.
4-C Scan image (main scanning direction)
If La = Lb, there is no distortion.
distortion adjustment
La Lb 1) Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below.
(Draw a rectangular with four right angles.)
L L
If there is any distortion in the sub scanning direction, perform

the following procedures.
4) Loosen either one of the fixing screws of the scanner unit drive
pulley. (Either one on the front frame or on the rear frame will L = 10mm
do.)
L

ment table, and make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper.
3) Check for distortion in the main scanning direction.
If the four angles of the rectangle of the copy image are right
angles, it is judged that there is no distortion. (The work is
completed.)
If there is any distortion in the main scanning direction, perform

the following procedure.
4) Check the difference (distortion balance) between left-hand
5) Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, manually turn the
and right-hand side images distortions.
scanner unit drive pulley to change the parallelism of the scan-
ner unit A and B. (Change the relative position of the scanner Lc Lc
unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.)
6) Tighten the scanner unit drive pulley fixing screw.
Repeat the procedures 2) - 6) until the condition of the procedure 3)
is satisfied. Copy A Copy B
If the distortion in the sub scanning direction cannot be deleted with
the above procedures, perform ADJ 4A Scanner (reading) unit par-
allelism adjustment.
Ld Ld
There is no difference There is some difference
between the distortion on between the distortion on
the right and that on the left. the right and that on the left.
Lc Ld Lc Ld
If Lc = Ld, the distortion on the left is equal to that on the right.

(The distortions are balanced.)
If the above condition is satisfied, go to the procedure 6).
If not, perform the following procedures.

5) Change the height balance of the scanner rail on the front 2) Copy the adjustment chart (created in step 1) to A3 (11" x 17")
frame side. paper in RSPF duplex mode, and then check the image for
skews (Set in the RSPF feed tray so that the mark on the
adjustment chart is at the edge).
? Check with one of the following methods.
Check Method 1
(Front side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |a-b| ± 1 mm
A B
a b
Check Method 2
Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction
Remove the lower cabinet of the operation panel. Loosen the print line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within
scanner rail fixing screw to change the balance between the 1.0mm.
right and the left heights of the scanner rail.
Repeat the procedures 2) - 5) until the difference between the
image distortions (distortion balance) is deleted. 0 - 1.0mm
6) Without changing the balance of the scanner rail on the front
frame side, change the overall height.
ment table, and make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper. Check A
that the distortion in the main scanning direction is within the
specified range.
Repeat the procedures 6) and 7) until the distortion in the main
scanning direction is in the specified range.
ADJ 5 Scanner image skew

adjustment (RSPF mode) If the copy image is not in the above state, perform the pro-
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: cedure 3).
* The RSPF section has been disassembled. 3) Open the RSPF unit, and loosen the fixing screw of the hinge.
* When replacing the RSPF unit.
* The RSPF unit generates skewed scanned images.
1) Create an adjustment chart by printing in duplex mode the self-
print pattern (grid pattern) specified in Simulation 64-2.
SIM 64-2 set values
A = 1, B = 1, C = 254, D = 255
Make sure that the print grid pattern is almost in parallel with
the paper edges, and apply position marks A and B to the
leading and trailing edges of the paper surface lead edge sec-
tion.
A Paper pass direction
4) Slide the RSPF unit in the arrow direction to make the skew
adjustment.
5) Make a copy again and measure (a) and (b) on the copied test
chart. Repeat procedures 2) to 5) until the condition ((a) - (b) =
1mm or less) is satisfied.

4) Make a normal copy on A4 paper.
ADJ 6 Scan image focus adjustment Go to the copy mode, and make a copy.
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: 5) Compare the copied image of the scale and the actual scale
length in terms of length.
* The CCD unit has been removed from the machine.
6) Obtain the copy magnification ratio correction ratio in the main
* The CCD unit has been replaced.
scanning direction from the following formula.
* When the copy image focus is not properly adjusted.
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction
* When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image main scan- ratio = (Original size - Copy image size) / Original size x 100%
ning direction is not properly adjusted.
(Example)
* U2 trouble has occurred. Compare the scale of 10mm with the scale of 10mm on the
1) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode. copy image.
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
ratio = (100 - 99) / 100 x 100 = 1
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖&&'0$,1
$˖ %˖ ˖&&'68%
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63)0$,1
'˖ ˖63)68%

100mm scale
(˖ ˖63)%0$,1
(Orignal)
10 20 90 100 110
)˖ ˖63)%68%
1.0mm
2.
Copy image
2) Set the adjustment item CCD (MAIN) to 50 (default value). (1mm (1%)
10 20 90 100 110
shorter than
Select the adjustment item with the scroll key, and enter the the original)
adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
3) Place a scale on the original table as illustrated below.
If the copy magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform the
following procedures.
7) Remove the document table glass.
8) Remove the dark box cover.
9) To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis, mark the
CCD unit base as shown below.
NOTE: MEMO: This procedure must be executed also when the

CCD unit is replaced.

10) Loosen the CCD unit fixing screws.
ADJ 7 Print lead edge image position
adjustment (Printer mode)
* When the registration roller section is disassembled.
* When the LSU is replaced or removed.
NOTE: This adjustment is performed by the user to increase the
lead edge void area to greater than the standard value
(3mm) in the printer mode.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(35,17(5
$˖ ˖'(1&
$˖ %˖ ˖'(1%
CAUTION: Never loosen the screws marked with X. ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖)52175($5
If any one of these screws is loosened, the position and '˖ ˖'(1%0)7
the angle of the CCD unit base may be changed to (˖ ˖'(1%&6
)˖ ˖'(1%&6
cause a problem, which cannot be adjusted in the mar- *˖ ˖'(1%&6
ket. In that case, the whole scanner unit must be +˖ ˖'(1%&6
replaced. ,˖ ˖'(1%$'8

-˖ ˖'(1%+9
11) Slide the CCD unit in the arrow direction (CCD sub scanning .˖ ˖08/7,&2817
direction) to change the installing position. /˖ ˖ 3$3(5
When the copy image is longer than the original scale, shift the
(;(&87( 2.
CCD unit in the direction B. When the copy image is shorter

than the original scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction A. 10-key EXECUTE
One scale of mark-off line corresponds to 0.2%.
EXECUTE End of print
At that time, fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the
scale on the front and the rear side of the CCD unit base.
* Fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the line marked

in procedure 9). ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(35,17(5
$˖ ˖'(1&
$˖ %˖ ˖'(1%
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖)52175($5

'˖ ˖'(1%0)7
(˖ ˖'(1%&6
)˖ ˖'(1%&6
*˖ ˖'(1%&6
B +˖ ˖'(1%&6
,˖ ˖'(1%$'8
-˖ ˖'(1%+9
.˖ ˖08/7,&2817
/˖ ˖3$3(5
(;(&87( 2.
A
2) Select the set item L with the scroll key, and enter the value
corresponding to the paper feed tray with A4 (11" x 8.5") paper
in it.
12) Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again.
If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100 1%, Display/Item Content
Setting
Default
repeat the procedures of 9) - 11) until the condition is satisfied. range
A DEN-C Printer lead edge image 1 - 99 30
CAUTION: By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simu- position adjustment
lation 48-1 adjustment value at 50, the copy magnifica- B DEN-B Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
tion ratio is adjusted within the specified range (100 adjustment
1.0%) and the specified resolution is obtained based on C FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void area 1 - 99 20
the optical system structure. adjustment
D DENB-MFT Manual feed rear edge void 1 - 99 57
area adjustment correction
value
E DENB-CS1 Tray 1 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
adjustment correction value
F DENB-CS2 Tray 2 rear edge void area 1 - 99 57
G DENB-CS3 Tray 3 rear edge void area 1 - 99 57
H DENB-CS4 Tray 4 rear edge void area 1 - 99 57
I DENB-ADU ADU rear edge void area 1 - 99 60

Setting
Display/Item Content
range
Default
ADJ 8 Image density adjustment
J DENB-HV Heavy paper correction 1 - 99 50
value Make a copy of the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) and a copy
K MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1 of the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-
L PAPER MFT Tray Manual 1-5 1 2 (CS1) 0326FC11), and check that they are proper.
selection paper feed Note for checking the monochrome copy mode density
CS1 Tray 1 2 To check the density, use the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ).
CS2 Tray 2 3 Set the copy density level to "Manual 3" in the Text/Printed Photo
CS3 Tray 3 4 mode (Manual).
CS4 Tray 4 5
In addition, all the color balance adjustments in the user adjustment
M DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
mode must be set to the default (center).
NO selection No 1
Check with the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ)
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. In the copy density check with the gray test chart, check to insure
The adjustment pattern is printed. the following conditions.
4) Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment CAUTION: For the color (gray) balance, use the servicing color test
pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to check.
in the standard adjustment value range.
(Black-and-white copy)
Standard adjustment value: 4.0mm or less
Patch 2 is SHARP gray chart
slightly copied.
SHARP GRAY CHART
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
Patch 3 is copied.
Patch 1 is not copied.

4.0mm or less
If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.

5) Select the adjustment target of the paper feed mode adjust-
ment item DENC with the scroll key.
6) Change the adjustment value.
Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key or the
[EXECUTE] key.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
printed.
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the
paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When
the adjustment value is decreased, the distance is decreased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed
by about 0.1mm.
Repeat the procedures 4) - 6) until the condition of 4) is satisfied.

Monochrome copy check items (Check to confirm the following:)
1) There are 12 void areas.
2) The resolution of 4.0 (5 points) can be seen.
3) The density difference between the F and the R sides is not so great.
4) There are no white and black streaks.
5) The background density is not so light.
6) The black low-density gradation is copied slightly.
Void Void
Resolution Resolution
Density difference between the F and the R sides.

No white and black streaks
Resolution
Void Void
Low-density gradation
Background density
Resolution Resolution
Void Void

2) Enter the SIM 63-3 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
8-A Scanner calibration (CCD calibration)
The automatic operation is started. During the adjustment,
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: [EXECUTE] is highlighted. After completion of the adjustment,
* When the CCD unit is replaced. [EXECUTE] returns to the normal display.
* When a U2 trouble is occurred.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced. 6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
6(77+(&+$5721'63)$1'728&+>(;(&87(@
(1) Note before adjustment
? Check that the table glass, No. 1, 2, 3 mirrors, and the lens sur-
face are free from dirt and dust.
(If there is some dust and dirt, wipe and clean with alcohol.)
? Check to confirm that the patches in BK1 and BK2 arrays of the
SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) are free from
dirt and scratches.
If they are dirty, clean them.
If they are scratched or streaked, replace with new one.
(;(&87(
(2) Adjustment procedures
1) Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) to
the reference position on the left rear frame side of the docu- NOTE: Since the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FC
ment table. Z1) is easily discolored by sunlight (especially ultraviolet
rays) and humidity and temperature, put it in a bag (such
Set the chart so that the lighter density side of the patch is on
as a dark file) and store in a dark place of low temperature
the left side.
and low humidity.
If the SIT chart is not available, execute SIM 63-5 to set the
CCD gamma to the default. In this case, however, the adjust-
ment accuracy is lower when compared with the adjustment
method using the SIT chart.
CAUTION: Check to insure that the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or
UKOG-0280FCZ1) is in close contact with the docu-
ment table.
NOTE: UKOG-0280FCZZ is equivalent to UKOG-0280FCZ1.

8-B Copy / Image send / FAX image quality
adjustment (Individual adjustment)
a. General
This is used to execute a fine adjustment in each mode when there is a request from the user. Normally, however, there is no need to use it.
In this adjustment, the adjustment result may be applied to the image send mode and the FAX mode as well as the copy mode.
This must be well understood for execution of the adjustment.
Copy MODE IMAGE SEND(SCAN) MODE

Monochrome mode Color mode Monochrome mode
Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual FAX Printer
46-02 Monochrome copy density adjustment (for each ○ ○ －－－－－－
monochrome copy mode) (separately for the low-
density area and the high-density area)
(No need to adjust normally)
46-04 Color image send mode image density adjustment －－ ○ ○ －－－－
(for each mode)
46-05 Monochrome image send mode image density －－－－ ○ ○ －－
adjustment (for each mode)
46-08 Image send mode RGB color balance adjustment －－ ○ ○ －－－－
(separately for the low-density area and the high-
density area)
46-09 RSPF mode (Copy/Scan/FAX) density adjustment ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ －
46-19 Automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode ○ －－－ ○ － ○ －
document density scanning operation (exposure
operation) conditions setting
(Normally no need to set)
46-32 Document low density image density reproduction ○ －－－ ○ － ○ －
adjustment in the automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/
FAX) mode (No need to adjust normally) (Background
density adjustment in the scanning section)
46-37 Monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode color document ○ ○ －－ ○ ○ ○ －
reproduction adjustment
46-39 FAX send image sharpness adjustment －－－－－－ ○ －
46-40 FAX send image density adjustment －－－－－－ ○ －
(Collective adjustment of all the modes)
46-41 FAX send image density adjustment (Normal text mode) －－－－－－ ○ －
46-42 FAX send image density adjustment (Fine text mode) －－－－－－ ○ －
46-43 FAX send image density adjustment (Super fine mode) －－－－－－ ○ －
46-44 FAX send image density adjustment (Ultra fine mode) －－－－－－ ○ －
46-45 FAX send image density adjustment (600dpi mode) －－－－－－ ○ －
46-47 Copy image, image send image, FAX send image ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ －
(JPEG) compression ratio setting
(Normally unnecessary to the setting change)
46-60 Color (Scan) mode sharpness adjustment －－ ○ －－－－ ○
46-61 Area separation recognition level adjustment ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ －－
(No need to adjust normally) (*1) (*1) (*1)
46-62 ACS, area separation, background image process, －－ ○ ○ ○ ○ －－
automatic exposure mode operation conditions setting
(Normally unnecessary to the setting change)
46-63 Scan low density image density adjustment (for each －－ ○ ○ ○ ○ －－
mode)
*1: Text Printed Photo / Copy document, Text Printed Photo only

Setting
8-B (1) Display/Item Content Default
range
Monochrome copy density adjustment I AUTO1 (COPY Auto 1 LOW 1 - 99 50
(for each monochrome copy mode) TO COPY) (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
(separately for the low-density area and the J AUTO2 Auto 2 LOW 1 - 99 50
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
high-density area)
K TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
(No need to adjust normally) (COPY TO COPY) (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually. L TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy document)
* When there is necessity to change the copy density of the low
M TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
density and high density part at each copy density individually.
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
* When there is necessity to change the density gradient of the
copy by each the copy mode individually. 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
* When there is necessity to change all copy density by each the When adjusting the copy density on the low density part, select
copy mode individually. "LOW" mode and change the adjustment value. When adjust-
* When there is request from the user. ing the copy density on the high density part, select "HIGH"
mode and change the adjustment value.
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is

increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( density is decreased.
(;32685($'-8670(17%:>&23<@
$˖ ˖$872 4) Make a copy and check the adjustment result.
$˖ %˖ ˖$872
Switch the adjustment simulation mode and the test mode
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7(;7
'˖ ˖7(;735,17('3+272
alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
(˖ ˖7(;73+272
Repeat switching the adjustment simulation mode and the test
)˖ ˖35,17('3+272
*˖ ˖3+272*5$3+
mode and changing the adjustment value and checking the
+˖ ˖0$3 copy until a satisfactory result is obtained.
8-B (2)
/2: +,*+ 2.
Automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX)
mode document density scanning
㪈㪇㪄㫂㪼㫐
operation (exposure operation) conditions
OK setting (Normally no need to set)
Use for setting the condition of read operation (Exposure) for docu-

ment density in monochrome auto copy mode.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67
(;32685($'-8670(17%:>&23<@
&/26(
When a copy with correct density is not obtained by type of docu-
$˖ ˖$872 ment, change the setting.
$˖ %˖ ˖$872
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7(;7

This setting is required in the following cases.
'˖ ˖7(;735,17('3+272 * When a proper density copy is not obtained in the monochrome
(˖ ˖7(;73+272
automatic copy mode.
)˖ ˖35,17('3+272
*˖ ˖3+272*5$3+ * When a document with images near its lead edge is copied.
+˖ ˖0$3
* When a document with colored background is copied.

/2: +,*+ 2. ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(;32685(02'(6(783%:$(
2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. $(B02'( ˖ 02'( 02'(
$(B6723B&23< ˖ 5($/7,0( 6723 35(6&$1
$(B6723B)$; ˖ 2)) 21
Setting
Display/Item Content Default $(B6723B6&$1 ˖ 5($/7,0( 6723 35(6&$1
range $(B),/7(5 ˖ 62)7 1250$/ 6+$53
A AUTO1 Auto 1 LOW 1 - 99 50 $(B:,'7+ ˖ )8// 3$57
HIGH 1 - 99 50
B AUTO2 Auto 2 LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
C TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50

D TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
E TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50 2) Set REALTIME, STOP or PRE-SCAN to adjustment item AE
HIGH 1 - 99 50 STOP COPY. For contents of each setting item, refer to below.
F PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 Change the setting value of "AE WIDTH" item to "FULL" or
HIGH 1 - 99 50 "PART", in some cases.
G PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
Display/Item Content Set value Default
HIGH 1 - 99 50
AE_MODE Auto exposure mode MODE1, MODE2 MODE2
H MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50
AE_STOP_COPY Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP
HIGH 1 - 99 50
Stop (for copy) STOP/PRESCAN

Display/Item Content Set value Default Document table/RSPF mode
AE_STOP_FAX Auto B/W exposure ON
ON/OFF
Stop (for FAX) 3 to 7mm
AE_STOP_SCAN Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP
Stop (for scanner) STOP/PRESCAN
AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter SOFT NORMAL
setting NORMAL
SHARP
AE_WIDTH AE exposure width FULL PART AE WIDTH = FULL
PART
NOTE:
MODE1: High gamma (Improves the image contrast)
MODE2: Normal gamma
STOP: Document table mode
Reads the density of 3 - 7 mm area from leading edge of document,
decides the output image density according to the density of that 3 to 7mm
part. (The output image density is constant at whole area.)

REALTIME:
100mm
Reads the density of width of the document one by one, decides
the output image density according to the density of each part of
the document. (The output image density may be not constant at AE WIDTH = PART
whole area.)
PRESCAN:
Once the densities on the document surface are scanned, the out-
put image density is determined according to the average of the
scanned densities. (The output image density is even for all the
surface.)
RSPF mode
AE WIDTH FULL:
Document density reading area in monochrome auto mode is 3 - 7 3 to 7mm
mm (leading edge of document) x Document width. No relationship
to PRESCAN MODE
AE WIDTH PART:
Document density reading area in monochrome auto mode is 3 - 7
mm (leading edge of document) x 100 mm (width). No relationship
to PRESCAN MODE 100mm AE WIDTH = PART
Operation in monochrome auto copy mode:

When the density of the document of the read area is light, output
image density is increased by control. When the density of the doc-
ument of the read area is dark, output image density is decreased
by control.
Document density detection area
8-B (3)
Document low density image density
reproduction adjustment in the automatic
monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode
(No need to adjust normally) (Background
density adjustment in the scanning section)
Use for the reproducibility adjustment of document background
density in monochrome auto copy mode.
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
* When there is a desire not to reproduce the background of the
document. When there is a desire to reproduce the low density
image of the document.
* When there is request from the user.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
㩷/,0,72)$(5($&7,216(77,1* %*5(029($'-8670(17
$˖ ˖&23<˖2& $˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272
$˖ %˖ ˖&23<˖563) $˖ %˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;7
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖6&$1˖2& ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&2/25&23<35,17('3+272

'˖ ˖6&$1˖563) '˖ ˖&2/25&23<3+272*5$3+
(˖ ˖)$;˖2& (˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;73+272
)˖ ˖)$;˖563) )˖ ˖&2/25&23<0$3
*˖ ˖&2/25&23</,*+7
+˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23<

,˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;7&23<72&23<
-˖ ˖&2/25&23<35,17('3+272&23<72&23<
.˖ ˖&2/25386+7(;735,17('3+272
/˖ ˖&2/25386+7(;7
2. 2.
10-key 10-key
OK OK

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
%*5(029($'-8670(17
/,0,72)$(5($&7,216(77,1*
$˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272
$˖ ˖&23<˖2&
$˖ %˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;7
$˖ %˖ ˖&23<˖563)
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&2/25&23<35,17('3+272
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖6&$1˖2&
'˖ ˖&2/25&23<3+272*5$3+
'˖ ˖6&$1˖563)
(˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;73+272
(˖ ˖)$;˖2&
)˖ ˖&2/25&23<0$3
)˖ ˖)$;˖563)
*˖ ˖&2/25&23</,*+7
+˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23<

,˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;7&23<72&23<
-˖ ˖&2/25&23<35,17('3+272&23<72&23<
.˖ ˖&2/25386+7(;735,17('3+272
/˖ ˖&2/25386+7(;7
2.
2.
2) Select the adjustment mode with the scroll key.

3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the
background and the low density image is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the back-
ground and the low density image is decreased.
Display/Item Content Set value Default

A COPY : OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
B COPY : RSPF Copy mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196
C SCAN : OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
D SCAN : RSPF Scanner mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196
E FAX : OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
F FAX : RSPF FAX mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196
8-B (4)
Copy/Scan low density image density
adjustment (for each mode)
(No need to adjust normally) (Effective only
for the color scan function)
This adjustment is used to adjust the image density in the low den-
sity area in the scanner mode.
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
* When there is a desire not to reproduce the background of the
document. When there is a desire to reproduce the low density
image of the document.
* When there is request from the user.

2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
Set
Display/Item Content Default
value
A COLOR COPY : Text print (color copy) 1-9 3
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
B COLOR COPY : TEXT Text (color copy) 1-9 3
C COLOR COPY : Printed photo 1-9 5
PRINTED PHOTO (color copy)
D COLOR COPY : Photograph 1-9 5
PHOTOGRAPH (color copy)
E COLOR COPY : Text/Photograph 1-9 3
TEXT/PHOTO (color copy)
F COLOR COPY : MAP Map (color copy) 1-9 5
G COLOR COPY : LIGHT Light document 1-9 6
(color copy)
H COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Text print (color copy)
(COPY TO COPY)
I COLOR COPY : TEXT Copy document, Text 1-9 5
(COPY TO COPY) (color copy)
J COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo
K COLOR PUSH : TEXT/ Text print 1-9 3
PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH)
L COLOR PUSH : TEXT Text (color PUSH) 1-9 3
M COLOR PUSH : Printed photo 1-9 5
PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH)
N COLOR PUSH : Photograph 1-9 5
PHOTOGRAPH (color PUSH)
O COLOR PUSH : Text/Photograph 1-9 3
TEXT/PHOTO (color PUSH)
P COLOR PUSH : MAP Map (color PUSH) 1-9 5
* Items A - J are not used. (Changes do not affect the picture

quality.)
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the
background and the low density image is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the back-
ground and the low density image is decreased.

2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
8-B (5)
Monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode color Display/Item
Content
Adjustment
Default
document reproduction adjustment (Copy mode) range
A R-Ratio Gray making setting (R) 0 - 1000 108
B G-Ratio Gray making setting (G) 0 - 1000 678
Use to adjust the reproducibility for the red image and the yellow
image when printing color document that included the red/yellow 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
image in monochrome copy mode. When the adjustment value of adjustment item A is increased,
This adjustment is required in the following cases. copy density of red image is decreased. When the adjustment
* When there is desire to change reproducibility of yellow/red value is decreased, copy density of red image is increased.
image in case of making a color copy of the color document in When the adjustment value of adjustment item B is increased,
monochrome copy mode. copy density of red image is increased. When the adjustment
* When there is request from the user. value is decreased, copy density of red image is decreased.
1) Enter the SIM 46-37 mode. 4) Press [OK] key.
5) Make a copy in monochrome text/printed photo copy mode
(manual), check the copy.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17 If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-37
$˖ ˖55DWLR
$˖ %˖ ˖*5DWLR
mode and change the adjustment value.
˷̚˹
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
8-B (6)
RSPF mode (Copy/Scan/FAX) density
'()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87( adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
This setting is normally not required, however, in the following
10-key
cases, make changes to the setting:
DEFAULT
OK * When copy in RSPF mode differs from copy in document table
mode.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
* When copy density in RSPF mode is low or too high.
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17
$˖ ˖55DWLR
* When the RSPF unit is replaced.
$˖ %˖ ˖*5DWLR
* When the RSPF unit is disassembled.
˷̚˹
* The CCD unit has been replaced.

* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
a. Adjustment procedure
'()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87( 1) Enter the SIM 46-9 mode.
EXECUTE NO

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(1763)

$˖ ˖&23<˖/2:
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( $˖ %˖ ˖6&$1˖/2:
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17
˷̚˹ C˖ ˖)$;˖/2:
$˖ ˖55DWLR
$˖ D˖ ˖&23<˖+,*+
%˖ ˖*5DWLR
(˖ ˖6&$1˖+,*+
˷̚˹
F˖ ˖)$;˖+,*+
2.
'()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
10-key
YES
OK

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17

$˖ ˖55DWLR ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$˖ %˖ ˖*5DWLR (;32685($'-8670(1763)
˷̚˹ $˖ ˖&23<˖/2:

$˖ %˖ ˖6&$1˖/2:
˷̚˹ C˖ ˖)$;˖/2:

D˖ ˖&23<˖+,*+
(˖ ˖6&$1˖+,*+
F˖ ˖)$;˖+,*+
'()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
2.

2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. 1) Enter the SIM 40-2 mode.
When adjusting density on low density part, select "A (COPY
LOW)". When adjusting density on high density part, select "D

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(COPY HIGH)". %<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
0$;326,7,21$'-8670(17
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
Setting
Item/Display Content Default
range
A COPY : LOW RSPF copy mode exposure 1 - 99 48
adjustment (Low density side)
B SCAN : LOW RSPF scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 48
C FAX : LOW RSPF FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 48
D COPY : HIGH RSPF copy mode exposure 1 - 99 53
adjustment (High density side) (;(&87(
E SCAN : HIGH RSPF scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 53

adjustment (Low density side) EXECUTE
F FAX : HIGH RSPF FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 53
adjustment (High density side)

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. %<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
0$;326,7,21$'-8670(17
In case of increase of image density, input large numeric (;(&87,1*
value. Or in case of diluting the image density, input small
numeric value.
4) Press [OK] key.
5) Make a copy in the RSPF mode and check the copy.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-9 mode
and change the adjustment value.
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.
(;(&87(

ADJ 9 Paper size sensor adjustment ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
3$5326,7,21$'-8670(17
9-A Manual paper feed tray paper size (width) 35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
sensor adjustment
* The manual paper feed tray section has been disassembled.
* The manual paper feed tray unit has been replaced.
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. (;(&87(
EXECUTE
Repeat the above procedure to adjust

the A5R width MIN POSITION.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
&203/(7(
(;(&87(

2) Open the manual paper feed guide to the maximum width posi-
tion. 9-B RSPF paper feed tray document size (width)
sensor adjustment
* The RSPF paper feed tray section has been disassembled.
* The RSPF paper feed tray unit has been replaced.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
* The scanner PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM on the scanner PWB has been replaced.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
63)75$<$'-8670(17
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. 75$<92/0$;75$<$'-8670(17
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal 35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
display.
The maximum width position detection level of the manual
paper feed guide is recognized.
4) Set the manual paper feed guide to the A4R size.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
display.
The A4R size width position detection level of the manual (;(&87(

6) Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A5R size. 2) Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width posi-
7) Press [EXECUTE] key. tion.
display.
Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A5R size.
8) Open the manual paper feed guide to the minimum width posi-
tion.
display.
The minimum width position detection level of the manual
If the above operation is not completed normally, "ERROR" is dis-
played.
When the operation is completed normally, the above data are
saved to the memory and "COMPLETE" is displayed.

The maximum width detection level is recognized.
4) Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.
The A4R width detection level is recognized.
6) Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the width for the A5R size.
8) Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the minimum width posi-
tion.
The minimum width detection level is recognized.
When each of the above operations has been completed, the
"COMPLETE" message appears; when any of the operations has
failed, the "ERROR" message appears.

ADJ 10 Document size detection 10-B Adjust the sensitivity of the original size
sensor
adjustment 1) Enter the SIM41-2 mode.
* When the original size sensor section has been disassembled.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
* When the original size sensor section has been replaced. '2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783
* When U2 trouble has occurred. :,7+7+(25,*,1$/&29(523(1('7851217+((;(&87(

.(<:,7+7+(25,*,1$/217+(25,*,1$/7$%/(
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.

* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
10-A Document size sensor detection point

adjustment
(;(&87(

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
EXECUTE
3'6(1625&+(&.
2&6: 3' 3' 3'
3' 3' 3' 3'
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783
6(7$1$6,=(h&23<3$3(5217+(25,*,1$/7$%/(
$1':,7+7+(2&23(1('7851217+((;(&87(.(<

(;(&87(
Loosen the original cover switch actuator adjustment screw
and slide the actuator position so that the display OCSW is Adjustment
returned to the normal display when the height of the arm unit failed
Adjustment completed EXECUTE
top from the table glass is 20.2 +/- 0.25mm by slowly tilting the
document detection arm unit in the arrow direction and adjust.
(If the ON timing of the original cover switch is shifted, the doc- ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783
ument detection function may malfunction.) '2&80(176,=(3+2726(1625/(9(/,6$'-867('
(;(&87(

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783
3+2726(1625(5525326,7,21
20.2 0.25mm
3'3'3'3'3'3'3'
(;(&87(
2) Execute the sensor adjustment without document.

With the document cover open, without placing a document on
the table glass, press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Place A3 (11" x 17") paper on the document table and press
[EXECUTE] key.
If the adjustment is completed normally, "DOCUMENT SIZE
PHOTO SENSOR LEVEL IS ADJUSTED " is displayed.

ADJ 11 Touch panel coordinate setting ADJ 12 Print image position, void area,
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: off-center adjustment (Print
* The operation panel has been replaced. engine) (Manual adjustment)
* U2 trouble has occurred. NOTE: Normally if the adjustment is executed by ADJ 3 (automatic
* The scanner control PWB has been replaced. adjustment), there is no need to execute this adjustment.
* The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced. Only when the manual adjustment is required, execute this
1) Enter the SIM 65-1 mode. adjustment.
In other words, this manual adjustment is executed when a
satisfactory result is not obtained from the automatic
adjustment (ADJ 3).
12-A Print image print area adjustment

(Print engine) (Manual adjustment)
* When a paper tray is replaced.
* When the paper tray section is disassembled.
2) Precisely press the cross mark points (4 positions).
* When the manual feed tray is replaced.
When the cross mark is pressed precisely, a buzzer sounds
* When the manual feed tray is disassembled.
and the display is reversed. When all the four points are
pressed and the touch panel adjustment is completed, the dis- * When the duplex mode paper transport section is disassembled.
play returns to the simulation sub number entry screen. * When the registration roller section is disassembled.
In case of an error, the display returns to the entry screen * U2 trouble has occurred.
again. * The PCU PWB has been replaced.
Check to confirm that there is no shift between the display * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
frame and the detection position when the touch panel is 1) Enter the SIM 50-10 mode.
pressed.
* When pressing the touch panel, never use a sharp tip (such
as a needle or a pin).
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
$˖ ˖0$,10)7
$˖
%˖ ˖0$,1&6
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6
'˖ ˖0$,1&6
(˖ ˖0$,1&6
)˖ ˖0$,1$'8
*˖ ˖68%0)7
+˖ ˖68%&6
,˖ ˖68%'6.
-˖ ˖68%$'8
.˖ ˖08/7,&2817
/˖ ˖3$3(5&6
(;(&87( 2.
EXECUTE EXECUTE
End of print

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
$˖ ˖0$,10)7
$˖
%˖ ˖0$,1&6
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6
'˖ ˖0$,1&6
(˖ ˖0$,1&6
)˖ ˖0$,1$'8
*˖ ˖68%0)7
+˖ ˖68%&6
,˖ ˖68%'6.
-˖ ˖68%$'8
.˖ ˖08/7,&2817
/˖ ˖3$3(5&6
(;(&87( 2.
2) Set A4 (11 x 8.5") paper to all the paper feed trays. Select an
adjustment item of the target paper feed tray among items A -
J and enter the adjustment value. Then select item "L" to
select the paper feed tray which is to be used for executing
test printing.
The adjustment pattern is printed.

4) Check the adjustment pattern to confirm that the items below 6) Select an adjustment item (DENA, DENB, FRONT/REAR) with
are in the range of the standard values. the scroll key, enter the adjustment value, and press [OK] key.
Content Standard adjustment value Setting Default

Item/Display Content
X Lead edge void area 4.0mm or less range value
Y Rear edge void area 2.0 - 5.0mm Void area DENA Lead edge void area 1 - 99 30
Z1/Z2 FRONT/REAR void area 2.0 +/- 2.0mm adjustment adjustment
DENB Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
adjustment
Z1
FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 20
2.0 2.0mm
REAR area adjustment
Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 57
scanning correction value
direction DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction value 1 - 99 50
print area DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction value 1 - 99 57
correction DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction value 1 - 99 57
value
DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction value 1 - 99 57
X
DENB-ADU ADU correction value 1 - 99 60
4.0mm or less Y DENB-HV Heavy paper 1 - 99 50
2.0 - 5.0mm correction value
When the adjustment value is increased, the void area is

increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the void
area is decreased.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the void area is
changed by 0.1mm.
NOTE: The adjustment value and the actual void area are related
Z2 as follows:
2.0 2.0mm Adjustment value/10 = Actual void area
If the above condition is not satisfied, or if it is set to a desired

condition, execute the simulation 50-1. NOTE: When the amount of the rear edge void is different between
each paper feed tray, change the adjustment value of item
NOTE: Feed paper from all the paper feed trays to confirm.
(DENB-XXX) in SIM50-1 and adjust.
The adjustment item (DENB) have a effect on the paper of all
paper feed tray.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( That is, adjustment value of item (DENB-XXX) fine adjusts to
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
$˖ ˖55&$
adjustment item (DENB) for each paper tray.
$˖ %˖ ˖55&%&6 After execution of the above, perform procedures 1) - 4) to
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖55&%'6.
check that the void area is within the specified range.
'˖ ˖55&%0)7
(˖ ˖55&%$'8 Though the lead edge void area adjustment value is proper, if
)˖ ˖/($' the lead edge void area is not within the specified range,
*˖ ˖6,'(
change the adjustment value of item (RRCB-XXX) in SIM 50-1.
+˖ ˖'(1$
,˖ ˖'(1% Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.
-˖ ˖)52175($5
.˖ ˖2))6(7B2&
/˖ ˖6&$1B63(('B2& 12-B Print image off-center adjustment

2.
(Print engine) (Manual adjustment)
10-key
OK
* When a paper tray is replaced.
* When the paper tray section is disassembled.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
* When the manual feed tray is replaced.
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
* When the manual feed tray is disassembled.
$˖ ˖55&$
$˖ %˖ ˖55&%&6 * When the duplex mode paper transport section is disassembled.
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖55&%'6.
'˖ ˖55&%0)7
* When the registration roller section is disassembled.
(˖ ˖55&%$'8 * U2 trouble has occurred.
)˖ ˖/($'
*˖ ˖6,'(
+˖ ˖'(1$ * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
,˖ ˖'(1%
-˖ ˖)52175($5
.˖ ˖2))6(7B2&
/˖ ˖6&$1B63(('B2&
2.

1) Enter SIM 50-10 mode. 6) Change the adjustment value.
Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key or the

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
[EXECUTE] key.
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
$˖ ˖0$,10)7
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
$˖
%˖ ˖0$,1&6 printed.
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6
'˖ ˖0$,1&6
When the adjustment value is increased, the adjustment pat-
(˖ ˖0$,1&6 tern is shifted to the front frame side. When it is decreased, the
)˖ ˖0$,1$'8
adjustment pattern is shifted to the rear frame side.
*˖ ˖68%0)7
+˖ ˖68%&6 When the set value is changed by 1, the shift distance is
,˖ ˖68%'6.
changed by about 0.1mm.
-˖ ˖68%$'8
.˖ ˖08/7,&2817 Repeat procedures 3) - 6) until the conditions of procedure 5)

/˖ ˖3$3(5&6
are satisfied.
(;(&87( 2.
In case a satisfactory result cannot be obtained by repeating

the above procedures, perform the following procedure.
EXECUTE EXECUTE
7) Loosen the paper feed tray off-center adjustment screws (2
End of print pcs.) at the center section of the lift plate of the paper feed tray,
and change the gear unit position in the front/rear frame direc-

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
tion. Repeat the adjustment procedures from 4).
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
$˖ ˖0$,10)7
$˖
%˖ ˖0$,1&6
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6
'˖ ˖0$,1&6
(˖ ˖0$,1&6
)˖ ˖0$,1$'8
*˖ ˖68%0)7
+˖ ˖68%&6
,˖ ˖68%'6.
-˖ ˖68%$'8
.˖ ˖08/7,&2817
/˖ ˖3$3(5&6
(;(&87( 2.
2) Select the target paper feed tray (MAIN-XX) with the scroll key.
Display/Item Content Setting range

NO Not select 1
3) Set A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in the paper feed tray selected in pro-
cedure 2).
The adjustment pattern is printed.
5) Check that the adjustment pattern image is printed in the cor-
rect position.
Measure the dimension of the void area in the front and the
rear frame direction of the adjustment pattern, and check that
all the following conditions are satisfied.
RV
2.0mm 2.0mm
NOTE: Normally if the adjustment is executed by ADJ 3 (automatic

adjustment), there is no need to execute this adjustment.
Only when the manual adjustment is required, execute this
adjustment.
adjustment (ADJ 3).
FV
2.0mm 2.0mm
RV: REAR VOID AREA

FV: FRONT VOID AREA
RV + FV +/- 4.0mm
RV = 2.0 +/- 2.0mm
FV = 2.0 +/- 2.0mm
If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.

3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.
ADJ 13 Scan image magnification ratio Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the
adjustment copy mode, and make a copy.
4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified
(Manual adjustment) range (100 1.0%).
NOTE: Normally if the adjustment is executed by ADJ 3 (automatic If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100
adjustment), there is no need to execute this adjustment. 1.0%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification
Only when the manual adjustment is required, execute this ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following
adjustment. procedure.
In other words, this manual adjustment is executed when a 5) Change the CCD (MAIN) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1.
satisfactory result is not obtained from the automatic When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnifica-
adjustment (ADJ 3). tion ratio is increased.
CAUTION: If the default adjustment value of the scan image magni- When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnifi-
fication ration adjustment (main scanning direction) of cation ratio is changed by about 0.02%.
SIM 48-1, copy image quality may be degraded. There- Repeat the procedures 3) - 5) until the copy magnification ratio
fore, this adjustment must be executed only when there is within the specified range (100 1.0%).
is a special necessity.
13-B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
13-A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (sub scanning direction) (Manual
(main scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) (Document table mode)
adjustment) (Document table mode) This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: * When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image sub scan-
* When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image main scanning direction is not properly adjusted.
ning direction is not properly adjusted. * When the scanner motor is replaced.
* When the scanner motor is replaced. * U2 trouble has occurred.
* U2 trouble has occurred. * When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced. * When the EEPROM of the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM of the scanner control PWB is replaced. 1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
Before this adjustment, the focus adjustment (CCD unit installing below.
position adjustment) must have been completed.
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
below.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
2) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode. 0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17

$˖ ˖&&'0$,1
$˖ %˖ ˖&&'68%
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63)0$,1
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( '˖ ˖63)68%
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
(˖ ˖63)%0$,1
$˖ ˖&&'0$,1
)˖ ˖63)%68%
$˖ %˖ ˖&&'68%
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63)0$,1

'˖ ˖63)68%
(˖ ˖63)%0$,1
)˖ ˖63)%68%
2.
2.

3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio. 2) Make a duplex copy at the normal ratio on A4 paper.
Go to the copy mode, and make a copy. 3) Measure the images on the copy paper and the original
images.
Copy magnifi- (Original dimension - Copy dimension)
cation ratio 100%
Original dimension
original
(Example 1)
Copy A
(Shorter than
the original)
10 20 90 100 110
copy
10 50 100 150 200 250
Scale 10 50 100 150 200 250
(Original) 10 20 90 100 110
4) Obtain the image magnification ratio according to the following

formula:
Image magnification ratio = Original size / Original size x 100
(Example 2) (%)
Copy B
10 20 90 100 110
Image magnification ratio = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99 (%)
(Longer than
If the image magnification ratio is within the specified range
the original)
(100 0.8%), there is no need to perform the adjustment.
If it is not within the specified range, perform the following pro-
4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified cedures.
range (100 1.0%). 5) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.
If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100
1.0%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following 7(67
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
&/26(
procedure. $˖ ˖&&'0$,1

$˖
5) Change the CCD (SUB) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1. %˖ ˖&&'68%
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63)0$,1

When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnifica- '˖ ˖63)68%
tion ratio in the sub scanning direction is increased. (˖ ˖63)%0$,1
)˖ ˖63)%68%
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnifi-
cation ratio is changed by about 0.1%.
Repeat the procedures 3) - 5) until the copy magnification ratio is

within the specified range (100 1.0%).
2.
13-C Scan image magnification ratio adjustment RSPF

(main scanning direction)
Setting Default
(Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode) Item Display Content
range value
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: A CCD(MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio
* When the scan control PWB is replaced.
adjustment (CCD)
* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced. B CCD(SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
* When U2 trouble occurs. magnification ratio
* When the copy magnification ratio of the RSPF mode copy adjustment (CCD)
image in the main scanning direction is not proper. C SPF(MAIN) RSPF document front 1 - 99 50
surface magnification ratio
* When the RSPF is disassembled. adjustment (Main scan)
a. Adjustment procedures D SPF(SUB) RSPF document front 1 - 99 50
1) Place the duplex adjustment chart shown below on the docu- adjustment (Sub scan)
ment tray of the RSPF. E SPFB(MAIN) RSPF document back 1 - 99 50
The adjustment chart is prepared by the following procedures. surface magnification ratio
Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper, and put marks on both sides and adjustment (Main scan)
both surfaces of the paper at 10mm from each edge. F SPFB(SUB) RSPF document back 1 - 99 50
adjustment (Sub scan)
Paper pass direction
A4 size 6) Select an adjustment item of SPF (MAIN)/SPFB (MAIN) with
the scroll key.
SPF (MAIN) Main scanning direction image magnification ratio

(Front surface)
SPFB (MAIN) Main scanning direction image magnification ratio
(Both the front surface
and the back surface)
(Back surface)
10mm 10mm

7) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key. 5) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnifica-
tion ratio is increased. When the adjustment value is changed
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
by 1, the image magnification ratio is changed by 0.02%. 0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
8) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio. $˖

$˖ ˖&&'0$,1
%˖ ˖&&'68%
Repeat the procedures of 1) - 8) until a satisfactory result is ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63)0$,1
obtained. '˖ ˖63)68%
(˖ ˖63)%0$,1
)˖ ˖63)%68%
13-D Scan image magnification ratio adjustment

(sub scanning direction) (Manual
adjustment) (RSPF mode)
* When the SCAN CONTROL PWB is replaced. 2.
* When the EEPROM on the SCAN CONTROL PWB is replaced.

* When U2 trouble occurs. Item Display Content
Setting Default
range value
* When the copy magnification ratio of the RSPF mode copy
A CCD(MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50
image in the sub scanning direction is not proper.
magnification ratio
* When the RSPF is disassembled. adjustment (CCD)
1) Place the duplex adjustment chart shown below on the docu- B CCD(SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
ment tray of the RSPF. magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
The adjustment chart is prepared by the following procedures.
C SPF(MAIN) RSPF document front 1 - 99 50
Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper, and put marks on both sides and surface magnification ratio
both surfaces of the paper at 10mm from each edge. adjustment (Main scan)
D SPF(SUB) RSPF document front 1 - 99 50
10mm surface magnification ratio
Paper pass direction E SPFB(MAIN) RSPF document back 1 - 99 50
A4 size surface magnification ratio
adjustment (Main scan)
F SPFB(SUB) RSPF document back 1 - 99 50
6) Select an adjustment item with the scroll key.
10mm SPF (SUB) Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio

(Front surface)
SPFB (SUB) Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio
2) Make a duplex copy at the normal ratio on A4 paper. (Back surface)
3) Measure the images on the copy paper and the original 7) Enter an image magnification ratio adjustment value with 10-
images. key, and press [OK] key.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnifica-
tion ratio is increased.
10
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the image magni-

50
fication ratio is changed by 0.1%.

8) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.
100
10
Repeat the procedures of 1) - 8) until a satisfactory result is

obtained.
original
150
50
200
100
copy
150
200
4) Obtain the image magnification ratio according to the following

formula:
Image magnification ratio = Original size / Original size x 100
(%)
Image magnification ratio = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99 (%)
If the image magnification ratio is within the specified range
(100 +/- 0.8%), there is no need to perform the adjustment.
If it is not within the specified range, perform the following pro-
cedures.

ADJ 14 Scan image off-center

adjustment ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
25,*,1$/&(17(52))6(76(783
(Manual adjustment) $˖ ˖2&
$˖ %˖ ˖63)6,'(
NOTE: Normally if the adjustment is executed by ADJ 3 (automatic ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63)6,'(
adjustment), there is no need to execute this adjustment.

Only when the manual adjustment is required, execute this
adjustment.
adjustment (ADJ 3).
2.
14-A Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual
adjustment) (Document table mode) 4) Select the adjustment mode OC with the scroll key.
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: 5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. The entered value is set.
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced. When the set value is increased, the main scanning print posi-
* When a U2 trouble occurs. tion is shifted to the front side by 0.1mm.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced. 6) Go to the copy mode, and make a copy.
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced. Repeat the procedures of 1) - 6) until the above condition is satis-
1) Make a copy of the adjustment chart (made by yourself) in the fied.
adjustment mode (document table).
14-B Scan image off-center adjustment
(Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode)
A * When the scan control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced.
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
A=B * When the scanner (reading) section is replaced.
* When U2 trouble occurs.
* When the RSPF section is disassembled.
B
* When the RSPF unit is replaced.
CAUTION: To execute this adjustment, it is required that the ADJ
14A Scan image off-center adjustment (Document table
mode) must have been properly adjusted.
2) Check the copy image center position. 1) Prepare the adjustment chart.
If A - B = 1.0mm, the adjustment is not required. Draw a line at the center of the front surface and the back sur-
face of A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in parallel with the paper transport
direction.
Paper transport direction
A'
Front surface Back surface
A' - B' = 1.0mm

(100%)
B'
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following

procedures. Draw a line at the center of the
front surface and the back surface
of paper in parallel with the paper
transport direction.

2) Set the adjustment chart to the RSPF. SIM50-6
3) Make a duplex copy in the normal magnification ratio from the Setting Default
manual paper feed tray, and check the image position on the Item/Display Content
range value
front surface and the back surface of the copy paper. A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50
document scan
position adjustment
original copy (CCD)
B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50
a document scan
position adjustment
(CCD)
C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead 0 - 99 20
loss (SIDE1) edge image loss
b amount amount setting
D setting FRONT_REAR Front surface side 0 - 99 20
SIDE1 (SIDE1) image loss amount
setting
E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear 0 - 99 30
(SIDE1) edge image loss
If the difference is within the range of 0 2.7mmm there is no
amount setting
need to perform the adjustment.
F Image LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead 0 - 99 20
If the adjustment is required, perform the following procedures. loss (SIDE2) edge image loss
4) Enter the SIM 50-12 or 50-6 mode. amount amount setting
G setting FRONT_REAR Back surface side 0 - 99 20
SIM50-12 SIDE2 (SIDE2) image loss amount

setting
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂ
7(67 12 &/26( H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 - 99 30
25,*,1$/&(17(52))6(76(783 (SIDE2) edge image loss
$˖ ˖2&
$˖ amount setting
%˖ ˖63)6,'(
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63)6,'(

I OFFSET_SPF1 RSPF front surface 1 - 99 50
document off-center
adjustment
J OFFSET_SPF2 RSPF back surface 1 - 99 50
document off-center
adjustment
K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 RSPF document 1 - 99 50
front surface
magnification ratio
2.
adjustment (Sub
scan)
L SCAN_SPEED_SPF2 RSPF document 1 - 99 50
SIM50-6
back surface
magnification ratio
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( adjustment (Sub
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(63)
scan)
$˖ ˖6,'(
$˖
%˖ ˖6,'(
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖/($'B('*(6,'( * Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan
'˖ ˖)5217B5($56,'( timing is delayed.
(˖ ˖75$,/B('*(6,'(
)˖ ˖/($'B('*(6,'(
* Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the
*˖ ˖)5217B5($56,'( image loss is increased.
+˖ ˖75$,/B('*(6,'(
* Item A - H: 1 step = 0.1mm change
,˖ ˖2))6(7B63)
-˖ ˖2))6(7B63) * The SPF rear edge image loss setting is provided for
.˖ ˖6&$1B63(('B63)
countermeasures against the case when shades are
produced.
/˖ ˖6&$1B63(('B63)
2.
5) Select an adjustment mode with the scroll key.
SIM50-12 SIM50-12
Setting Default SPF(SIDE1) Front surface mode

Item Display Content SPF(SIDE2) Back surface mode
range value
A OC Document table image off- 1 - 99 50 SIM50-6
center adjustment
B SPF(SIDE1) SPF front surface image off- 1 - 99 50 OFFSET SPF1 Front surface mode
center adjustment OFFSET SPF2 Back surface mode
C SPF(SIDE2) SPF back surface image off- 1 - 99 50 6) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
center adjustment
(Change for change in the adjustment value: 0.1mm/step)
A - C: When the adjustment value is increased, the image (When the adjustment value is increased, the print image is
position is shifted to the rear frame side. shifted to the rear.)
1step = 0.1mm Repeat the procedures of 2) - 6) until a satisfactory result is
obtained.

ADJ 15 Copy image position and image

loss adjustment ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
(Manual adjustment) $˖ ˖55&$
$˖ %˖ ˖55&%&6
NOTE: Normally if the adjustment is executed by ADJ 3 (automatic ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖55&%'6.
adjustment), there is no need to execute this adjustment. '˖ ˖55&%0)7

(˖ ˖55&%$'8
Only when the manual adjustment is required, execute this )˖ ˖/($'
adjustment. *˖ ˖6,'(
In other words, this manual adjustment is executed when a +˖ ˖'(1$

,˖ ˖'(1%
satisfactory result is not obtained from the automatic -˖ ˖)52175($5
adjustment (ADJ 3). .˖ ˖2))6(7B2&
/˖ ˖6&$1B63(('B2&
2.
15-A Copy image position, image loss, and void
area adjustment (Manual adjustment) 10-key
(Document table mode) OK
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced. ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
* When the LSU is replaced or removed. $˖ ˖55&$
$˖
* When the registration roller section is disassembled. %˖ ˖55&%&6
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖55&%'6.
* U2 trouble has occurred. '˖ ˖55&%0)7

(˖ ˖55&%$'8
* The PCU PWB has been replaced. )˖ ˖/($'
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. *˖ ˖6,'(
+˖ ˖'(1$
* The scanner control PWB has been replaced. ,˖ ˖'(1%
* The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced. -˖ ˖)52175($5
.˖ ˖2))6(7B2&
NOTE: Before executing this adjustment, be sure to confirm that /˖ ˖6&$1B63(('B2&
the ADJ 3 Print engine image skew, image position, image 2.
magnification ratio, void area adjustments has been com-

pleted normally. 3) Set RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the default values.
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
Setting Default
below. Item/Display Content
range value
Place a scale so that it is in parallel with the scanning direction A Lead RRCA Document lead 0 - 99 50
and that its lead edge is in contact with the document guide edge edge reference
plate. adjust- position (OC)
Place white paper on the document table so that the scale lead B ment RRCB-CS12 Regis- Standard 1 - 99 50
edge can be seen. value tration Tray
C RRCB-DSK motor Desk 1 - 99 50
D RRCB-MFT ON Manual 1 - 99 50
timing paper feed
E adjust- ADU 1 - 99 50
RRCB-ADU ment
F Image LEAD Lead edge image 0 - 99 30
loss area loss area setting
G setting SIDE Side image loss 0 - 99 20
value area adjustment
H Void area DENA Lead edge void 1 - 99 30
adjust- area adjustment
I ment DENB Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
adjustment
J FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 20
K Off-center OFFSET_ OC document off- 1 - 99 50
adjust- OC center adjustment
ment
L Magnifi- SCAN_ SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
cation SPEED_OC magnification ratio
ratio adjustment (CCD)
correction
M Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 57
scanning correction value
N direction DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction 1 - 99 50
print area value
O correction DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction 1 - 99 57
value value
P DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction 1 - 99 57
value

Setting Default
Item/Display Content 15-B Image scanning position adjustment
range value
Q Sub DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction 1 - 99 57 (Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode)
scanning value This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
R direction DENB-ADU ADU correction 1 - 99 60 * When the scan control PWB is replaced.
print area value
correction * When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced.
S DENB-HV Heavy paper 1 - 99 50
value correction value * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
* When the scanner (reading) section is replaced.
4) Perform the image lead edge reference position adjustment.
* When U2 trouble occurs.
Shift to the copy mode, and make a copy at each of 100% and
200% in the document table mode. * When the RSPF section is disassembled.
When the adjustment value of RRCA is proper, the lead edge * When the RSPF unit is replaced.
image from 4.0mm is not copied in either of 100% and 200% This simulation is to adjust the scanning position when scanning in
copy scale. the RSPF mode.
If not, change and adjust the RRCA value. If this adjustment is made improperly, the scanner stop position is
(Adjust so that the lead edge image from 4.0mm is not copied shifted from the specified position and a shade of the document
in either of different copy magnification ratios.) table may be reflected on the lead edge section of the scan image
in the RSPF mode.
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
obtained. 1) Make a copy in the RSPF mode, and check for any shade on
the lead edge section of the copy image.
Scale image 4.0mm position
Paper lead
edge
Papar lead edge

Image area
100%
5mm
Shadow image of RSPF

200%
5mm 10mm
If there is any shade of the document table on the lead edge

section of the copy image, perform the following procedures.
5) Image loss adjustment
2) Enter the SIM 53-8 mode, and press [MANUAL] key.
When the adjustment item of the image loss below is set to the
default value, it is adjusted to the standard state. If it is not in

the below standard state, or when it is set to a desired value, ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
change these adjustment items.

63)6&$11,1*326,7,21$'-8670(17
$872 0$18$/
Paper lead edge
Copy area
Maginification ratio : 400%
1 2 3 4
5mm 10mm

3) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.

Void area: 4.0mm, Image loss: 4.0mm When the set value is increased, the distance from the home
position to the RSPF scanning position is increased. When the
De- Standard
Item/
Content
Adjustment
fault adjustment
set value is changed by 1, the scanning position is changed by
Display range
value value 0.1mm.
LEAD Image loss Lead edge 0 - 99 40 4.0 Perform the procedures of 1) - 3) until a satisfactory result is
adjustment image loss +/-1.0mm obtained.
adjustment
CAUTION: After execution of this adjustment, be sure to execute
SIDE Side image 0 - 99 20 2.0
loss +/- 1.0mm
ADJ 15C Copy image position, image loss, void area
adjustment adjustment (Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode).
When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is

increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
image loss is decreased.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the void area is
changed by 0.1mm.

15-C Copy image position, image loss, void area
adjustment (Manual adjustment)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67
(RSPF mode) /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(63)
&/26(
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: $˖

$˖ ˖6,'(
%˖ ˖6,'(
* When the scan control PWB is replaced. ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖/($'B('*(6,'(
* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced. '˖ ˖)5217B5($56,'(
(˖ ˖75$,/B('*(6,'(

* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. )˖ ˖/($'B('*(6,'(
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced. *˖ ˖)5217B5($56,'(
+˖ ˖75$,/B('*(6,'(
* When U2 trouble occurs. ,˖ ˖2))6(7B63)
-˖ ˖2))6(7B63)
* When the RSPF section is disassembled. .˖ ˖6&$1B63(('B63)
* When the RSPF unit is replaced. /˖ ˖6&$1B63(('B63)

2.
a. Adjustment procedures
1) Prepare the adjustment chart.
Setting Default
The adjustment chart can be made by the following proce- Item/Display Content
range value
dures.
A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50
Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper and draw arrow marks vertically and document scan
horizontally on the front and the back surfaces. position
At the same time, put marks of the lead edge, the trail edge, adjustment (CCD)
the front end, and the rear end as well as the identification B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50
document scan
marks of the front surface and the back surface.
position
adjustment (CCD)
R Front surface
FACE C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead 0 - 99 20
amount amount setting
D setting FRONT_REAR Front surface side 0 - 99 20
L T SIDE1 (SIDE1) image loss amount
setting
E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear 0 - 99 30
Put the position (SIDE1) edge image loss
marks. amount setting
F loss (SIDE2) edge image loss
Draw arrows. G setting FRONT_REAR Back surface side 0 - 99 20
R Back surface setting
BACK
H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 - 99 30
amount setting
L
I OFFSET_SPF1 RSPF front surface 1 - 99 50
T
document off-
center adjustment
J OFFSET_SPF2 RSPF back 1 - 99 50
Put the position surface document
marks. off-center
adjustment
F K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 RSPF document 1 - 99 50
front surface
Draw arrows. magnification ratio
adjustment (Sub
scan)
back surface
magnification ratio
adjustment (Sub
scan)
* Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan

timing is delayed.
* Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the
image loss is increased.
* Item A - H: 1 step = 0.1mm change
* The RSPF rear edge image loss setting is provided for coun-
termeasures against the case when shades are produced.

Lead edge image loss adjustment 2) Enter the adjustment value of TRAIL EDGE (SIDE1/SIDE2)
1) Set the lead edge image loss adjustment values (LEAD EDGE with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
(SIDE1/SIDE2) on the front surface and the back surface to TRAIL EDGE (SIDE 1):
the following values. Rear edge image loss adjustment value (Front surface)
(Standard set value) TRAIL EDGE (SIDE 2):
Rear edge image loss adjustment value (Back surface)
TRAIL EDGE (SIDE 1):
40 Lead edge image loss set value (Front surface) (When the adjustment value is increased, the rear edge image
TRAIL EDGE (SIDE 2): loss is increased.)
40 Lead edge image loss set value (Back surface) (Change for change in the set value: 0.1mm/step)
(When the set value is increased, the lead edge image loss is Perform the procedures of 1) - 2) until a satisfactory result is
increased.) obtained.
(Change for change in the set value: 0.1mm/step) Front/rear frame direction image loss adjustment
2) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the RSPF mode. Check to 1) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the RSPF mode. Check to
confirm that the lead edge image loss is within 4.0 1.0mm on confirm that the image losses on the front frame side and the
the front surface and the back surface. The paper lead edge rear frame side are 2.0 2.0mm on the front surface and the
must be aligned with the presumed image lead edge. back surface.
Paper lead edge The paper lead edge must be aligned with Paper F Image loss
the image lead edge. side edge 2.0 2.0mm
Copy image
Copy image
Copy image
Paper R Image loss

Image loss
4.0 1.0mm side edge 2.0 2.0mm
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following
procedure. procedure.
3) Enter the adjustment value of SIDE1/SIDE2 with 10-key, and 2) Enter the adjustment value of FRONT/REAR (SIDE 1) /
press [OK] key. FRONT/REAR (SIDE 2), and press [OK] key.
Adjust so that the paper lead edge is aligned with the pre- FRONT/REAR (SIDE 1):
sumed image lead edge. Front/Rear image loss adjustment value (Front surface)
SIDE1: Front surface lead edge scan position adjustment FRONT/REAR (SIDE 2):
SIDE2: Back surface lead edge scan position adjustment Front/Rear image loss adjustment value (Back surface)
(When the adjustment value is increased, the print image posi- (When the adjustment value is increased, the front/rear image
tion is shifted to the delaying direction for the paper.) loss is increased.)
(Change for change in the set value: 0.1mm/step) (Change for change in the adjustment value: 0.1mm/step)
Perform the procedures of 2) - 3) until a satisfactory result is Perform the procedures of 1) - 2) until a satisfactory result is
obtained. obtained.
Rear edge image loss adjustment

1) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the RSPF mode. Check to
confirm that the rear edge image loss is 2.0 - 5.0mm on the
front surface and the back surface.
Paper rear edge
Copy image
Image loss 2.0 - 5.0mm
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following

procedure.

ADJ 16 Finisher adjustments
(alignment, staple position)
* When the finisher is disassembled.
* When the finisher control PWB is replaced.
* When the alignment is improper.
* When the staple position is shifted.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
),1,6+(5$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖)3$0$'-867
$˖ %˖ ˖)'5/0$'-867
˷̚˹
2.
2) Select an adjustment target item with the scroll key.

Inner finisher
Setting Default
range value
A FPAM ADJUST Alignment width adjustment 40 - 60 50
B FDRLM ADJUST Paper exit roller descending 40 - 60 50
position adjustment
3) Enter an adjustment value and press [OK] key.

4) Cancel the simulation, make a copy in the mode including the
adjustment target, and check the adjustment result.

MX-M316N
[6] SIMULATION Service Manual
1. General and purpose

The simulation mode has the following functions, to display the
machine operating status, identify the trouble position and causes
in an earlier stage, and to efficiently setup and adjust the machine
for improved serviceability.
1) Various adjustments
2) Setting of the specifications and functions
3) Canceling troubles
4) Operation check
5) Counters check, setting, clear
6) Machine operating conditions (operation hysteresis), data
check, clear.
7) Various (adjustments, setting, operation, counters, etc.) data
transport.
The operating procedures and displays depend on the design of
the operation panel of the machine.
2. Starting the simulation

Entering the simulation mode
1) Machine in Copy mode: Select Program key  Asterisk (*) key
 Clear key  Asterisk (*) key  Ready for input of main
code of simulation.
2) Entering a main code with the 10-key  START key ON.
Or select a main code with the SIM key on the touch panel.
3) Entering a sub code with the 10-key  START key ON.
4) Select an item with the scroll key and the item key.
5) The machine enters the mode corresponding to the selected
item. Press [START] key or [EXECUTE] key to start the simu-
lation operation.
To cancel the current simulation mode and change the main
code and the sub code, press [SYSTEM SETTING] key.
Canceling the simulation mode to return to the normal mode

1) Press [CA] key.
CAUTION: Do not turn OFF the power when the machine is in the
simulation mode.
If the power switch should be turned OFF in the simula-
tion mode, a malfunction may be result. In this case,
turn OFF/ON the main power source.
MX-M316N SIMULATION 6 – 1
START (Copy mode)
Press the Program key.
Press the asterisk (*) key.
Press the clear key.
Press the Program key.
Standby for entry of Press the SYSTEM

SIM code. SETTINGS key
Enter the main code of

SIM with the 10-key.
The main code of SIM

is displayed.
NO
Press the START key.

YES Is it the same
simulation main
code?
YES
In the power OFF/ON type
Standby for entry of SIM <Exclusion type> simulation, OFF/ON
Is there a sub code ?
sub code You have to exit message is
simulation mode Press the SYSTEM displayed by the
NO before entering into SETTINGS key SYSTEM
Enter SIM sub code with
this mode for self YES
SETTINGS key.
the 10-key. printing type.
Select the mode and the Do you want
NO
Press the START key. item with the scroll key to perform another
and the item key. simulation ? The simulation mode
is canceled.
NO
If there is no item. YES Press the EXECUTE key
Operation check ?
and OK key.
NO Do you YES
Operation is made according want to end the Press the clear all key.
to the selected mode and item. simulation ?
YES Press the EXECUTE key

Operating conditions
check ? and OK key.
NO
The display is made according to
the selected some and the item.
YES Press the EXECUTE key

Data clear ?
and OK key.
NO
The selected mode and
the item are cleared.
YES Adjustments NO Operation is made according

or setting (counter data to the selected mode and the item.
change) ? (Other modes)
The display is made according

to the selected mode and the item.
Do you NO
want to change the
content ?
The changed content
YES
is stored.
Enter the new setting and Press the EXECUTE key

adjustment values. and OK key.
3. List of simulation codes
Main Sub Functions Section
1 1 Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
2 Used to check the sensors in the scanner (reading) section and the related circuits. Scanner (reading)
5 Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
2 1 Used to check the operations of the automatic document feeder and the control circuit. RSPF
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the automatic document feeder section RSPF
and the control circuits.
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the automatic document feeder and the control circuit. RSPF
3 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the finisher and the control circuit. Finisher
3 Used to check the operation of the load in the finisher and the control circuit. Finisher
10 Used to adjust the finisher. Finisher
4 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the desk, and the control circuit of those. Desk
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the desk, and the control circuit of those. Desk
5 1 Used to check the operation of the display, LCD in the operation panel, and control circuit. Operation panel
2 Used to check the operation of the heater lamp and the control circuit. Fusing
3 Used to check the operation of the scanner lamp and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
6 1 Used to check the operations of the load in the paper transport system (clutches and solenoids) and the Paper transport/Paper exit section
control circuits.
2 Used to check the operations of each fan motor and its control circuit. Others
90 Used to reset the machine to the factory setting. (The scanner is set to the lock enable position) Scanner
7 1 Used to set the operating conditions of aging. Others
6 Used to set the operating intermittent aging cycle.
8 Used to display the warm-up time.
12 The document reading number of sheets setting (for aging operation) RSPF
8 1 Used to check and adjust the operations of the developing voltage in each print mode and the control Process (Developing)
circuit.
2 Used to check and adjust the operation of the main charger grid voltage in each printer mode and the Process (Charging)
control circuit.
6 Used to check the output of the transfer output electric current. Process (Transport)
9 3 Used to check the operations of the load in the paper reverse section (duplex section) and its control circuit. Duplex
10 1 Used to check the operations of the toner supply mechanism (toner motor) and the related circuit. Process (Developing)
3 Used to check the operation of the toner motor rotation sensor. Process (Developing)
13 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
14 - Used to cancel the self-diag H3, H4, H5 troubles.
16 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble. MFP PWB / PCU PWB / SCU PWB
21 1 Used to set the maintenance cycle.
22 1 Used to check the print count value in each section and each operation mode. (Used to check the
maintenance timing.)
2 Used to check the total number of misfeed and troubles. (When the number of total jam is considerably
great, it is judged as necessary for repair.)
3 Used to check misfeed positions and the misfeed count of each position.
* Presumption of the faulty point by this data is possible.
4 Used to check the trouble (self diag) history.
5 Used to check the ROM version of each unit (section). Firmware
6 Used to output the setting/adjustment data (simulation, FAX soft switch, counter), the firmware version, and
the counter list.
8 Used to check the number of operations (counter value) of the finisher, the RSPF, and the scan (reading)
unit.
9 Used to check the number of use (print quantity) of each paper feed section. Paper feed, ADU
10 Used to check the system configuration (option, internal hardware).
11 Used to check the use frequency (send/receive) of FAX. (Only when FAX is installed) FAX
12 Used to check the RSPF misfeed positions and the number of misfeed at each position. RSPF
(When the number of misfeed is considerably great, it can be judged as necessary for repair.)
13 Used to check the operating time of the process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner cartridge) and the Process
fusing unit
14 Used to display the use status of the toner cartridge. Process
18 Used to display the user data delete history.
19 Used to check the values of the counters related to the scan - image send.
40 Used to display the error code list and the contents.
41 Used to display the JAM code list and the contents.
42 Used to check the JAM/trouble data.
43 JAM data details display.
90 Used to output the various set data lists.
23 2 Used to output the trouble history list of paper jam and misfeed.
(If the number of troubles of misfeed is considerably great, the judgment is made that repair is required.)
80 Used to check the operation of paper feed and paper transport in the paper feed section and the paper Paper feed, Paper transport
transport section. Used to output the list of the operation status of the sensor and the detectors in the paper
feed section and the paper transport section.
81 Backup the paper feed time data to the USB memory.
2 : ‘16/Jun.
24 1 Used to clear the jam counter, and the trouble counter.
(After completion of maintenance, clear the counters.)
2 Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints) of each paper feed section.
3 Used to clear the finisher, RSPF, and the scan (reading) unit counter.
4 Used to clear the maintenance counter, the printer counters of the transport unit and the fusing unit.
(After completion of maintenance, clear the counters.)
5 Used to clear the developer counter. (After replacement of developer, clear the counter.)
6 Used to clear the copy counter.
2
9 Used clear the printer mode print counter and the self print mode print counter.
10 Used to clear the FAX counter. (Only when FAX is installed)
12 Used to clear the document filing counter value.
15 Used to clear the counters related to the scan mode and the image send.
30 Used to initialize the administrator (Admin) password.
31 Used to initialize the service mode password.
35 Used to clear the toner cartridge use status data.
25 1 Used to check the operations of the developing section. Process (Developing section)
2 Used to make the initial setting of toner density when replacing developer. (Automatic adjustment) Image process (Photoconductor/
Developing)
4 Used to display the operation data of the toner correction quantity. (Not used in the market.) Process
26 1 Used to set Yes/No of installation of the job separator. Paper exit
2 Used to set the paper size of the paper feed tray. Paper feed
(When the paper size is changed, this simulation must be executed to change the paper size in software.)
3 Used to set the specifications of the auditor. Auditor
(Setting must be made according to the auditor use conditions.)
5 Used to set the count mode of the total counter and the maintenance counter. (A3/11x17 size)
6 Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed magnification ratio, etc.) of the destination.
7 Used to set the machine ID.
8 Counter mode setting (Long scale).
10 Used to set the trial mode of the network scanner.
18 Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner save mode operation. (For the Japan and the UK versions.)
30 Used to set the operation mode corresponding to the CE mark (Europe safety standards).
(For slow start to drive the fusing heater lamp)
32 Used to set the special functions.
35 Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4 trouble history when a same trouble occurred repeatedly. There
are two display modes: display as one trouble and display as several series of troubles.
38 Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the maintenance life is reached.
50 Used to set functions.
52 Used to set whether non-printed paper (insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up or not.
56 Used to set ON/OFF of the Life Correction.
65 Used to set the finisher alarm mode.
69 Used to set the operating conditions for toner near end.
73 Enlargement continuous shoot, A3 wide copy mode image loss (shade delete quantity) adjustment
74 Used to set the OSA trial mode.
78 Used to set the password of the remote operation panel.
79 Used to set YES/NO of the pop-up display of user data delete result.
27 1 Used to set non-detection of communication error (U7-00) with RIC. (FSS function)
2 Used to set the sender's registration number and the HOST server telephone number. (FSS function)
4 Used to set the initial call and toner order auto send. (FSS function)
5 Used to set the machine tag No. (This function allows the host computer to check the machine tag No.) Communication (RIC/MODEM)
(FSS function)
6 Used to set of the manual service call. (FSS function)
7 Used to set of the enable, alert callout. (FSS function)
9 Used to set the paper transport time recording YES/NO threshold value and shading gain adjustment retry
number. (FSS function)
10 Used to clear the trouble prediction history information. (FSS function)
11 Used to check the serial communication retry number and the scanner gain adjustment retry number
history. (FSS function)
13 Used to check the history of paper transport time between sensors. (FSS function)
14 Used to set the FSS function connection test mode.
15 Used to display the FSS connection status.
16 Used to set the FSS alert send.
17 Used to set the FSS paper order alert.
18 Used to clear the FSS paper feed retry counter.
30 1 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in other than the paper feed section and the
control circuits.
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the paper feed section and the control
circuits.
40 2 Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor adjustment. Paper feed
7 Used to set the adjustment value of the manual paper feed tray paper width sensor. Paper feed
41 1 Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit.
2 Used to adjust the document size sensor detection level.
3 Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit.
43 1 Used to set the fusing temperature in each mode.
4 Used to set the fusing temperature 2 in each mode.
10 Used to set the postcard feed cycle
20 Used to perform the low-temperature, low-humidity (L/L) environment correction for the fusing temperature
setting of each paper (SIM43-01).
22 Used to perform the low-temperature, low-humidity (L/L) environment correction for the fusing temperature
setting of each paper (SIM43-04).
44 1 Used to set each correction operation function in the image forming (process) section. Image process (Photoconductor/
Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
9 Used to display the result data of the high density process control operation. Image process (Photoconductor/
Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
14 Used to display the output level of the temperature and humidity sensor. Process (OPC drum,
development)/Fusing/LSU
43 Used to display the identification information of the developing unit. Developing system
46 2 Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode.
4 Used to adjust the density in the image send mode. (Color scanner)
5 Used to adjust the density in the image send mode. (Monochromatic scanner)
8 Used to adjust the image send mode color balance RGB.
9 Used to adjust the scan image density.
19 Used to set the operating conditions for the density scanning (exposure) of monochrome auto copy mode
documents.
30 Used to adjust the resolution in the sub scanning direction in the copy mode.
32 Used to adjust the document background density reproducibility in the monochrome auto copy mode.
37 Used to adjust the reproduction capability of monochrome mode color.
39 Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send images.
40 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Collective adjustment of all the modes)
41 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Normal)
42 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Fine)
43 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Super Fine)
44 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Ultra fine)
45 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (600dpi).
47 Used to set the compression rate of copy and scan images (JPEG).
60 Used to adjust the sharpness in the color auto copy mode.
61 Used to adjust the area separation recognition level.
62 Used to set the operating conditions of the ACS, the area separation, the background image process, and
the auto exposure mode.
63 Used to adjust the density in the copy low density section.
48 1 Used to adjust the scan image magnification ratio (in the main scanning direction and the sub scanning
direction).
5 Used to correction the scan image magnification ratio (in the sub scanning direction). Scanner section
49 1 Used to perform the firmware update.
3 Used to update the operation manual in the HDD.
5 Used to perform the watermark update.
50 1 Copy image position, image loss adjustment
5 Used to adjust the print lead edge image position. (PRINTER MODE)
6 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss. (RSPF mode) RSPF
10 Used to adjust the black print image magnification ratio and the off-center position.
(The adjustment is made separately for each paper feed section.)
12 Used to perform the scan image off-center position adjustment.
(The adjustment is made separately for each scan mode.)
27 Used to perform the image loss adjustment of scanned images in the FAX or image send mode.
28 Used to automatically adjust the image loss, void area, image off-center, and image magnification ratio.
51 1 Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the transfer current.
2 Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflection amount) on paper by the main unit and the RSPF
registration roller. (This adjustment is performed when there is a considerable variation in the print image
position on the paper or when paper jams frequently occur.)
9 Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the separation voltage.
53 6 Used to adjust the detection level of the RSPF document width.
7 Used to adjust the RSPF document size width sensor.
8 Used to adjust the document lead edge reference and the RSPF mode document scan position.
9 RSPF dirt detection setting.
10 RSPF dirt detection execution.
55 1 Used to set the specifications of the engine control operations. (SOFT SW)
2 Used to set the specifications of the scanner control operation. (SOFT SW)
3 Used to set the specifications of the controller operation. (SOFT SW)
10 Used to set the special stamp text. (Taiwan only)
56 1 Used to transport data between HDD - MFP PWB SRAM/EEPROM. (Used to repair the PWB.)
2 Used to backup the data in the EEPROM. SD Card, and HDD (including user authentication data and
address data) to the USB memory. (Corresponding to the device cloning and the storage backup.)
3 Used to backup the document filing data to the USB memory.
4 Used to backup the JOB log data to the USB memory.
5 Used to import the SIM22-6 data to a USB memory in the TEXT format.
6 Used to output the JAM/trouble data.
7 Used to backup the SYS log data to the USB memory.
11 Used to save the data in the SD card to the HDD temporarily.
12 Used to copy the SD card data saved temporarily in the HDD with SIM56-11 to the machine.
60 1 Used to check the memory operations (read/write) of the MFP PWB.
61 1 Used to check the LSU polygon motor rotation and laser detection. LSU
3 Used to set the laser power
62 1 Used to format the hard disk. (HDD: Excluding the Operation manual and the watermark data)
2 Used to check read/write of the hard disk (partial).
3 Used to check read/write of the hard disk (all areas).
6 Used to perform the self diagnostics of the hard disk.
7 Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics error log.
8 Used to format the hard disk. (HDD: Excluding the Operation Manual, the watermark data, and the system
area)
10 Used to clear the job completion list data.
11 Used to delete the document filing data.
12 Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format in a hard disk trouble.
13 Used to format the hard disk. (Operation Manual, watermark data only)
14 Used to initialize (remake) only the database file of the HDD. HDD
63 1 Used to display the shading correction result. Scanner
2 Used to perform shading.
3 Used to perform scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma auto adjustment. Scanner
4 Used to display the SIT chart patch density.
5 Used to perform the scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma default setting.
64 2 Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)
4 Printer test print. (Self print)
5 Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL)
6 Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)
65 1 Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates. Operation panel section
2 Used to display the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates.
5 Used to check the operation panel key input.
66 1 Used to display the FAX-related soft SW (2 - 150) on the LCD to allow changing the soft SW while checking FAX
with the LCD.
2 Used to enter a country code and set the default value for the country code. FAX
3 Used to check read/write of the EEPROM and the SDRAM on the MODEM controller and display the result. FAX
4 Used to send the selected signals to the line and the main unit speaker. (Send level: max.) FAX
5 Used to send the selected signal to the line and the main unit speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting) FAX
(For the kinds of send signals, refer to SIM66-04.)
6 Used to print the confidential registration check table (BOX NO., BOX name, passcode. FAX
(If there is no confidential registration, no print is made.)
7 Used to output all image data saved in the image memory. (Confidential data are also outputted.) FAX
8 Used to send the selected sound messages to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Max.) FAX
9 Used to send the selected sound message to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting) FAX
* For details of sound messages, refer to the sound message table of SIM66-08.
10 Used to clear the FAX and image send image data. (The confidential data are also cleared.) FAX
11 Used to send the selected signal at 300bps to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Max.) FAX
12 Used to send the selected signal at 300bps to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting) FAX
* For the kings of send signals at 300bps, refer to SIM66-11, 300bps send signal table.
13 Used to register dial numbers for SIM66-14/15/16, Dial test. (Up to 20 digits can be registered.) FAX
14 Used to execute the dial pulse (10PPS) send test and to adjust the make time. FAX
15 Used to execute the dial pulse (20PPS) send test and to adjust the make time. FAX
16 Used to execute the DTFM signal send test and to adjust the send level. FAX
17 Used to send the DTMF signal to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Max.) FAX
18 Used to send the DTMF signal to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting) FAX
21 Used to print the selected items (system error, protocol monitor). FAX
22 Used to set the handset sound volume. (This simulation can be executed even though the handset setting FAX
is set to NO. When, however, the handset is not installed, the sound volume cannot be checked.)
(Japan model only)
24 Used to clear the FAST save data. FAX
29 Used to initialize the telephone book data (the one-touch registration table, the FTP/Desktop expansion FAX
table, the group expansion table, the program registration table, the interface memory box table, the meta
data, InboundRouting, and the DocumentAdmin table).
30 Used to display the TEL/LIU status change, The display is highlighted by status change. FAX
31 Used to set ON/OFF the port for output to TEL/LIU. FAX
32 Used to check the fixed data received from the line and to display the result. FAX
33 Used to execute detection of various signals with the line connected and to display the detection result. FAX
When a signal is detected, the display is highlighted.
66 34 Used to execute the send test and display the time required for sending image data in the test. Used to FAX
execute send test and display. (Unit: ms)
36 Used to check send and receive data from the MODEM controller to the MFP controller or the data line or FAX
the command line individually.
39 Used to check and change the destination setting saved in EEPROM of the FAX BOX. FAX
42 Used to rewrite the program to power control installed in the FAX BOX. FAX
43 Used to write the adjustment value into the power control installed in the FAX BOX. FAX
61 Used to display the FAX-related soft SW (151 - 250) on the LCD to allow changing the soft SW while FAX
checking with the LCD.
62 Used to import the FAX receive data into a USB memory in PDF file type. FAX
67 17 Printer reset Printer
45 Used to adjust the printer image filter and trapping. Printer
4. Details of simulation <56opm>
Item/Display Operation mode Default value

1 OC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI
(372.0mm/s)
300DPI
(372.0mm/s)
400DPI 400DPI
1-1 (279.0mm/s)
Purpose Operation test/check 600DPI 600DPI
(186.0mm/s)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner
1200DPI 1200DPI
(reading) unit and the control circuit. (93.0mm/s)
Section Scanner (reading)
<31opm>
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the operation speed with the touch panel key. Item/Display Operation mode Default value
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. OC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI
(248.0mm/s) (248.0mm/s)
Scanning is once performed at the speed corresponding to the
400DPI 400DPI
scan resolution (operation speed).
(186.0mm/s)
600DPI 600DPI
(124.0mm/s)
1200DPI 1200DPI
(62.0mm/s)
<31opm>
1-2
Purpose Operation test/check Item/Display Operation mode Default value
Function (Purpose) Used to check the sensors in the scanner (SINGLE) 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI
(186.0mm/s) (186.0mm/s)
(reading) section and the related circuits.
400DPI 400DPI
Section Scanner (reading) (186.0mm/s)
Operation/Procedure 600DPI 600DPI
The operating status of the sensor is displayed. (124.0 mm/s)
(DOUBLE) 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI
When "MHPS" is highlighted, the scanner unit is in the home posi- (186.0mm/s) (186.0mm/s)
tion. 400DPI 400DPI
(186.0mm/s)
600DPI 600DPI
1-5 (124.0 mm/s)
Purpose Operation test/check

2-2
(reading) unit and the control circuit. Purpose Operation test/check
Section Scanner (reading) Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
sors and the detectors in the automatic
Operation/Procedure
document feeder section and the control
1) Select the operation speed with the touch panel key. circuits.
Section RSPF
Scanning is repeated at the speed corresponding to the scan
Operation/Procedure
resolution (operation speed).
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
played.
Item/Display Operation mode Default value The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
OC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI are highlighted.
(248.0mm/s) (2480.mm/s)
400DPI 400DPI Display Content
(186.0mm/s) SSET SPF installation detection
600DPI 600DPI SOCD RSPF open/close sensor
(124.0mm/s) SCOV RSPF cover open/close detector
1200DPI 1200DPI SPED SPF document empty sensor
(62.0mm/s) SPPD1 SPF primary paper transport sensor
SPPD2 SPF secondary paper transport sensor
SPPD3 SPF scan front sensor
SPPD4 SPF scan rear sensor
SPLS1 SPF document length sensor 1
2 SPLS2 SPF document length sensor 2
STMPU SPF stamp UN installation detection
SWD_LEN SPF document guide plate position (Unit: 0.1mm)
2-1
SWD_AD SPF document detection volume output AD value
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the auto- CAUTION: SWD_LEN and SWD_AD are not ON/OFF display.
matic document feeder and the control cir-
cuit.
Section RSPF
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the operation mode and the speed with the touch panel
key.
The RSPF repeats paper feed, transport, and paper exit oper-
ations at the speed corresponding to the scan resolution (oper-
ation speed).
<56opm>
Item/Display Operation mode Default value

(SINGLE) 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI
(279.0mm/s) (279.0mm/s)
400DPI 400DPI
(279.0mm/s)
600DPI 600DPI
(186.0 mm/s)
(DOUBLE) 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI
(279.0mm/s) (279.0mm/s)
400DPI 400DPI
(279.0mm/s)
600DPI 600DPI
(124.0 mm/s)
2-3 3-3
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the load in
in the automatic document feeder and the the finisher and the control circuit.
control circuit. Section Finisher
Section RSPF Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
1) Select a target item of the operation check with the touch panel key.
key. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. The selected load performs the operation.
The selected load performs the operation. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
Inner finisher (MX-FN26)
<56opm>
Display Content
Display Content FCF Cooling fan
SPUM_F RSPF paper feed motor (normal rotation) FDRLM Paper exit roller lift motor
SPUM_R RSPF paper feed motor (reverse rotation) FPAM_F Paper alignment motor F
SPFM_F RSPF transport motor (normal rotation) FPAM_R Paper alignment motor R
SPFM_R RSPF transport motor (reverse rotation) FPDM Paper exit motor
SRRC Registration roller clutch (RSPF) FPGS Paper gate solenoid
SPRS Pressure release solenoid (RSPF) FPS Paddle solenoid
STMPS Stamp solenoid FARLS Finisher alignment roller lift solenoid
FPTM Paper transport motor
<31opm> FSL Illumination of the staple unit
FSM Staple motor
Display Content
FTLM Tray lift motor
SPUM_F RSPF paper feed motor (normal rotation)
SPUM_R RSPF paper feed motor (reverse rotation)
SPUC Paper feed clutch (RSPF)
SRRC Registration roller clutch (RSPF)
SPRS Pressure release solenoid (RSPF)
STMPS Stamp solenoid
3
3-2
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
sors and the detectors in the finisher and
the control circuit.
Section Finisher
Operation/Procedure
played.
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
are highlighted.
Display Content
FAPHPS_F Paper alignment plate HP sensor F
FAPHPS_R Paper alignment plate HP sensor R
FDRPS Paper exit roller position sensor
FDTLLS Paper exit tray lower limit sensor
FDTPD Delivery tray paper detector
FPHPS Punch unit home position sensor
FPLD Paper height detector
FPLS Paper surface sensor auxiliary detector
FPMRS Punch motor rotation sensor
FPPD1 Paper entry detector
FPRD Compiler paper rear edge detector C
FSED Staple empty detector
FSHPS Staple HP sensor
FSLD Staple lead edge detector
FSSW Safety switch
FSTPD Staple tray paper detector
FTPS Tray position sensor
3-10
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the finisher.
Section Finisher
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)

Setting Default Change when the adjustment value is Change when the adjustment
range value increased or decreased value is changed by 1
A FPAM ADJUST Paper alignment width 40 - 60 50 When the adjustment value is increased, the 0.419mm
adjustment width of the alignment plate F/R during
alignment operation is decreased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the
width of the alignment plate F/R during
alignment operation is increased.
B FDRLM ADJUST Paper exit roller descending 40 - 60 50 When the adjustment value is increased, the 0.13mm
position adjustment descending position of the paper exit roller is
shifted to the compression side.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the
descending position of the paper exit roller is
shifted to the decompression side.
4-3
4
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads
4-2
in the desk, and the control circuit of those.
Section Desk
Operation/Procedure
sors and detectors in the desk, and the
control circuit of those. 1) Select the load item that is required to operation check with the
touch panel key.
Section Desk
Operation/Procedure
The selected load performs the operation.
played.
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active Desk
are highlighted. Display Content
Desk CPFM Desk motor
PTRC1 Desk vertical transport clutch
Display Content
C3LUM Cassette 3 lift-up motor
C3PFD Cassette 3 paper entry sensor
C3PUC Cassette 3 paper feed clutch
C3LUD Cassette 3 paper upper limit sensor
C3PED Cassette 3 paper empty sensor
C3SS Cassette 3 installation sensor
DSW_C3 Cassette 3 door open/close sensor
C4PFD Cassette 4 paper entry sensor
C4LUD Cassette 4 paper upper limit sensor
C4PED Cassette 4 paper empty sensor
C4SS Cassette 4 installation sensor
DSW_C4 Cassette 4 door open/close sensor
5-3
5
5-1
lamp and the control circuit.
Section Scanner (reading)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the display,
Operation/Procedure
LCD in the operation panel, and control cir-
cuit. 1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
key.
Section Operation panel
Operation/Procedure
The scanner lamp lights up for 10 sec.
The LCD is changed as shown below.
The contrast changes every 2sec from the current level to MAX ->
MIN -> the current level. During this period, each LED is lighted.
The LCD display contrast change and the LED lighting status are
checked.
6
SIMULATION NO.05-01
TEST
6-1
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in
the paper transport system (clutches and
solenoids) and the control circuits.
Section Paper transport/Paper exit section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
key.
TEST
SIMULATION NO.05-01 Load operation check method
The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However,
there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation
sound.
Section Item/Display Content

Transport/ MM Main motor
process POM_F*1 Paper exit reverse motor (normal rotation)
POM_R*1 Paper exit reverse motor (reverse
rotation)
OSM Shifter motor
PTRC2 Vertical transport clutch 2CS
RRC PS clutch
PSPS Process separation pawl solenoid
POGS1 Paper exit gate solenoid
5-2 POGS2 Right paper exit keep solenoid
Purpose Operation test/check Paper feed C1LUM Cassette 1 lift-up motor
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the heater
lamp and the control circuit.
Section Fusing MPFS Manual feed take-up solenoid
Operation/Procedure
*1: If "Normal rotation" and "Reverse rotation" of a same load are
displayed as different items, when the both are selected at the
key.
same time, "Normal rotation" is performed. In addition, a
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. change in the rotating direction is accepted only when the
The selected heater lamp operates ON/OFF. operation is stopped.
HL_UM Main heater lamp (Paper surface heat roller)

HL_US Sub heater lamp (Paper surface heat roller)
6-2 7-6
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of each fan Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating intermittent aging
motor and its control circuit. cycle.
Section Others Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel 1) Enter the intermittent aging operation cycle (unit: sec) with 10-
key. key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 2) Press [OK] key.
The selected load performs the operation. The time entered in procedure 1) is set.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. * The interval time that can be set is 1 to 900 (sec).
Load operation check method The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However, after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation
sound.
7-8
Display Content
PSFM Power cooling fan motor
Purpose Operation display
FUFM Fusing fan motor Function (Purpose) Used to display the warm-up time.
OZFM Ozone fan motor Section
LSUFM LSU fan motor
Operation/Procedure
Press [EXECUTE] key.
Counting of the warm-up time is started and the time required for
6-90 warm-up is displayed
Purpose Setting * Interruption of counting by pressing [EXECUTE] key is inhibited.
Function (Purpose) Used to reset the machine to the factory
setting. (The scanner is set to the lock
enable position) 7-12
Section Scanner Purpose Operation test/check
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) The document reading number of sheets
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. setting (for aging operation)
The scanner is shifted to the lock enable position and stopped. Section RSPF
Operation/Procedure
1) Set document reading quantity with 10-key.
7 (Setting range: 0 - 255)
2) Press [OK] key. The set value is saved.
7-1 The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
Purpose Setting after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of

aging.
Section Others
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel key.
The machine is rebooted in the aging mode.
The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
AGING Aging operation setup

INTERVAL Intermittent operation setting
MISFEED DISABLE JAM detection ignoring setting
FUSING DISABLE Fusing unit ignoring setting
WARMUP DISABLE Warming up ignoring setting
DV CHECK DISABLE Developing unit ignoring setting
SHADING DISABLE Shading correction operation omitting setting
CCD GAIN FREE CCD gain adjustment omitting setting
1 : ‘15/Aug.
8
8-1 8-2
Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operations of Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of
the developing voltage in each print mode the main charger grid voltage in each
and the control circuit. printer mode and the control circuit.
Section Process (Developing) Section Process (Charging)
1) Select a mode with [TS_OFF] and [TS_ON] keys on the touch 1) Select a mode with [TS_OFF] and [TS_ON] keys on the touch
panel. panel.
2) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys. 2) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.
3) Enter the setting value with 10-key. (The value specified on the 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. (The value specified
label of the high voltage PWB must be entered.) on the label of the high voltage PWB must be entered.)
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each * When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The set value is saved and the voltage entered with step 3) is The set value is saved and the voltage entered with step 3) is
output for 30 sec. output for 30 sec.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated.
Adjust Default value Adjust Default value

1 Item/Display (Mode) Content ment 26 31 35 1
Item/Display (Mode) Content ment 26 31 35
range cpm cpm cpm range cpm cpm cpm
TS_ A COPY Developing 0 - 650 400 400 430 TS_ A COPY GB Charging/grid 0 - 750 575 575 605
OFF DVB bias set value OFF bias set value
in a copy job in a copy job
(Toner save (Toner save
mode OFF) mode OFF)
B PRINTER Developing 0 - 650 400 400 430 B PRINTER Charging/grid 0 - 750 575 575 605
FAX DVB bias set value FAX GB bias set value
in a PRINT/ in a PRINT/
FAX job (Toner FAX job (Toner
save mode save mode
OFF) OFF)
TS_ A COPY Developing 0 - 650 320 320 320 TS_ A COPY GB Charging/grid 0 - 750 495 495 495
ON DVB bias set value ON bias set value
in a copy job in a copy job
mode ON) mode ON)
B PRINTER Developing 0 - 650 250 250 250 B PRINTER Charging/grid 0 - 750 495 425 425
DVB bias set value GB bias set value
in a print job in a print job
mode ON) mode ON)
1 : ‘15/Aug.
8-6
Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to check the output of the transfer
charger output current.
Section Process (Transfer)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.
The set value is saved and the electric current corresponding
to the set value is output for 30 sec.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated.

range 26cpm 31cpm 35cpm
A TC PLAIN SPX W Primary transfer bias reference Plain Front surface 5 - 35 18 18 20
B TC PLAIN DPX W value paper Back surface 5 - 35 16 16 16
C TC PLAIN SPX N1 Front surface 5 - 35 22 22 24
D TC PLAIN DPX N1 Back surface 5 - 35 20 20 22
E TC PLAIN SPX N2 Front surface 5 - 35 26 26 28
F TC PLAIN DPX N2 Back surface 5 - 35 24 24 26
G TC HEAVY1 W Heavy paper 5 - 35 14 14 16
H TC HEAVY1 N1 5 - 35 18 18 20
I TC HEAVY1 N2 5 - 35 22 22 24
J TC OHP W OHP 5 - 35 10 10 10
K TC OHP N1 5 - 35 14 14 14
L TC OHP N2 5 - 35 14 14 14
M TC ENVELOPE W Envelope 5 - 35 14 14 16
N TC ENVELOPE N1 5 - 35 18 18 20
O TC ENVELOPE N2 5 - 35 22 22 24
P TC THIN W Thin paper 5 - 35 14 14 16
Q TC THIN N1 5 - 35 18 18 20
R TC THIN N2 5 - 35 22 22 24
S TC LABEL W Label paper 5 - 35 14 14 16
T TC LABEL N1 5 - 35 18 18 20
U TC LABEL N2 5 - 35 22 22 24
V TC TAB W Primary transfer bias reference Tab paper 5 - 35 14 14 16
W TC TAB N1 value 5 - 35 18 18 20
X TC TAB N2 5 - 35 22 22 24
Y TC POSTCARD N2 Post card 5 - 35 22 22 24
Z TC ADSORPTION W 0 - 100 50 50 50
AA TC ADSORPTION N1 0 - 100 50 50 50
AB TC ADSORPTION N2 0 - 100 50 50 50
AC TC INTERVAL BIAS W 0 - 100 50 50 50
AD TC INTERVAL BIAS N1 0 - 100 50 50 50
AE TC INTERVAL BIAS N2 0 - 100 50 50 50
AF TC FRONTEDGE 0 - 100 60 60 60
AG TC BACKEND SPX 0 - 100 90 90 90
AH TC BACKEND DPX 0 - 100 80 80 80
10-3
9
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the toner
9-3
supply mechanism (toner motor) and the
Purpose Operation test/check related circuit.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in Section Process (Developing)
the paper reverse section (duplex section)
Operation/Procedure
and its control circuit.
1) Select a target of the operation check with the touch panel key.
Section Duplex
Operation/Procedure
The selected load operation is performed for 15 sec.
key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. CAUTION: This simulation must be executed without installing the
toner cartridges.
If this simulation is executed with the toner cartridges
installed, toner will be forcibly supplied to the develop-
Display Content ing unit, resulting in overtoner.
ADUM ADU motor If this simulation is erroneously executed with the toner
cartridges installed, overtoner state may be deleted by
making a few black background copy in the copy mode.
Display Content
10 TM_COUNT Toner motor rotation sensor
10-1
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the toner 13
supply mechanism (toner motor) and the
related circuit. 13--
Section Process (Developing) Purpose Cancel (Trouble etc.)
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
1) Select a target of the operation check with the touch panel key. Section
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Operation/Procedure
The selected load operation is performed for 15 sec. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. 2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
CAUTION: This simulation must be executed without installing the
toner cartridges.
If this simulation is executed with the toner cartridges
installed, toner will be forcibly supplied to the develop-
ing unit, resulting in overtoner.
14
If this simulation is erroneously executed with the toner
14--
cartridges installed, overtoner state may be deleted by
making a few black background copy in the copy mode. Purpose Cancel (Trouble etc.)
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag H3, H4, H5
Display Content troubles.
TNM Toner motor
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
16
16--
Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.)
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble.
Section MFP PWB / PCU PWB / SCU PWB
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
1 : ‘15/Aug.
22-2
21
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the total number of misfeed
21-1
and troubles. (When the number of total
Purpose Setting jam is considerably great, it is judged as
Function (Purpose) Used to set the maintenance cycle. necessary for repair.)
Section Section
* Do not change the default setting value of the maintenance The paper jam, trouble counter value is displayed.
counter on SIM21-1. The replacement timing of the fusing clean-
ing roller, the filter and PS paper dust removal cleaner may not MACHINE JAM Machine JAM counter
clarify. RSPF JAM RSPF JAM counter
TROUBLE Trouble counter
1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch
panel.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) 22-3
Setting Default
range value Function (Purpose) Used to check misfeed positions and the
A MAINTENANCE Maintenance 0: 26CPM: 75K misfeed count of each position.
COUNTER counter (Total) Default 31/35CPM: * Presumption of the faulty point by this
(TOTAL) 1 - 300: 100K data is possible.
1K - 300K
999: Free
Section
Operation/Procedure
The paper jam and misfeed history is displayed from the latest one
22 up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
22-1
22-4
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data output/
Check Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the print count value in each Function (Purpose) Used to check the trouble (self diag) his-
section and each operation mode. tory.
(Used to check the maintenance timing.) Section
Section Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure The trouble history is displayed from the latest one up to 30 items.
Change the display page with scroll key on the touch panel. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)

Total TOTAL OUT Total output All prints including
output quantity of black jams
quantity and white
Total use TOTAL Total use quantity Effective paper
quantity of black and white (including self print,
excluding jams)
Copy COPY Black and white Billing target
copy counter (excluding self print)
Print PRINT Black and white Billing target
print counter (excluding self print)
Document DOC FIL Black and white Billing target
filing document filing (excluding self print)
print counter
Other OTHER Black and white Self print quantity
other counter
22-5 22-8
Purpose Others Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the ROM version of each Function (Purpose) Used to check the number of operations
unit (section). (counter value) of the finisher, the RSPF,
Section Firmware and the scan (reading) unit.
Operation/Procedure Section
The ROM version of the installed unit in each section is displayed. Operation/Procedure
When there is any trouble in the software, use this simulation to The counter values of the finisher, the RSPF, and the scanner
check the ROM version, and upgrade the version if necessary. related counters are displayed.
S/N Serial No. (The codes for November and December are SPF Document feed quantity
"X" and "Y" respectively.) (The number of sheets of discharged documents)
ICU (MAIN) ICU (Main section) SCAN Number of times of scan
ICU (BOOT) ICU (Boot section) STAPLER Staple counter
ICU (SUB) ICU (Sub section) (ARM9) STAMP Stamp counter
LANGUAGE Language support data version COVER Document cover open/close counter
GRAPHIC Graphic data for LCD HP_ON Number of scanner HP detection
PCU PCU OC LAMP TIME Total lighting time of the scanner lamp
SCU SCU (* hour * minutes)
FAX1 (MAIN) FAX 1-Line (Main section)
FINISHER Finisher 22-9
NIC NIC
POWER-CON Power controller
E-MANUAL Operation manual (HDD storage) Function (Purpose) Used to check the number of use (print
(except 20cpm machine) quantity) of each paper feed section.
WATER MARK Watermark (HDD storage) Section Paper feed, ADU
ESCP ESCP font ROM
Operation/Procedure
PDL PDL font ROM
The counter values related to paper feed are displayed.
TRAY1 Paper feed counter (Paper feed tray 1)

22-6
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check TRAY4 Paper feed counter (Paper feed tray 4)
Function (Purpose) Used to output the setting/adjustment data MFT TOTAL Manual paper feed counter (Total)
(simulation, FAX soft switch, counter), the MFT HEAVY Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper)
firmware version, and the counter list. MFT OHP Manual paper feed counter (OHP)
MFT ENV Manual paper feed counter (Envelope)
Section
ADU ADU paper feed counter (Paper reverse section)
Operation/Procedure
* When installing or servicing, this simulation is executed to print
the adjustment data and set data for use in the next servicing.
(Memory trouble, PWB replacement, etc.)
1) Select the print list mode with 10-key.
Print list
Item/Display Print content
mode
A 1 Firmware version,
DATA PATTERN counter data, etc.
2 Data related to the process control
2) Press [EXECUTE] key to start printing the list selected in step

1).
1 : ‘15/Aug.
22-10 22-11
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the system configuration Function (Purpose) Used to check the use frequency (send/
(option, internal hardware). receive) of FAX.
Section (Only when FAX is installed)
Operation/Procedure Section FAX
The system configuration is displayed. Operation/Procedure
(The model names of the installed devices and options are dis- The values of the FAX send counter and the FAX receive counter
played.) are displayed.
MACHINE MX-M266N Main unit FAX OUTPUT FAX print quantity counter (for line 1)
1 MX-M316N FAX SEND FAX send counter
MX-M356N FAX RECEIVED FAX receive counter
MX-M356U SEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counter (for line 1)
MX-M265N SEND TIME FAX send time
MX-M315N RECEIVED TIME FAX receive time
MX-M265U
MX-M315U
MX-M3158N
MX-M2658N
22-12
MX-M3158U Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
MX-M2658U Function (Purpose) Used to check the RSPF misfeed positions
RSPF MX-RP19 Reversing single pass feeder and the number of misfeed at each posi-
MX-RP20 tion. (When the number of misfeed is con-
STANDARD siderably great, it can be judged as
STAMP AR-SU1 Finish stamp necessary for repair.)
DESK MX-CS12 1-Paper Tray 2nd Drawer
1-Paper Tray 4th Drawer
Section RSPF
MX-CS13 1-Paper Tray 3rd Drawer Operation/Procedure
FINISHER MX-FN26 Inner finisher The paper jam and misfeed history is displayed from the latest one
MX-TR18/ Job separator up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
STANDARD
FAX1 MX-FX11 Facsimile expansion kit
NETWORK MX-NSX1 / Network Scanner Expansion Kit
SCANNER STANDARD
PRINTER MX-PB16 Printer expansion kit (PCL)
STANDARD
PS MX-PK11 PS expansion kit
SECURITY MX-FR48U Data security kit (commercial version)
AIM MX-AMX1 Application integration module
SDRAM (ICU) *****MB SDRAM capacity
HDD *****MB Hard disk capacity
SD *****MB SD Card capacity
NIC STANDARD NIC
BARCODE MX-PF10 Bar code font
INTERNET-FAX MX-FWX1 Internet Fax expansion kit
ACM(*) MX-AMX2 Application communication module
EAM(*) MX-AMX3 External account module
AP - Air Purifier
RIGHT TRAY MX-TE10 Paper exit tray unit
(*) Displayed only in the OSA models.
22-13
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operating time of the
process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner
cartridge) and the fusing unit
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
The number of prints and the number of rotations in the process
section are displayed.
Number of
Number of Life meter
Item/Display Content Counter RPM remaining
use days (Unit: +/-1%)
days
MAINTENANCE ALL Maintenance counter (Total) Max. 8 Not displayed 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365
FUSING ROLLER Fusing roller Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365
PRESSURE ROLLER Pressure roller Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365
SEPARATE PAWL(U) Upper separate pawl Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365
CLEANING FELT Cleaning felt Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365
TC UNIT Transfer unit Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365
OZONE FILTER Ozone filter Max. 8 Not displayed 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365
DEVE CTRG(K) Developer cartridge K Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365
DRUM CTRG(K) Drum cartridge K Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365
MAIN CHARGER(K) Main charger K Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365
DRUM BLADE(K) Drum blade K Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) 0 - 365
TONER CTRG(K) Toner cartridge K Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100(%) Not displayed
22-14
Function (Purpose) Used to display the use status of the toner
cartridge.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
The status of the toner cartridge is displayed.
Accumulated No. of Accumulated No. of near Accumulated No. of Remaining quantity

Display item Content installed cartridges (Unit) near end (Unit) end (Unit) (Unit: %)
INSTALL NN END END RESIDUAL
TONER (K)*1 Toner number counter (K) 0 - 510 0 - 510 0 - 510 0-25%
LARGE*2 Toner number counter 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 25-50%
(K LARGE) 50-75%
SMALL*2 Toner number counter 75-100%
(K SMALL)
*1: The sum total of LARGE/SMALL is displayed. For the remaining amount, it is common to LARGE/SMALL.
*2: The remaining amount is not displayed.
22-18
Function (Purpose) Used to display the user data delete history.
Section
Operation/Procedure
The date and time of the user data delete are displayed.
Display item
Content
Item name Date
START Year/month/day/hour/min. Delete history (Date and time
of operation start)
END Year/month/day/hour/min. Delete history (Date and time
of operation end)
22-19
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check 22-40
Function (Purpose) Used to check the values of the counters Purpose Error contents display
related to the scan - image send.
Function (Purpose) Used to display the error code list and the
Section contents.
Operation/Procedure
Section
Used to display the counter value related to the network scanner
Operation/Procedure
Change the display with scroll key.
1) Select the main error code.
Item/Display Content The sub error code and the contents are displayed.
Network NET SCN Network scanner document read quantity
scanner ORG_B/W counter (B/W scan job)
NET SCN Network scanner document read quantity 22-41
ORG_CL counter (Color scan job)
Internet INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX output
Purpose JAM contents display
FAX OUTPUT Function (Purpose) Used to display the JAM code list and the
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX sending page contents.
SEND OUTPUT
Section
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX receive
RECEIVE Operation/Procedure
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX send 1) Select the main error code.
SEND The sub error code and the contents are displayed.
E-Mail MAIL Number of times of E-MAIL send
COUNTER
FTP FTP COUNTER Number of FTP send
Other SMB SEND Number of SMB send
USB CNT Number of times of USB storage
TRIAL Trial mode counter
MODE_B&C (B/W & COLOR scan job)
SCAN TO SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W)
HDD_B/W
SCAN TO SCAN TO HDD record quantity
HDD_CL (COLOR)
22-42
Function (Purpose) Used to check the JAM/trouble data.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key.
2)Printable with [START] keys.
Counter Content Max.

JAM CODE/ number
Display data TOTAL Remarks
Display Content TROUBLE DATE/TIME of
COUNT(BW)
CODE histories
PAPER JAM PAPER JAM Number of Generated Generated Total output
The head is the latest, and the bottom is the
COUNT machine JAM JAM code date/time quantity of 50
oldest. The max. number of histories is 50.
troubles (Machine) (YY/MM/DD black and
SPF JAM SPF JAM Number of Generated HH:MM:SS) white
When 50 is exceeded, the oldest one is not
COUNT SPF JAM JAM code 50
displayed sequentially.
troubles (SPF)
TROUBLE TROUBLE Number of Generated The head is the latest, and the bottom is the
COUNT troubles trouble code oldest. The max. number of histories is 30.
30
When 30 is exceeded, the oldest one is not
displayed sequentially.
22-43 22-90
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) JAM data details display Function (Purpose) Used to output the various set data lists.
Section Section
1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key. 1) Change the display with scroll key.
When [COUNTER] key is pressed, the JAM counter, the paper 2) Select the print target with the keys on the touch panel.
feed counter, and the paper feed retry counter are displayed. 3) Press [EXECUTE] key to start self print of the list.
When [HISTORY1] key is pressed, the JAM history is dis-
played. When [HISTORY2] key is pressed, the temperature All setting list (*) ALL CUSTOM SETTING LIST
and humidity data are displayed. Printer test page PCL SYMBOL SET LIST
2)Printable with [START] keys. PCL INTERNAL FONT LIST
PCL EXTENDED FONT LIST
Display data and contents (COUNTER)
PS FONT LIST
Item Content PS KANJI FONT LIST (Japan)
PAPER JAM COUNT Number of machine JAM troubles PS EXTENDED FONT LIST
PAPER FEED COUNTER Paper feed counter (Similar with NIC PAGE
SIM22-09 display content) Address registration list (*) INDIVIDUAL LIST
PAPER FEED RETRY COUNTER Paper feed retry counter (Similar GROUP LIST
with SIM27-18 display content) PROGRAM LIST (Output Disable)
MEMORY BOX LIST
Display data and contents (HISTORY1)
ALL SENDING ADDRESS LIST
Item Content Description Document filing list (*) DOCUMENT FILING FOLDER LIST
NO No History number System setting list ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COPY)
JAM CODE JAM Code Jam code main ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (PRINT)
DATE/TIME Date/Time Occurrence date ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (IMAGE
TOTAL_BW Total Count (BW) Total counter (B/W) SEND)
P_S (*1) Paper Size Paper size ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (DOC FILING)
P_T (*1) Paper Type Paper type ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (SECURITY)
JOB (*1) Job Mode Job mode ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COMMON)
JN Job No First after JOB start or not ALL ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS LIST
OF Offset Paper exit: Offset Receive rejection number table ANTI JUNK FAX NUMBER LIST
EP Exit Position Paper exit: Exit position Receive rejection/allow ANTI JUNK MAIL/DOMAIN NAME LIST
PC Punch Paper exit: Punch address
SP Staple Paper exit: Staple domain table
To E-mail INBOUND ROUTING LIST
Transfer table list
To administrator Transfer list DOCUMENT ADMIN LIST
Web setting list WEB SETTING LIST
Meta data set list METADATA SET LIST
* When the data list print of system setting is inhibition in DSK

model, this setting is invalid.
23 24
23-2 24-1
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to output the trouble history list of Function (Purpose) Used to clear the jam counter, and the trou-
paper jam and miss feed. (If the number of ble counter. (After completion of mainte-
troubles of miss feed is considerably great, nance, clear the counters.)
the judgment is made that repair is Section
required.)
Operation/Procedure
Section
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
Operation/Procedure
Press [EXECUTE] key to execute print.
3) Press [YES] key.
The trouble history of paper jams and miss feed is printed.
The target counter is cleared.
Error content
MACHINE Machine JAM counter
Item Button display Content
SPF RSPF JAM counter
DATA NO.1 JAM/Trouble history print
TROUBLE Trouble counter
PATTERN NO.2 Paper feed counter, JAM history
details, and temperature/humidity
history print
24-2
23-80 Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the number of use (the num-
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of paper feed ber of prints) of each paper feed section.
and paper transport in the paper feed sec- Section
tion and the paper transport section. Used
Operation/Procedure
to output the list of the operation status of
the sensor and the detectors in the paper 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
feed section and the paper transport sec- 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
tion. 3) Press [YES] key.
Section Paper feed, Paper transport The target counter is cleared.
Operation/Procedure
TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed counter
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the timing list of paper feed and
paper transport is outputted.
Used to print the operations timing list of the sensors and detectors TRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed counter
in the paper feed and transport section. MFT TOTAL Manual paper feed counter (Total)
The timing list of paper feed and paper transport operations of the MFT HEAVY Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper)
latest job (copy or print) on the final paper is printed. MFT OHP Manual paper feed counter (OHP)
Since the paper feed and paper transport routes differ depending MFT ENV Manual paper feed counter (Envelope)
on the used paper feed tray and the print operation mode, the sen- ADU ADU paper feed counter
sor and the detectors and the operation timing also differ.
JAM CODE JAM code

DATE / TIME JAM occurrence date/time 24-3
MODE Printing mode when JAM occurs Purpose Data clear
SIZE Paper size
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the finisher, RSPF, and the
TYPE Paper type
scan (reading) unit counter.
PIC TRAY Paper feed tray
OUT TRAY Paper exit tray Section
INF1 (ILLEGAL) Illegal detection information Operation/Procedure
INF2(SENSOR) Sensor information 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
3) Press [YES] key.
23-81 The target counter is cleared.
Purpose Data backup
SPF RSPF document feed counter
Function (Purpose) Backup the paper feed time data to the (No. of discharged sheets)
USB memory. SCAN Scan counter
Section STAPLER Staple counter
STAMP Stamp counter
Operation/Procedure
COVER Document cover open/close counter
Insert the USB memory into the main unit, and press [OK] key and
HP_ON Number of scanner HP detection
[EXECUTE] key. OC LAMP TIME Total lighting time of the scanner lamp
2 : ‘16/Jun.
24-4 24-5
Purpose Data clear Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the maintenance counter, the Function (Purpose) Used to clear the developer counter. (After
printer counters of the transport unit and replacement of developer, clear the coun-
the fusing unit. (After completion of mainte- ter.)
nance, clear the counters.) Section
Operation/Procedure 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 3) Press [YES] key.
3) Press [YES] key. The target counter is cleared.
NOTE: The "Developer cartridge life meter" counter displayed in
SIM22-13 is not displayed in this simulation, but it is
cleared in conjunction with this simulation.
Maintenance MAINTENANCE Maintenance counter (Total) (Counter)
ALL Maintenance counter (Total)
Developer cartridge print counter (K)
(Number of use days)
K Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K)
Fusing FUSING Fusing roller (Counter)
Number of day that used developer (Day) K
ROLLER Fusing roller (Number of use days)
Fusing roller
(Accumulated number of rotations) 24-6 2
PRESS Pressure roller (Counter) Purpose Data clear
ROLLER Pressure roller (Number of use days)
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the copy counter.
Pressure roller
(Accumulated number of rotations) Section
Separation SEPARATE Upper separation pawl (Counter) Operation/Procedure
PAWL(U) Upper separation pawl (Number of use 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
days)
Upper separation pawl
(Accumulated traveling distance) 3) Press [YES] key.
CLEAN FELT Clean felt (Counter) The target counter is cleared.
Clean felt (Number of use days)
Clean felt COPY BW Copy counter (B/W)
(Accumulated number of rotations)
Transfer TC UNIT Transfer unit (Counter) 24-9 2
Transfer unit (Number of use days)
Purpose Data clear
Transfer unit
(Accumulated number of rotations) Function (Purpose) Used clear the printer mode print counter
Drum DRUM CTRG K Drum cartridge (K) (Counter) and the self print mode print counter.
Drum cartridge (K) (Number of use Section
days)
Operation/Procedure
Drum cartridge (K) (Accumulated
traveling distance) 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
Main MAIN Main charger (K) (Counter) 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
charger CHARGER K Main charger (K) (Number of use days) 3) Press [YES] key.
Main charger (K) (Accumulated
traveling distance)
Drum blade DRUM BLADE Drum blade K (Counter)
PRINT BW Print counter (B/W)
K Drum blade K (Number of use days)
OTHER BW Other counter (B/W)
Drum blade K (Accumulated traveling
distance)
Other OZONE FILTER Ozone filter (Counter) 24-10 2
Ozone filter (Number of use days) Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAX counter.
(Only when FAX is installed)
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [YES] key.
FAX OUTPUT FAX Print quantity counter

FAX SEND FAX send counter
FAX RECEIVED FAX receive counter
SEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counter
SEND TIME FAX send time
RECEIVED TIME FAX receive time
2 : ‘16/Jun.
2 24-12 24-30
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the document filing counter Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the administrator (Admin)
value. password.
Section Section
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Press [YES] key. The administrator password is initialized.
DOC FIL (BW) Black-white document filing print counter 24-31

Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the service mode pass-
2 24-15 word.
Purpose Data clear Section
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the counters related to the Operation/Procedure
scan mode and the image send. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Section 2) Press [YES] key.
Operation/Procedure Used to initialize the service mode password.
3) Press [YES] key. 24-35
The target counter is cleared. Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the toner cartridge use status
Division Item/Display Content
data.
Network NET SCN ORG_B/W Network scanner document read
scanner quantity counter (B/W scan job) Section
NET SCN ORG_CL Network scanner document read Operation/Procedure
quantity counter (COLOR scan job) 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Internet INTERNET FAX Number of Internet FAX output
Fax OUTPUT
2) Press [YES] key.
INTERNET FAX Number of Internet FAX sending The toner cartridge use status data (SIM22-14) are cleared.
SEND OUTPUT page
INTERNET FAX Number of Internet FAX receive
RECEIVE
INTERNET FAX Number of Internet FAX send
SEND 25
E-mail MAIL COUNTER Number of times of E-MAIL send
FTP FTP COUNTER Number of FTP send 25-1
Other SMB SEND Number of SMB send
USB CNT Number of times of USB storage
TRIAL MODE_B&C Trial mode counter (B/W & COLOR Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the devel-
scan job) oping section.
SCAN TO HDD_B/W SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W) Section Process (Developing section)
SCAN TO HDD_CL SCAN TO HDD record quantity
Operation/Procedure
(COLOR)
The developing motor and the OPC drum motor rotate for 3
minutes and the output level of the toner density sensor is dis-
played.
Sensor name (Display) Sensor name

TCS_K Toner sensor output value (K)
1 : ‘15/Aug.
25-2 Display
range
Purpose Setting AUTO DEVE AREA Area in the auto development -128 - 127
Function (Purpose) Used to make the initial setting of toner adjustment
density when replacing developer. (Auto- CURRENT AREA Current area -128 - 127
matic adjustment)
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop-
ing)
Operation/Procedure 26
1 Toner cartridges must be installed to execute this setting (Toner 26-1
density control reference value setting)
Because of the structure of this machine, if SIM25-2 is executed Purpose Setting
without the toner cartridges installed, the waste toner transport pipe Function (Purpose) Used to set Yes/No of installation of the Job
of the process UN may be locked. separator.
Section Paper exit
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. Operation/Procedure
The developing motor rotates and the toner density sensor makes 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
sampling of the toner density, displaying the detected level. 2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
After stopping the developing motor, it is set as the reference toner This setting is required to use the Job separator.
density control level.
CAUTION: When the above operation is interrupted on the way, the Item/Display Content
reference toner concentration level is not set. Also when A 0 YES Job separator provided
error code of EE-EL or EE-EU is displayed, the refer- 1 NO Job separator not provided
ence toner density level is not set normally.
CAUTION: Do not execute this simulation except when new devel-
oper is supplied. If it is executed in other cases, under- 26-2
toner or overtone may occur, causing a trouble.
Purpose Setting
Display Default Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper size of the paper feed
range value tray. (When the paper size is changed, this
AT DEVE ADJ Automatic development 1 - 255 128 simulation must be executed to change the
adjustment value paper size in software.)
Display during execution of the simulation Section Paper feed
Operation/Procedure
TCS Toner sensor output value Select a paper size and a weight system to be changed.
Error content Item Setting value Content

LEGAL SET 0 8.5 x 14
Display Error name Error content 1 8.5 x 13.4
EE-EL EL abnormality Sensor output level less than 78 2 8.5 x 13.5
EE-EU EU abnormality Sensor output level over 178 G/LBS SET 0 GRAM
1 LBS
25-4 Setting value

Destination
LEGAL SET G/LBS SET
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check U.S.A 8.5 x 14 LBS
Function (Purpose) Used to display the operation data of the CANADA 8.5 x 14 LBS
toner correction quantity. (Not used in the INCH 8.5 x 14 LBS
market.) JAPAN 8.5 x 14 GRAM
Section Process AB_B 8.5 x 14 GRAM
EUROPE 8.5 x 14 GRAM
Operation/Procedure
U.K. 8.5 x 14 GRAM
The operation data of the toner supply quantity are displayed. AUS. 8.5 x 14 GRAM
AB_A 8.5 x 14 GRAM
Display
Item/Display Content CHINA 8.5 x 14 GRAM
range
TONER DEN_LT Current toner density sensor output 1 - 255
value (final value)
TONER DEN_ST Current toner density reference 1 - 255
value display (the value including all
the correction values)
AUTO DEVE Automatic development adjustment 1 - 255
value
ALL All correction reference value 1 - 255
LIFE Life correction value -128 - 127
ENV Environment correction value -128 - 127
DUPLEX Duplex correction value -128 - 127
PRINT RATE Print ratio correction value -128 - 127
AREA Area correction value -128 - 127
26-3 Default
value
Purpose Setting COUNTUP FUSER_IN Mode in which the detection EXIT_
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the auditor. TIMING timing of the paper lead OUT
(Setting must be made according to the edge by the sensor after the
auditor use conditions.) paper passes the fusing
section is used as the
Section Auditor money charging timing.
Operation/Procedure FUSER_OUT Mode in which the detection
timing of the paper rear
Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
edge by the sensor after the
paper passes the fusing
Default
Item/Display Content section is used as the
value
money charging timing.
BUILT-IN P10 Built-in auditor mode P10
EXIT_OUT Mode in which the detection
AUDITOR (standard mode) operation.
timing of the paper rear
OUTSIDE NONE No external connection NONE
edge by the paper exit
AUDITOR vendor is used.
sensor of the right paper
P VENDOR1 Coin vendor mode exit tray or of the after
(Only the copy mode can process unit is used as the
be controlled.) money charging timing.
P VENDOR3 Vendor mode in which PRINTER MODE1 All the items in OUTSIDE MODE
signals for the intercard CONTROL AUDITOR and VENDOR 1
connected to the PCU are MODE are allowed to
used for communication in select.
parallel I/F.
MODE2 (“OUTSIDE AUDITOR” is
P OTHER Mode for an external always set to “P
auditor connected to the VENDOR1”. Other buttons
SCU. are grayed out.
VENDOR-EX Vendor I/F for EQUITRAC “VENDOR MODE” is
(*1) always set to “MODE3”.
VENDOR-EX VENDOR-EX + Multi job Other buttons are grayed
(MULTI) (*1) cueing Enable mode out.)
S_VENDOR Serial vendor mode MODE3 “OUTSIDE AUDITOR” is
DOC ADJ ON Support for the auditor in OFF always set to “P OTHER”.
document filing print Other buttons are grayed
OFF No support for the auditor in out.
document filing print “VENDOR MODE” is
PF ADJ ON Continuous printing is OFF always set to “MODE3”.
performed in the duplex Other buttons are grayed
print mode. out.
If the remaining money
(*1) Displayed only when EQUITRAC.
expires during continuous
printing, the sheets in the (*2) Details of the vendor mode
machine are discharged
Details of the vendor mode
without being printed on the
back surfaces. Completion Insufficient money during Completion
OFF Continuous printing is not of the copy job of the
performed in the duplex specified specified
BW BW
print mode. (The remaining quantity. quantity.
(no money (money
amount is checked for (Money (No money
remaining) remaining)
printing every surface in all remaining) remaining)
the printing process.) Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3 Condition 4
If the remaining money MODE1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 2 Operation 1
expires during printing, the MODE2 Operation 1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 1
sheet is discharged without MODE3 Operation 1 Operation 3 Operation 2 Operation 3
printing on the back
surface. Operation 1:
VENDOR MODE1 Vendor mode 1 MODE Standby during setting time of auto clear. Default is 60 seconds,
MODE (*2) MODE2 Vendor mode 2 3
which can be changed in the system setting.
MODE3 Vendor mode 3
Operation 2:
Auto clear is not made.
Operation 3:
The display is shifted to the initial screen.
26-5 Number of times of key input
10-key
Purpose Setting 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 1 - - - - - - - - -
Function (Purpose) Used to set the count mode of the total
2 A B C a b c 2 - - -
counter and the maintenance counter. (A3/
3 D E F d e f 3 - - -
11x17 size)
4 G H I g h i 4 - - -
Section 5 J K L j k l 5 - - -
Operation/Procedure 6 M N O m n o 6 - - -
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. 7 P Q R S p q r s 7 -
8 T U V t u v 8 - - -
2) Enter the setting value with 10-key
9 W X Y Z w x y z 9 -
1 = Count up by 1, 2 = Count up by 2
0 0 - - - - - - - - -
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved.
Item/Display Content Default value 26-8

A TOTAL (B/W) Total counter (B/W) 1
Purpose Setting
(Japan)
2 Function (Purpose) Counter mode setting (Long scale)
(Except Japan)
Section
B MAINTE (B/W) Maintenance counter (B/W) 2
Operation/Procedure
C DEV (B/W) Developer counter (B/W)
1) Select a setting item with the scroll key.
1 = 1 count up, 2 = 2 count up.
26-6
3) Press [OK] key.
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed
magnification ratio, etc.) of the destination. Setting Default
range value
Section
A TOTAL(B/W) Long scale (Small) Total 1 - 10 3
Operation/Procedure LONG SIZE(S) counter (B/W)
1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel. B MAINTE Long scale (Small) 1 - 10 3
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (B/W) LONG Maintenance counter
SIZE(S) (B/W)
The selected set content is saved.
C DEV(B/W) LONG Long scale (Small) 1 - 10 3
SIZE(S) Developer counter (B/
U.S.A. United States of America
W)
CANADA Canada
D TOTAL(B/W) Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5
INCH Inch series, other destinations LONG SIZE(L) Total counter (B/W)
JAPAN Japan E MAINTE Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5
AB_B AB series (B5 detection), other destinations (B/W) LONG Maintenance counter
EUROPE Europe SIZE(L) (B/W)
U.K. United Kingdom F DEV(B/W) LONG Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5
AUS. Australia SIZE(L) Developer counter (B/
AB_A AB series (A5 detection), other destinations W)
CHINA China
26-7
26-10
Purpose Setting
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the machine ID.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the trial mode of the network
Section scanner.
1) Enter the machine ID with the 10-key. Operation/Procedure
Max. 30 digits of numerals and alphabetical characters can be 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
inputted. To select a desired character, press the 10-key 2) Press [OK] key.
repeatedly. Refer to the following list and enter characters.
Touch the "CONFIRM" section every time a character is input-
ted. TRIAL MODE 0 Trial mode setting
To modify an inputted character, delete it with "CLEAR" key (0: YES 1: NO) 1 Trial mode cancel (Default)
and enter the correct character.
2) Press [SET] key to set the contents entered in procedure 1).
NOTE:
The machine ID can be set also by the Web Page service
mode
function.
Conventionally, the machine ID has been set by the Web Page
function. In this mode, this function is made available in the
simulation mode.
26-18 26-35
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner Function (Purpose) Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4
save mode operation. trouble history when a same trouble
(For the Japan and the UK versions.) occurred repeatedly. There are two display
Section modes: display as one trouble and display
as several series of troubles.
Operation/Procedure
Section
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved. 0 Only once display.
1 Any time display.
Default
value 2) Press [OK] key.
A COPY 0 Copy toner save mode is inhibited.
0 The set value in step 1) is saved.
1 Copy toner save mode is allowed
B PRINTER 0 Printer toner save mode is inhibited.
0
1 Printer toner save mode is allowed.
26-38
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the
26-30
maintenance life is reached.
Purpose Setting
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operation mode corre-
Operation/Procedure
sponding to the CE mark (Europe safety
standards). (For slow start to drive the fus- 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
ing heater lamp) 2) Press [OK] key.
Section The set value in step 1) is saved.
Operation/Procedure Default
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. value
A MAINTENANCE 0 Setting of Print Continue/ 0
0 Control allowed LIFE OVER Stop when the maintenance
1 Control inhibited (0: CONTINUE life is over (Print Continue)
1: STOP) 1 Setting of Print Continue/
2) Press [OK] key. Stop when the maintenance
The set value in step 1) is saved. life is over (Print Stop)
* Even in Enable state, the control may not be executed due
to the power frequency, etc.
U.S.A 1 (CE not supported) EUROPE 0 (CE supported) 26-49

CANADA 1 (CE not supported) U.K. 0 (CE supported) Purpose Setting
INCH 1 (CE not supported) AUS. 0 (CE supported)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the print speed of postcards
JAPAN 1 (CE not supported) AB_A 0 (CE supported)
mode.
AB_B 1 (CE not supported) CHINA 0 (CE supported)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Select the copy speed mode with the touch panel. (Default: LOW)
26-32
Purpose Setting Item Setting Default
Content
value value
Function (Purpose) Used to set the special functions. POSTCARD LOW Postcard copy speed LOW LOW
Section HIGH Postcard copy speed HIGH
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [OK] key.
Default
Item/Display Content Setting range
value
A CLEANING The screen of the 0 YES 1(NO)
PRINT SET cleaning mode self print
execution is displayed.
(ON)
The screen of the 1 NO
cleaning mode self print
execution is not
displayed. (OFF)
26-50 26-51
Function (Purpose) Used to set functions. Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the serial
Section port operation.
1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch Operation/Procedure
panel.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) 26-52
Purpose Setting
Default
Item/Display Content Function (Purpose) Used to set whether non-printed paper
value
A BW REVERSE 0 BW reverse copy Disable Refer
(insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up
1 BW reverse copy Enable to *1 or not.
B FINISHER 0 Finisher special paper 0 Section
FUNCTION The number of paper exit is Refer Operation/Procedure
limited. to *2
1 Finisher special paper
The number of paper exit is
0 Count up
not limited.
1 No count up
C FEED TRAY 0 Paper feed tray color display 0
COLOR ON during paper feed 2) Press [OK] key.
1 Paper feed tray color display
OFF during paper feed
D LONG SIZE PRINT 0 Long size print disable 0
Destination Default
1 Long size print enable
U.S.A 0 (Counted)
E WIRELESS SET 0 Wireless LAN disable 0
CANADA 0 (Counted)
1 Wireless LAN enable
INCH 0 (Counted)
(*1) Default values for each destination of item A JAPAN 1 (Not counted)
AB_B 0 (Counted)
Destination Item A EUROPE 0 (Counted)
USA 1 U.K. 0 (Counted)
CANADA 1 AUS. 1 (Not counted)
INCH 1 AB_A 0 (Counted)
JAPAN 1 CHINA 0 (Counted)
AB_B 1
EUROPE 1
UK 0
AUS 1
AB_A 1
CHINA 1
(*2)
Target Target paper setting

paper 0 1
Inner Postcard, The operation is stopped when If it is set to "1,"
finisher envelope 10 sheets of a same kind are the operation is
discharged continuously. When, stopped when
however, different kinds of the paper exit
sheets are mixed and tray is full or
discharged and 10 or less when 250
sheets of a kind are sheets
continuously discharged, the (35.5mm thick)
operation is stopped by the are discharged.
paper exit tray full detection.
Label The operation is stopped when
sheet, 100 sheets of a same kind are
tab sheet, discharged continuously. When,
OHP however, different kinds of
sheets are mixed and
discharged and 100 or less
sheets of a kind are
continuously discharged, the
operation is stopped by the
paper exit tray full detection.
26-56 26-69
Function (Purpose) Used to set ON/OFF of the Life Correction. Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions for
Section toner near end.
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. Operation/Procedure
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content The set value in step 2 is saved.
range value
A AUTO1 Life correction of Auto 1 is 0-1 1 1 (ON) Setting Default
turned ON. Item/Display Content
range value
Life correction of Auto 1 is 0 A TONER 0 The toner 0-1 0
turned OFF. PREPARATION preparation
B AUTO2 Life correction of Auto 2 is 0-1 1 1 (ON) (0:YES 1:NO) message is
turned ON. displayed.
Life correction of Auto 2 is 0 1 The toner
turned OFF. preparation
C TEXT Life correction of Text is 0-1 1 0 (OFF) message is not
turned ON. displayed.
Life correction of Text is 0 B REMAINING 5% 0 Toner 0-9 4
turned OFF. TONER preparation at
D TEXT/ Life correction of Text/Printed 0-1 1 0 (OFF) LEVEL remaining toner
PRINTED Photo is turned ON. level of 5%
PHOTO Life correction of Text/Printed 0 10% 1 Toner
Photo is turned OFF. preparation at
E TEXT/ Life correction of Text/ 0-1 1 0 (OFF) remaining toner
PHOTO Photograph is turned ON. level of 10%
Life correction of Text/ 0 15% 2 Toner
Photograph is turned OFF. preparation at
F PRINTED Life correction of Printed 0-1 1 1 (ON) remaining toner
PHOTO Photo is turned ON. level of 15%
Life correction of Printed 0 20% 3 Toner
Photo is turned OFF. preparation at
G PHOTOG Life correction of Photograph 0-1 1 1 (ON) remaining toner
RAPH is turned ON. level of 20%
Life correction of Photograph 0 25% 4 Toner
is turned OFF. preparation at
remaining toner
H MAP Life correction of Map is 0-1 1 0 (OFF)
level of 25%
turned ON.
30% 5 Toner
Life correction of Map is 0
preparation at
turned OFF.
remaining toner
level of 30%
35% 6 Toner
preparation at
26-65 remaining toner
Purpose Setting level of 35%
Function (Purpose) Used to set the finisher alarm mode. 40 7 Toner
% preparation at
Section remaining toner
Operation/Procedure level of 40%
B REMAINING 45% 8 Toner 0-9 4
Use the touch key to set.
TONER preparation at
LEVEL remaining toner
Set Setting Default
Item Content NOTE level of 45%
value range value
LIMIT ON Number of ON or ON 50 9 Toner
% preparation at
COPIES sets of OFF
remaining toner
stapling:
level of 50%
Max. 50 sets
C TONER NEAR END 0 The toner near 0-1 0
OFF Number of
(0:YES 1:NO) end message is
sets of
displayed.
stapling:
Not Limited 1 The toner near
end message is
not displayed.
D TONER END 1 Operation setup 1-3 -
1
2 Operation setup
2
3 Operation setup
3
Setting Default 26-73
range value
E TONER END Setting of the 1-5 4 Purpose Setting
COUNT number of copy/print/ Function (Purpose) Enlargement continuous shoot, A3 wide
FAX outputs Enable copy mode image loss (shade delete quan-
after TONER NEAR tity) adjustment
END.
F TONER E-MAIL 0 Low status send 0-1 1 Section
ALERT of E-mail alert Operation/Procedure
(When the toner
preparation
message is 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
displayed) (in 3) Press [OK] key.
near near toner
When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
end)
(shade delete quantity) is increased.
1 Low status send
of E-mail alert
Setting
(near toner end) Item/Display Content Default value
range
Item E (TONER END COUNT) setting value and printable quan- A DELETING Rear frame side 0 - 50 0
tity SHADOW ADJ image loss quantity (Adjustment
(M) (shade delete amount:
Setting value Printable quantity at A4/6% equivalent conversion quantity) adjustment 0.1mm/step)
1 0 B DELETING Lead edge image 0 - 50 0
2 20 SHADOW ADJ (S) loss quantity (shade (Adjustment
3 40 delete quantity) amount:
4 80 adjustment 0.1mm/step)
5 160
Contents of set items

A: Enable/Disable setting of the toner preparation message display. 26-74
B: The toner remaining quantity at which the toner preparation Purpose Setting
message is displayed. Function (Purpose) Used to set the OSA trial mode.
C: Enable/Disable setting of the toner preparation message display Section
when the toner near end status is reached. Operation/Procedure
D: Machine operation at toner end 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
E: Number of allowable copy/print/FAX when the toner near end 2) Press [OK] key.
message is displayed. (Range: 0 - 160 sheets)
The number of output print allowed in item D is based on the Setting Default
assumption that the sheets are of A4 size with print ratio of 6%. range value
(The number of outputs allowed differs depending on the paper A OSA TRIAL MODE 0 Used to set the 0-1 1
size and the print ratio.) (0: YES 1: NO) OSA trial mode.
1 OSA trial mode is
CAUTION: When item A is set to "0" and item E is properly set, canceled.
printing can be made after toner near end. However,
improper phenomena such as insufficient density, thin
spots, or improper color balance may result depending
on the using conditions. When item E is set to "1" print- 26-78
ing is disabled after toner near end. In this case, toner
Purpose Setting
end display is made in the toner near end status, and
copy/print/FAX outputs are disabled. Function (Purpose) Used to set the password of the remote
operation panel.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter a password with 10-key. (5 - 8 digits)
The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW".
In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key
to delete the entered value one digit by one digit.
2) Press [SET] key.
26-79
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set YES/NO of the pop-up display
of user data delete result.
Section
Operation/Procedure
The value for the display operation specification after comple-
tion of user data delete is set.
2) Press [OK] key.
Default
value
A DISP SET User data delete result YES 1 0 (NO)
pop-up display ON
User data delete result NO 0
pop-up display OFF
27
27-1
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set non-detection of communica-
tion error (U7-00) with RIC. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
0 Not detection
1 Detection
2) Press [OK] key.

27-2
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the sender's registration num-
ber and the HOST server telephone num-
ber. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with touch panel.
[USER FAX NO] [SERVA TEL NO]
3) Press [SET] key.
USER FAX_NO. Sender registration number (Max. 16 digits)

SERVA TEL_NO. Host server telephone number (Max. 16 digits)
* If the connection process is not completed
normally when registering the FSS, calling to the
HOST may be continuously made every time
when the power is turned ON (from OFF) or
rebooted.
In this case, enter "********" to inhibit calling to the
HOST.
27-4
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the initial call and toner order
auto send. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Remarks
range value
A FSS MODE NEB1 Set the FSS MODE Exclusive for send in NE-B mode 0-3 0 1
NEB2 Send/Receive in NE-B mode 1
NFB1 Exclusive for send in NE-F mode 2 For convenience
stores
NFB2 Send/Receive in NE-F mode 3 For convenience
stores
B RETRY_BUSY Resend number setting when busy 0 - 15 2 0: No retry
C TIMER(MINUTE)_BUSY Resend timer setting (minute) when busy 1 - 15 3
D RETRY_ERROR Resend number setting when error 0 - 15 1 0: No retry
E TIMER(MINUTE)_ERROR Resend timer setting (minute) when error 1 - 15 1
F FAX RETRY Resend number setting when FAX initial connection 0 - 15 2 Unit: Number of times
G TONER ORDER EMPTY Toner order auto send Empty 0 - 11 0 6
TIMING(K) NEAR_END timing setting (K) Near end 1
5% 5% 2
10% 10% 3
15% 15% 4
20% 20% 5
25% 25% 6
30% 30% 7
35% 35% 8
40% 40% 9
45% 45% 10
50% 50% 11
H TEMP HISTORY CYCLE Frequency of acquiring the temperature and humidity history 1 - 1440 60 Unit: min.
I LOG OUTPUT CAPACITY(PCU) Log output capacity 0 - 50 30 Unit: [KB]
J TONER ORDER TIMING Toner order timing Toner order alert send at the fixed 0-1 0 0
CONTROL control toner remaining quantity.
Toner under alert send when 0 - 50 1
presuming the toner
consumption.
27-5 27-6
Function (Purpose) Used to set the machine tag No. (This func- Function (Purpose) Used to set of the manual service call.
tion allows the host computer to check the (FSS function)
machine tag No.) (FSS function) Section
Section Communication (RIC/MODEM) Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
1) Enter the password (max. 8 digits) with 10-key.
0 Allow (Default)
The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW”.
1 Inhibit
In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key
to delete the entered value one digit by one digit. 2) Press [OK] key.
2) Press [SET] key. The set value in step 1) is saved.
27-7 27-10
Purpose Setting Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to set of the enable, alert callout. Function (Purpose) Used to clear the trouble prediction history
(FSS function) information. (FSS function)
Section Section
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 2) Press [YES] key.
3) Press [OK] key. The history information of trouble prediction is cleared.
Target history Serial communication retry history
Setting Default Scanner gain adjustment retry history
range value Paper transport time between sensors
A FUNCTION FSS function enable 0 1 (NO)
(0:YES 1:NO) FSS function disable 1
B ALERT Alert call enable (*1) 0 0 (YES)
(0:YES 1:NO) Alert call disable 1 27-11
C CONNECTION FAX connection enable 0 0 (FAX) Purpose Others
(0: FAX Not used. 1 Function (Purpose) Used to check the serial communication
1: No Use HTTP connection enable 2
2: HTTP)
retry number and the scanner gain adjust-
ment retry number history. (FSS function)
*1 Alert send timing Section
No alert cause Initial state / Trouble / Continuous JAM alert
Operation/Procedure
Maintenance When the maintenance timing is reached. The serial communication retry number history and the scanner
Service call When pressing Service call. gain adjustment retry number history are displayed.
Toner send request When the toner order automatic send setting is
reached. Display Item
Toner collection request Revision of the toner installation date (only for Occurrence date Retry Content
Item name
a new product) (Display) number
Alert resend LSU1 Year/month/day 8 digits Serial
hour: min.: sec. communication
LSU2 Year/month/day 8 digits retry number
27-9 hour: min.: sec. history display
Purpose Setting DESK1 Year/month/day 8 digits
hour: min.: sec.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper transport time record-
DESK2 Year/month/day 8 digits
ing YES/NO threshold value and shading
hour: min.: sec.
gain adjustment retry number.
FINISHER1 Year/month/day 8 digits
(FSS function)
hour: min.: sec.
Section FINISHER2 Year/month/day 8 digits
Operation/Procedure hour: min.: sec.
SCAN GAIN ADJ1 Year/month/day 8 digits Scanner gain
hour: min.: sec. adjustment retry
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. SCAN GAIN ADJ2 Year/month/day 8 digits history
3) Press [OK] key. hour: min.: sec.
The set value in step 2) is saved. SCAN GAIN ADJ3 Year/month/day 8 digits
hour: min.: sec.
Setting Default SCAN GAIN ADJ4 Year/month/day 8 digits
range value hour: min.: sec.
A FEED TIME2 Threshold value of paper 0 - 100 50(%) SCAN GAIN ADJ5 Year/month/day 8 digits Scanner gain
transport time between hour: min.: sec. adjustment retry
sensors (SPF) history
B GAIN Threshold value of the gain 0 - 20 11
ADJUSTMENT adjustment retry number (TIMES)
RETRY
C JAM ALERT Continuous JAM alert 1 - 100 10
judgment threshold value (TIMES)
(Alert judgment threshold
value for continuous JAM's)
(Setting of the number of
JAM's continuously made
at which it is judged as an
alert.)
D JAM ALERT Continuous JAM alert 1 - 99 30
PERIOD period setting (DAYS)
* Items A, B: 0%, standard passing time between sheets of paper;

100%, time for judgment as a jam between sheets of paper.
* Item C: Because of a trouble in shading operation, the number of
retry is actually not registered.
27-13
Purpose Others
Function (Purpose) Used to check the history of paper transport
time between sensors. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Change the display with scroll key.
Code between Reference

Item/Display Content Occurrence date Passing time
sensors passing time
RSPF FEED TIME1 (SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
sensors 1 hour: min.: sec.
FEED TIME2 (SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
27-14
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS function connection
test mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
0 Disable (Default)
1 Enable
2) Press [OK] key.

27-15
Function (Purpose) Used to display the FSS connection status.
Section
Operation/Procedure
The FSS operating status is displayed.
Default
value
FSS CONNECTION Used to display the 0 Not 0
FSS connection operated
status. 1 Operated
27-16 Item/ Setting Default
Content NOTE
Display range value
Purpose Setting A3: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS alert send. FIRST number setting (A3) 10000 sheets for the
(Number of used first time
Section sheets)
Operation/Procedure A4: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. FIRST number setting (A4) 10000 sheets for the
(Number of used first time
The value for the FSS alert operation specification is set.
sheets)
2) Press [OK] key. B4: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert
FIRST number setting (B4) 10000 sheets for the
Setting Default (Number of used first time
range value sheets)
A MAINTENAN Maintenance Alert send 0 0 B5: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert
CE ALERT alert send Enable FIRST number setting (B5) 10000 sheets for the
(0:YES 1:NO) Enable setting Alert send 1 (Number of used first time
Disable sheets)
B TONER Toner order Alert send 0 0
ORDER alert send Enable
ALERT Enable setting Alert send 1
(0:YES 1:NO) Disable 27-18
C TONER Toner Alert send 0 0
Purpose Data clear
CTRG ALERT cartridge Enable
(0:YES 1:NO) replacement Alert send 1 Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FSS paper feed retry
alert send Disable counter.
Enable setting
Section
D JAM ALERT Continuous Alert send 0 0
(0:YES 1:NO) JAM alert Enable Operation/Procedure
send Enable Alert send 1 1) Select an item to be cleared.
setting Disable 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
E TROUBLE Trouble alert Alert send 0 0
3) Press [YES] key.
ALERT send Enable Enable
(0:YES 1:NO) setting Alert send 1 The target counter is cleared.
Disable
F PAPER Paper order Alert send 0 1
ORDER alert send Enable TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed retry counter
ALERT Enable setting Alert send 1 TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed retry counter
(0:YES 1:NO) Disable TRAY3 Tray 3 paper feed retry counter
TRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed retry counter
MFT Manual paper feed retry counter
27-17
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS paper order alert. 30
Section
Operation/Procedure 30-1
1) Select an item to be set.
The value for the FSS paper order alert operation specification sors and the detectors in other than the
is set. paper feed section and the control circuits.
3) Press [SET] key.
Section
Item/ Setting Default Operation/Procedure
Content NOTE
Display range value The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
PAPER Setting of paper kind 0-2 0 0: Standard played.
TYPE for paper order alert paper and
The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-
SET recycled paper
lighted.
1: Standard
paper only
PPD1 Registration front detector
2: Recycled
POSD Paper exit branch detector
paper only
POD1 Paper exit detector 1
A3 Paper order number 500 - 1250 Unit: No. of
POD2 Paper exit detector 2
setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box
sheets] (A3) POD3 Paper exit detector 3
A4 Paper order number 500 - 2500 Unit: No. of TFD1 Paper exit tray full detector 1
setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box TFD2 Paper exit tray full detector 2
sheets] (A4) TFD3 Paper exit tray full detector 3
B4 Paper order number 500 - 2500 Unit: No. of SHPOS Shifter home positions sensor
setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box DSW_R Front/side cover open/close detector
sheets] (B4) DSW_POC Paper exit cover open/close detector
B5 Paper order number 500 - 2500 Unit: No. of
setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box
sheets] (B5)
30-2 40-7
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- Function (Purpose) Used to set the adjustment value of the
sors and the detectors in the paper feed manual paper feed tray paper width sensor.
section and the control circuits. Section Paper feed
Operation/Procedure 1) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
played.
3) Press [OK] key.
The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-
lighted.
Default
C1PFD Cassette 1 paper entry detector Item/Display Content
value
C1LUD Cassette 1 paper upper limit detector A MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width 235
C1PED Cassette 1 paper empty detector B P1 (A4R) POSITION Manual feed P1 position width 143
C1SS Cassette 1 detector (A4R)
C2PFD Cassette 2 paper entry detector C P2 (A5R) POSITION Manual feed P2 position width 78
C2LUD Cassette 2 paper upper limit detector (A5R)
C2PED Cassette 2 paper empty detector D MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width 27
C2SS Cassette 2 installation detector
DSW_C2 Cassette 2 door open/close detector
MPED Manual feed paper empty detector
MPLD1 Manual feed paper length detector 1
MPLD2 Manual feed paper length detector 2 41
MTOP1 Manual feed tray detector 1
MTOP2 Manual feed tray detector 2
41-1
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the docu-
ment size sensor and the control circuit.
40 Section
Operation/Procedure
40-2
Purpose Adjustment/Setup played.
Function (Purpose) Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-
adjustment. lighted.
Section Paper feed
OCSW Document cover status Open: Normal display
Operation/Procedure Close: Highlighted
1) Open the manual paper feed guide to the max. width (MAX). PD1 - 7 Document detection No document: Normal display
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. sensor status Document present: Highlighted
The max. width (MAX) detection level is recognized.

3) Open the manual paper feed guide to P1 width (A4R).
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. 41-2
The P1 width (A4R) detection level is recognized. Purpose Adjustment
5) Open the manual paper feed guide to P2 width (A5R). Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document size sensor
6) Press [EXECUTE] key. detection level.
The P2 width (A5R) detection level is recognized. Section
7) Open the manual paper feed guide to the min. width (MIN). Operation/Procedure
8) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1) Open the document cover, and press [EXECUTE] key without
The min. width (MIN) detection level is recognized. place a document on the document table.
When the above operation is not performed normally, "ERROR" is The sensor level without document is recognized.
displayed. When completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed. 2) Set A3 (11" x 17") paper on the document table, and press
[EXECUTE] key.
MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width
The sensor level when detecting the document is displayed.
P1(A4R)POSITION Manual feed P1 position width (A4R)
P2(A5R)POSITION Manual feed P2 position width (A5R)
When the above operation is normally completed, it is displayed.
MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width
Sensor Setting Defaul
Content
name range t value
PD1 - 7 Document detection sensor 1 - 7 0 - 255 128
1 : ‘15/Aug.
41-3
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the docu-
ment size sensor and the control circuit.
Section
Operation/Procedure
The detection output level (A/D value) of OCSW and the document
sensor (PD1 - PD7) is displayed in real time.
The light receiving range of PD1 - PD7 is 1 - 255. (Default: 128)
Item/Display Content Detection level range

OCSW Original cover SW 0-1 ("1" to Close)
PD1 Document detection 1 0 - 255
43
43-1
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing temperature in each
mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.
Default value
1 26cpm 31cpm 35cpm
Setting
Item/Display Content Group A Group B Group A Group B Group A Group B
range
SW- SW- SW- SW- SW- SW- SW- SW- SW- SW- SW- SW-
A B A B A B A B A B A B
A HL_UM READY Ready standby TH_UM set 70 - 220 185 185 190 190 185 185 190 190 195 195 195 195
value
B HL_US READY Ready standby TH_US set 70 - 220 180 180 200 200 180 180 200 200 195 195 195 195
value
C HL_UM PLAIN Black-White plain paper 70 - 220 190 195 195 200 190 195 195 200 195 200 195 200
PAPER BW TH_UM set value
D HL_US PLAIN Black-White plain paper 70 - 220 190 195 195 200 190 195 195 200 195 200 195 200
PAPER BW TH_US set value
E WARMUP FUMON Fusing motor pre-rotation start 0 - 200 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150 150
HL_UM T TH_US set value
F WARMUP FUMOFF Fusing motor previous rotation 0 - 60 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
HL_UM T complete time
G WARMUP END Warm-up complete time 0 - 20 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
TIME
H HL_UM THIN Thin paper TH_UM set value 70 - 220 190 195 190 195 185 185
PAPER
I HL_US THIN Thin paper TH_US set value 70 - 220 190 195 190 195 185 185
PAPER
J HL_UM HEAVY Heavy paper TH_UM set value 70 - 220 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200
PAPER
K HL_US HEAVY Heavy paper TH_US set value 70 - 220 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200
PAPER
L HL_UM LABEL Label paper TH_UM set value 70 - 220 200 200 200 200 200 200
PAPER
M HL_US LABEL Label paper TH_US set value 70 - 220 200 200 200 200 200 200
PAPER
N HL_UM OHP OHP-TH_UM set value 70 - 220 190 195 190 195 195 195
PAPER
1 : ‘15/Aug.
Default value
1 26cpm 31cpm 35cpm
Setting
Item/Display Content Group A Group B Group A Group B Group A Group B
range
O HL_US OHP OHP-TH_US set value 70 - 220 190 195 190 195 195 195
PAPER
P HL_UM ENV Envelope TH_UM set value 70 - 220 205 205 205 205 210 210
PAPER
Q HL_US ENV Envelope TH_US set value 70 - 220 205 205 205 205 210 210
PAPER
R HL_UM E-STAR Preheating TH_UM set value 70 - 220 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95
S HL_US E-STAR Preheating TH_US set value 70 - 220 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95
T HL_UM PRE-JOB TH_UM set value when 70 - 220 180 180 190 190 180 180 190 190 180 180 190 190
recovery from Warm-Up
U HL_UM TH_UM set value when Warm- 70 - 220 180 180 190 190 180 180 190 190 205 205 205 205
WARMUP_120L Up at 120 degree C or below
V HL_US TH_US set value when Warm- 70 - 220 180 180 190 190 180 180 190 190 205 205 205 205
WARMUP_120L Up at 120 degree C or below
W LO_WARMUP_TIM U, V applying time (Timer from 0 - 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
E completion of Ready)
X HL_UM TH_LM set value when Warm- 70 - 220 180 180 190 190 180 180 190 190 180 180 190 190
WARMUP_120H Up at 120 degree C or above
Y HL_US TH_US set value when Warm- 70 - 220 180 180 190 190 180 180 190 190 180 180 190 190
WARMUP_120H Up at 120 degree C or above
Z HI_WARMUP_TIM X, Y applying time (Timer from 0 - 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
E completion of Ready)
AA HI_WU_FM_ON_T FM prior rotation start TH_US 0 - 220 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
MP when Warm-Up at alpha
degree C or above
AB HI_WU_END_TIME Warm-Up completion time 0 - 60 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
when Warm-Up at alpha
degree C or above
AC HI_WU_JOB_SET_ Job enable TH_UM 30 - 220 180 180 190 190 180 180 190 190 205 205 205 205
TMP 1 temperature 1 when Warm-Up
at alpha degree C or above
AD HI_WARMUP_BOR Threshold value alpha to which 1 - 119 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
DER U - W is applied
AE LO_WU_JOB_SET Job enable TH_UM 70 - 220 180 180 190 190 180 180 190 190 205 205 205 205
_TMP 1 temperature 1 when Warm-Up
at alpha degree C or below
AF JOBEND_FUMON_ After rotating time when a job is 0 - 60 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
TIME completed
AG HI_WU_JOB_SET_ Job enable TH_UM 70 - 220 180 180 190 190 180 180 190 190 180 180 190 190
TMP 2 temperature 2 when Warm-Up
at alpha degree C or above
AH LO_WU_JOB_SET Job enable TH_UM 70 - 220 180 180 190 190 180 180 190 190 180 180 190 190
_TMP 2 temperature 2 when Warm-Up
at alpha degree C or below
Code descriptions
TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper) HL_UM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper) HL_US Heater lamp sub (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
List of destination groups

Group Destination
1
Group A U. S. A CANADA INCH - -
Group B EUROPE U. K AUS. AB_A AB_B
1 : ‘15/Aug.
43-4
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing temperature 2 in
each mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with the scroll key.
3) Press [OK] key.
Default value
1 26cpm 31cpm 35cpm
Ite Setting
Display Content Group A Group B Group A Group B Group A Group B
m range
A HL_UM PLAIN Black and white plain paper 70 - 220 190 195 190 195 195 195
PAPER BW DUP duplex TH_UM set value
B HL_US PLAIN Black and white plain paper 70 - 220 190 195 190 195 195 195
PAPER BW DUP duplex TH_US set value
C PLAIN PAPER BW Black and white plain paper 0 - 255 0 0 0 0 0 0
DUP APP CNT duplex applying number of
sheets
D HL_UM HEAVY Black and white heavy paper 70 - 220 190 195 190 195 195 195
PAPER BW DUP duplex TH_UM set value
E HL_US HEAVY Black and white heavy paper 70 - 220 190 195 190 195 195 195
PAPER BW DUP duplex TH_US set value
F HEAVY PAPER BW Black and white heavy paper 0 - 255 0 0 0 0 0 0
DUP APP CNT duplex applying number of
sheets
Code descriptions
List of destination groups

Group Destination
1
Group A U. S. A CANADA INCH - -
Group B EUROPE U. K AUS. AB_A AB_B
43-10
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the postcard feed cycle
Section
Operation/Procedure
Setting Default
range value
A POSTCARD CYCLE Postcard feed cycle 1 - 99 50
43-20
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the low-temperature, low-
humidity (L/L) environment correction for
the fusing temperature setting of each
paper (SIM43-01).
Section
Operation/Procedure
Setting Default
range value
A HL_UM READY LL Correction value for TH_UM set value in ready standby under LL environment 1 - 99 55
B HL_US READY LL Correction value for TH_US set value in ready standby under LL environment 1 - 99 55
C HL_UM PLAIN BW LL Correction value for black and white plain paper TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
D HL_US PLAIN BW LL Correction value for black and white plain paper TH_US set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
E WARMUP FUMON HL_US T Correction value for fusing motor previous rotation start TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 50
LL
F WARMUP FUMOFF LL Fusing motor prior rotation completion time under LL environment 1 - 99 50
G WARMUP END TIME LL Correction value for warm-up complete time under LL environment 1 - 99 50
H HL_UM THIN LL Correction value for thin paper TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
I HL_US THIN LL Correction value for thin paper TH_US set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
J HL_UM HEAVY LL Correction value for heavy paper TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
K HL_US HEAVY LL Correction value for heavy paper TH_US set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
L HL_UM LABEL LL Correction value for label paper TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
M HL_US LABEL LL Correction value for label paper TH_US set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
N HL_UM OHP LL Correction value for OHP-TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
O HL_US OHP LL Correction value for OHP-TH_US set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
P HL_UM ENV LL Correction value for envelope TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
Q HL_US ENV LL Correction value for envelope TH_US set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
R HL_UM E-STAR LL Correction value for preheating TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
S HL_US E-STAR LL Correction value for preheating TH_US set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
T HL_UM PRE-JOB LL Correction value for the set value of TH_UM when restoring from preheating under LL environment 1 - 99 50
U HL_UM WARMUP_120L LL Correction value for TH_UM set value in Warm-Up at 120 degree Cor below under LL environment 1 - 99 55
V HL_US WARMUP_120L LL Correction value for TH_US set value in Warm-Up at 120 degree C or below under LL environment 1 - 99 55
W LO_WARMUP_TIME_LL Correction value for O, P applying time (timer from Ready complete) under LL environment 1 - 99 50
X HL_UM WARMUP_120H LL Correction value for TH_UM set value in Warm-Up at 120 degree C or above under LL environment 1 - 99 55
Y HL_US WARMUP_120H LL Correction value for TH_US set value in Warm-Up at 120 degree C or above under LL environment 1 - 99 55
Z HI_WU_TIME_LL Correction value for R, S applying time (timer from Ready complete) under LL environment 1 - 99 50
AA HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP_LL Correction value for FM prior rotation start TH_UM in Warm-Up at alpha degree C or above under LL 1 - 99 50
environment
AB HI_WU_END_TIME_LL Correction value for Warm-Up completion time in Warm-Up at alpha degree C or above under LL 1 - 99 50
environment
AC HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP_LL Correction value for Job enable TH_UM temperature (1) when Warm-Up at alpha degree C or above 1 - 99 50
under LL environment
AD HI_WARMUP_BORDER_LL Correction value for the threshold value alpha applying SIM43-1-U - W under LL environment 1 - 99 50
AE LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP_LL Correction value for Job enable TH_UM temperature (1) when Warm-Up at alpha degree C or below 1 - 99 50
under LL environment
AF JOBEND_FUMON_TIME LL Correction value for the after rotation time when completing a job under LL environment 1 - 99 50
AG HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP 2 Correction value for Job enable TH_UM temperature (2) when Warm-Up at alpha degree C or above 1 - 99 50
LL under LL environment
AH LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP 2 Correction value for Job enable TH_UM temperature (2) when Warm-Up at alpha degree C or below 1 - 99 50
LL under LL environment
* WARMUP END TIME LL: 1 count = 1s change
Other correction values: 1 count = 1 degree C change
* Items C/D: Correction of "-5" is made for item C and Item D in the case of B5 size
Code descriptions
* Correction value: (-49 - +49), Input value: Actual input value (1 - 99)
Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 +5 +25 +49

Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
43-22
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the low-temperature, low-
humidity (L/L) environment correction for
the fusing temperature setting of each
paper (SIM43-04).
Section
Operation/Procedure
Setting Default
range value
A HL_UM PLAIN BW DUP LL Correction value for the upper TH_UM black and white plain paper duplex under the LL 1 - 99 55
environment
B HL_US PLAIN BW DUP LL Correction value for the upper TH_US black and white plain paper duplex under the LL 1 - 99 55
environment
C PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT LL Correction value for applying number of sheets in black and white plain paper duplex under LL 1 - 99 50
environment
D HL_UM HEAVY BW DUP LL Correction value for the upper TH_UM set value of black and white heavy paper duplex under the 1 - 99 55
LL environment
E HL_US HEAVY BW DUP LL Correction value for the upper TH_US set value of black and white heavy paper duplex under the 1 - 99 55
LL environment
F HEAVY BW DUP APP CNT LL Correction value for applying number of sheets in black and white heavy paper duplex under LL 1 - 99 50
environment
* PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT LL: 1 count = 1s change

Other correction values: 1 count = 1 degree C change
Code descriptions
* Setting value: Target value (-49 - +49), Input value: (Actual input value) 1 - 99
Setting value -49 -25 -5 0 +5 +25 +49

Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
44
44-1
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set each correction operation func-
tion in the image forming (process) section.
ing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
(The selected item is highlighted.)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
CAUTION: Set the items to the default values unless a change is
specially required.
Item/Display Content Setting range Default value NOTE

MD_VG Membrane decrease (GB) Enable/Disable setting Black text on Enable
MD_DV_LIFE DV life correction (GB, DVB) Enable/Disable setting white Enable
MD_ENV Environment correction (GB, DVB) Enable/Disable setting background Enable
MD_DUPLEX Duplex print correction (GB, DVB) Enable/Disable setting (Inhibit: 0=NO) Enable
White text on
MD_LD Membrane decrease life correction (laser power) Enable/Disable setting Enable
black
MD_LD_ENV Environment correction (laser power) Enable/Disable setting Enable
background
TN_LIFE Enable/Disable setting of the toner density life correction (Allow: 1=YES) Enable
TN_ENV Enable/Disable setting of the toner density environment correction Enable
TN_DUPLEX Toner density duplex print correction Enable/Disable setting disable
TN_COV Enable/Disable setting of the toner density print ratio correction Enable
TN_AREA Enable/Disable setting of the toner density area correction Enable
TN_DRIP Enable/Disable setting of the toner density correction unconditional supply Enable
TC Enable/Disable setting of the transfer output correction Enable
44-9
Purpose Operation data display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the result data of the high
density process control operation.
ing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Operation/Procedure
Select a target display mode with [CPY/PRN], [OTHER] keys.
1 : ‘15/Aug.
Item/Display Default value

Mode Page number Display
(*: Correction Content
range
value) 26/31cpm 35cpm
CPY/ 1/2 REF (TS_OFF) Left GB *** GB/DVB default value when TS is OFF 0 - 750 575 605
PRN*1 (PROCESS) Right DVB *** 0 - 650 400 430
ALL (TS_OFF) Left GB *** GB/DVB value after addition or 0 - 750 575 605
Right DVB *** subtraction of the correction amount 0 - 650 400 430
when TS is OFF
REF (TS_ON_C) Left GB *** Copy GB/DVB default value when TS is 0 - 750 460 460
Right DVB *** ON 0 - 650 320 320
ALL(TS_ON_C) Left GB *** GB/DVB value after addition or 0 - 750 540 540
when Copy TS is ON.
REF (TS_ON_P) Left GB *** Printer GB/DVB default value when TS is 0 - 750 390 390
Right DVB *** ON 0 - 650 250 250
ALL (TS_ON_P) Left GB *** GB/DVB value after addition or 0 - 750 390 390
when Printer TS is ON
MD_VG Left GB *** Drum membrane decrease correction 0 - 255 0 0
amount GB value
MD_DV_LIFE Left GB *** Process developer life correction amount -127 - +127 0 0
Right DVB *** GB/DVB value -127 - +127 0 0
MD_ENV Left GB *** Environment correction amount GB/DVB -127 - +127 0 0
Right DVB *** value -127 - +127 0 0
MD_DUPLEX Left GB *** Duplex print correction amount GB/DVB 0 - 255 0 0
Right DVB *** value 0 - 255 0 0
CPY/ 2/2 (LD) REF (TS_OFF) Left LD (CP) Laser power default value when TS is 0 - 255 For default values refer
PRN*1 Right LD (PRT) OFF (CP/PRT) 0 - 255 to "Default values for
ALL (TS_OFF) Left LD (CP) Laser power value after addition or 0 - 255 each item".
Right LD (PRT) subtraction of the correction amount 0 - 255
when TS is OFF (CP/PRT)
REF (TS_ON_C) Left LD (CP) Laser power default value when TS is ON 0 - 255
Right LD (PRT) (CP/PRT) 0 - 255
ALL (TS_ON_C) Left LD (CP) Laser power value after addition or 0 - 255
Right LD (PRT) subtraction of the correction amount 0 - 255
when Copy TS is ON (CP/PRT)
MD_LD Left LD (CP) Drum membrane decrease laser power -127 - +127 0 0
Right LD (PRT) correction amount (CP/PRT) -127 - +127 0 0
MD_LD_ENV Left LD (CP) Environment laser power correction -127 - +127 0 0
Right LD (PRT) amount (CP/PRT) -127 - +127 0 0
1 OTHER 1/2 TN_TMP_AREA *** Toner control display temperature/ 1-8 4 4
(TN/TC/MD) humidity area
TN_TMP_DATA *** Toner control display temperature AD 0 - 1023 0 0
value
TN_HUD_DATA *** Toner control display humidity AD value 0 - 1023 0 0
TC_TMP_AREA *** Transfer display temperature/humidity 1-8 4 4
area
TC_TMP_DATA *** Transfer display temperature AD value 0 - 1023 0 0
TC_HUD_DATA *** Transfer display humidity AD value 0 - 1023 0 0
MD_VG_AREA *** Membrane decrease drum traveling 1 - 15 1 1
distance area
MD_DV_LIFE_AREA *** Developer life area for process 0 - 15 1 1
MD_ENV_AREA *** Environment correction area 1-8 1 1
MD_DUPLEX_COUNTER *** Duplex counter 0 - 300 0 0
MD_LD_AREA *** Laser power area 0 - 15 1 1
MD_LD_ENV_AREA *** Laser power environment area 0-8 4 4
2/2 DESTINATION Left xx Machine side management CRUM - - -
(CRUM/CNT) destination
MODEL TYPE xx Model type of the machine 0-1 0 0
CRUM DEST_K Right xx Crum destination - - -
*1: The left of the correction amount indicates the execution result, and the right indicates the reference value.
Default values for each item
Default value
Mode Item/Display
35cpm machine 31cpm machine 26cpm machine
CPY/ REF (TS_OFF) LD (CP) 170 160 160
PRN LD (PRT) 170 160 160
ALL (TS_OFF) LD (CP) 170 160 160
LD (PRT) 170 160 160
REF (TS_ON_C) LD (CP) 170 160 160
LD (PRT) 170 160 160
ALL (TS_ON_C) LD (CP) 170 160 160
LD (PRT) 170 160 160
1 : ‘15/Aug.
44-14 46
Purpose Operation data display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the output level of the tem- 46-2
perature and humidity sensor. Purpose Adjustment (Monochrome copy mode)
Section Process (OPC drum, development)/Fusing/ Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density in the copy
LSU mode.
Operation/Procedure
Section
The output levels of the fusing temperature sensor, the machine
Operation/Procedure
temperature sensor, and the humidity sensor are displayed.
Item/ Content Display range panel.
Display 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
TH_UM Fusing upper thermistor main Temperature: * When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
detection temperature 0 - 255 degree C (+/- 1
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
Fusing upper thermistor main degree C)
detection temperature A/D value AD value: 0-1023 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
TH_US Fusing upper thermistor sub Temperature: To adjust the copy density in the low density area, select the "LOW"
detection temperature 0 - 255 degree C (+/- 1 mode and change the adjustment value. To adjust the copy density
Fusing upper thermistor sub degree C) in the high density area, select the "HIGH" mode and change the
detection temperature A/D value AD value: 0-1023 adjustment value.
TH_RA Temperature thermistor Temperature:
Temperature thermistor A/D value - 40.0-60.0 degree C (+/
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is
- 0.1 degree C) increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy den-
AD value: 0-123 sity is decreased.
HUD_RA Humidity sensor Humidity:
Humidity sensor A/D value 5.0-90.0% (+/- 0.1%) Setting Default
AD value: 0-1023 range value
A AUTO1 Auto 1 LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
B AUTO2 Auto 2 LOW 1 - 99 50
44-43 HIGH 1 - 99 50
C TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
Purpose Data display
HIGH 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to display the identification informa- D TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
tion of the developing unit. PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
Section Developing system E TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
Operation/Procedure HIGH 1 - 99 50
F PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
The identification number and the identification signal level of the
HIGH 1 - 99 50
developing unit are displayed.
G PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
Display HIGH 1 - 99 50
Item/Display Content NOTE H MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50
range
A DVCH K developing unit 1-9 The model HIGH 1 - 99 50
KIND K identification identification number of I AUTO1 Auto 1 (copy LOW 1 - 99 50 1
number the developing unit to copy) HIGH 1 - 99 50
which is backed up in J AUTO2 Auto 2 LOW 1 - 99 50
the EEPROM of the (copy to copy) HIGH 1 - 99 50
machine.
K TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
B DV_TYP_ K developing unit 0-1 0 = High (Open) (copy to copy) HIGH 1 - 99 50
SEL_K identification 1 = Low (GND)
L TEXT/PRINTED Text printed LOW 1 - 99 50
detection
PHOTO photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
C DVCH_ K developing unit 0 - 255 AD value of the
(copy to copy)
AD_K identification AD developing unit
M PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo LOW 1 - 99 50
value identification voltage
(copy to copy) HIGH 1 - 99 50
1 : ‘15/Aug.
46-4 46-8
Purpose Adjustment (Color scanner mode) Purpose Adjustment (Color scanner mode)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image send mode color
send mode. balance RGB.
Section Section
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch 1) Select an adjustment target with [R] [G] [B] keys on the touch
panel. panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 2) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each panel.
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
1 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) 4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is The color balance can be adjusted separately for the low density
increased, and vice versa. area and the high density area.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density of the
Setting Default
Mode Item/Display Content target color is increased, and vice versa.
range value
LOW A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50 Default
B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50 Item/Display Content
value
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50 A LOW DENSITY POINT Low density correction amount 50
PHOTO B HIGH DENSITY POINT High density correction amount 50
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
46-9
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50 Purpose Adjustment (RSPF mode)
HIGH A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50 Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scan image density.
B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
Section
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
PHOTO Operation/Procedure
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50 1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50 panel.
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50 * When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
46-5 This adjustment result affects the image send mode, the copy
mode, and the fax mode.
Purpose Adjustment (Monochrome scanner mode)
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image
increased, and vice versa.
send mode.
Section Setting Default
Operation/Procedure range value
A COPY : LOW RSPF copy mode exposure 1 - 99 40
panel.
B SCAN : LOW RSPF scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 40 1
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. adjustment (Low density side)
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each C FAX : LOW RSPF FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 40
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. adjustment (Low density side)
D COPY : HIGH RSPF copy mode exposure 1 - 99 50
adjustment (High density side)
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is E SCAN : HIGH RSPF scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 50
increased, and vice versa. adjustment (Low density side)
F FAX : HIGH RSPF FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 50
Setting Default adjustment (high density)
Mode Item/Display Content
range value
LOW A AUTO TEXT Auto/Text 1 - 99 50
PHOTO
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
HIGH A AUTO TEXT Auto/Text 1 - 99 50
PHOTO
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
46-19 46-32
Purpose Setting Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions for the Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document background
density scanning (exposure) of mono- density reproducibility in the monochrome
chrome auto copy mode documents. auto copy mode.
Section Section
Select an item to be set with touch panel. 1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch
When an item is selected, it is highlighted and the setting change is panel.
saved. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Default
Item/Display Content Set value When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the
value
AE_MODE Auto exposure mode MODE1, MODE2 MODE2 background and the low density image is increased. When the
AE_STOP_COPY Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background
Stop (for copy) STOP/ and the low density image is decreased.
PRESCAN
AE_STOP_FAX Auto B/W exposure ON/OFF ON Setting Default
Stop (for FAX) range value
AE_STOP_SCAN Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP A COPY : OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
Stop (for scanner) STOP/ B COPY : RSPF Copy mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196
PRESCAN C SCAN : OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter SOFT NORMAL D SCAN : RSPF Scanner mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196
setting NORMAL E FAX : OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
SHARP F FAX : RSPF FAX mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196
AE_WIDTH AE exposure width FULL/PART FULL
46-37
46-30 Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the reproduction capability
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the resolution in the sub of monochrome mode color.
scanning direction in the copy mode. Section
Operation/Procedure 1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel.
1) Refer to the following table, and enter the set value corre- 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
sponding to the resolution mode with 10-key. 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) 4) Press [YES] key.
Setting Default This is to adjust the reproduction capability of red and yellow
Item/Display Content images when copying color documents with red and yellow images
range value
A SCAN Scan resolution Mode1 0-1 0 0 in the monochrome mode.
RESOLUTION selection Mode2 1 Applied to the copy mode only.
SW (COPY: COLOR)
Setting Default
range value
Resolution in the sub scanning direction (DPI)
Scan A R-Ratio Gray making setting (R) 0 - 1000 108
25-99% 100-200% 201-400%
Mode B G-Ratio Gray making setting (G) 0 - 1000 678
mode [Magnification [Magnification [Magnification
ratio] ratio] ratio]
Mode1 OC 600 600 1200 B-Ratio Gray making setting (B)
RSPF 600 600 - (1000-R-Ratio - G-Ratio)
Mode2 OC 300 600 1200
* B-Ratio: The value of gray making setting (B) is obtained from
RSPF 400 600 -
the formula below.
1000-R-Ratio - G-Ratio
When [DEFAULT] key is pressed, the values are set to the initial
values (Default).
When the adjustment value of the adjustment item A is increased,
the copy density of red images is decreased. When the adjustment
value is decreased, the density is increased.
When the adjustment value of the adjustment item B is increased,
the copy density of yellow images is increased. When the adjust-
ment value is decreased, the density in also decreased.
46-39 46-41
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
images. (Normal)
Section Section
1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel. 1) Set the document on the document table.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
Input small numeric value to obtain crispy image. Input large When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
numeric value to decrease moire. and the scanned document image is outputted.
Setting Default Setting Default

Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
range value range value
A 200 x 100 [DPI] OFF 200 x 100 [DPI] 0-2 1 A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
halftone OFF B EXPOSURE1 Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
B 200 x 200 [DPI] OFF 200 x 200 [DPI] 0-2 1 C EXPOSURE2 Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
halftone OFF D EXPOSURE3 Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
C 200 x 200 [DPI] ON 200 x 200 [DPI] 0-2 1 E EXPOSURE4 Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
halftone ON F EXPOSURE5 Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
D 200 x 400 [DPI] OFF 200 x 400 [DPI] 0-2 1 G EXECUTE AUTO Print Auto 1-6 1 1
halftone OFF MODE mode Exposure 1 (AUTO)
EXP1 2
E 200 x 400 [DPI] ON 200 x 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
EXP2 Exposure 2 3
halftone ON
EXP3 Exposure 3 4
F 400 x 400 [DPI] OFF 400 x 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
EXP4 Exposure 4 5
halftone OFF
EXP5 Exposure 5 6
G 400 x 400 [DPI] ON 400 x 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
halftone ON
To check the adjustment density level of items A - F, set the docu-
H 600 x 600 [DPI] OFF 600 x 600 [DPI] 0-2 1
ment and set the setting value of item G according to items A - F,
halftone OFF
and press [EXECUTE] key.
I 600 x 600 [DPI] ON 600 x 600 [DPI] 0-2 1
halftone ON
46-40
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
(Collective adjustment of all the modes)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the document on the document table.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
and the scanned document image is outputted.
Setting Default
range value
A EXPOSURE Used to adjust the FAX send 1 - 99 50
LEVEL(ALL) image density. (Collective
adjustment of all the modes)
46-42 46-43
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
(Fine) (Super Fine)
Section Section
1) Set the document on the document table. 1) Set the document on the document table.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
and the scanned document image is outputted. and the scanned document image is outputted.

A AUTO Fine/Automatic 1 - 99 50 A AUTO Super Fine/Auto 1 - 99 50
B EXPOSURE1 Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 B EXPOSURE1 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
C EXPOSURE2 Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50 Exposure 1
D EXPOSURE3 Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50 C EXPOSURE2 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
E EXPOSURE4 Fine/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50 Exposure 2
F EXPOSURE5 Fine/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50 D EXPOSURE3 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
G AUTO H_TONE Fine/Automatic/ 1 - 99 50 Exposure 3
Halftone E EXPOSURE4 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 1/ 1 - 99 50 Exposure 4
Halftone F EXPOSURE5 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 2/ 1 - 99 50 Exposure 5
Halftone G AUTO H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 3/ 1 - 99 50 Auto/Halftone
Halftone H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 4/ 1 - 99 50 Exposure 1/Halftone
Halftone I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 5/ 1 - 99 50 Exposure 2/Halftone
Halftone J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
M EXECUTE AUTO Print Fine/Auto 1- 1 1 Exposure 3/Halftone
MODE EXP1 mode Fine/ 12 2 (AUTO) K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
Exposure 1 Exposure 4/Halftone
EXP2 Fine/ 3 L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
Exposure 2 Exposure 5/Halftone
EXP3 Fine/ 4 M EXECUTE AUTO Print Super Fine/ 1- 1 1
Exposure 3 MODE mode Auto 12 (AUTO)
EXP4 Fine/ 5 EXP1 Super Fine/ 2
Exposure 4 Exposure 1
AUTO Fine/ 7 EXP3 Super Fine/ 4
H_TONE Automatic/ Exposure 3
halftone EXP4 Super Fine/ 5
EXP1 Fine/ 8 Exposure 4
H_TONE Exposure 1/ EXP5 Super Fine/ 6
Halftone Exposure 5
EXP2 Fine/ 9 AUTO Super Fine/ 7
H_TONE Exposure 2/ H_TONE Auto/
Halftone Halftone
H_TONE Exposure 3/ H_TONE Exposure 1/
Halftone Halftone
H_ONE Exposure 4/ H_TONE Exposure 2/
Halftone Halftone
H_TONE Exposure 5/ H_TONE Exposure 3/
Halftone Halftone
EXP4 Super Fine/ 11
To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu- H_TONE Exposure 4/
ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L, Halftone
and press [EXECUTE] key. EXP5 Super Fine/ 12
H_TONE Exposure 5/
Halftone
To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu-

ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L,
and press [EXECUTE] key.
46-44 46-45
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
(Ultra fine) (600dpi).
Section Section
1) Set the document on the document table. 1) Set the document on the document table.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
and the scanned document image is outputted. and the scanned document image is outputted.

A AUTO Ultra Fine/Auto 1 - 99 50 A AUTO 600dpi/Auto 1 1 - 99 50
B EXPOSURE1 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 B EXPOSURE1 600dpi/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
C EXPOSURE2 Ultra Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50 C EXPOSURE2 600dpi/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
D EXPOSURE3 Ultra Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50 D EXPOSURE3 600dpi/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
E EXPOSURE4 Ultra Fine/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50 E EXPOSURE4 600dpi/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
F EXPOSURE5 Ultra Fine/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50 F EXPOSURE5 600dpi/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
G AUTO H_TONE Ultra Fine/Auto/ 1 - 99 50 G AUTO H_TONE 600dpi/Auto/ 1 - 99 50
Halftone Halftone 1
H EXPOSURE1 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50 H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 1/ 1 - 99 50
H_TONE Exposure 1/Halftone Halftone
I EXPOSURE2 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50 I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 2/ 1 - 99 50
J EXPOSURE3 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50 J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 3/ 1 - 99 50
K EXPOSURE4 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50 K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 4/ 1 - 99 50
L EXPOSURE5 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50 L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 5/ 1 - 99 50
M EXECUTE AUTO Print Ultra Fine/ 1- 1 1 M EXECUTE AUTO Print 600dpi/ 1- 1 1
MODE mode Auto 12 (AUTO) MODE mode Auto 12 (AUTO)
EXP1 Ultra Fine/ 2 EXP1 600dpi/ 2
AUTO Ultra Fine/ 7 AUTO 600dpi/ 7
H_TONE Auto/ H_TONE Auto/
Halftone Halftone
H_TONE Exposure 1/ H_TONE Exposure
Halftone 1/Halftone
Halftone 2/Halftone
Halftone 3/Halftone
Halftone 4/Halftone
Halftone 5/Halftone
To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu- To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu-
ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L, ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L,
and press [EXECUTE] key. and press [EXECUTE] key.
46-47 46-60
Function (Purpose) Used to set the compression rate of copy Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sharpness in the color
and scan images (JPEG). auto copy mode.
Section Section
1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel. 1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel.
3) Press [OK] key. 3) Press [OK] key.
The set value is saved. The set value is saved.
Operation Setting Default Setting Default

mode range value range value
FILLING A FILLING LOW Low 0 0 (LOW) A SCREEN H Sharpness Strong 1 3 (Auto)
(COLOR) (C) compression FILTER (filter) emphasis
(COLOR (Color) LEVEL L adjustment Soft 2
mode)*1 MIDDLE Medium 1 of dot emphasis
compression AUTO pattern Auto 3
(Color) image in
HIGH High 2 auto copy
compression mode
(Color) B CPY SOFT Sharpness SOFT 1 2
FILLING B FILLING LOW Low 0 0 (LOW) PUSH CENTER (filter) CENTER 2 (CENTER)
(GRAY) (G) compression AUTO HIGH adjustment HIGH 3
(Mono- (Gray) FILTER for the
chrome MIDDLE Medium 1 LEVEL automatic
halftone compression push scan
mode)*1 (Gray) mode
(Text,
HIGH High 2
Printed
compression
Photo /
(Gray)
Printed
PUSH C SCAN MIDDLE Medium 0 1
Photo
SCAN (C) *1 1 compression (MIDDLE
images)
(COLOR) mode 1 2)
C B/W OFF Soft filter OFF 0 1 (ON)
(Scanner Low
COPY ON applying ON 1
(Color compression
setting in
mode)) MIDDLE Medium 1
monochro
2 compression
me copy
mode 2
mode
Medium
D COLOR OFF Soft filter OFF 0 1 (ON)
compression
PUSH : ON applying ON 1
MIDDLE Medium 2
RGB setting to
3 compression
image in
mode 3
push scan
High
color mode
compression
E B/W OFF Soft filter OFF 0 1 (ON)
PUSH D SCAN MIDDLE Medium 0 1
PUSH ON applying ON 1
SCAN (G) *2 1 compression (MIDDLE
setting to
(GRAY) mode 1 2)
image in
(Scanner Low
push scan
(Mono- compression
monochro
chrome MIDDLE Medium 1 me mode
halftone 2 compression
F B/W OFF Setting of OFF 0 0 (OFF)
mode)) mode 2
PRINT ON ON/OFF of ON 1
Medium
soft filter
compression
application
MIDDLE Medium 2 to
3 compression monochro
mode 3 me print
High images
compression
*1: Disable without HDD.

*2: Setting of compression rate for images when the image
compression rate is set to "Medium" in the user mode.
NOTE: When the compression rate is increased, the HDD capacity
in the document filing mode is decreased. On the other
hand, however, the image quality of some documents may
be remarkably reduced.
46-61 Setting Default
range value
Purpose Adjustment/Setup P SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the area separation recogni- [SCR 1 HIGH] adjustment: High
tion level. density dots
Q SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
Section [SCR 1 MIDDLE] adjustment: Medium
Operation/Procedure density dots
1) Select an adjustment mode. R SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
[SCR 1 LOW] adjustment: Low
2) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
density dots
panel.
S SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 15 8
3) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key. [SCR 2] adjustment: Dot 2
4) Press [OK] key. T SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 15 8
[SCR 3] adjustment: Dot 3
The set value is saved.
U SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
CAUTION: This must be set to the default unless any change is [LINE HALFTONE] adjustment: line
specially required. screen
When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly dif-
ferent from the default value, image quality trouble may
occur for some documents.
46-62
Item/Display Content Purpose Adjustment/Setup
COLOR AUTO [Color/Gray] Auto
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of the
TPP [Color/Gray] Manual (Text print)
ACS, the area separation, the background
COPY(TPP) [Color/Gray] Copy document (Text print)
image process, and the auto exposure
MONO AUTO [Monochrome] Auto
mode.
TPP [Monochrome] Manual (Text print)
COPY(TPP) [Monochrome] Copy document (Text print) Section
Operation/Procedure
Setting Default 1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
Item/Display Content panel.
range value
A SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0 2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
[TXT ON SCR] Text on dot
3) Press [OK] key.
B SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0
[LINE SCR] line screen The set value is saved.
C SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0 CAUTION: This must be set to the default unless any change is
[SMALL SCR] Dot in a small area specially required.
D SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0
When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly dif-
[HIGH LPI] High line number
ferent from the default value, image quality trouble may
judgment select
occur for some documents.
E SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0
[TXT ON SCR IMAGE Text on image send
Setting Default
SEND] dots Item/Display Content
range value
F SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
A SW_ACS ACS judgment reference 0-1 1
[BK TXT 1] adjustment: Black text
area select
1
B TEXT_IMAGE Text/Image judgment 0-6 3
G SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
priority level adjustment
[CL TXT 1] adjustment: Color text
1 C TEXT_BLANK Text/Blank judgment 0-6 4
priority level adjustment
H SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
[BK TXT 2, CL TXT 2] adjustment: Black text D HT_LV Dot area judgment 0-6 1
2, Color text 2 threshold value
adjustment
I SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
[TXT ON SCR 1] adjustment: Text 1 on E AE_AREA_LV Color AE judgment target 0-6 3
dots area adjustment
J SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50 F AE_LV_CC AE background detection 0-8 4
[TXT ON SCR 2] adjustment: Text 2 on division result
dots adjustment:
For color copy
K SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 15 8
[TXT ON SCR AREA] adjustment: Detection G AE_LV_MC AE background detection 0-8 4
area of text on dots division result
adjustment:
L SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
For monochrome copy
[HIGH LPI] adjustment: High line
number judgment H AE_LV_CS AE background detection 0-8 4
division result
M SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
adjustment:
[BK] adjustment: No
For color scan
chrome judgment
I AE_LV_MS AE background detection 0-8 4
N SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
division result
[CL] adjustment: Chrome
adjustment:
judgment
For monochrome scan
O SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
J AE_JUDGE_ Color AE background 0-4 0
[TXT ON BG] adjustment: Text on
LV_L_U density threshold value
background
adjustment (lower limit)
K AE_JUDGE_ Color AE background 0 - 10 0 J COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
LV_L_O density threshold value PRINTED PHOTO (COPY Printed photo
adjustment (upper limit) TO COPY) (color copy)
L AE_JUDGE_ Color AE background 0 - 10 5 K COLOR PUSH : Text print 1-9 3
LV_C detection level TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH)
adjustment (chroma) L COLOR PUSH : TEXT Text (color PUSH) 1-9 3
M AE_ ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON) M COLOR PUSH : Printed photo 1-9 5
ONOFF_ OFF OFF switch: OFF 1 PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH)
CC For color copy N COLOR PUSH : Photograph 1-9 5
N AE_ ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON) PHOTOGRAPH (color PUSH)
ONOFF_ OFF OFF switch: OFF 1 O COLOR PUSH : Text/Photograph 1-9 3
MC For mono- TEXT/PHOTO (color PUSH)
chrome copy P COLOR PUSH : MAP Map (color PUSH) 1-9 5
O AE_ ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON)
ONOFF_ OFF OFF switch : OFF 1
CS For color scan
P AE_ ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON)
ONOFF_ OFF switch :
MS
OFF
For mono-
OFF 1
48
chrome copy
Q BLANK_JUDGE_ Blank judgment level 0 - 10 0 48-1
LV_L adjustment (value)
Purpose Adjustment
R BLANK_JUDGE_ Blank judgment level 0 - 10 0
LV_C adjustment (chroma) Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scan image magnifica-
S MODE0_UNDER Mode 0 developing 0-6 0 tion ratio (in the main scanning direction
paper mode select and the sub scanning direction).
T MODE1_UNDER Mode 1 developing 0-6 0
Section
paper mode select
U MODE5_UNDER Mode 5 developing 0-6 0 Operation/Procedure
paper mode select 1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
V MODE6_UNDER Mode 6 developing 0-6 0 panel.
paper mode select 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.
46-63 When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnification
Purpose Adjustment/Setup ratio is increased.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the copy low A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item A, C, or E corre-
density section. sponds to a change of about 0.02% in the copy magnification ratio.
Section A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item B, D, or F corre-
sponds to a change of about 0.1% in the copy magnification ratio.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch Setting Default
panel. range value
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key. A CCD (MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio adjustment
3) Press [OK] key. (CCD)
The set value is saved. B CCD (SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the magnification ratio adjustment
background and the low density image is increased. When the (CCD)
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background C SPF (MAIN) RSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50
and the low density image is decreased. magnification ratio adjustment
(Main scan)
Setting Default D SPF (SUB) RSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50
Item/Display Content magnification ratio adjustment
range value
(Sub scan)
A COLOR COPY : Text print 1-9 3
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO (color copy) E SPFB (MAIN) RSPF document back surface 1 - 99 50
B COLOR COPY : TEXT Text (color copy) 1-9 3
(Main scan)
C COLOR COPY : Printed photo 1-9 5
F SPFB (SUB) RSPF document back surface 1 - 99 50
PRINTED PHOTO (color copy)
D COLOR COPY : Photograph 1-9 5
(Sub scan)
PHOTOGRAPH (color copy)
E COLOR COPY : Text/Photograph 1-9 3
TEXT/PHOTO (color copy)
F COLOR COPY : MAP Map (color copy) 1-9 5
G COLOR COPY : LIGHT Light document 1-9 6
(color density)
H COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Character print
I COLOR COPY : TEXT Copy document, 1-9 5
(COPY TO COPY) Character
(color copy)
1 : ‘15/Aug.
48-5
49
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to correction the scan image magnifi-
49-1
cation ratio (in the sub scanning direction).
Purpose
Section Scanner section
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the firmware update.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch Section
panel. Operation/Procedure
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 1) Save the firmware to the USB memory.
3) Press [OK] key. 2) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. (Use USB I/F of the
The set value is saved. operation panel section.)
When the image magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is 3) Select a target firmware file for update with the touch panel.
adjusted with SIM48-1, and a different magnification ratio is speci- 4) Select a target firmware.
fied, and the image magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform Press [ALL] key to select all the Firmware collectively.
this adjustment. 5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
When there is an error in the image magnification ratio in reduction, 6) Press [YES] key.
change the adjustment value in the high speed mode. When there
The selected firmware is updated.
is an error in the image magnification ratio in enlargement, change
the adjustment value in the low speed mode. When the operation is normally completed, "COMPLETE" is
displayed. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is dis-
Setting Default played.
range value
A MR (HI) Scanner motor (High speed) 1 - 99 50 Error display in
case of abnormality
B MR(MID) Scanner motor (Reference speed) 1 - 99 50
ICU (MAIN) ICU Main section ICUM
C MR(LO) Scanner motor (Low speed) 1 - 99 50
ICU (BOOTM) ICU Boot section main ICUBM
D SPF(HI) Document feed (SPF) motor 1 - 99 50
(High speed) ICU (BOOTCN) ICU Boot section CN ICUCN
E SPF(MID) Document feed (SPF) motor 1 - 99 50 ICU (SUB) ICU Sub section (ARM9) ICUS
(Reference speed) LANGUAGE Language support data LANG
program
GRAPHIC Graphic data for L-LCD GRAPH
SLIST SLIST data for L-LCD SLIST
48-6 PCU (BOOT) PCU Boot section PCUB
PCU (MAIN) PCU Main section PCUM
Purpose Adjustment
FIN (BOOT) Inner finisher boot section FINB
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the rotation speed of each FIN (MAIN) Inner finisher main section FINM
motor. SCU (BOOT) SCU Boot section SCUB
Section SCU (MAIN) SCU Main section SCUM
1 FAX (BOOT) FAX1 Boot section FAXB
Operation/Procedure
FAX (MAIN) FAX1 Main section FAXM
1) Select an adjustment target mode with [COLOR] [MONO]
ANIMATION Animation data ANIME
[HEAVY] keys on the touch panel.
WEB HELP WEB help WEBHP
2) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
4) Press [OK] key. 49-3
The set value is saved. Purpose
When the adjustment value is increased, the speed is increased, Function (Purpose) Used to update the operation manual in the
and vice versa. A change of 1 in the adjustment value corresponds HDD.
to a change of about 0.1% in the speed. Section
Operation/Procedure
Item/ Setting Default
Content 1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
Display range value
A POM Paper exit motor correction value 1 - 99 50 * When the USB is not inserted, "INSERT A STORANGE E-
B ADUM ADU motor correction value 1 - 99 50 MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK] key is
C MM Main motor correction value 1 - 99 50 pressed, the display is shifted to the folder select menu 1.
2) Press the folder button of the operation manual data. (The dis-
play is shifted to the operation manual update menu.)
The current version and the update version are displayed.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted, and [YES] [NO] keys becomes
active from gray out.
4) When [YES] key is pressed, the selected operation manual is
updated.
When update is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is dis-
played. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is displayed.
1 : ‘15/Aug.

range value
Purpose M Sub DENB- Manual feed correction 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the watermark update. scanning MFT value
N direction DENB- Tray 1 correction value 1 - 99 50
Section print area CS1
Operation/Procedure O correction DENB- Tray 2 correction value 1 - 99 50
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. value CS2
2) Select the button of the folder to perform the watermark P DENB- Tray 3 correction value 1 - 99 50
update. CS3
Q DENB- Tray 4 correction value 1 - 99 50
3) The current version and the update version are displayed. CS4
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. R DENB- ADU correction value 1 - 99 55
5) Press [YES] key. ADU
The selected watermark is updated. S DENB-HV Heavy paper 1 - 99 50
correction value
A. (RRC-A) Timing from starting document scanning to specifying

the image lead edge reference is adjusted. (01.mm/step)
50 * When the value is decreased, the timing is advanced. When
the value is increased, the timing is delayed.
B - F. (RRC-B) The timing to turning ON the registration roller after
50-1
receiving the registration signal is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
Purpose Adjustment
* When the value is decreased, the timing is delayed. When the
Function (Purpose) Copy image position, image loss adjust- value is increased, the timing is advanced.
ment G. (LEAD) The lead edge image loss amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/
1 Section step)
Operation/Procedure * When the value is increased, the image loss is increased.
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch H. (SIDE) The side image loss amount is adjusted.
panel. * When the value is increased, the image loss is increased.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. (0.1mm/step)
Set the items other than RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the I. (DEN-A) The paper lead edge void amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/
default. step)
RRCA: Image lead edge reference position adjustment * When the value is increased, the void is increased.
LEAD: Lead edge image loss adjustment J. (DEN-B) The paper rear edge void amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/
SIDE: Side image loss adjustment step)
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) * When the value is increased, the void is increased.
K. (FRONT/REAR) The void amount on the right and left edges of
Setting Default paper is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
range value
A Lead edge RRCA Document lead edge 0 - 99 50
adjust- reference position
ment value (OC)
B RRCB- Regis- Cassette 1 - 99 40
CS1 tration
C RRCB- motor ON Cassette 1 - 99 40
CS234 timing 2,3,4*
D RRCB- adjust- Manual 1 - 99 40
MFT ment paper feed
E RRCB- ADU 1 - 99 40
ADU
F Image loss LEAD Lead edge image loss 0 - 99 30
area area setting
G setting SIDE Side image loss area 0 - 99 20
value adjustment
H Void area DENA Lead edge void area 1 - 99 30
adjust- adjustment
I ment DENB Rear edge void area 1 - 99 40
adjustment
J FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 20
K Off-center OFFSET_ OC document off- 1 - 99 50
adjust- OC center adjustment
ment
L Magnificati SCAN_ SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
on ratio SPEED_ magnification ratio
correction OC adjustment (CCD)
50-5
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the print lead edge image
position. (PRINTER MODE)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment item (DEN-C) with scroll key on the
touch panel.
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
The set value is saved, and the adjustment check pattern is
printed.
4) Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment
pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is
in the standard adjustment value range.
Standard reference value: 4.0±2.0mm
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the
paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, the distanced is decreased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by
about 0.1mm.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content NOTE
range value
A DEN-C Used to adjust the print lead edge image 1 - 99 30 Adjustment value too align the print lead edge for the
position. printer. When the adjustment value of this item is
(PRINTER MODE) decreased by 1, the printer print start position in the paper
transport direction is shifted to the lead edge by 0.1mm.
B DEN-B Rear edge void area adjustment 1 - 99 40 Void amount generated at the paper rear edge. When the
adjustment value of item B (DEN-B) is decreased by 1, the
print area adjustment value in the sub scanning direction
for the paper transport direction is decreased by 0.1mm.
C FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void area adjustment 1 - 99 20 Adjustment of the void amount generated on the left and
right edges of paper. When the adjustment value is
increased, the void amount is increased.
D DENB-MFT Manual feed rear edge void area adjustment 1 - 99 50
correction value
E DENB-CS1 Tray 1 rear edge void area adjustment 1 - 99 50
correction value
F DENB-CS2 Tray 2 rear edge void area adjustment 1 - 99 50
correction value
G DENB-CS3 Tray 3 rear edge void area adjustment 1 - 99 50
correction value
H DENB-CS4 Tray 4 rear edge void area adjustment 1 - 99 50
correction value
I DENB-ADU ADU rear edge void aria adjustment 1 - 99 55
correction value
J DENB-HV Heavy paper correction value 1 - 99 50
K MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
L PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-5 1 2 (CS1)
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
M DUPLEX YES Duplex print selection Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
NO No 1
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the adjustment
value is decreased, the distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge is decreased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by about 0.1mm.
1 : ‘15/Aug.
50-6
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position and
the image loss. (RSPF mode)
Section RSPF
Operation/Procedure
panel.
Setting Default
range value
A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50
document scan
1 position
adjustment (CCD)
B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50
document scan
position
adjustment (CCD)
C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead 0 - 99 20
setting
SIDE1
D Image FRONT_REAR Front surface side 0 - 99 20
loss (SIDE1) image loss amount
amount setting
E setting TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear 0 - 99 40
SIDE1 (SIDE1) edge image loss
amount setting
G setting FRONT_REAR Back surface side 0 - 99 20
setting
H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 - 99 40
amount setting
I OFSET_SPF1 SPF front surface 1 - 99 50
document off-
center adjustment
J OFSET_SPF2 SPF back surface 1 - 99 50
document off-
center adjustment
K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 RSPF document 1 - 99 50
front surface
magnification ratio
(Sub scan)
back surface
magnification ratio
(Sub scan)
Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan timing

is delayed.
Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
is increased.
Item E - H: When a shadow image appears on the rear edge,
increase the adjustment value to delete the shadow.
Item A - H: 1 step = 0.1mm change
50-10
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the black print image magni-
fication ratio and the off-center position.
(The adjustment is made separately for
each paper feed section.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
panel.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
Item/Display Content Setting range Default value NOTE

A MAIN-MFT Print off center adjustment value (Manual paper feed) 1 - 99 50 Adjustment Item
B MAIN-CS1 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 1) 1 - 99 50 List
C MAIN-CS2 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 2) 1 - 99 50
D MAIN-CS3 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 3) 1 - 99 50
E MAIN-CS4 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 4) 1 - 99 50
F MAIN-ADU Print off center adjustment value (Duplex) 1 - 99 50
CAUTION: If the adjustment items A - F are not properly adjusted,
this adjustment cannot be executed properly.
G SUB-MFT Registration motor ON timing adjustment Manual paper feed 1 - 99 40
H SUB-CS12 Standard cassette 1 - 99 40
I SUB-DSK DESK 1 - 99 40
J SUB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 40
K MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1 Adjustment pattern
L PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-5 1 2 (CS1) print conditions
CS1 Tray 1 2 setting
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
M DUPLEX YES Duplex print selection Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
NO No 1
Item A - F: When the adjustment value is increased, it is shifted to the front frame side. When the adjustment value is decreased, it is shifted to
the rear frame side. 1 step = 0.1mm change
50-12
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scan image off-center
position adjustment. (The adjustment is
made separately for each scan mode.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
panel.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image position is
shifted to the rear frame side. When the adjustment value is
decreased, it is shifted to the front frame side.
1step = 0.1mm
Item/Display Content Setting range Default value

A OC Document table image off-center adjustment 1 - 99 50
B SPF (SIDE1) SPF front surface image off-center adjustment 1 - 99 50
C SPF (SIDE2) SPF back surface image off-center adjustment 1 - 99 50
1 : ‘15/Aug.
50-27
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the image loss adjustment
of scanned images in the FAX or image
send mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment mode with [FAX] or [SCANNER]
key.
panel.

FAX send A Image loss LEAD_EDGE (OC) OC lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 30 (3mm)
B amount setting FRONT_REAR (OC) OC side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
C OC TRAIL_EDGE (OC) OC rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
D Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
E amount setting FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
F SPF SIDE1 TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 30 (3mm)
G Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
H amount setting FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
I SPF SIDE2 TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 30 (3mm)
When A Image loss LEAD_EDGE (OC) OC lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
image B amount setting FRONT_REAR(OC) OC side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
send mode C OC TRAIL_EDGE(OC) OC rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
(Except for D Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
FAX and amount setting
E FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
copy) SPF SIDE1
F TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE1) Front surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
G Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
H amount setting FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
I SPF SIDE2 TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE2) Back surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
1
A-I: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is increased.
1step = 0.1mm
50-28 Item/Display Content Section

Purpose Adjustment SPF ADJ ALL SIDE1 MFT Document lead edge Scanner
(RSPF) (Front
Function (Purpose) Used to automatically adjust the image surface) Document off-center
loss, void area, image off-center, and image SIDE2 CS1
magnification ratio. (Back Sub scanning
surface) magnification ratio
Section
CS2
Operation/Procedure
MFT
The following adjustment items can be executed automatically with
CS1
SIM50-28.
CS2
* ADJ 12 Print image position, image magnification ratio, void
area, off-center adjustments (Manual adjustments)
* ADJ 13 Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Manual Item/Display Content Section
adjustment) SETUP/ ALL LEAD MFT Print off center Engine
PRINT CS1
* ADJ 14 Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment) ADJ Print lead edge
CS2
* ADJ 15 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image ADU
loss (Manual adjustments) CS3
1) Select an adjustment item with the menu button. CS4
2) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is printed. OFF MFT
SET CS1
3) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.
CS2
4) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is scanned.
ADU
5) Press [OK] key. CS3
Item/Display Content Section

OC ADJ MFT Document lead edge Scanner
CS1 Document off-center
CS2 Sub scanning magnification ratio
1 : ‘15/Aug.
1 51 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
When the adjustment value is decreased, the transfer ON/OFF
51-1 timing for the paper is advanced. When the adjustment value
is increased, the timing is delayed. When the adjustment value
Purpose Adjustment
is changed by 1, the timing is changed by about 2ms. The set-
Function (Purpose) Adjust the ON/OFF timing of the transfer ting range is -98 - +98ms.
current.
Section Default
value
Operation/Procedure
A TC ON Transfer current ON timing setting 50
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch TIMING
panel. B TC OFF Transfer current OFF timing 50
TIMING setting

51-2
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflec-
tion amount) on paper by the main unit and
the RSPF registration roller. (This adjust-
ment is performed when there is a consid-
erable variation in the print image position
on the paper or when paper jams frequently
occur.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) (When RSPF model)
Select a target adjustment mode with [SIDE1] or [SIDE2] or
[ENGINE] keys.
2) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.
Setting Default
Mode Display/Item Content
range value
SIDE1 A NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment value - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Plain paper/HIGH)
B NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment value - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Plain paper/LOW)
C NORMAL_THIN_HIGH RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment value - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Thin paper/HIGH)
D NORMAL_THIN_LOW RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment value - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Thin paper/LOW)
E RANDOM_PLAIN_HIGH RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment value - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Plain paper/HIGH)
F RANDOM_PLAIN_LOW RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment value - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Plain paper/LOW)
G RANDOM_THIN_HIGH RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment value - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Thin paper/HIGH)
H RANDOM_THIN_LOW RSPF front surface document deflection amount adjustment value - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Thin paper/LOW)
SIDE2 A NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH_1 RSPF back surface document deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Plain paper/HIGH)
B NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW_1 RSPF back surface document deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Plain paper/LOW)
ENGINE A TRAY1(S) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 25
(Plain paper/Small size) or less
B TRAY1(L) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 25
(Plain paper/Large size) or above
C TRAY2(S) Main unit cassette 2 (Lower stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 50
D TRAY2(L) Main unit cassette 2 (Lower stage)/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 50
E MANUAL PLAIN PAPER (S) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Small size) LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 50
or less
Setting Default
Mode Display/Item Content
range value
ENGINE F MANUAL PLAIN PAPER (L) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Large size) LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 50
or above
G MANUAL HEAVY PAPER (S) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 50
(Heavy paper/Small size) or less
H MANUAL HEAVY PAPER (L) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 50
(Heavy paper/Large size) or above
I MANUAL OHP Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (OHP) - 1 - 99 50
J MANUAL ENV Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (Envelope) - 1 - 99 50
K MANUAL LBL Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (Label paper) - 1 - 99 50
L ADU PLAIN PAPER (S) ADU/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 50
M ADU PLAIN PAPER (L) ADU/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 50
N DESK (S) DESK/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 50
O DESK (L) DESK/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 50
Note on “Large size” and “Small size”

Small size: The paper length in the transport direction is shorter than the LT size (216mm).
Large size: The paper length in the transport direction is longer than the LT size (216mm).
Adjustment value
When the adjustment value is increased, the warp amount is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the warp amount is
decreased.
(When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the stop timing is changed by 0.1mm.)

51-9
7) Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the minimum width.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the
separation voltage.
The minimum width detection level is recognized.
Section
When the above operation is nor performed normally, "ERROR" is
Operation/Procedure displayed and. When the above operation is completed normally,
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key. "COMPLETE" is displayed.
1 TRAYVOLMAX Tray size volume maximum value
2 TRAYVOLA4R Tray volume A4R size adjustment value
Setting Default 3 TRAYVOLA5R Tray volume A5R size adjustment value
Item Display Content 4 TRAYVOLMIN Tray size volume minimum value
range value
A DHV ON Separation voltage ON/OFF 1 - 99 50
timing adjustment
B DHV OFF Separation voltage OFF timing 1 - 99 50
adjustment 53-7
When the adjustment value is increased, the timing is delayed.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the timing is changed Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the RSPF document size
by about 4ms. The setting range is -196 - +196ms. width sensor.
Section
Operation/Procedure
53 panel.
53-6 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Purpose Adjustment
Setting Default
Item/Display
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the detection level of the range value
RSPF document width. A AD_MAX Max. width position 0 - 1023 84
Section B AD_P1 A4R width position 0 - 1023 509
C AD_P2 A5R width position 0 - 1023 808
Operation/Procedure
D AD_MIN Min. width position 0 - 1023 961
1) Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width.
The maximum width detection level is recognized.
3) Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the A4R width.
5) Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the A5R width.
range value
Purpose Adjustment
MEASUREMENT Document lead edge 0-255 -
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document lead edge ref- DISTANCE measurement distance (0.1mm unit)
erence and the RSPF mode document RRCA Document lead edge 0 - 99 50
scan position. reference position
Section
MANUAL: RSPF mode document scan position adjustment
Operation/Procedure
Select an adjustment item with [AUTO] [MANUAL] key.
AUTO: Document lead edge reference (RRCA) adjustment
(Auto adjustment) Setting Default
1) Set a sheet of black paper of A4 or 11"x 8.5" on the document range value
table. A ADJUST RSPF mode document scan 1 - 99 5
VALUE position adjustment (Scanner
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment is performed and the
stop position adjustment)
adjustment value is saved.)
* When the adjustment value is increased, the scanner stop posi-
tion in the RSPF mode is shifted to the right.
* When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the position is
shifted by 0.1mm.
53-9
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Set dirt detection for SPF scanning posi-
tion.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Setting Default
Item/Display item, Details of display Content
range value
A DIRT_ALARM_SET SPF front surface optimum scan position detection setting (when OFF 0-1 0 0
starting) ON 1 (OFF)
B SIDEA_SCAN_POSIION _SET_START SPF front surface optimum scan position detection setting (After a OFF 0-1 0 0
job) ON 1 (OFF)
C SIDEA_SCAN_POSITION_SET_JOB SPF front surface optimum scan position detection level setting WEAK 0-1 0 1
MIDDLE 1 (ON)
STRONG 2
D SIDEA_SCAN_POSITION_LV OC dirt level setting WEAK 0-2 0 1
MIDDLE 1 (MIDDLE)
STRONG 2
E OC_DIRT_LV SPF front surface dirt alarm level setting WEAK 0-2 0 1
MIDDLE 1 (MIDDLE)
STRONG 2
F SIDEA_DIRT_ALARM_LV SPF back surface dirt alarm level setting WEAK 0-2 0 1
MIDDLE 1 (MIDDLE)
STRONG 2
G SIDEA_DIRT_SHADING_SET SPF front surface streak delete shading setting OFF 0-1 0 1
ON 1 (ON)
53-10
Function (Purpose) SPF dirt detection execution.
Section
Operation/Procedure
SPF SIDEA SPF front surface dirt detection position (main scan
position 1 to 8) "-": No dirt, A"*": Dirt
OC OC surface dirt detection position (main scan
position 1 to 8) "-": No dirt, "*": Dirt
Setting Default
range value
H TYPE PATTERN Print Edging 0 1
1 com- type
55-1 posing
PATTERN OR 1
Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially 2 method process
required.) type
PATTERN No- 2
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the engine
3 delete-
control operations. (SOFT SW)
compo-
Section sition type
Operation/Procedure Input value
Print Blank A B C E F G
55-2
Input value 32 65 66 67 69 70 71
Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially
required.) Print H I J K L M N
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the scan- Input value 72 73 74 75 76 77 78
ner control operation. (SOFT SW)
Section Print O P Q R T U V
Input value 79 80 81 82 84 85 86
Operation/Procedure
Print W X Y Z 0 1 2
55-3 Input value 87 88 89 90 48 49 50
Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially
required.) Print 3 5 6 7 8 9
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the control- Input value 51 53 54 55 56 57
ler operation. (SOFT SW)
Section
Operation/Procedure
56
56-1
55-10 Purpose Backup
Purpose Adjustment/Setting Function (Purpose) Used to transport data between HDD - MFP
Function (Purpose) Used to set the special stamp text. (Taiwan PWB SRAM/EEPROM. (Used to repair the
only) PWB.)
Section Section
1) Select an item to be set (digit, color, type) with the scroll key. 1) Select a target content of data transfer.
2) Enter the value corresponding to the setting item with 10-key. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key and press [YES] key.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) Data transfer of the item selected in procedure 1) is executed.
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
Setting Default displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
range value
A 1ST DIGIT First digit (left edge) 1 - 90 1 EEPROM -> HDD Transfer from EEPROM to HDD
B 2ND DIGIT Second digit HDD -> EEPROM Transfer from HDD to EEPROM
C 3RD DIGIT Third digit 32 [blank:
20H]
D 4TH DIGIT Fourth digit 65 - 90
[Alphabet:
41H("A) -
5AH("Z")]
E 5TH DIGIT Fifth digit 48 - 57
[Numeral:
30H("0") -
39H("9")]
F 6TH DIGIT Sixth digit (right
edge)
G COLOR K Color specification 0 0
C input 1
M 2
Y 3
R 4
G 5
B 6
56-2 Classifi-
Content NOTE
cation
Purpose Data backup Operation E-manual
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the data in the EEPROM. manual
SD Card, and HDD (including user authen-
tication data and address data) to the USB 56-3
memory. (Corresponding to the device Purpose Data backup
cloning and the storage backup.)
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the document filing data to
Section the USB memory.
Operation/Procedure
Section
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
Operation/Procedure
2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel.
<IMPORT>
2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel.
From USB MEMORY DEVICE To EEPROM, SD Card HDD
<IMPORT>
<EXPORT> From USB MEMORY DEVICE to EEPROM, SD Card, HDD
From EEPROM, SD Card, HDD To USB MEMORY
<EXPORT>
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
From EEPROM, SD Card, HDD to USB MEMORY DEVICE
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed.
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
Machine with the DSK installed
2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel. 56-4
* IMPORT Purpose Data backup
From USB MEMORY DEVICE to EEPROM, SD Card HDD Function (Purpose) Used to backup the JOB log data to the
* EXPORT USB memory.
From EEPROM, SD Card, HDD to USB MEMORY DEVICE Section
3) Enter the password with 10-key. Operation/Procedure
4) Press [SET] key. 1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
5) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key. 2) Press [JOB LOG EXPORT] key.
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed. 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed.
Data list outside the backup targets displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
EEPROM/SD Card
PWB Type Content NOTE

Controller Machine serial No.
56-5
Product key information Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Various counter Copy counter/FAX Function (Purpose) Used to import the SIM22-6 data to a USB
send counter etc. memory in the TEXT format.
Trouble history
PCU Machine serial No.
Section
Various counter Maintenance counter Operation/Procedure
Machine adjustment execute 1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
history 2) Select a kind of data to be imported.
Trouble history
SCU Various counter Maintenance counter
Trouble history Procedure 2) The selected data are imported.
HDD displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
Classifi-
Content NOTE
cation
Japanese User dictionary 56-6
FEP Purpose Operation data check
Job end list Job end list display data
(The image send series include Function (Purpose) Import the SIM23-2 data to a USB memory
the preserved job list.) in the TEXT format.
Log Job log Read from WEB is Section HDD
enable.
Operation/Procedure
New N/A * Print history information
* JAM history information 1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
* Trouble history information 2) Select a kind of data to be imported.
* Same position continuous jam 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
count value
* Charging information
* Life information
1 : ‘15/Aug.
56-7
60
Function (Purpose) Import the syslog data to a USB memory.
60-1
Section HDD
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to check the memory operations
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. (read/write) of the MFP PWB.
2) Select SYSLOG EXPORT to be imported.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Start the test.
56-11
Purpose Data copy Result display Description
Function (Purpose) Used to save the data in the SD card to the OK Success
HDD temporarily. NG Fail
NONE Not installed (Including DIMM trouble)
Section INVALID Execution disable
Operation/Procedure
1
1) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key. SLOT Description
The data are saved temporarily to the HDD. ICU SLOT-1 ICU standard memory DIMM1
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is ICU SLOT-2 ICU expansion memory DIMM2
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed. PCL SLOT-1 Printer standard memory DIMM3
Error display Content

COMPLETE Normal completion 61
WARNING HDD unmounting
ERROR (HDD ACCESS ERROR) HDD access disable
ERROR (LOW LEVEL BLOCK Low level block IO error: write 61-1
WRITE ERROR) Purpose Operation test/check
ERROR (LOW LEVEL BLOCK Low level block IO error: read
Function (Purpose) Used to check the LSU polygon motor rota-
READ ERROR)
tion and laser detection.
ERROR (NO DATA ADJUSTMENT) Inconsistent data
TROUBLE (U2-42) U2-42 occurrence Section LSU
Operation/Procedure
56-12 When the operation is completed normally, [OK] is displayed.
In case of an abnormal end, [NG] is displayed.
Purpose Data copy
Function (Purpose) Used to copy the SD card data saved tem- Display Content
porarily in the HDD with SIM56-11 to the LSU TESTRESULT NG: PG Polygon mirror rotation abnormality
machine. LSU TESTRESULT NG: K Laser abnormality (K)
Section
Operation/Procedure
The set values are copied from the HDD to the SD card.

COMPLETE Normal completion
WARNING SD/HDD unmounting
NO DATA No data
ERROR (EXPORT DATA ILLEGAL) Export data illegal
ERROR (LOW LEVEL BLOCK Low level block IO error: read
READ ERROR)
ERROR (NO DATA ADJUSTMENT) Inconsistent data (Error at the verify
check)
ERROR (SD ACCESS ERROR) SD access error (File IO error)
61-3
Function (Purpose) Used to set the laser power
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target mode for adjustment with [COPY], [PR600/
FAX], [PR1200] on the touch panel.
panel.
When the laser power and the DUTY adjustment value are
increased, the print density is increased and the line width of
line images are increased.
Default value
Setting 26/31 35cpm Destination
Mode Item/Display Content
range cpm machine linkage
machine
COPY A LASER POWER (BW) Laser power setting/BW 0 - 255 160 170 ✕
B LASER POWER TS (BW) Laser power setting toner save/BW 0 - 255 160 170 ✕
PR600/FAX A LASER POWER (BW) Laser power setting/BW 0 - 255 160 170 ✕
PR1200 A LASER POWER (BW) Laser power setting/BW 0 - 255 160 170 ✕
62
62-6
62-1 Purpose Operation test/check
Purpose Data clear Function (Purpose) Used to perform the self diagnostics of the
hard disk.
Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (HDD:
Excluding the Operation manual and the Section
watermark data) Operation/Procedure
Section 1) Select the self diag area.
Operation/Procedure 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. The self diag operation is performed.
2) Press [YES] key. NOTE: E7-03 error occurs. If there may be a trouble in the HDD,
Used to execute the HDD format. use this simulation to cheek the HDD.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
SHORT S.T Partial area diag
normal display.
EXTENDED S.T All area diag

62-2 normal display.
Purpose Operation test/check Normal completion -> "OK (RESULT:0)" is displayed.
Abnormal end -> "NG (RESULT: Other than 0)" is displayed.
Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk
(partial). * If the simulation cannot be executed or terminated abnormally for
some reason, "ERROR" is displayed on the corresponding sec-
Section tion.
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key. 62-7
Function (Purpose) Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics
62-3 error log.
Purpose Operation test/check Section
Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk Operation/Procedure
(all areas).
Section ERROR LOG SECTOR of the SMART function is executed, and
Operation/Procedure the result is printed.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
2) Press [YES] key. normal display.
Read/write operations are performed.
62-8 62-13
Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (HDD: Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (Operation
Excluding the Operation Manual, the water- Manual, watermark data only)
mark data, and the system area) Section
Operation/Procedure 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key. The operation manual data are deleted.
Used to execute the hard disk format. When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.
normal display.
* When the HDD formatting (except for the system area) is not
completed normally, "HDD FORMAT (EXCEPT SYSTEM AREA) 62-14
NG" is displayed.
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to initialize (remake) only the data-
base file of the HDD.
62-10
Section HDD
Purpose Data clear
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the job completion list data.
Section 2) Press [YES] key.
Operation/Procedure The database file is initialized
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
2) Press [YES] key. normal display.
Used to delete the job log data.
normal display.
62-11
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to delete the document filing data.
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
Used to delete the document filing data.
normal display.
62-12
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format
in a hard disk trouble.
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [OK] key.
When it is set to Enable, if a read error of HDD occurs in the system
data storage area (FAX/device cloning data, etc.), only the system
data storage area is cleared.
A 0 Enable
1 Disable (Default)
Operation/Procedure
63 1) Place the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1)
on the reference position of the left rear frame side of the doc-
ument table.
63-1
2) Select a target color of data display with [R] [G] [B] keys, and
press [OC] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to display the shading correction 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
result.
The scanner (CCD) color balance automatic adjustment is per-
Section Scanner formed.
Operation/Procedure When the operation is completed, data are displayed on the initial
1) Select a target color to display with [R] [G] [B] on the touch screen.
panel.

ANALOG GAIN Analog gain adjustment value (odd
63-4
ODD number) Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
ANALOG GAIN Analog gain adjustment value (even Function (Purpose) Used to display the SIT chart patch density.
EVEN number)
DIGITAL GAIN ODD Digital gain adjustment value (odd Section
number) Operation/Procedure
DIGITAL GAIN Digital gain adjustment value (even 1) Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) to
EVEN number) the reference position on the left rear frame side of the docu-
SMP AVE ODD Reference plate sampling average ment table.
value (ODD)
SMP AVE EVEN Reference plate sampling average
2) Select a target color of data display with [R] [G] [B] keys, and
value (EVEN) press [OC] key.
TARGET VALUE Target value 3) Select a data display mode.
BLACK LEVEL Black output level GAMMA THROUGH SIT chart scan data
COPY GAMMA Copy mode gamma process data of the SIT chart
ERROR CODE Error code 0 scan data
(0, 1-14) 1 SCANNER GAMMA Image send mode gamma process data of the SIT
(for debug) 2 chart scan data
3 SIT CHECK SIT chart scan data/Check result
4
5
6
The patch of the SIT chart is scanned.
7 When the operation is completed, data are displayed on the
8 initial screen.
9
10 63-5
11 Purpose Adjustment/Setup
12
13
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scanner (CCD) color
14
balance and gamma default setting.
RSPF WHITE First scan SPF front surface white Section
LEVEL 1ST reference level Operation/Procedure
RSPF WHITE SPF front surface white reference level
1) Press [SIDE A(OC)] key.
LEVEL 2ND of the second or later scanning
2) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key
3) The scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma are set to the
default.
63-2
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform shading.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) (When RSPF model)
Press [EXECUTE] key.
Used to perform shading.
normal display.
63-3
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform scanner (CCD) color bal-
ance and gamma auto adjustment.
Section Scanner
64
64-2
Function (Purpose) Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the print conditions.
Select an item to be print condition with scroll keys.
Change the set values with 10-key.
The test print (self print) is performed.

A PRINT PATTERN Print pattern specification 1 - 58 1
(1, 2, 17 - 19) (* For details, refer to the description below.) (Printable only 1, 2, 17 - 19)
B DOT1 (DOT1>=2 IF A: 2) Setting of print dot number (M parameter) 1-255 1
(Self print pattern: m by n) (Pattern 2, 11: 2-255 except above: 1-255)
C DOT2 (DOT1>=2 IF A:2) Setting of blank dot number 0-255 254
(N parameter) (Self print pattern: m by n) (Pattern2, 11: 2-255 except above: 0-255)
D DENSITY (DOT1>=2 IF A:2) Used to specify the print gradation. 1-255 255
E MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
F EXPOSURE THROUGH Exposure mode No process (through) 1-8 1 8
(2 - 8 IF A: 17 - 19) CHAR/PIC specification Text/Printed Photo (Pattern 17-19: 2-8 2 (STANDARD
CHAR/PRPIC Text/ Photograph except above: 1-8) 3 DITHER)
CHAR Text 4
PRINT PIC Printed Photo 5
PRINT PAPER Photograph 6
MAP Map 7
STANDARD DITHER Dither without correction 8
G PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-5 1 2
CS1 Tray 1 2 (CS1)
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
H DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1
NO selection No 1 (NO)
I PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 1-6 1 1
HEAVY Heavy paper 2 (PLAIN)
OHP OHP 3
ENVELOPE Envelope 4
Print pattern of Item A

Pattern generating
Pattern No. Content NOTE
section
1 Grid pattern LSU-ASIC * Print is started at 4mm from the paper lead edge.
* Writing regardless of void. The first one is fixed to LD1.
2 Dot print -
17 All background (halftone) Halftone (IMG-ASIC -
18 256 gradations pattern rear process) * 16 gradations are printed in the main scan direction, and the following 16 gradations
(Other dither) are printed in the next line. (16 x 16 patch print)
* Printing is started at 5mm from the paper lead edge.
* Printing is made from 255 gradation, and 0 - 254 gradations are printed.
19 256 gradations pattern -
(For text dither)
64-4
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print)
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) The test print (self print) is performed.

A PRINT PATTERN Specification of the print pattern 1-3 3
(* For details, refer to the description below.)
B DENSITY Used to specify the print gradation. 1 - 255 128
C MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
D PAPER MFT Paper feed tray selection Manual paper feed 1 3
CS1 Tray 1 2 (CS2)
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
E PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 0 0
HEAVY Heavy paper 1

Pattern No. Content
1 256 gradations pattern (B/W)
2 Halftone pattern (B/W)
3 Background dot print
64-5
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL)
Section
Operation/Procedure

A PRINT PATTERN Print pattern specification 1-2 2
B MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
C PAPER MFT Paper feed tray Manual paper feed 1 2
CS1 selection Tray 1 2 (CS1)
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
D PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 0 0
E TONER SAVE MODE OFF Monochrome toner not set. 0 0
ON save set. 1 (OFF)

Pattern No. Content
1 B/W
2 Service chart (B/W)
64-6
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)
Section
Operation/Procedure

A PRINT PATTERN Print pattern specification 1 1
B MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
C PAPER MFT Paper feed tray Manual paper feed 1 2
CS1 selection Tray 1 2 (CS1)
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
D PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 0 0
E TONER SAVE MODE OFF Monochrome toner not set. 0 0
ON save set. 1 (OFF)

Pattern No. Content
1 B/W
65-2
65
Purpose Operation check/test
Function (Purpose) Used to display the touch panel (LCD dis-
65-1
play section) detection coordinates.
Purpose Adjustment
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD dis-
Operation/Procedure
play section) detection coordinates.
Touch the touch panel.
Section Operation panel section
The coordinates X (horizontal direction) and Y (vertical direction) of
Operation/Procedure the touched position is displayed in real time.
Touch the center of the cross mark at the four corners of the
screen.
When the adjustment is completed normally, the screen shifts to ;<

the simulation sub number entry menu.

In case of an error, the screen returns to the adjustment menu.

65-5 66-2
Purpose Operation check/test Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation panel key Function (Purpose) Used to enter a country code and set the
input. default value for the country code.
Section Section FAX
Press the keys sequentially according to the guidance displayed on 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-02, the following
the screen. screen is displayed.
If the key entry is effective, the guidance for pressing the next key * When [DEST CODE] button is pressed, the display is shifted
is displayed. When all the key entries are completed, "COMPLETE" to the country code list screen.
is displayed. * The currently set country code is displayed in the column of
<Check target key> "PRESENT:".
2) Enter the country code (8 digits) with 10-key([0]/[1]). The
JOB STATUS
entered country code is displayed in the column of "NEW:" and
SYSTEM SETTINGS
[SET] key becomes active.
HOME
* When [C] key is pressed, the column of “NEW:” is cleared.
1
2 3) When [SET] button is pressed after entering the country code,
3 [EXECUTE] button becomes active. The country code is dis-
4 played in the column of "PRESENT:", and the column of
5 "NEW:" is cleared.
6 4) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and
7 [YES] and [NO] buttons become active. The country name is
8 displayed on the tile line.
9 5) When [YES] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the soft SW
AUDIT CLEAR corresponding to the country code is initialized.
0
6) After completion of initialization of the soft SW, [EXECUTE],
PROGRAM
[YES], and [NO] buttons become inactive.
CLEAR
Operation/Procedure (Shifting to the country page)
STOP
CLEAR ALL/RESET * When [DEST CODE] button is pressed on the initial screen, the
START (MONO) display is shifted to the country code list screen.
Use scroll keys to select the country select page.
Country code list
JAPAN 00000000
66 U.S.A. 10110101
AUSTRALIA 00001001
U.K. 10110100
66-1 FRANCE 00111101
Purpose Setting GERMANY 00000100
Function (Purpose) Used to display the FAX-related soft SW (2 SWEDEN 10100101
- 150) on the LCD to allow changing the NEWZEALAND 01111110
soft SW while checking with the LCD. CHINA 00100110
SINGAPORE 10011100
Section FAX
TW 11111110
Operation/Procedure MIDDLEANDNEAREAST 11111101
1) Enter the [SW NO] with 10-key. SLOVAKIA 11111100
* When [C] key is pressed, the entered value of [SW NO] is OTHER3 11111011
cleared. FINLAND 00111100
NORWAY 10000010
2) Press [DATA] button.
DENMARK 00110001
The soft SW data entered in procedure 1) is displayed.
NETHERLANDS 01111011
* When [SW NO] button is pressed, the display returns to the ITALY 01011001
initial screen. SWITZERLAND 10100110
3) Enter the number corresponding to the bit to be changed with AUSTRIA 00001010
10-key. INDONESIA 01010100
* [1] -> [0] THAILAND 10101001
MALAYSIA 01101100
[0] -> [1]
INDIA 01010011
4) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
PHILIPPINES 10001001
setting is saved.
HONGKONG 01010000
After saving the setting, [EXECUTE] button returns to the nor- RUSSIA 10111000
mal display. SOUTHAFRICA 10011111
SPAIN 10100000
PORTUGUESE 10001011
LUXEMBURG 01101001
BELGIUM 00001111
CZECH 00101110
HUNGARY 01010001
GREECE 01000110 Signal send table
POLAND 10001010
NOSIGNAL 33.6 V34 31.2 V34 28.8 V34
BRAZIL 00010110
26.4 V34 24.0 V34 21.6 V34 19.2 V34
KOREA 01100001
16.8 V34 14.4 V34 12.0 V34 9.6 V34
VIETNAM 10111100
7.2 V34 4.8 V34 2.4 V34 14.4 V33
12.0 V33 14.4 V17 12.0 V17 9.6 V17
7.2 V17 9.6 V29 7.2 V29 4.8 V27t
66-3 2.4 V27t 0.3 FLG CED 2100 CNG 1100
0.3 V21 ANSam RINGER No RBT
Purpose Operation test/Check
Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the EEPROM
DP MAKE DP BRK NO MSG
and the SDRAM on the MODEM controller
and display the result.
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure 66-5
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-03, the following Purpose Operation test/Check
screen is displayed. Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected signal to the line
* Select the page of memory check item with the scroll key. and the main unit speaker. (Send level: Soft
2) When the memory check item button is selected, the display is SW setting) (For the kinds of send signals,
shifted to the memory check screen. refer to SIM66-04.)
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the Section FAX
memory check of the selected item is started. Operation/Procedure
4) After completion of memory check, [EXECUTE] button returns 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-05, the following
to the normal display and the result of memory check is dis- screen is displayed.
played.
* Use scroll keys to switch the send mode select page.
Memory check status 2) When a button of a signal to be sent is selected, it is high-
NO CHECK No check lighted and the previously set button is shifted to the normal
CHECKING During checking display.
OK Check complete OK 3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig-
NG A## Check complete NG Error occurring address or data nals are sent.
line is displayed for each item. 4) To end signal send:
Check item * When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and
signal send is interrupted.
Check memory item Remark
1 All Memory Device Check (once) All the items are checked
once.
2 MFP SRAM (once) Check only once 66-6
3 MFP SRAM (repeat) Repeat check Purpose Data output/Check
4 MODEM EEPROM <1> (once) Check only once in LINE1 Function (Purpose) Used to print the confidential registration
5 MODEM EEPROM <1> (repeat) Repeat check in LINE1 check table (BOX NO., BOX name, pass-
6 MODEM SDRAM <1> (once) Check only once in LINE1 code. (If there is no confidential registra-
7 MODEM SDRAM<1>(repeat) Repeat check in LINE1 tion, no print is made.)
The number in < > indicates the line. Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
66-4 1) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
Purpose Operation test/Check confidential checkable is printed.
Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected signals to the * If there is no confidential registration, no print is made even
line and the main unit speaker. (Send level: though [EXECUTE] key is pressed.
max.) 2) After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
normal display.
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-04, the screen on the
66-7
right is displayed. (Default, left upper selected.)
* Use scroll keys to switch the send mode select page. Purpose Data output/Check
2) When a button of a signal to be sent is selected, it is high- Function (Purpose) Used to output all image data saved in the
lighted and the previously set button is shifted to the normal image memory. (Confidential data are also
display. outputted.)
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig- Section FAX
nals are sent. Operation/Procedure
4) To end signal send: 1) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and all
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig- image data saved in the image memory are outputted.
nal send is interrupted. 2) After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
normal display.
66-8 66-11
Purpose Operation test/Check Purpose Operation test/Check
Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected sound mes- Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected signal at 300bps
sages to the line and the speaker. (Send to the line and the speaker. (Send level:
level: Max.) Max.)
Section FAX Section FAX
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-08, the following 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-11, the following
screen is displayed. screen is displayed.
2) When the sound message button to be sent is selected, it is 2) When a button of a sound message to be sent is selected, it is
highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normal highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normal
display. display.
<Sound message table> 3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and a
sound message is sent.
NONE (Mute) PAUSE (Pause MESSAGE1 MESSAGE2
melody) (Message 1) (Message 2) 4) To end signal send:
MESSAGE3 MESSAGE4 MESSAGE5 MESSAGE6 When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig-
(Message 3) (Message 4) (Massage 5) (Message 6) nal send is interrupted.
ALARM (Alarm) RINGER EXT.TEL.RING
300bps send signal table
(Ringing sound ER (External
(Speaker)) telephone call) NO SIGNAL 11111 11110 00000
010101 00001
66-12
66-9
Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected signal at 300bps
Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected sound message
to the line and the speaker. (Send level:
to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting)
Soft SW setting)
* For the kings of send signals at 300bps,
* For details of sound messages, refer to
refer to SIM66-11, 300bps send signal
the sound message table of SIM66-08. table.
Section FAX
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-09, the following
screen is displayed.
2) When a button of a sound message to be sent is selected, it is
2) When a button of a sound message to be sent is selected, it is
highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normal
highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normal
display. display.
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and a 3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and a
4) To end signal send:
4) To end signal send:
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig-
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig-
nal send is interrupted.
nal send is interrupted.
66-13
66-10
Purpose Setting
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to register dial numbers for SIM66-
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAX and image send 14/15/16, Dial test. (Up to 20 digits can be
image data. (The confidential data are also registered.)
cleared.)
Section FAX
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] button. screen is displayed.
2) Press [YES] button. * The number saved in the memory is displayed in the column
3) After completion of clearing, press [CA] key to reboot the of [PRESENT:]. (If there is no data, [-------] is displayed.)
machine. 2) Enter a number with 10-key.
The entered number is displayed in the column of [NEW:].
After entering 20 digits, 10-key is disabled (no response). Only
[C] key is enabled. (10-key [0] to [9], [*], [#], [C] key (back by
one digit))
3) When [SET] key is pressed after completion of entry, the
entered number is displayed (registered) in the column of
[PRESENT:]. The column of [NEW:] becomes blank.
66-14 66-18
Purpose Adjustment Purpose Operation test/Check
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the dial pulse (10PPS) Function (Purpose) Used to send the DTMF signal to the line
send test and to adjust the make time. and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW set-
Section FAX ting)
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-14, the following Operation/Procedure
screen is displayed. 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-18, the following
2) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the screen is displayed.
dial pulse is sent from the line in the set make time. 2) When a button of a send signal is selected, it is highlighted and
3) To end the dial test, press [EXECUTE] button again. The but- the previously set button returns to the normal display.
ton returns to the normal display and the test is terminated. 3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig-
nals are sent.
4) To stop signal sending:
66-15 When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it returns to the normal
Purpose Adjustment display and signal sending is interrupted.
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the dial pulse (20PPS)
send test and to adjust the make time.
66-21
Section FAX
Purpose Check
Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-15, the following Function (Purpose) Used to print the selected items (system
screen is displayed. error, protocol monitor).
2) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the Section FAX
dial pulse is sent from the line in the set make time. Operation/Procedure
* The dial pulse in this example is up to 20 digits registered 1) When an item button to be printed is selected, it is highlighted
with SIM66-13. and the previously set button returns to the normal display.
3) To end the dial test, press [EXECUTE] button again. The but- 2) Press [EXECUTE] button.
ton returns to the normal display and the test is terminated. [EXECUTE] button is highlighted and printing is started.
3) After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
66-16 normal display.
Purpose Adjustment FAX information print content table
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the DTFM signal send test
REGISTERED MANAGEMENT
and to adjust the send level.
FILE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ERROR LINE 1
Section FAX PROTOCOL LINE 1
Operation/Procedure
66-22
dial pulse signal is sent from the line by the setting of high/low Purpose Setting
group of the signal send level. Function (Purpose) Used to set the handset sound volume.
3) To terminate the dial test, press [EXECUTE] button. The button (This simulation can be executed even
returns to the normal display and the test is terminated. though the handset setting is set to NO.
When, however, the handset is not
66-17 installed, the sound volume cannot be
checked.) (Japan model only)
Section FAX
Function (Purpose) Used to send the DTMF signal to the line
and the speaker. (Send level: Max.) Operation/Procedure
Section FAX 1) When the machine enters the simulation, the number of the set
sound volume is displayed. (In this example, MIDDLE is set as
Operation/Procedure
the default sound volume.)
2) Use 10-key to set the handset sound volume. (0: MIN 1:MID-
DLE 2:MAX)
2) When a button of a send signal is selected, it is highlighted and
3) Press [EXECUTE] button to deliver the selected on-hold tone.
the previously set button returns to the normal display.
* If, however, the handset is not installed, the sound volume
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig-
cannot be checked. Execution is possible.
nals are sent.
4) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and deliv-
4) To stop signal sending:
ery of the on-hold tone is stopped.
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it returns to the normal
display and signal sending is interrupted.
66-24 66-32
Purpose Data clear Purpose Operation test/Check
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAST save data. Function (Purpose) Used to check the fixed data received from
Section FAX the line and to display the result.
1) Press [EXECUTE] button. Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] button. 1) Press [EXECUTE] button to check the fixed data received from
The FAST save data are cleared. the line. At that time, [EXECUTE] button is highlighted.
3) After completion of memory clear, [EXECUTE] button returns * Fixed data check procedure
to the normal display and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out. * The data received from the line is checked of the following
fixed data status for minutes, then if they are in accord with
66-29 “OK” is displayed on LCD, if not “NG” is displayed.
* The judgment is made in 2 minutes.
Purpose Clear
Receive speed: 300BPS
Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the telephone book data Receive data: 00H
(the one-touch registration table, the FTP/ Judgment data: 100byte
Desktop expansion table, the group expan-
2) After completion of check, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
sion table, the program registration table,
normal display. The result is displayed as "OK" or "NG."
the interface memory box table, the meta
data, InboundRouting, and the Documen-
tAdmin table).
66-33
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] button. Function (Purpose) Used to execute detection of various sig-
nals with the line connected and to display
2) Press [YES] button.
the detection result. When a signal is
The telephone book data area cleared. detected, the display is highlighted.
3) After completion of memory clear, [EXECUTE] button returns
Section FAX
to the normal display and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out.
Operation/Procedure
66-30 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-33, the following
2) The signal to be checked can be selected from the two
Function (Purpose) Used to display the TEL/LIU status change, options: "FNET" and "BT/CNG/CED/DTMF."
The display is highlighted by status change.
3) When a signal is detected, "FNET" and "BUSY TONE CNG
Section FAX CED DTMF" are highlighted. When a signal is not detected,
Operation/Procedure they are normally displayed.
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-30, the following Signal used for signal detection check
screen is displayed. (When "FNET" is selected)
2) HS1, HS2, RHS, and EXHS are highlighted when the signal is
FNET
detected, and displayed normally when the signal is not
detected. (When "BT/CNG/CED/DTMF" is selected)
TEL/LIU status change item description BUSY TONE CNG CED DTMF
HS1 Polarity inversion signal
HS2 Polarity inversion signal
RHS Handset hook SW
EXHS External telephone hook SW 66-34
66-31 Function (Purpose) Used to execute the send test and display
Purpose Setting the time required for sending image data in
the test. Used to execute send test and dis-
Function (Purpose) Used to set ON/OFF the port for output to
play. (Unit: ms)
TEL/LIU.
Section FAX
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1) FAX send is performed.
screen is displayed. 2) Enter the SIM 66-34 mode.
2) Change the port setting. The send time in procedure 1) is displayed.
When a port is set to ON, the port display is highlighted.
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the changed setting is
reflected to the port which outputs to TEL/LIU.
4) To terminate the process, press [EXECUTE] button again.
[EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display.
Port which outputs to TEL/LIU
CION MR EC S.
66-36 66-43
Purpose Operation test/Check Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to check send and receive data from Function (Purpose) Used to write the adjustment value into the
the MODEM controller to the MFP control- power control installed in the FAX BOX.
ler or the data line or the command line Section FAX
individually.
Operation/Procedure
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure screen is displayed.
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-36, the following * Use scroll keys to select the select item of the power control
screen is displayed. adjustment value.
2) Operation check 2) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and writing
Select an item to be checked on the screen. to the power control is executed. When writing is normally
MFP controller I/F check item table completed, "OK" is displayed. When it is failed, "NG" is dis-
played.
MFP <- MDMC (DATA once) MFP -> MDMC (DATA once)
3) After completion of writing, [EXECUTE] key returns to the nor-
Data line Once Data line Once
mal display.
MFP <- MDMC (DATA repeat) MFP -> MDMC (DATA repeat)
Data line Repeat Data line Repeat Set range and default value of each set value
MFP <- MDMC (CMD once) MFP -> MDMC (CMD once)
Item Set range Default value
Command line Once Command line Once
A CI_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 to 15 6
MFP <- MDMC (CMD repeat) MFP -> MDMC (CMD repeat)
B CI_CYCLE_MIN 1 to 254 10
Command line Repeat Command line Repeat
C CI_CYCLE_MAX 2 to 255 142
D CI_COUNT 2 to 15 3
E RES_3.3V_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 to 15 15
66-39 F EXHS_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 to 225 240
G RHS_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 to 15 2
Purpose Setting H SON_TIMEOUT 1 to 127 20
Function (Purpose) Used to check and change the destination
setting saved in EEPROM of the FAX BOX.
Section FAX
66-61
Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters the simulation, the currently set des- Purpose Setting
tination button is highlighted. (In the default state, JAPAN is set Function (Purpose) Used to display the FAX-related soft SW
as the destination.) (151 - 250) on the LCD to allow changing
2) Select a destination button to set the destination. (In this the soft SW while checking with the LCD.
example, USA/CANADA is selected.) The selected button is Section FAX
highlighted and the previously selected button returns to the Operation/Procedure
normal display.
1) Enter the [SW NO] with 10-key.
* When the destination button is changed, the new destination
2) Press [DATA] button.
setting is saved to EEPROM of the FAX BOX.
The soft SW data entered in procedure 1) is displayed.
Destination setting table
3) Enter the number corresponding to the bit to be changed with
JAPAN U.S.A/CANADA EUROPE AUSTRALIA 10-key.
CHINA ASIA&OTHERS * [1] -> [0]
[0] -> [1]
66-42 setting is saved.
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to rewrite the program to power con-
66-62
trol installed in the FAX BOX.
Purpose Backup
Section FAX
Function (Purpose) Used to import the FAX receive data into a
Operation/Procedure
USB memory in PDF file type.
1) Press [EXECUTE] button.[EXECUTE] button is highlighted
and YES] and [NO] buttons become active. Section FAX
2) Press [YES] button. Operation/Procedure
The power control program is rewritten. 1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
3) When rewriting of the power control program is normally com- 2) Select data to be imported.
pleted, "OK" is displayed and [EXECUTE] button returns to the 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
normal display, and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out. Execute import of data selected in procedure 2).
When the operation is completed normally, [COMPLETE] is
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, [ERROR] is displayed.

ERROR: NO USB MEMORY DEVICE No USB memory installed
ERROR: NO IMAGE DATA No image data
ERROR Other errors
67
67-17
Purpose Reset
Function (Purpose) Printer reset
Section Printer
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
The set data related to the printer are initialized. (Including the
NIC setting.)
normal display.
67-45
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the printer image filter and
trapping.
Section Printer
Operation/Procedure
Setting Default
range value
A SHARPNESS: Monochrome 0-4 2 The greater
B/W PRINT print the set value
is, the
stronger the
filer
enhancement
is. The smaller
the set value
is, the
stronger the
filter
smoothness
is.
(0: Soft High,
1: Soft Low, 2:
Center, 3:
Sharp Low, 4:
Sharp High)
MX-M316N
[7] TROUBLESHOOTING D. Self diag
Service operation
Manual
The machine always monitors its own state.
When the machine recognizes a trouble, it stops the operation and
1. Error code and troubleshooting displays the trouble message.
A. General A warning message is displayed when a consumable part life is
When a trouble occurs in the machine or when the life of a consum- nearly expired or is expired.
able part is nearly expired or when the life is expired, the machine When a warning message is displayed, the machine may be or
detects and displays it on the display section. This allows the user may not be stopped.
and the serviceman to take the suitable action. In case of a trouble, The trouble messages and the warning messages are displayed by
this feature notifies the occurrence of a trouble and stops the the LCD and lamp.
machine to minimize the damage. Some trouble messages are automatically cleared when the trou-
B. Function and purpose ble is repaired. Some other troubles must be cleared by a simula-
tion.
1) Securing safety. (The machine is stopped on detection of a
Some warning messages of consumable parts are automatically
trouble.)
cleared when the trouble is repaired. Some other warning mes-
2) The damage to the machine is minimized. (The machine is sages must be cleared by a simulation.
stopped on detection of a trouble.)
3) By displaying the trouble content, the trouble position can be
quickly identified. (This allows to perform an accurate repair, Monitors the machine
conditions.
improving the repair efficiency.)
4) Preliminary warning of running out of consumable parts allows
to arrange for new parts in advance of running out. (This Detects/analyzes
avoids stopping of the machine due to running out the a con- the content.
sumable part.)
C. Self diag message kinds

Warning
࠙࣬
The self diag messages are classified as shown in the table below. Trouble/Warning
Πρήσȟ࠙࣬
Class 1 User Warning of troubles which can be recovered by the

user. (Paper jam, consumable part life expiration, Trouble
Πρήσ
etc.)
Service Warning of troubles which can be recovered only by
൲ै೪গ
The machine is stopped.
a serviceman. (Motor trouble, maintenance, etc.)
Others -
Class 2 Warning Warning to the user, not a machine trouble
(Preliminary warning of life expiration of a ඤယͬນা
The content is displayed.
consumable part, etc.)
Trouble Warning of a machine trouble. The machine is
stopped.
Others - Warning No
࠙࣬ A consumable OP
Πρήσȟ࠙࣬
Trouble/Warning part has reached
its lifetime
Trouble
Πρήσ ZFT
YES
Replace or supply
Troubleshoot
ະၻࡔ֦ͬ಺औ the cause. ક࿍ΩȜΜ࢐۟¦༞‫ݯ‬
the consumable part.
ਘၑ
Repair
Cancel the self-diagnostic

ΘͼͺΈȪΞΑΠ΋ζϋΡȫ
message with the
൝ͤ͢ͅুࡨ૷౯ιΛΓȜΐ
diagnostic (test
ٜੰcommands).
Reset
໘‫ܦ‬
Standby
ఞ‫ેܥ‬ఠ state
MX-M316N TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 1
E. Breakdown sequence
(1) Error code and operatable mode
Trouble Operatable mode

code
Judg- Copy scan
(26cpm/ Scan-
Trouble content ment (including Scan Scan List FAX FAX
31cpm/ To Print
block interrup- (Push) (Pull) print Send print
35cpm) HDD
tion)
machine)
FAX board trouble * FAX board MFP F6 (00, 01, O O O O O O - -
breakdown 04, 21, 30,
97, 98)
HDD trouble * SD card E7 (07) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
breakdown
* HDD breakdown E7 (03) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
* HDD-ASIC E7 (04) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
breakdown
Scanner * SCU A0 (02) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ O O ✕ O
communication communication E7 (80)
trouble error
Engine * PCU A0 (01) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
communication communication E7 (90)
trouble error
Backup battery * Backup battery U1 (01) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
voltage fall trouble voltage fall
Operation disable * External serial I/F U7 (50, 51) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
trouble 2 communication
error (RIC)
* Memory error U2 (00, 05, ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
(included not 10, 11, 22,
installed the 23, 24, 40,
expansion RAM) 41, 42)
* Connection trouble A0 (11, 15, ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
(Model data 20)
discrepancy) E7 (60, 61,
(MFPC detection) 62)
* Serial number data U2 (30) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
error
* HDD registration U2 (50) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
data check sum
error
Operation disable * Memory check E7 (96) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
trouble 3 error when booting
* Image memory E7 (01, 49, ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
trouble, decode 91, 92, 93,
error 94)
Operation disable * Personal counter PC (00) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
trouble 4 connection trouble
Power controller * Power controller L8 (20) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
trouble error
Special function * Watermark data U2 (60) O O O O O O O O
trouble error P1 (00, 01,
02)
Laser trouble * LSU breakdown PCU E7 (20, 21, ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
28) *10
L6 (10)
Engine trouble 1 * Connection trouble A0 (21) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
(Model data E7 (50)
discrepancy) (PCU F1 (50, 95)
detection)
Trouble Operatable mode
code
Judg- Copy scan
(26cpm/ Scan-
Trouble content ment (including Scan Scan List FAX FAX
31cpm/ To Print
block interrup- (Push) (Pull) print Send print
35cpm) HDD
tion)
machine)
Engine trouble 2 * PCU troubles PCU F2(40,64, ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
(motor, fusing, etc.) 70,74) *10
H2(00,01)
H3(00,01)
H4(00,01)
H5(01)
L4(01,11,32,
34,35,40,
44,70)
L8(01,02)
U2 (90, 91)
Paper feed tray 1 * Paper feed tray 1 F3 (12) 3 O O O 3 3 O 3
trouble breakdown *10
Paper feed tray 2 * Paper feed tray 2 F3 (22) 3 O O O 3 3 O 3
Paper feed tray 3 * Paper feed tray 3 F3 (32, 42) 3 O O O 3 3 O 3
Staple trouble * Staple breakdown F1 (10) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
*10
Finisher trouble * After-process F1 (00, 03, 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
breakdown 15, 19, 20, *10
29, 37)
Other troubles * Other troubles EE (EL, EU) O O O O O O O O
Process control * Process control F2 (39, 58) O O O O O O O O
trouble breakdown (PCU *11
detection)
Operation disable * Connection trouble SCU A0 (22) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
trouble (Model data
discrepancy) (SCU
detection)
SCU CPT ASIC * SCU CPT ASIC UC (02) 9 9 9 9 O O 9 O
trouble error
SCU ASIC trouble * SCU ASIC error UC (20) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ O O ✕ O
(SCU detection) (SCU detection)
Scanner trouble 1 * SCU EEPROM U2 (80, 81) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ O O ✕ O
error
Scanner trouble 2 * Scanner section L1 (00) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ O O ✕ O
breakdown (mirror L3 (00)
motor, lens, copy
lamp)
CCD trouble * CCD breakdown E7 (10, 11, ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ O O ✕ O
(shading, etc.) 14)
O: Operation enabled ✕: Operation disabled

1: The operation is enabled in a line other than the trouble line.
3: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled with a tray other than the trouble tray.
4: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in a section other than the trouble paper exit section. * However, it is
valid only when the escape tray setting has been made.
9: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in the black and white mode.
*10: Since communication is enabled, reception can be transferred.
*11: The trouble display is "Display to a 2-line message." (Example: Ready to copy. F2 trouble)
15: FAST notification function (When in U2-22, trouble notification cannot be made. If there is no abnormality in the FAX software or the
FAST data in U2-23, trouble notification can be made.)
(2) Trouble detection sequence and trouble cancel sequence when turning on the power
MFP event Each block

manager
(Power ON sequence)
H3, H4, H5, U1, U2, U6, F3 trouble check When the power is turned on,
Trouble check is preformed in each block, check is made in each block.
and the result is sent to the MFP. Communication of trouble status
[Trouble code] [Trouble status]
H3, H4, H5 Saved in the PCU
U1 Saved in the MFP
U2 Saved in each block
F3, U6 Saved in the PCU
(Trouble cancel sequence)

When executing SIM 13, 14, 16 sim task
SIM13: U1 trouble cancel

SIM14: H3, H4, H5
(Color mode inhibition) cancel
SIM15: LCC/LCT(U6)trouble cancel, F3 cansel
SIM16: U2 trouble cancel Trouble cancel
Trouble cancel command
(The trouble memory is
initialized.)
Trouble cancel status
is communicated.
The process has priority when the power is turned ON with the MFP.
When booting, two or more troubles in the list below may be detected. In this case, the trouble code of higher priority is displayed.
Process sequence Error code Content

U2 60 Watermark check error
50 HDD user authentication data check sum error (SD card when no HDD is installed)
30 MFPC PWB and PCU PWB manufacturing No. data inconsistency
24 MFPC PWB SRAM memory user authentication counter check sum error
First
(Low priority) 10 MFPC PWB SRAM user authentication index check sum error
23 Individual data check sum error of SRAM memory
 22 SRAM memory check sum error
A0 15 Incompatible DSK BOOT and program firmware
i 20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (MFP)
U2 11 MFPC PWB EEPROM counter check sum error
(High priority) 00 MFP EEPROM read/write error
E7 96 MFPC PWB DIMM memory check error
U1 01 Battery trouble
E7 60 MFP connection trouble
F. Error code list
Trouble
code Trouble
Trouble content Mechanism Option Electricity FAX Supply
Main Sub detection
code code
A0 01 PCU PWB ROM error MFP O
02 SCU PWB ROM error MFP O
11 Firmware version inconsistency (MFP - PCU) MFP O
15 Incompatible DSK BOOT and program firmware MFP O
20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (MFP) MFP O
21 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (PCU) PCU O
22 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (SCU) SCU O
E7 01 MFP image data error MFP O
03 HDD trouble MFP O
04 HDD-ASIC error MFP O
07 SD card error MFP O
10 Shading error (Black correction) SCU O
11 Shading error (White correction) SCU O
14 CCD-ASIC error SCU O
20 LSU laser detection error PCU O
21 LSU LD deterioration trouble PCU O
28 LSU control Asic connection error PCU O
49 Water Mark data error MFP O
50 PCU connection trouble PCU O
60 MFP connection trouble MFP O
61 MFP connection trouble (PCU) MFP O
62 MFP connection trouble (SCU) MFP O
80 MFP - SCU PWB communication error MFP O
90 MFP - PCU PWB communication error MFP O
91 FAX reception image data error MFP O
92 Copy image data error MFP O
93 Copy, image send, FAX, filing, print image data process error MFP O
94 Image file data process error (when importing file data) MFP O
96 MFPC PWB DIMM memory check error MFP O
EE EL Auto developer adjustment trouble (Over-toner abnormality) PCU O
EU Auto developer adjustment trouble (Under-toner abnormality) PCU O
F1 00 Finisher - PCU PWB communication error PCU O
03 Finisher paper exit roller lifting operation trouble PCU O
10 Staple operation trouble PCU O
15 Finisher paper exit tray lift operation trouble PCU O
19 Finisher alignment operation trouble F PCU O
20 Finisher alignment operation trouble R PCU O
29 Finisher cooling fan motor abnormality MFP O
37 Finisher data backup RAM error PCU O
50 Main unit - Finisher combination error PCU O
95 Paper exit option configuration error PCU O
F2 39 Process thermistor trouble PCU O
40 Toner density sensor trouble PCU O
58 Temperature/humidity sensor trouble (HUD_M/TH_M) PCU O
64 Toner supply operation trouble PCU O
70 Improper toner cartridge detection PCU O
74 Toner cartridge CRUM error PCU O
F3 12 Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble PCU O
22 Paper feed tray 2 lift operation trouble PCU O
32 Paper feed tray 3 lift operation trouble
42 Paper feed tray 4 lift operation trouble
F6 00 MFPC PWB - FAX communication trouble MFP O
01 FAX control PWB EEPROM read/write error FAX O
04 FAX MODEM operation trouble FAX O
21 Improper combination of TEL/LIU PWB and FAX soft switch MFP O
30 FAX 1-chip microprocessor access error (FAX detection) MFP O
97 Incompatibility between FAX control PWB and the main machine MFP O
98 Incompatibility between the FAX control PWB destination and the main MFP O
machine destination
H2 00 Thermistor open trouble (TH_UM) PCU O
01 Thermistor open trouble (TH_US) PCU O
H3 00 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_UM) PCU O
01 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_US) PCU O
H4 00 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_UM) PCU O
01 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_US) PCU O
H5 01 5-time continuous jams of POSD PCU O
L1 00 Scanner feed trouble SCU O
Trouble
code Trouble
Trouble content Mechanism Option Electricity FAX Supply
Main Sub detection
code code
L3 00 Scanner return trouble SCU O
L4 01 Main motor lock trouble PCU O
11 Shift motor trouble PCU O
32 Power source cooling fan trouble PCU O
34 LSU cooling fan trouble PCU O
35 Fusing cooling fan trouble PCU O
40 Ozone fan trouble PCU O
43 Paper exit cooling fan trouble PCU O
70 Toner motor lock trouble PCU O
L6 10 Polygon motor trouble PCU O
L8 02 Full wave signal width abnormality PCU O
20 Power controller communication trouble MFP O
P1 00 PCI communication error MFP O
01 PCI fan error MFP O
02 Plasma generating device error MFP O
PC - Personal counter not detected MFP O
U1 01 Battery trouble MFP O
U2 00 MFP EEPROM read/write error MFP O
05 SD/MFPC PWB SRAM contents inconsistency MFP O
10 MFPC PWB SRAM user authentication index check sum error MFP O
11 MFPC PWB EEPROM counter check sum error MFP O
22 SRAM memory check sum error MFP O
23 Individual data check sum error of SRAM memory MFP O
24 MFPC PWB SRAM memory user authentication counter check sum error MFP O
30 MFPC PWB and PCU PWB manufacturing No. data inconsistency MFP O
40 SD card system storage data area error MFP O
41 HDD system storage data area error MFP O
42 Machine adjustment data (system storage data area) error MFP O
50 HDD user authentication data check sum error MFP O
(SD card when no HDD is installed)
60 Watermark check error MFP O
80 SCU PWB EEPROM read/write error SCU O
81 SCU PWB EEPROM check sum error SCU O
90 PCU PWB EEPROM read/write error PCU O
91 PCU PWB EEPROM check sum error PCU O
U7 50 MFPC PWB - Vendor machine communication error MFP O
51 Vendor machine error MFP O
UC 02 CPT - ASIC error SCU O
20 DOCC ASIC error SCU O
G. Details of error codes and countermeasures
A0-01 PCU PWB ROM error A0-22 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data
version (SCU)
Trouble content
Detail MFP Trouble content
Cause The firmware version-up is not completed properly by Detail SCU
interruption of the power during the version-up
Cause Inconsistency between the SCU firmware version and
operation, etc.
the EEPROM data version.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-1 to perform the firmware version-up
procedure again.
Replace the PCU PWB.
E7-01 MFP image data error
A0-02 SCU PWB ROM error Trouble content

Detail MFP
Trouble content Cause Image data transfer error in the MFPC PWB.
MFPC PWB trouble.
Detail MFP
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness
Cause The firmware version-up is not completed properly by
of the MFPC PWB.
interruption of the power during the version-up
Check or replace the MFPC PWB.
operation, etc.
SCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-1 to perform the firmware version-up
procedure again.
E7-03 HDD trouble
Replace the SCU PWB.
Trouble content
Detail MFP
A0-11 Firmware version inconsistency Cause Connector, harness connection trouble in the MFPC
(MFP - PCU) PWB and HDD.
HDD (error file management area) data abnormality
(FAT breakage).
Trouble content MFPC PWB trouble.
Detail MFP Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness
Cause Firmware combination error between the MFP and of the MFPC PWB and HDD.
the PCU. Use SIM62-2, 3 to check read/write operations of the
Check & Remedy Install the firmware in the all-firmware version-up HDD.
mode. Replace the HDD.
Check or replace the MFPC PWB.
A0-15 Incompatible DSK BOOT and pro-

gram firmware E7-04 HDD-ASIC error
Trouble content Trouble content

Detail MFP Detail MFP
Cause HDD-ASIC trouble. (MFPC PWB trouble.)
Cause Installation of the normal firmware was performed
An error occurs in the HDD-ASIC self test when
with a security kit enable.
booting.
Check & Remedy Stop installation of the normal firmware.
Check & Remedy Check or replace the MFPC PWB.
A0-20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data

E7-07 SD card error
version (MFP)
Trouble content
Trouble content Detail MFP
Detail MFP Cause SD card trouble or contact error
Cause Inconsistency between the MFP firmware version and MFPC PWB trouble.
the EEPROM data version. Check & Remedy Replace the SD card.
Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware. Check the SD card socket.
Replace the MFPC PWB.
A0-21 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data

version (PCU)
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause Inconsistency between the PCU firmware version and
the EEPROM data version.
Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
E7-10 Shading error (Black correction) E7-21 LSU LD deterioration trouble
Trouble content Trouble content Laser trouble

Detail SCU Detail PCU
Cause Abnormality in the CCD black scan level when the Cause Laser deterioration, power reduction
scanner lamp is turned OFF. Disconnection or improper connection of harness and
Improper installation of the harness to the CCD unit. connector between LD PWB and MFPC PWB.
CCD unit abnormality. Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU.
SCU PWB abnormality. Check connection of the communication connetctor
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit. between the LD PWB and MFPC PWB.
Check the CCD unit. Replace the MFPC PWB.
Check the SCU PWB. Replace the LSU.
E7-11 Shading error (White correction) E7-28 LSU control Asic connection error
Trouble content Trouble content Access error between the CPU in the PCU PWB and
Detail SCU the LSU control ASIC.
Cause Abnormality in the CCD white reference plate scan Detail PCU
level when the scanner lamp is turned ON. Cause Improper connection of the communication connector
Improper installation of the harness to the CCD unit. between the PCU PWB and the MFPC PWB.
Dirt on the mirror, lens, and the reference white plate. Harness trouble between the PCU PWB and the
Scanner lamp lighting trouble. MFPC PWB
Scanner lamp drive PWB trouble PCU PWB or MFPC PWB trouble.
CCD unit abnormality. Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness
SCU PWB abnormality. between the PCU PWB and the MFPC PWB.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit. Replace the MFPC PWB.
Check connection of the harness to the scanner lamp Replace the PCU PWB.
unit.
Check or replace the scanner lamp.
Check or replace the scanner lamp drive PWB. E7-49 Water Mark data error
Clean or replace the mirror, the lens, and the
reference white board.
Check or replace the CCD unit. Trouble content
Check or replace the SCU PWB. Detail MFP
Cause Watermark data trouble.
HDD trouble.
E7-14 CCD-ASIC error * When the wartermark data is not installed, U2-60
error occurs in booting.
Check & Remedy Use SIM62-02/SIM62-03 to check HDD read/write.
Trouble content If the result is NG, a remedy corresponding to E7-03
Detail SCU is required.
Cause SCU PWB trouble. Use SIM49-05 to update the watermark data.
Improper Installation of the harness to the CCD unit. (Reinstallation)
CCD unit abnormality.
SCU PWB abnormality.
Check & Remedy Check the SCU PWB. E7-50 PCU connection trouble
Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit.
Check or replace the CCD unit. Trouble content Unknown PWB identification information is detected
Check or replace the SCU PWB. in the PCU PWB.
Detail PCU
Cause A PWB/firmware which does not comply with the
E7-20 LSU laser detection error machine specifications is connected.
Check & Remedy Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
LSU connection trouble.
Trouble content PCU PWB trouble.
Detail PCU LSU trouble.
Cause Laser optical axis misalignment
Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode
trouble. E7-55 PCU PWB information sum error
Disconnection or improper connection of harness and
connector between LD PWB and MFPC PWB.
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU. Trouble content PCU EEPROM PWB information sum error
Check connection of the connector and harness Detail PCU
between the LD PWB and the MFPC PWB. Cause PCU EEPROM sum check error.
Replace the MFPC PWB. PCU EEPROM trouble.
Replace the LSU. PCU EEPROM contact trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the PCU EEPROM.
E7-60 MFP connection trouble E7-91 FAX reception image data error
Trouble content Unknown PWB identification information is detected Trouble content An error of FAX reception image data process occurs.
in the MFPC PWB. Detail MFP
Detail MFP Cause Image data process abnormality
Cause A PWB/firmware which does not comply with the HDD trouble
machine specifications is connected. SD card trouble or contact error
Check & Remedy Check the kind and the version of the firmware. Image compression data corruption
MFPC PWB trouble. MFPC PWB trouble
DIMM memory trouble or contact error
FAX control PWB trouble
E7-61 MFP connection trouble (PCU) Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of
the memory.
Replace the HDD.
Trouble content MFP connection trouble Replace or check installation of the SD card.
Compatibility trouble between MFP - PCU Replace the MFPC PWB.
Detail MFP Replace or check installation of the DIMM memory.
Cause Combination error between the MFPC PWB and the Replace the FAX control PWB.
PCU.
Check & Remedy Check the MFPC PWB.
Check the combination between the MFPC PWB and E7-92 Copy image data error
the PCU.
Trouble content An error of copy image data process occurs.

(In Non ERDH)
E7-62 MFP connection trouble
Detail MFP
Cause Image data process abnormality
Trouble content EEPROM PWB information check sum error HDD trouble
Detail MFP Image compression data corruption
Cause Combination error between the MFPC PWB and the MFPC PWB trouble
SCU. DIMM memory trouble or contact error
Check & Remedy Check the MFPC PWB. Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of
Check the combination between the MFPC PWB and the memory.
the SCU. Replace the HDD.
Replace or check installation of the DIMM memory.
E7-80 MFP - SCU PWB communication error
E7-93 Copy, image send, FAX, filing, print
Trouble content
Detail MFP image data process error
Cause SCU PWB - MFPC PWB connection trouble.
SCU PWB trouble. Trouble content An image data process error occurs in the following
MFPC PWB trouble. operation mode:
Check & Remedy Check connection of the SCU PWB and the MFPC ? Copy (in ERDH)
PWB. ? Copy composing system function (Water mark)
Check the ground. ? When in image send
Replace the SCU PWB. ? When filing documents
Replace the MFPC PWB. ? When displaying the preview
? When printing with the GDI/PCL printer
? Copy composing system function (Water mark)
E7-90 MFP - PCU PWB communication error ? When printing FAX send result table
Detail MFP
Cause Image data process abnormality
Trouble content
HDD trouble
Detail MFP Image compression data corruption
Cause PCU PWB - MFPC PWB connection trouble. MFPC PWB trouble
PCU PWB trouble. DIMM memory trouble or contact error
MFPC PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of
Check & Remedy Check connection of the PCU PWB and the MFPC the memory.
PWB. Replace the HDD.
Check the ground. Replace the MFPC PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace or check installation of the DIMM memory.
E7-94 Image file data process error F1-03 Finisher paper exit roller lifting
(when importing file data) operation trouble
Trouble content File image process error (backup restore error) when Trouble content
importing filing data Detail PCU
Detail MFP Cause Finisher paper exit roller lift motor trouble
Cause Image data process abnormality Harness and connector connection trouble
HDD trouble Home position sensor trouble
Image compression data corruption Finisher control PWB trouble
MFPC PWB trouble Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper exit
DIMM memory trouble or contact error roller lift motor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
the memory. position sensor.
Replace the HDD. Replace the paper exit roller lift motor.
Replace the MFPC PWB. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace or check installation of the DIMM memory. Replace the home position sensor.
Replace the finisher control PWB.
E7-96 MFPC PWB DIMM memory check error

F1-10 Staple operation trouble
Trouble content MFPC PWB DIMM memory access trouble
Cause Memory data corruption occurs Detail PCU
MFPC PWB trouble Cause Staple motor trouble.
DIMM memory trouble or contact error Finisher control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of Home position sensor trouble.
the memory. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the staple
Replace the MFPC PWB. motor.
DIMM memory socket check Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
Replace the DIMM memory. position sensor.
Replace the staple motor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
EE-EL Auto developer adjustment trouble Replace the home position sensor.
(Over-toner abnormality)
Trouble content An abnormality occurred in execution of automatic F1-15 Finisher paper exit tray lift operation
developer adjustment.
trouble
Detail PCU
Cause Toner density sensor trouble, charging voltage/
developing voltage error, toner concentration trouble, Trouble content Lift motor trouble.
developing unit trouble, PCU PWB trouble. Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM25-2 to perform the auto developer Cause Paper exit tray lift motor trouble.
adjustment. Finisher control PWB trouble.
Home position sensor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper exit
EE-EU Auto developer adjustment trouble tray lift motor.
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
(Under-toner abnormality) position sensor.
Trouble content An abnormality occurred in execution of automatic Replace the paper exit tray lift motor.
developer adjustment. Replace the home position sensor.
Detail PCU
Cause Toner density sensor trouble, charging voltage/
developing voltage error, toner concentration trouble, F1-19 Finisher alignment operation trouble F
developing unit trouble, PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM25-2 to perform the auto developer Trouble content
adjustment.
Detail PCU
Cause Finisher paper alignment motor lock.
Motor speed abnormality.
F1-00 Finisher - PCU PWB communication Over-current to the motor.
error Finisher control PWB trouble.
Home position sensor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
Trouble content
alignment motor F.
Detail PCU Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the harness position sensor.
between the finisher and the PCU PWB. Replace the finisher control PWB.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Replace the paper alignment motor F.
PCU PWB trouble. Replace the home position sensor.
Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness between the
finisher and the PCU PWB.
F1-20 Finisher alignment operation trouble F2-39 Process thermistor trouble
R
Trouble content
Trouble content Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause Process thermistor trouble.
Process thermistor harness connection trouble.
Cause Finisher paper alignment motor lock.
PCU PWB trouble.
Motor speed abnormality.
Over-current to the motor. Check & Remedy Replace the process thermistor.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Check connection of the process thermistor harness
Home position sensor trouble. and the connector.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
alignment motor R.
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
position sensor. F2-40 Toner density sensor trouble
Replace the paper alignment motor R. Trouble content
Replace the home position sensor.
Detail PCU
Cause Toner density sensor output abnormality.
Sensor connector and harness connection trouble.
F1-29 Finisher cooling fan motor Developing unit trouble.
abnormality PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Check connection of the sensor connector and the
Trouble content Finisher cooling fan motor abnormality
harness.
Detail MFP
Replace the developing unit.
Cause Motor lock Replace the PCU PWB.
Motor harness short/open.
Finisher control PWB trouble.
Harness/connector connection trouble.
F2-58 Temperature/humidity sensor trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the finisher
cooling fan (FCF). (HUD_M/TH_M)
Check connection from the finisher control PWB to
the motor. Trouble content
Detail PCU
Replace the fan motor.
Cause Temperature/humidity sensor trouble.
Process humidity sensor harness and connector
connection trouble
F1-37 Finisher data backup RAM error PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the temperature/humidity sensor.
Trouble content Check connection of the temperature/humidity sensor
Detail PCU harness and the connector.
Cause Finisher control PWB trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
Malfunction due to noises
Check & Remedy Replace the finisher control PWB.
Readjust the finisher. (Use SIM3-10, Finisher control F2-64 Toner supply operation trouble
PWB DIP SW adjustment.)
Trouble content
Detail PCU
F1-50 Main unit - Finisher combination error Cause Toner motor trouble.
Toner density sensor trouble.
Trouble content Connector/harness trouble.
Detail PCU PCU PWB trouble.
Toner cartridge trouble.
Cause The finisher which is not supported by the main unit
Developing unit trouble.
model is installed.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the toner motor.
Replace the toner density sensor.
Check & Remedy Install a proper finisher.
Connector and harness check.
Replace the toner cartridge.
Replace the developing unit.
F1-95 Paper exit option configuration error
Trouble content F2-70 Improper toner cartridge detection

Detail PCU
Cause The paper exit option configuration is improper. Trouble content
Check & Remedy Install a proper option.
Detail PCU
Cause An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main
unit detects a toner cartridge of a different
specification.)
Toner cartridge trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
F2-74 Toner cartridge CRUM error F6-00 MFPC PWB - FAX communication
trouble
Trouble content
Detail PCU Trouble content MFP - FAX communication establishment error /
Cause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble. Framing / Parity / Protocol error
PCU PWB trouble. Section MFP
Connector and harness trouble between PCU PWB
Case 1 Cause FAX control PWB trouble.
and toner cartridge
Check Replace the FAX control PWB.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
and
Remedy
Check the connector and the harness between the
Case 2 Cause FAX control PWB - MFPC PWB connector and
PCU PWB and the toner cartridge.
harness trouble
Check Check the connector and the harness between the
and FAX control PWB and the MFPC PWB.
F3-12 Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble Remedy
Case 3 Cause FAX control PWB - Mother board connector and
Trouble content C1LUD is not turned ON within the specified time. harness trouble
Detail PCU Check Check the connector and the harness between the
Cause C1LUD is not turned ON within the specified time. and FAX control PWB and the mother board.
C1LUD sensor trouble. Remedy
Paper feed tray 1 lift unit trouble. Case 4 Cause FAX control PWB ROM trouble / ROM pin breakage
PCU PWB trouble. Check Check the ROM of the FAX control PWB.
Sensor harness and connector connection trouble and
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and the connector Remedy
of C1LUD.
Replace the lift-up unit.
Replace the PCU PWB. F6-01 FAX control PWB EEPROM read/write
error
F3-22 Paper feed tray 2 lift operation trouble
Trouble content FAX control PWB EEPROM access error (Read and
write)
Trouble content C2LUD does not turn ON within the specified time.
Section FAX
Detail PCU
Case 1 Cause FAX control PWB EEPROM trouble
Cause C2LUD does not turn ON within the specified time.
Check Check that no trouble occurs after replacement of
C2LUD sensor trouble.
and EEPROM. Execute the memory check of SIM66-3 to
Paper feed tray 2 lift unit trouble.
Remedy insure that EEPROM can be accessed.
PCU PWB trouble.
Case 2 Cause FAX control PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
Sensor harness and connector connection trouble
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector of C2LUD.
and
Replace the lift-up unit.
Remedy
F3-32 Paper feed tray 3 lift operation trouble F6-04 FAX MODEM operation trouble
Trouble content FAX control PWB MODEM chip operation trouble

Section FAX
Detail PCU
Case 1 Cause FAX MODEM chip operation trouble.
Cause C3LUD does not turn ON within the specified time.
C3LUD sensor trouble. Check Replace the FAX control PWB.
Paper feed tray 3 lift unit trouble. and
PCU PWB trouble. remedy
Sensor harness and connector connection trouble Case 2 Cause The FAX MODEM chip cannot be accessed.
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector of C3LUD. Check Replace the FAX control PWB.
Replace the lift-up unit. and
Replace the PCU PWB. Remedy
F3-42 Paper feed tray 4 lift operation trouble F6-21 Improper combination of TEL/LIU
PWB and FAX soft switch
Detail PCU Trouble content Incompatibility between the TEL/LIU PWB and the
Cause C4LUD does not turn ON within the specified time. FAX control PWB information (soft switch)
C4LUD sensor trouble. Section MFP
Paper feed tray 4 lift unit trouble. Case 1 Cause The destination of the TEL/LIU PWB installed is
PCU PWB trouble. improper.
Sensor harness and connector connection trouble Check Check the destination of the TEL/LIU PWB.
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector of C4LUD. and
Replace the lift-up unit. Remedy
Replace the PCU PWB. Case 2 Cause TEL/LIU PWB trouble.
Check Replace the TEL/LIU PWB.
and
Remedy
F6-30 FAX 1-chip microprocessor access H2-01 Thermistor open trouble (TH_US)
error (FAX detection)
Trouble content Sub thermistor open hardware detection trouble
Trouble content FAX 1-chip microprocessor access error (Read and Detail PCU
write) Cause Sub thermistor trouble
Section MFP PCU PWB trouble
Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble
Case 1 Cause Program writing trouble to the 1-chip microprocessor,
Fusing section connector connection trouble
or no program data written.
Fusing unit not installed
Check Use SIM66-42 to rewrite the 1-chip microprocessor
Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
and program.
Replace the thermistor.
Remedy
Case 2 Cause FAX 1-chip microprocessor circuit trouble.
Check connection of the thermistor connector and the
harness.
and
Check the connector in the fusing section.
Remedy
H3-00 Fusing section high temperature

F6-97 Incompatibility between FAX control
trouble (TH_UM)
PWB and the main machine
Trouble content Main heater lamp abnormally high temperature
Trouble content Incompatibility between FAX control PWB and the software detection trouble
main machine
Detail PCU
Section MFP
Cause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level.
Case 1 Cause The FAX control PWB installed is improper.
Main thermistor trouble
FAX control PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Check Install a proper FAX control PWB. Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble
and Replace the FAX control PWB. Power unit trouble.
Remedy Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
heater lamp.
F6-98 Incompatibility between the FAX Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
control PWB destination and the main Replace the thermistor.
machine destination Check connection of the thermistor connector and the
harness.
Trouble content Incompatibility between the FAX control PWB Replace the power unit.
destination and the main machine destination
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause Incompatibility between the destination information H3-01 Fusing section high temperature
written into the FAX control PWB EEPROM and that trouble (TH_US)
in the main machine (set with SIM26-6)
Check 1) Check the destination of the FAX control PWB.
and 2) Check the destination of the machine. (SIM26-6) Trouble content Sub heater lamp abnormally high temperature
Remedy software detection trouble
Detail PCU
Cause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level.
H2-00 Thermistor open trouble (TH_UM) Sub thermistor trouble
PCU PWB trouble
Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble
Trouble content Main thermistor open hardware detection trouble Power unit trouble.
Detail PCU Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
Cause Main thermistor trouble Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
PCU PWB trouble heater lamp.
Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Fusing section connector connection trouble Replace the thermistor.
Fusing unit not installed Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor. Check connection of the thermistor connector and the
Replace the thermistor. harness.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the power unit.
Check connection of the thermistor connector and the
harness.
Check the connector in the fusing section.
H4-00 Fusing section low temperature H5-01 5-time continuous jams of POSD
trouble (TH_UM)
Trouble content
Trouble content The fusing temperature does not reach the specified Detail PCU
level within the specified time from turning ON the Cause A fusing jam is not canceled completely. (A jam paper
power relay. remains.)
Detail PCU POSD sensor trouble
Fusing unit installation trouble
Cause Main thermistor trouble.
POSD sensor connector and harness connection
Main heater lamp trouble.
trouble
PCU PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Thermostat trouble.
Fusing unit, drive section trouble
Connector, harness connection trouble.
HL control PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the POSD sensor.
Power unit trouble. Check installation of the fusing unit.
Check & Remedy Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. Replace the fusing unit.
Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor. Check paper around the fusing unit section.
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the Check connection of the POSD sensor connector and
heater lamp. the harness.
Replace the thermistor. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the heater lamp. Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Replace the thermostat.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. L1-00 Scanner feed trouble
Replace the HL control PWB.
Replace the power unit. Trouble content Scanner feed is not completed within the specified
time.
Detail SCU
H4-01 Fusing section low temperature Cause Scanner unit trouble.
trouble (TH_US) SCU PWB trouble.
Scanner control PWB trouble.
Harness and connector connection trouble.
Trouble content The fusing temperature does not reach the specified
Scanner home position sensor trouble.
level within the specified time from turning ON the
Scanner motor trouble.
power relay.
Check & Remedy Use SIM1-1 to check the scan operation.
Detail PCU
Replace the scanner unit.
Cause Sub thermistor trouble. Replace the SCU PWB.
Sub heater lamp trouble. Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
PCU PWB trouble. Replace the scanner home position sensor.
Thermostat trouble. Replace the scanner motor.
HL control PWB trouble.
Power unit trouble.
L3-00 Scanner return trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the Trouble content Scanner return is not completed within the specified
heater lamp. time.
Replace the thermistor. Detail SCU
Replace the heater lamp. Cause Scanner unit trouble
Replace the PCU PWB. SCU PWB trouble
Replace the thermostat. Scanner control PWB trouble
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Harness and connector connection trouble
Replace the HL control PWB. Scanner home position sensor trouble
Replace the power unit. Scanner motor trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM1-1 to check the scan operation.
Replace the scanner unit.
Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Replace the scanner home position sensor.
Replace the scanner motor.
L4-01 Main motor lock trouble L4-40 Ozone fan trouble
Trouble content The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of Trouble content The fan operation signal is not detected.
the main motor. Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause Harness/connector trouble between the PCU PWB
Cause Main motor lock trouble and the fan motor.
Harness and connector connection trouble PCU PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble Fan motor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the main motor The fan does not rotate because of the other trouble
lock. (No power supply to the fan motor)
Replace the main motor. Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan
Check connection of the connectors and the harness. motor.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the fan motor / the PCU PWB.
Check connection of the connector and the
harness.
L4-11 Shift motor trouble
Trouble content No change in the shifter home position sensor signal L4-43 Paper exit cooling fan trouble
is detected in the operation of the shifter initializing.
Detail PCU
Trouble content The fan operation signal is not detected.
Cause Shift motor trouble.
Detail PCU
PCU PWB trouble.
Cause Paper exit cooling fan trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
PCU PWB trouble.
Shifter home position sensor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the shift operation.
Check & Remedy Replace the fan.
Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of the shifter
home position sensor.
Check the connector and the harness.
Replace the shift motor.
Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.
Replace the shifter home position sensor.
L6-10 Polygon motor trouble
L4-34 LSU cooling fan trouble Trouble content The polygon motor does not reach the specified RPM
within the specified time after starting rotation of the
polygon motor.
Detail PCU
Detail PCU
Cause Polygon motor trouble.
Cause LSU cooling fan trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the polygon
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
motor.
Use SIM6-2 to check the rotating operation of the fan.
Replace the LSU cooling fan.
Replace the LSU.
L4-32 Power source cooling fan trouble L4-70 Toner motor lock trouble
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Detail PCU
Cause Power cooling fan trouble.
Cause Toner motor abnormality
PCU PWB trouble.
Improper connection or disconnection of the toner
motor and the harness.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.
PCU PWB abnormality
Replace the power cooling fan.
Check & Remedy Use SIM 10-1 to check the toner motor operations.
Check connection of the toner motor harness/
Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
connector.
Replace the toner motor. Replace the
PCU PWB.
L4-35 Fusing cooling fan trouble
Trouble content The fan operation signal is not detected. L8-02 Full wave signal width abnormality
Detail PCU
Cause Fusing cooling fan trouble. Trouble content The full wave signal frequency is judged as abnormal.
PCU PWB trouble. (The detected frequency is over 65Hz or below
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. 45Hz.)
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating. Detail PCU
Replace the fusing cooling fan.
Cause PCU PWB trouble.
Power unit trouble.
Harness trouble.
Replace the power unit.
L8-20 Power controller communication PC-- Personal counter not detected
trouble
Trouble content
Trouble content Communication establishment error / Framing / Detail MFP
Parity / Protocol error Cause The personal counter is not installed.
Detail MFP The personal counter is not detected.
SCU PWB trouble.
Cause PCU PWB - MFPC PWB connector connection
trouble. Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Broken connector pin of the PCU PWB of the MFPC Replace the SCU PWB.
PWB.
Check connector connection between the PCU PWB U1-01 Battery trouble
and the MFPC PWB.
Check the ground of the main unit. Trouble content RTC backup battery voltage fall
Detail MFP
Case 1 Cause 1) Battery life
P1-00 PCI communication error 2) Battery circuit abnormality
Check Check to confirm that the battery voltage is about
Trouble content and 2.5V or above.
Detail MFP Remedy Replace the battery.
Cause Communication error between the MFPC PWB and
the PCI.
Connection failure of connectors and harness U2-00 MFP EEPROM read/write error
between the MFPC PWB and the PCI.
MFPC PWB trouble.
Trouble content
PCI control PWB trouble.
Detail MFP
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and connectors
Cause MFPC PWB EEPROM trouble
between the MFPC PWB and the PCI.
EEPROM socket contact trouble
Check the MFPC PWB, and replace if necessary.
MFPC PWB trouble
(Refer to the necessary procedures after replacement
Strong external noises.
of the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and
perform the procedures.) Check & Remedy Replace the MFPC PWB EEPROM.
Check the PCI control PWB, and replace if Replace the MFPC PWB.
necessary. (Refer to the pages on the necessary works after
replacing the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and
perform the works.)
Check the power environment.
P1-01 PCI fan error
Trouble content U2-05 SD/MFPC PWB SRAM contents

Detail MFP inconsistency
Cause The PCI fan operation signal is not detected.
PCI fan trouble.
PCI control PWB trouble. Trouble content The SD card or the MFPC PWB installed is improper.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and harness (Erroneous detection of account management data)
between the PCI fan and the PCI control PWB. Detail MFP
Check the PCI control PWB, and replace if Cause The SD card was replaced.
necessary. The MFPC PWB was replaced.
Check the PCI fan, and replace if necessary. SD card trouble
MFPC PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Refer to the pages on the necessary works after
P1-02 Plasma generating device error replacing the SD and the MFPC PWB in the Service
Manual, and perform the works.
Use SIM16 to cancel the error.
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause Connection failure of connectors and harness U2-10 MFPC PWB SRAM user authentication
between the plasma generating device and the PCI
control PWB. index check sum error
Plasma generating device trouble.
PCI control PWB trouble. Trouble content
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and harness Detail MFP
between the plasma generating device and the PCI Cause SRAM user index information (user authentication
control PWB. basic data) check sum error.
Replace the plasma generating device. MFPC PWB SRAM trouble.
Check the PCI control PWB, and replace if MFPC PWB trouble.
necessary. Strong external noises.
Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error.
(Index information data in the HDD are transferred to
the SRAM.)
(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after
perform the works.)
U2-11 MFPC PWB EEPROM counter check U2-24 MFPC PWB SRAM memory user
sum error authentication counter check sum
error
Trouble content
Cause MFPC PWB EEPROM trouble Detail MFP
Cause MFPC PWB SRAM trouble
MFPC PWB trouble
MFPC PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error. (The previous writing
Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error. (The check sum error
data (about the latest 8 sheets) are written into the
detection data are calculated again to reset the
EEPROM.)
proper check sum data.)
perform the works.)
perform the works.)
U2-22 MFPC PWB SRAM memory check sum U2-30 MFPC PWB and PCU PWB
error manufacturing No. data inconsistency
Trouble content MFP PWB SRAM trouble
Trouble content Inconsistency between the manufacturing No. saved
Detail MFP in the PCU PWB and that in the MFPC PWB.
Cause MFP PWB SRAM trouble Detail MFP
Strong external noises
Cause When replacing the PCU PWB or the MFPC PWB,
Access circuit trouble
the EEPROM which was mounted on the PWB before
Check & Remedy The data of the communication management table in replacement is not mounted on the new PWB.
the SRAM is initialized when an error occurs, register MFPC PWB trouble
the deleted data again PCU PWB trouble
Use SIM16 to cancel the error
Check & Remedy Check that the EEPROM is properly set.
Replace the MFPC PWB
Check to confirm that the EEPROM which was
mounted on the PWB before replacement is mounted
on the new PWB.
U2-23 MFPC PWB SRAM memory user Replace the MFPC PWB.
authentication counter check sum (Refer to the pages on the necessary works after
error perform the works.)
Trouble content Individual data check sum error of SRAM memory
(MFP)
Detail MFP U2-40 SD card system storage data area
Cause SRAM trouble error
Runaway of the control circuit due to the noise
MFPC PWB SRAM access circuit trouble
Trouble content
Check & Remedy Initialize automatically the data relating to the Detail MFP
content that check sum error occurs by the Cause A file error occurs in the SD card system storage data
power-OFF/ON. partition.
The saved "Scan" and "Fax" data may be SD card trouble
deleted by auto initialization. MFPC PWB trouble
To check if there're any deletion of those data Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power, and the backup data in the
above, by "Job Log". HDD are written into the SD card and the machine is
If there're any deletions, ask customer to do automatically booted.
deleted job again. Check the MFPC PWB, and replace if necessary.
Check the SD card, and replace if necessary.
Clear the U2 trouble by SIM16.
U2-41 HDD system storage data area error
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause A file error occurs in the HDD system saved data
area, disabling backup of the saved file of the
machine adjustment values in the SD card.
HDD trouble
MFPC PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Check the HDD, and replace if necessary.
When replacing the HDD and the MFPC PWB, refer
to the chapter of "Necessary works and procedures
of HDD and MFPC PWB replacement."
U2-42 Machine adjustment data (system U2-80 SCU PWB EEPROM read/write error
storage data area) error
Trouble content
Trouble content Detail SCU
Detail MFP Cause SCU PWB EEPROM trouble
SCU PWB trouble
Cause The saved file of the machine adjustment values in
SCU PWB EEPROM socket connection trouble
the SD card and the HDD cannot be found or is
broken. Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB EEPROM.
Both of the SD card set data and the HDD system Replace the SCU PWB.
saved data area are broken. Check connection of the SCU PWB EEPROM socket.
HDD trouble Check the SIM adjustment value of the following
MFPC PWB trouble items, and adjust again if they are improper.
SD card trouble * Scanner-related adjustments
* Touch panel-related adjustments
Check & Remedy Check the HDD, and replace if necessary.
Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble.
To avoid missing of the counter data and the
Check the SD card, and replace if necessary.
adjustment values, use this simulation to save the
When replacing the HDD, the MFPC PWB, and the
counter data and the adjustment values. (If there is a
SD card, refer to the chapter of "Necessary works
printer option, use SIM22-01 to save the counter data
and procedures of HDD, MFPC PWB, and SD card
and the adjustment values.)
replacement."
Use SIM to adjust the machine again and set the
adjustment values.
U2-81 SCU PWB EEPROM check sum error
U2-50 HDD*1 user authentication data check Trouble content

sum error (SD card when no HDD is Detail SCU
Cause SCU PWB EEPROM trouble.
installed) Installation of non-initialized EEPROM.
SCU PWB trouble.
Trouble content EEPROM socket contact trouble.
Detail MFP Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB EEPROM.
Cause HDD trouble*1 Replace the SCU PWB.
MFPC PWB trouble Check contact of the EEPROM socket.
Strong external noises. Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble. (The check sum
Check & Remedy Check the data related to the check sum error error detection data are calculated again to reset the
(address book, image send system registration data proper check sum data.)
(senders record, meta data)) and register again. To avoid missing of the counter data and the
Use SIM16 to cancel the U2 trouble. adjustment values, use this simulation to save the
Replace the HDD*1. counter data and the adjustment values. (If there is a
Replace the MFPC PWB. printer option, use SIM22-01 to save the counter data
(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after and the adjustment values.)
replacing the HDD and the MFPC PWB in the Service
Manual, and perform the works.)*1
U2-90 PCU PWB EEPROM read/write error
*1: SD card when no HDD is installed.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
U2-60 Watermark check error Cause PCU PWB EEPROM trouble
PCU PWB trouble
Trouble content EEPROM socket contact trouble
Detail MFP Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB EEPROM.
Cause Watermark data trouble Check the SIM adjustment values of the engine, and
HDD trouble adjust again if they are improper.
MFPC PWB trouble Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the U2 trouble. Check contact of the EEPROM socket.
Use SIM49-5 to install the watermark data. Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble.
Replace the HDD. To avoid missing of the counter data and the
Replace the MFPC PWB. adjustment values, use this simulation to save the
(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after counter data and the adjustment values. (If there is a
replacing the HDD and the MFPC PWB in the Service printer option, use SIM22-01 to save the counter data
Manual, and perform the works.) and the adjustment values.)
U2-91 PCU PWB EEPROM check sum error
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause PCU PWB EEPROM trouble
PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB EEPROM.
Check contact of the EEPROM socket.
Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble. (The check sum
error detection data are calculated again to reset the
proper check sum data.)
To avoid missing of the counter data and the
adjustment values, use this simulation to save the
counter data and the adjustment values. (If there is a
printer option, use SIM22-01 to save the counter data
and the adjustment values.)
U7-50 MFPC PWB - Vendor machine

communication error
Trouble content Communication error between the MFP and the serial
vendor.
Detail MFP
Cause Improper setting of the vendor machine specifications
(SIM26-3).
Vendor machine trouble.
MFPC PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Cancel the error by turning OFF/ON the power.
Check the connector and the harness in the
communication line.
Change the specifications of the vendor machine
(SIM26-3).
U7-51 Vendor machine error
Trouble content
Detail MFP (Notification of a trouble from the serial vendor)
Cause Serial vendor machine trouble.
Check & Remedy Err.XX is displayed on the operation panel of the
vendor. (XX is the detail code.)
Repair the vendor machine referring to the detail code.
Check the connector and the harness in the
communication line.
UC-02 CPT - ASIC error
Trouble content
Detail SCU
Cause SCU PWB trouble. (CPT-ASIC trouble.)
Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB.
UC-20 DOCC ASIC error
Trouble content
Detail SCU
Cause SCU PWB trouble. (DOCC-ASIC trouble.)
Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB.
(1) Descriptions on E7-91 - 94 errors
Two-digit numbers with double parentheses are added to E7-91 - 94 error codes recorded in SIM22-6 indicate the detailed contents of the
errors.
The number in each digit has its own meaning.
(Example) E7-91(**)
The upper digit of the added code indicates the job kind at the occurrence of the error.
Error The upper digit of Image Job kind at the occurrence

code the added code type of the error
E7-91 0* Other *1
1* JPEG * FAX (Internet FAX) *1
2* JBIG reception print (Other than *1
3* Mxx1ch long size images)
4* Mxx4ch
5* Other *1
6* JPEG * FAX (Internet FAX) *1
7* JBIG reception print *1
8* Mxx1ch (Long size images)
9* Mxx4ch
A* - F* Not Used *1
E7-92 0* Other *1
1* JPEG
2* JBIG * OC copy (in Non ERDH) *1
3* Mxx1ch *1
4* Mxx4ch
5* - F* Not Used *1
E7-93 0* Other *1
* Copy print (in ERDH)
1* JPEG
* Copy composing system
2* JBIG
function (Custom Stamp,
3* Mxx1ch
Water mark)
4* Mxx4ch
5* Other *1
6* JPEG * Image send
7* JBIG * Document filing
8* Mxx1ch * Preview display
9* Mxx4ch
A* Other *1
* GDI/PCL printer print
B* JPEG
* Copy composing system
C* JBIG
function (Custom Stamp,
D* Mxx1ch Water mark) *1
E* Mxx4ch
F* Not Used *1
E7-94 0* Other *1
1* JPEG
* Backup restore
2* JBIG *1
(Filing data import)
3* Mxx1ch *1
4* Mxx4ch *1
5* - F* Not Used *1
*1: Added code without generating
The lower digit of the added code indicates the kind and the content of the abnormality or the result of the automatic memory check executed
when the abnormality is detected.
Lower digit of the added code Kind/Content of the error

*1 *9 *A *B *C *D *E *F
Memory Huffman Restart Improper Head decoding Head decoding Other
verify - code marker marker error detection error detection abnormal
NG error error error (ASIC detection) (CPU detection) termination
The upper digit of the 1*, 6*, B* JPEG - O O O O - O
added code 2*, 7*, C* JBIG - - - O O - O
i 3*, 8*, D* Mxx1ch - - - - - - O
Error detection circuit 4*, 9*, E* Mxx4ch - - - - - - O
: Added code indicating that the memory and its peripheral must be focused for check in case of an error.
O : Added code indicating that doubtful sections are in a wider range such as the memory, PWB's, HDD, etc.
- : Added code without generating
(2) Countermeasures in case of E7-91 - 94
In case of E7-9x (11), E7-9x (21), E7-9x (31), E7-9x (41)
Cause In case of E7-91 - 94, the DIMM memory (DRAM) is automatically read/written to perform a simplified check. If an abnormality is detected
in that case, the added code becomes (*1).
Therefore, there is a strong possibility that an abnormality lies around the memory.
Check and remedy * Check the installing state of the DIMM memory and the MFPC PWB to insure that there is no abnormality. (Disconnect and connect the
DIMM memory and the MFPC PWB to check to insure that there is no error occurring again.)
* Use SIM60-01 (Memory read/write check) to check to insure that no error occurs.
* Replace the DIMM memory.
* Replace the MFPC PWB.
NOTE: Since the automatic memory check executed when E7-91 - 94 occurs is a simplified check, it cannot detect an abnormality with abso-
lute certainty.
If the added code is (*1), there may be a memory abnormality. Even if it is not (*1), however, it cannot be said that there is no abnormal-
ity around the memory.
Other added codes
Cause Mostly because the data inputted to the ASIC for decoding are broken for some reason.
There is an abnormality in the process of read/write of the process data in the memory or the hard disk.
A great noise unexpectedly generated may be the cause.
For the cases of FAX or Internet FAX reception data, when broken data are saved, printing is performed every time when the machine is
booted, generating an error repeatedly. (E7-91)
(To clear the received data, execute SIM66-10.)
Check and remedy * Check the DIMM memory, the MFPC PWB, and the HDD to insure that there is no abnormality.
* When the job at occurrence of an error is FAX (E7-91), check the installing state of the FAX control PWB and the SC CARD PWB.
* Perform SIM60-01 (Memory read/write check) to insure that there is no NG.
* Perform SIM62-02 and SIM62-03 (HDD read/write check) to insure that there is no NG. (It is not required, however, when the job at
occurrence of an error is FAX.)
* Check the installing state of the DIMM memory and the MFPC PWB to insure that there is no abnormality. (Disconnect and connect the
DIMM memory and the MFPC PWB to check to insure that there is no error occurring again.)
* Replace the HDD.
* Replace the FAX control PWB.
* Replace the DIMM memory.
* Replace the MFPC PWB.
* Replace the SD card.
NOTE: When there is an abnormality around the HDD, E7-03 may occur.
If error E7-91 - 94 as well as E7-03 occurs, there is a high possibility that the error can be removed by replacing the HDD and the
MFPC PWB.
(3) Countermeasures against the case where nothing is displayed when the machine is booted
[Trouble content]
If nothing is displayed when the machine is booted, the error code cannot be checked and the cause is hard to identify.
One of the causes may be an abnormality in the boot program of the SD card. To check that, the following method is used.
[Check method]
Check to confirm that the LED (red) upper the CPU heat sink on the MFPC PWB shown in the figure below is lighted when the power is sup-
plied.
If the LED is lighted, it is judged as an abnormality of the SD card.
Red LED
Heat sink (CPU)
SD Card
[Countermeasures]
1) Replace the SD card with a new one. (Be sure to use a service part.)
2) Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
3) Use SIIM66-62 to backup the FAX reception data from the HDD to a USB memory device. (If there is no FAX reception data, this proce-
dure is not required.) (The FAX reception data are backed up in the PDF format. Supply the date to the user.)
4) Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX and image send memory. (Ensure consistency between the HDD data and the image related memory.)
(4) Relation between the MFPC PWB LED status and errors
When the machine cannot be booted, check the LED status of the MFPC PWB to presume the error content and its cause.
<Process content and LED display>
LED status (Lighting) Process operation content Cause for halt during operation
OOOO CPU initial setting Reus ASIC trouble
OOO Memory adjustment Memory and its peripheral circuit trouble
OO O Memory check Memory and its peripheral circuit trouble
OO - -
O OO Program memory development Memory-related trouble
O O Interruption-related initialization Reus ASIC trouble
O O PCIe initialization PCIe and its peripheral circuit trouble (SoC/ACRE, etc.)
O Basic device initialization Reus ASIC trouble
OOO SD card initialization Reus ASIC trouble
SATA initialization SD card trouble
HDD trouble
O OS initialization (1) Reus ASIC trouble
O O Timer enabling Reus ASIC trouble
O Serial driver enabling Reus ASIC trouble
I2C driver enabling
O LCD initialization Reus ASIC trouble
O Image process IP initialization Reus ASIC trouble
O OS initialization (2) Reus ASIC trouble
Main process Reus ASIC trouble
* : LED ON / O: LED OFF
<When an error occurs>

LED status (Flashing) Error content Cause
OOO Nonsupport memory Memory trouble
OO O Nonsupport memory (access speed) Memory trouble
OO Nonsupport memory controller Memory trouble
O OO DDR-PHY setting error Reus ASIC trouble
O O Interruption handler process error Reus ASIC trouble
OOO Memory check error Memory trouble
Memory combination error Memory trouble
* In case of an error, the LED's flash as shown in the above table.

* : LED ON / O: LED OFF
LED No. D25/D24/D23/D22

3 / 2 / 1 / 0
2. JAM and troubleshooting
A. JAM code list
(1) Main unit (3) RSPF
JAM code JAM content JAM code JAM content

TRAY1 Cassette 1 paper feed JAM SPPD1_N SPPD1 not-reached JAM
(PPD1 not-reached JAM) SPPD1_S SPPD1 remaining JAM
TRAY2 Cassette 2 paper feed JAM SPPD2_N SPPD2 not-reached JAM
(C2PFD not-reached JAM) SPPD2_S SPPD2 remaining JAM
C2PFD_N3 C2PFD not-reached JAM (Cassette 3 feed paper) SPPD3_N SPPD3 not-reached JAM
C2PFD_N4 C2PFD not-reached JAM (Cassette 4 feed paper) SPPD3_S SPPD3 remaining JAM
C2PFD_S2 C2PFD remaining JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper) SPPD4_N SPPD4 not-reached JAM
C2PFD_S3 C2PFD remaining JAM (Cassette 3 feed paper) SPPD4_S SPPD4 remaining JAM
C2PFD_S4 C2PFD remaining JAM (Cassette 4 feed paper) SPPD5_N SPPD5 not-reached JAM
TRAY3 Cassette 3 paper feed JAM SPPD5_S SPPD5 remaining JAM
(C3PFD not-reached JAM) SPSD_SCN Exposure start notification timer end
C3PFD_N4 C3PFD not-reached JAM (Cassette 4 feed paper) SPPD2_NR SPPD2 reverse not-reached JAM
C3PFD_S3 C3PFD remaining JAM (Cassette 3 feed paper) SPPD2_SR SPPD2 reverse remaining JAM
C3PFD_S4 C3PFD remaining JAM (Cassette 4 feed paper) P_SHORT Short size JAM
TRAY4 Cassette 4 paper feed JAM SDFS_S Overlap feed detection jam/accompanied feed jam
(C4PFD not-reached JAM)
ICU_REQ ICU factor stop JAM
C4PFD_S4 C4PFD remaining JAM (Cassette 4 feed paper)
MFT Manual feed tray paper feed JAM
(PPD1 not-reached)
PPD1_N2 PPD1 not-reached JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
PPD1_NA PPD1 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper)
PPD1_SM PPD1 remaining JAM (Manual feed tray feed paper)
PPD1_S1 PPD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
PPD1_SA PPD1 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper)
POSD_N POSD not-reached JAM
POSD_S POSD remaining JAM
POD1_N POD1 not-reached JAM
POD1_S POD1 remaining JAM
DRUM Drum lock detection
FUSER Fuser winding detection
PRI_JAM Image preparation wait timeout
FIN_ERR Finisher communication abnormality detection
MTR_ILG Motor driver trouble JAM
SIZE_ILG Size illegal JAM
STOP_JAM Emergency stop request JAM (Controller request)
NO_MATCH Parameter no matching
(2) Finisher
JAM code JAM content

FPPD1_N Finisher inlet port not-reached JAM
FPPD1_S Finisher inlet port remaining JAM
FSTPD_S Finisher paper exit remaining JAM
FSTPL Finisher staple JAM
FPRD_N Finisher compiler not-reached JAM
FPRD_S Finisher compiler remaining JAM
3. Image send communication report code
A. Outline and code system descriptions B. Details
After completion of communication, the communication report (1) Communication report main code
table, the communication management table, and the protocol are
described on the communication report column. Report Final receive signal
Final receive signal (Receive side)
The communication report code is composed as follows: code (Send side)
0 Abnormal signal Abnormal signal
Communication report: XX (XXXX)
1 NSF, DIS (SID), (SUB), NSS, DCS
The upper 2 digits of the communication report code:
2 CFR (PWD), (SEP), NSC, DTC
Communication report code of 00 - 99 (Refer to communication
3 FTT EOP
report main code.)
4 MCF EOM
The lower 4 digits of the communication report code: 5 PIP, PIN MPS
Used by the serviceman. 6 RTN, RTP PRI-Q
The upper 2 digits: Communication report sub code 1 (Refer to 7 No signal, DCN DCN
communication report sub code 1.) 8 PPR PPS-EOP
The lower 2 digits: Communication report sub code 2 (Refer to 9 PPS-EOM
communication report sub code 2.) 10 PPS-MPS, PPS-NULL
11 RNR RR
CAUTION: The communication report sub code 1 and sub code 2
12 CTR CTC
are in hexadecimal notation. (The others are in decimal
13 ERR EOR-Q
notation.)
14 PPS-PRI-Q
CAUTION: The communication report sub code 1 is not used in the 16 Abnormal signal Abnormal signal
these models. 17 NSF, DIS SID, SUB, NSS, DCS
18 CFR PWD, SEP, NSC, DTC
19 FTT PPS-EOP
20 MCF PPS-EOM
21 PIP, PIN PPS-MPS, PPS-NULL
22 RTN, RTP PRI-Q
23 No signal, DCN DCN
24 PPR
25 RNR RR
26 CTR CTC
27 ERR EOR-Q
28 PPS-PRI-Q
29 V.8 Phase-1 V.8 Phase-1
CAUTION: For report codes 16 - 31, V.34 MODE COMMUNICA-

TION.
Report code
Display in the column of
(Communication Content of communication interruption
result
result)
0 - 31 Refer to “previous table”. Depends on the point of communication interruption. For 16 or later, V.34 mode communication.
33 BUSY The calling side cannot establish connection with the remote party.
34 CANCEL A communication interruption command is made during sending/receiving. The interruption key is pressed for
interruption of input. <Send/Receive/Polling/Bulletin board>
35 NG35 XXXX Power is failed during sending/receiving. <Send/Receive/Polling/Bulletin board>
36 (No record paper)
37 (Record paper jam)
38 MEM. FULL Memory over during reception. <Receive/Polling>
Print is not made during reception in acting reception inhibit. <Receive/Polling>
39 (Number of paper
unmatched)
40 (Relay not received)
41 LENGTH OVER The send data length of one page exceeds the limit (2m) in sending. <Send/Bulletin board>
42 LENGTH OVER The receive data length of one page exceeds the limit. <Receive/Polling>
43 (Communication) (OK) Speaking before data transmission
44 ORIGINAL ERROR A document jam occurs in direct sending. <Send>
45 (Picture quality error)
46 NO RESPONSE The FAX signal from the remote party is not detected within T1 time. <Send/Polling>
(When in recall, however, the recall setting in case of a communication error is valid.)
47 TX DECODE ERROR A decode error occurs in the FAX board. <Send/Bulletin board>
48 OK Normal end of communication
OK REPLY RECEIVE OK in Internet FAX send with reception confirmation.
49 NO RX POLL The called side does not have polling function in polling reception. <Polling>
The called side has no data to send. <Polling>
50 RX POLL FAIL In polling reception, DCN is received for DTC. <Polling>
In polling sending, there is no send data. <Bulletin board>
51 PASS # NG In poling sending, the allow number is not matched. <Bulletin board>
In polling sending, the system number is not matched. <Bulletin board>
52 (No confidential function in In confidential sending, the remote party does not have confidential function. <Send>
remote party) (Including other company's machines)
1) The NSF signal has not "Confidential function" bit.
2) The NSF is not a Sharp machine.
53 (Confidential not received) 1) In confidential sending, DCN is received for NSS. <Send>
54 (Confidential BOX NO NG) 1) In confidential reception, a confidential box number which is not registered is specified.
55 (No relay function in In relay command sending, the remote machine has no relay function. <Send>
remote party) (Including other company's machine)
1) The NSF signal has not "Confidential function" bit.
2) The NSF is not a Sharp machine.
56 NO REL RX 1) In relay command sending, DCN is received for NSS. <Send>
2) In relay command reception, a remote station number which is not registered is specified. <Receive>
3) In F code relay broadcasting, an F code relay command is received.<Receive>
57 (Relay ID unmatched) 1) In relay command reception, the relay ID does not match. <Receive>
58 REJECTED In reception, data are sent from a remote machine of receive inhibit number. <Receive>
(Not rejected in the bulletin board send or the F code bulletin board send.)
59 RX NO F-CODE POLL In F code polling (calling), the remote machine has no DIS bit 47 (polling function). <Polling>
In F code polling (calling), the called side has no send data. (DIS bit 9 is 0.)<Polling>
60 NO F-CODE POLL In F code polling (calling), DCN is received for SEP. <Polling>
In bulletin board, there is no send data for SEP. <Bulletin board>
61 RX POLL # NG In bulletin board, the sub address (bulletin board number (SEP)) is not matched. <Bulletin board>
62 F POLL PASS # NG In bulleting board, the pass code (PWD) is not matched. <Bulletin board>
63 NO F FUNC In F code sending, the remote machine has no DIS bit 49 (sub address function). <Send>
(Check that the remote machine conforms to F code.)
64 NO F-CODE In F code sending : <Send>
1) DCN is received for SUB. --- Check the box number.
2) DCN is received for SID. --- Check the box number and pass code.
In F code receiving : <Receive>

"F code relay broadcasting" or "F code confidential reception" is "Inhibited with soft SW."
67 F PASS # NG In F code receiving, the pass code (SID) is not matched. <Receive>
68 BOX NO. NG In F code reception, a box number which is not registered is specified. (SUB is not matched.) <Receive>
69 MEMORY OVER Memory over in quick online sending <Send>
70 (JOB MEMORY OVER) In PC-FAX reservation, the number of remote parties is exceeded. <Send>
71 NG71 XXXX *1 In PC-FAX reservation, data sent from PC includes some errors. <Send>
72 (NG72 XXXX) *1 In department management setting on the machine side:
* In reservation from PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, a department number which is not registered on the
machine side is specified. <Send>
* In reservation from PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, the department number is not specified. <Send>
73 NG73 XXXX *1 In reservation from PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, the use quantity limit is exceeded. <Send>
74 NG74 XXXX *1 When reserving specified filing in document filing in PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX;
* The pass-code for the folder is set on the machine side and the pass-code from PC-XXX does not match
with it. <Send>
* The pass-code for the folder is set on the machine side and no pass-code is specified by PC-XXX. <Send>
Report code
Display in the column of
(Communication Content of communication interruption
result
result)
75 NG75 XXXX *1 * Reservation cannot be made due to machine busy. (Reservation of PC-FAX cannot be accepted.)
* When "PC-FAX or PC-internet FAX send inhibit" is set on the machine side.
76 NG76 XXXX *1 Reserved with receive confirmation request in PC-Internet FAX, but the Internet FAX sender is not registered
on the machine side. <Send>
77 NG77 XXXX *1 In reserving specified filing in PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, the machine has no filing function.
78 NG78 XXXX *1 The filing function is inhibited on the machine side when filing specification is reserved by PC-FAX or PC-
Internet FAX.
79 NG79 XXXX *1 An authentication error occurs when PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX is reserved.
80 NG80 XXXX *1 NIC connect failure (network abnormality)
* Check for disconnection of cables.
* A network trouble (CE-XX) occurs.
* The port is set to DISABLE.
* Authentication of the POP server is failed when POP before SMTP is enabled.
* When an error other than the communication result code 93 or 94 in D-SMTP send (including error
response of 5XX)
81 NG REPORT In Internet FAX send, reply of receive confirmation of the remote machine is not normal. (Including PC-Internet
FAX).
* Error of the disposition-modifier.
* The disposition modifier is not in an error, and the disposition type is other than displayed, dispatched, or
processed.
82 NO REPORT In Internet FAX send, time-out occurs in waiting for receive confirmation from the remote machine. (Including
PC-Internet FAX).
* In a case where send confirmation wait time-out time is other than 0, when send confirmation reply from an
Internet FAX destination is not received.
* Recalls of the set number of recalls are performed, but send confirmation reply from an internet FAX
destination is not received.
83 NG LIMIT In E-mail/FTP, Internet FAX send, the send data size exceeds the upper limit of send data.
84 REJECTED In e-mail receive, a sender is registered in receive reject address/domain. <Receive>
85 NG85 XXXX *1 In e-mail receive, an error occurs in communication with POP3 server.
* Header acquisition error.
* Time-out during mail receive
86 RECEIVED In e-mail receive, an unsupported attached file is received.
Only the TIFF-F type is supported for attached files.
* The TIFF-F type of the attached file cannot be recognized.
* There is no attached file.
87 NG87 XXXX *1 In e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory.
* Memory over
88 NG88 XXXX *1 In SMTP e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory.
* Cannot be stored in memory.
* The number of items of acting receive data is the maximum, and an additional data cannot be stored.
89 NG89 XXXX *1 In SMTP e-mail receive, an error occurs in communication with the mail server.
* Time-out occurs during e-mail receive.
90 NG90 XXXX *1 After reservation by re-operation of document filing, conversion for image send cannot be made.
91 NG91 XXXX *1 *2 Data cannot be written to the memory device when Scan To USB is executed.
* The memory device is disconnected during writing to the memory device.
* An error occurs due to a memory device trouble.
92 NG92 XXXX *1 *2 The USB device memory overflows during writing data into the memory device when "Scan to USB" is
executed.
93 NG93 XXXX *1 When error in D-SMTP send (with recall)
* An error response of 4XX occurs during communication with the SMTP server.
* Time out occurs after establishment of connection with the SMTP server.
94 NG94 XXXX *1 When busy in D-SMTP send
Time out occurs during establishment of connection with the SMTP server.
95 NG95 XXXX *1 When the path is too long in execution of Scan To USB.
96 NG96 XXXX *1 When the normal process is not executed in the secure mail sending.
98 NG98 XXXX *1 The copy inhibit pattern is detected when scanning a document.
99 NG99 XXXX *1 A document which is inhibited to be copied such as a banknote is scanned.
*1: For a job status result in "Display in the column of result," "NG XXXX" is displayed. " " is the code number.
For a communication result, "Communication error (XXXX)" is displayed.
*2: The error code of Scan To USB is specified only in the job log.
* When the communication result is OK, the communication sub code 1 and the communication sub code 2 are "0000."
* Errors in ( ) are not used.
(2) Communication report sub code 1
The communication report sub code 1 (upper 2 digits) are always indicated as "00."
(3) Communication report sub code 2
Report code 2 Content of communication interruption Send/Receive

00 When the conditions after 01 do not apply. Send/Receive
01 Send length over Send
02 EOL time up Receive
03 Carrier detection time up Receive
04 Time up of the communication start command from the machine side Receive
05 Time up in phase C (8 min) Send
06 Memory image decode error Receive
07 Memory image decode error Send
08 Time up between frames in phase C (Report code is 0 or 16.) Send/Receive
09 Not used —
10 Not used —
11 Polarity reversion detection Receive
12 Invalid command reception Receive
13 Time up (1-minute timer/6-second time) Receive
14 PUT error Receive
15 In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Primary to Control. Receive
16 In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Control to Primary. Receive
17 Command receive time-up from MFP controller Receive
18 Not used —
19 Not used —
20 Polarity reversion detection Send
21 Invalid command reception Send
22 Fallback retry number over Send
23 Command retry number resend over Send
24 Time up (T5 timer) Send
25 Time up (T5 timer) in V.34 mode Send
26 In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Primary to Control. Send
27 In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Control to Primary. Send
28 When sending the FSK signal, no response of send completion is sent back from the MODEM chip within a certain time. Send
(V.34, other than V.34)
29 Not used —
30 A communication error is generated between MFP controller and Modem controller. (Report code is 0 or 16.) —
31 DC current not detected (busy) Send
32 Dial tone not detected (busy) Send
33 Busy tone detection (busy) Send
34 T0 time up (Remote machine not responding) Send
35 T1 time up (Remote machine not responding) Send
36 In dialing, polarity reversion detection (Remote machine not responding) Send
37 Calling is not made (busy)<Collision detected (including CNG detection)> Send
38 Not used —
60 In resend of document filed data, an error occurs in decoding or coding. Resend
61 In resend of document filed data, setting to inhibit resolution conversion is made. (The resolution after resend is set to be Resend
Enlarged.)
62 In resend of document filed data, rotation setting is made for data which cannot be rotated. Resend
63 In resend of document filed data, data cannot be stored in HD after conversion of resolution for resend. Resend
64 In resending data of document file, during conversion for resending, the number of IMS management pages exceeds the Resend
upper limit (999). (IT occurs in OSA Scan to FTP also, resulting in memory over.) OSAScanToFTP
70 E-mail header acquisition error E-mail receive
71 Time out occurs during e-mail receive. E-mail receive
72 Receive reject occurs during e-mail receive. E-mail receive
73 Network communication cannot be made due to port disable. Network send
74 An authentication of the POP server is failed when POP before SMTP is enabled. Network send
75 In the setting of SSL communication, when SSL communication is tried but the server side does not support SSL. Network send
76 There is no image in network communication (transfer). Network send
80 There is no attached file in received e-mail. E-mail receive
81 The attached file of received e-mail is not of TIFF type which is supported. E-mail receive
82 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized. E-mail receive
ID error
Endian error
Version error
Tag data error
Tag parameter error
Header size error
Report code 2 Content of communication interruption Send/Receive
Data error
90 In e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory. E-mail receive
Memory over.
Cannot be stored in memory.
91 In e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory. E-mail receive
The file size is too great to be stored in memory.
92 In SMTP e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory. E-mail receive
Cannot be stored in memory.
When the sub code 2 is "08" or "30" and the communication report is "OK," the report code is "00" or "16."
4. Dial tone
When shipping from the factory, the dial tone detection when sending is set to Enable (changed from OFF to ON). When installing this
machine, be sure to check and confirm that the dial tone is properly detected and the auto dial sending is enabled.
Check to confirm that the continuous buzzer sound is heard when the on-hook key is pressed. (Press the on-hook key again to cancel the
buzzer sound.)
If facsimile communication cannot be executed normally through the IP telephone line, try the general telephone line.
MX-M316N
[8] FIRMWARE UPDATE Service Manual
1. Outline
A. Cases where update is required C. Update procedures and kinds of firmware
ROM update is required in the following cases: There are following methods of update of the firmware.
1) When there is a necessity to upgrade the performance. 1) Update method using SIM 49-1
2) When installing a new spare part ROM for repair to the 2) Update method using FTP
machine. 3) Update method using the Web page
3) When installing a new spare parts PWB unit (with ROM) for 4) Update method using the CN update function (There are three
repair to the machine. methods.)
4) When there is a trouble in the ROM program and it must be Normally, one of 1) - 3) is used to update the firmware.
repaired.
When any one of 1) - 3) is interrupted by an error such as
B. Notes for update power-off during updating, etc., and when retries of these
methods are failed, the method 4) is employed.
(1) Relationship between each ROM and update Firmware types
Before execution of ROM update, check combinations with ROM’s
The firmware type can be displayed by SIM22-5.
installed in the other PWB’s including options. Some combinations
Use SIM22-5 to check the firmware type.
of each ROM’s versions may cause malfunctions of the machine.
2. Update procedure
A. Update method using SIM 49-1
For the update, connect the media or USB memory to the USB port that exists in the main body, and select the firmware data in the media or
USB memory by simulation screen in the main unit.
Media
Firmware.sfu Adapter
USB Host
Firmware.sfu +
Firmware.sfu USB memory
Firmware.sfu The machine detects the media

and executes the program automatically.
*1:
* Store the firmware data (xxx .sfu) to the media or USB memory beforehand.
* The media used for the update must have an enouch capacity for storing the firmware data.
* The USB memory equipped with the security (secure) function cannot be used.
MX-M316N FIRMWARE UPDATE 8 – 1

Execution of the firmware by SIM49-01 5) Press [EXECUTE] key. “ARE YOU SURE? [YES] [NO]”
1) Insert the media or USB memory which stores the firmware becomes clear. Press [YES] key to start the update of selected
into the main unit. (Be sure to use the USB I/F on the operation firemware.
panel.)
2) Enter the SIM49-01.
Press the key of the file to be updated. The screen transfers to
the update screen.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(>XVEEG@
',5!)2/'(5 ),/(
),/( ',5!)2/'(5
The progress is displayed on right side of "FIRMWARE

UPDATE" title by 20 steps.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(
* The number of key changes according to the number of the 6 (
sfu file in the media or USB memory inserted. 5(0$,16)25 0,187(6

&$87,21'212732:(52))7+(0)3),50:$5(83'$7(,1352*5(66
* If the media or USB memory was not inserted when entry to
the SIM49-01 screen, "INSERT A USB MEMORY DEVICE
CONTAINING MFP FIRMWARE [OK]" is displayed on the
screen. Insert the media or USB memory and push the [OK]
key to open the file. If the media have not been inserted and
[OK] key is pushed, the next screen does not appear and the
screen waits the entry. Conversely, if the media or USB
memory is pulled out on the file list screen, the error is
detected by the [FILE] key pressing, and the first screen
appears. At this time, only the progress gauge is displayed on the
screen, and the version and the firmware selection key are not
3) Current version number and the version number to be updated
displayed.
will be shown for each firmware respectively.
6) If the update is normal completion, following screen is dis-
played.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(
&203/(7(3/($6(728&+>2.@72),1,6+
4) Press [ALL] key. 2.
All the firmware programs are selected.

Press [OK] key. (The machine is rebooted.)
Go to SIM22-05 and confirm the firmware has upgraded suc-
cessfully.
7) If the update is not normal completion, following screen is dis-
played.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(
(55253/($6(728&+>2.@72),1,6+
,&803&806&8%
* Normally select all the firmwares and execute updating.

* In this case, firmwares which do not exist on the machine
side are ignored.
To update a certain firmware only, select the firmware with 2.
the firmware display key.

* If firmware's key is not selected, [EXECUTE] key is gray out
and cannot be pressed.

B. Firmware update using FTP
FTP software is used to transfer the firmware data (extension ".sfu") from the PC to the machine. The controller recognizes the firmware identi-
fier and the machine automatically switches to firmware write mode. After the firmware is updated, the machine automatically resets.
Machine 1 Machine 3
10.36.112.83 10.36.112.84
Firmware.sfu
Machine 2 Machine 4
FTP Client
10.36.101.52 10.36.101.53
C. Firmware update using the Web page 4) When the firmware update is finished, "Firmware Update com-
pleted. Please reboot the MFP." appears. Pressing the
An Web browser (service technician’s Web page) is used to update
[Reboot] key, the machine will restart to complete the update.
the firmware.
The browser will shift to the following screen.
1) Start the Web browser on a PC and enter the specified URL. A
special firmware upgrade page appears.
2) Click the "Update of Firmware" key in the Web page. Click the
[Browse] key and select the firmware for the update.
MX-XXXX
"Close the browser and open again to display latest informa-

tion." will be displayed.
5) Check the firmware version of machine again.
3) After selecting the file, click the [Submit] key to send the firm-
ware to the machine. Update processing begins. While pro-
cessing takes place, "Firmware Update, now processing..."
appears.

D. Firmware update using the CN update function c. DIP-SW used in the CN update mode
(There are three methods.) To enter the CN update mode, turn ON the UPDATE DIP-SW on
the MFP PWB and boot the machine.
(1) Outline
When terminating the CN update mode, reset UPDATE DIP-SW to
The update method using the DIP SW of the MFP PWB is called OFF (normal mode).
the CN update.
a. Function
There are the following three functions in the CN update mode.
1) Firmware update function
This function is used to update the firmware by transferring
data from the PC which is connected to the MFP PWB, the
SCU PWB, the PCU PWB, the FAX PWB, and various options
by means of a USB memory or USB cable.
This is basically the same as SIM49-01, but differs in the fol-
lowing points:
When the power is shut down or an abnormality occurs in a
section other than the boot program for some reasons during
firmware update operation of other method than the CN
update, this method can be used to update the firmware.
If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, the SD
card must be replaced with a new one having the normal boot
program.
If the boot animation is not displayed, there is an abnormality d. Keys used in the CN update mode
in the boot program. The following five keys are used for operations in the CN update
If the boot animation is displayed but "Copying is enabled" is mode. Be careful that the functions of the keys differ those in the
not displayed on the copier basic menu, there is an abnormal- normal mode.
ity in the main program.
[UP] [BACK]
2) Firmware version check function
(The method to check the firmware version by using SIM22-5
is easier than this method. Therefore, it is not described in this
manual.)
3) ROM making function
(This function is not used in the market, and not described in
this manual.)
b. Purpose
This function is used in the following cases:
[DOWN] [MENU] [OK]
1) When an error occurs during firmware update operation other
than the CN update. Key name Functions in the CN update mode
When the power is shut down or an error occurs in a section [OK] key Executes the selected function or item.
other than the boot program for some reasons during firmware [MENU] key Selects a menu.
update operation of other method than the CN update, this [BACK] key Selects a menu.
method can be used to update the firmware. (Serves as a cancel key in the execution check screen.)
[UP] key Selects an item.
If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, the SD
[DOWN] key Selects an item.
card must be replaced with a new one having the normal boot
program.
If an error occurs in the boot program, this method cannot be
used. In such a case, the SD card must be replaced with a new
one having the normal boot program.

(2) Operating procedures 7) Press [OK] key.
a. Firmware update function The firmware file saved in the USB memory is retrieved, and
the file selection menu is displayed.
This function is used to revise the firmware by using the USB mem-
ory for the MFP PWB, the SCU PWB, the PCU PWB, the FAX
PWB, and each option. Firm Update
It is basically same as SIM 49-01, but differs in the following points.
> F 0100P000.sfu
1) The update target ROM is automatically selected.
2) When the power is shut down or an abnormality occurs in a Display of file selection
section other than the boot program for some reasons during
firmware update operation of other method than the CN 8) Select the firmware file (SFU).
update.
Select the target firmware file (SFU) with [UP] key and
If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, this [DOWN] key.
method cannot be used. On that case, the SD card must be
When [OK] key is pressed with a directory name (the head: ">
replaced with a new one having the normal boot program.
D") displayed, the menu goes to the one-stage lower directory.
When the boot animation is displayed but "Copying is enabled" is
When [BACK] key is pressed in the lower-stage directory, the
not displayed on the copier basic menu, there is an abnormality in
menu returns to the original upper directory.
the main program (SD card).
9) Press [OK] key.
a-1. Necessary items
The selected firmware file (SFU) is read. It takes about one
1) Insert the SD card to the MFP PWB of the machine. minute.
2) USB memory with the firmware file (SFU) saved in it.
NOTE: Save the firmware file in the main directory or in a one-level
lower directory.
Firm Update
a-2. Procedures
Reading Data
1) Turn OFF the power, and remove the cabinet and the MFP
Display of file reading
PWB cover.
2) Turn ON the DIP SW of the MFP PWB UP DATE. (Tilt it to the 10) After completion of reading, the firmware update process is
PWB side.) continued.
3) Install the USB memory into the USB port.
USB memory installing position
Firm Update IcuM
Writing Data
Display of the firmware update process
* The abbreviated name of the firmware which is under

update process is indicated on the right upper corner of the
display.
USB port * During the update process, the display may flash instanta-
neously. It is a normal operation.
4) Turn ON the power.
11) Check the update result.
5) Check to confirm that the machine starts booting. (It takes
Use [UP] key and [DOWN] key to display the results of all the
more than ten seconds to display the menu.)
firmware programs.
Update Program Init Firm Update

Result : OK
IcuM Firm Update IcuM
Result : Not Update
Firm Update
Result : NG
IcuM
Please wait Display of the firmware update result

OK: Update is completed successfully.
NG: Update is failed.
Version Check Not Update: Update is not executed.
Conf : 00050000 12) Turn OFF the power.
13) Turn OFF the DIP SW of the MFP PWB UP DATE. (Set the
Display when booting is completed DIP-SW to the normal mode.)
14) Turn ON the power, and check to confirm that the machine
6) Select the firmware update mode. boots up normally.
Select the update mode with [MENU] key and [BACK] key. Check to confirm that the boot animation is displayed.
Check to confirm that "Copying is enabled" is displayed on the
Firm Update copier basic menu.
15) Check to confirm the version of each firmware with SIM22-5.
From USB Memory 16) Attach the MFP PWB cover and the cabinet.
Display of the firmware update mode

1 : ‘15/Aug.
MX-M316N
[9] MAINTENANCE Service Manual
1. Maintenance list
✕: Check (Check, clean, replace or adjust according to necessity.) ○ : Cleaning : Replace ✩: Lubricate
When 100 150 200 300 400 450 500 600 700 750 800
Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k
Process Drum  ✕    ✕    ✕  Stearic acid powder
-
section (UKOG-0312FCZZ)
Cleaner blade -  ✕  -  ✕  -  ✕ 
Side Seal F/R ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ - ✕ ✕ ✕ - ✕ ✕ ✕ Replace as Process frame unit
MC unit ✕  ✕  -  ✕  -  ✕  every 300K.
Separation pawl unit ✕  ✕  -  ✕  -  - 
Star ring ✕  ✕  -  ✕  -  - 
Process frame unit ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕  ✕ ✕ ✕  ✕ ✕ ✕ Usable for three PM cycles
Developing Developer ✕  ✕    ✕    ✕ 
section Toner filter ✕  ✕    ✕    ✕ 
DV blade ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
DV side sheet F ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
DV side sheet R ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Toner sensor ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Check the sensor head surface.
Toner BK
User replacement for every toner empty.
cartridge
Transfer Transfer bearing - ✕ - ✕ - ✕ - ✕ - ✕ - - Packed with the drum.
unit Transfer Gear - ✕ - ✕ - ✕ - ✕ - ✕ - - Packed with the drum.
Anti-static pin - ✕ - ✕ - ✕ - ✕ - ✕ - - Packed with the drum.
Transfer roller unit - ○  ○  ○  ○  ○  ○
Scanner Mirror/Lens/CCD ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
section Table glass/SPF glass ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Scanner lamp ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Air-blow the light guide bar.
Rails ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Drive belt/drive wire ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
OC ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
LSU Dust-proof glass ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
section
Paper feed Paper feed roller ✕ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Replace it every 100K or 1 year
section/ Pickup roller ✕ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
of use.
Transport Separation roller ✕ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
section Transport rollers ✕ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Transport paper guides ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Torque limiter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Fusing Upper heat roller - ○  ○  ○  ○  ○  ○
section Pressure roller ○ ○ ○  ○ ○ ○  ○ ○ ○ Apply grease to specific position.
-
(Refer to grease map.)
Fusing separation pawl ○  ○  ○  ○  ○  ○
-
(Upper)
Staring washer - ○  ○  ○  ○  ○  ○
Upper cleaning pad - ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕
Fusing separation pawl ○ ○ ○  ○ ○ ○  ○ ○ ○
-
(Lower)
Thermistor - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Fusing gear - ✩  ✩  ✩  ✩  ✩  ✩ Apply grease to specific position.
Upper heat roller bearing - ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕  ✕ (Refer to grease map.)
Pressure roller bearing - ✕ ○✩ ✕  ✕ ○✩ ✕  ✕ ✕ ✕ Replace if necessary.
Paper guide - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Delivery guide collar ✕○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Refer to cleaning point.
Drive Gears ✕✩ ✕✩ ✕✩ ✕✩ ✕✩ ✕✩ ✕✩ ✕✩ ✕✩ ✕✩ ✕✩ Part replacement reference:
section - 100K or 1 year of use.
grease.(Refer to grease map.)
Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ○ ✕ ✕ ✕ ○ ○ ✕ ✕ Part replacement reference:
-
100K or 1 year of use.
Filter Ozone filter -  -    -    -  Or, replace it every 6 month use.
Exhaust ozone filter  -    -    -  Or, replace it every 6 month use.
1 - Destination: North America and
Mexico only
MX-M316N MAINTENANCE 9 – 1
When 100 150 200 300 400 450 500 600 700 750 800
Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k
Exit Paper Transport rollers ✕ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
feed Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
section Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Transport paper guides ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Paper feed Paper feed roller ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Replacement reference:
section/ Pickup roller ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Replace according to the SPF
Transport Separation roller ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ paper feed counter value.
section SPF section roller:
(RSPF) 100K or 1 year of use
When replacing the paper feed
roller, apply grease to the paper
feed shaft.
(UKOG-0013QSZZ)
Torque limiter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Replacement reference:
Replace according to the SPF
paper feed counter value.
SPF section torque limiter:
400K or 2 years of use
Discharge brush ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Transport rollers ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Sensors ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Scanning plate ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Gears ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Belts ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
OC mat ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Grease map（Fusing section）
Grease
UKOG-0255FCZZ
Grease Grease
UKOG-0235FCZZ UKOG-0235FCZZ
Grease
UKOG-0235FCZZ
Grease
UKOG-0235FCZZ
conntact point of plates.
conntact point of plates.
1 : ‘15/Aug.
Grease map（Drive section）
Grease
UKOG-0307FCZZ
Grease Grease
UKOG-0013QSZZ UKOG-0013QSZZ
Do not apply grease
on the fusing drive giar.
Grease
UKOG-0158FCZZ
Grease
UKOG-0299FCZZ
Grease
UKOG-0307FCZZ
Do not apply grease

on the tooth surface
show in the figure.
Cleaning point（Fusing section）
1
Clean the
Delivery guide collar
surface.
2. Other related items
A. Counter clear
Item SIM Remarks
Maintenance cycle setting SIM 21-1
Jam/trouble counter clear SIM 24-1
Paper feed counter clear SIM 24-2
Scan/Stapler/Stamp counter clear SIM 24-3
Maintenance counter clear SIM 24-4 *
Copy counter clear SIM 24-6
Printer/other counter clear SIM 24-9
FAX counter clear SIM 24-10
Scanner mode counter clear SIM 24-15
*: When maintenance message is displayed, replace consumption part reaching the number of sheets of maintenance, then clear the replaced
part's counter only.
3. Display of maintenance execution timing

The message of maintenance execution timing is displayed when each counter reaches the set value. The relations between the messages
and the counters are shown below.
A. Maintenance counter
Display condition
Print JOB Enable/
Display content SIM26-38-A
Counter name Counter value Disable
set value
- 0 (Print continue) Maintenance counter (Total) When 90% of the SIM21-1 set -
Maintenance required. Code: TA 1 (Print stop) value is reached. Enable
Maintenance required. Code: TA 0 (Print continue) When the SIM21-1 set value is Enable
1 (Print stop) reached. Disable
* After execution of maintenance, be sure to execute SIM24-4 to clear the maintenance counter (Total).
B. Transfer unit
Display condition Print JOB Enable/
Display content
Maintenance required.: TK Transfer unit print counter 150K Enable
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the transfer unit print counter, the accumulated number of rotations counter
and the use day counter.
C. Fusing unit
Display content
Maintenance required.: FK1 Fusing heat roller print counter 150K Enable
Maintenance required.: FK2 Pressure roller print counter 300K
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the fusing heat roller print counter, the accumulated rotation number counter
and the use day counter.
D. OPC drum
Display content
Maintenance required.: DK OPC drum print counter 100K Enable
Maintenance required.: DK OPC drum accumulated rotation number counter 550K rotations
* Judgment is made at the earlier timing of the drum print counter or the drum rotations accumulated number counter.
E. Developer
Display condition Print JOB
Display content
Counter name Counter value Enable/Disable
Maintenance required.: VK Developer print counter 100K Enable
Maintenance required.: VK Developer accumulated rotation number counter 550K rotations
* Judgment is made at the earlier timing of the developer print counter or the developer accumulated rotation number counter.
The developer rotation number is synchronized with the drum motor rotation number.
F. Toner
Message Print JOB
Status
Display content Enable/Disable
Close to Near End Toner low. Sim.26-69A Enable
(Near Near End) (Do not replace cartridge until requested.) 0 1
Display Not display
(Default)
Near End Ready to scan for copy. Sim.26-69C Enable
(Change the toner cartridge.) 0 1
Display Not display
(Default)
Toner End Change the toner cartridge. - - Disable
[10] DISASSEMBLY AND
ASSEMBLY
1. Disassembly and Assembly table
Unit Parts Contents
A. Side door section/Duplex transport 1 Transfer unit
section 2 Transfer roller
3 Transfer discharge plate
4 Duplex transport part
B. Scanner section 1 Table glass, SPF glass
2 Scanner unit
3 Drive belt, Drive wire
4 Rails
5 Mirror, Reflector, Scanner lamp
6 Lens, CCD
7 LED PWB, LED driver PWB
C. Fusing section 1 Fusing unit
2 Thermostat
3 Thermistor
4 Fusing PG
5 Lower separation pawl
6 Heater lamp
7 Cleaning felt
8 Upper separation pawl
9 Heat roller
10 Pressure roller
D. Paper exit section 1 Ozone filter
2 Cooling fan
3 First paper exit unit
4 Second paper exit unit
E. PWB section 1 MFP PWB
2 PCU PWB
3 Operation panel PWB
F. Optical frame unit section 1 Optical frame unit
G. LSU section 1 LSU unit
H. Tray paper feed section/Paper 1 Main drive unit
transport section 2 Paper feed clutch
3 Separation roller
4 PIN sensor
5 PS roller
I. Tray paper feed section/Paper 1 Tray pick up roller/ Tray paper feed roller/ Tray separation roller
transport section 2 Tray paper feed drive unit
3 Tray transport clutch/Tray paper feed clutch
4 Tray transport roller
J. Bypass tray section 1 Bypass tray unit
2 Bypass tray paper feed roller
3 Bypass tray separation roller
4 Bypass tray paper feed clutch
K. Power section 1 High voltage PWB
2 PCU PWB
3 Power switch
L. Developing section 1 Developer
2 Toner filter unit
3 DV side sheet F/ DV side sheet R
4 DV blade
5 Toner sensor
M. Process section 1 Drum unit
2 Main charger holder unit
3 Cleaning blade
4 Separation pawl unit
N. Others 1 Main motor
2 Tray open/close sensor
3 Paper empty sensor
4 Paper exit fan
5 DV cooling duct
6 Lift up motor
MX-M316N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 1

1 : ‘15/Aug.
2. Disassembly and assembly of each
unit F side(35cpm)
1
A. Side door section/Duplex transport section
(1)
No. Content
1 Transfer roller unit
2 Transfer roller (2)
3 Transfer discharge plate (1)
(1) Transfer roller unit

R side
Open the bypass tray and remove the side door.
(3)
* When the transfer roller unit is fixed to the right door unit, check
that the high pressure spring of the transfer roller unit fits with the
right door unit.
(1) (3) Transfer discharge plate
Remove the transfer discharge plate holder from the pawl.
(2)
Remove the transfer roller unit.
(2)
(3)
Remove the transfer discharge plate holder and the transfer dis-
(3) charge plate.
(1)
(2) Transfer roller

Open the pawls. Remove the transfer roller unit. Then, remove the
E-ring, the TC roller collar, the transfer roller gear, the transfer roller
bearing R and the pin from the transfer roller.
F side(26/31cpm )
(1)
(2)
(1)

(4) Duplex transport part B. Scanner section
Remove the rail inner unit.
No. Name
1 Table glass, SPF glass
2 Scanner unit
4 Rails
6 Lens, CCD
(1) Table glass, SPF glass

1) Remove the glass holder. and the table glass. Remove the
table glass, and the SPF glass.
Remove the side door reinforcing plate.
2) Clean the both surfaces of the table glass, and the SPF glass.
(2) Scanner unit

1) Remove the RSPF unit/ OC cover if they are fixed to the
machine.
2) Remove the operation panel unit.
3) Remove the table glass and the SPF glass.
Remove the side door auxiliary roller. 4) Remove the right cover, the left cover and the rear cabinet.
5) Remove the scanner unit.

(3) Drive belt, Drive wire (5) Mirror, Reflector, Scanner lamp
1) Remove the table glass. 1) Remove the table glass.
2) Check the tension of the drive belt and the drive wire. Check to 2) Clean the No. 2 mirror, and the No. 3 mirror.
confirm that the drive wire in the winding pulley is wound with-
out clearance.
3) Clean the reflector, the scanner lamp, and the No. 1 mirror.
OK NG
Wind the drive wire in the sequence of 1 to 7 as shown in the

figure below and fix it.
When winding the drive wire around the pulley, shift the mirror
unit to the vicinity of the home position, and wind 7 turns as
shown in the figure, and fix the 8th turn with a screw. Then
wind two turns furthermore around the pulley.
(6) Lens, CCD

1) Remove the table glass.
2) Remove the dark box, and the cover.
(4) Rails
2) Grease each rail.
Be careful not to allow grease to come in contact with drive

wires.
If grease contacts drive wires, clean wires thoroughly.
3) Clean the lens, and the CCD.

(7) LED PWB, LED driver PWB C. Fusing section
No. Contents
2) Shift the lamp unit to the notch section of the scanner base
1 Fusing unit
plate.
2 Thermostat
3 Thermistor
4 Fusing PG
6 Heater lamp
7 Cleaning felt
9 Heat roller
10 Pressure roller
(1) Fusing unit

1) Remove the right sub cabinet.
3) Remove the lamp guide. Disconnect the connector from the

LED driver PWB.
1) Remove the connectors of the fusing unit.
4) Remove the scanner lamp, and the LED PWB. Disconnect the
connector from the LED PWB.
1) Pull the right side part of the fusing unit shown in the figure
5) Remove the harness holder, and remove the flat cable from
the LED driver PWB. Remove the LED driver PWB.


1) Take out the fusing unit from the left side. (4) Fusing PG
1) Remove the fusing PG.
(2) Thermostat
1) Remove the thermostat cover. 1) When the fusing PG is fixed, check the position of the fusing
PG by seeing the scale on the fusing unit.
1) Remove the harnesses of the heater lamp and remove the

thermostat.
(5) Lower separation pawl

1) Remove the spring and remove the lower separation pawl.
(3) Thermistor
1) Remove the thermistor.
Į
Ĭ

(6) Heater lamp (7) Cleaning felt
1) Remove the harnesses of the heater lamp. 1) Remove the fusing cleaning plate unit.
1) Remove the screws fixing the upper fusing PG.

1) Remove the cleaning felt.
1) Remove the Front/Rear lamp fixing plates. (8) Upper separation pawl
1) Remove the upper separation pawl.
1) Remove the heat lamp.

(9) Heat roller D. Paper exit section
1) Remove the heat roller by removing the parts in order as
shown in the figure. No. Contents
1 Ozone filter
2 Cooling fan
1 4 Second paper exit unit
2
3 (1) Ozone filter
5
1) Remove the rear cabinet.
4
1
2) Remove the ozone filter.

(10) Pressure roller
1) Remove the High voltage holder.
(2) Cooling fan

1) Remove the harnesses from the power unit.
2) Remove the pressure roller.
Ĭ
ĭ

2) Remove the HV PWB. (3) First paper exit unit
1) Remove the paper holding arm.
3) Disconnect the harness and remove the cooling fan with the
fan duct.
2) Remove the paper full actuator.
4) Remove the cooling fan from the fan duct.
3) Remove the paper exit tray right cabinet.
4) Remove the screw for adjusting the tension.

5) Remove the upper paper exit cover. 9) Remove the right sub cabinet.
10) Remove the right cover bottom and the right cover door.
11) Remove the right front rear stay.
7) Remove the harness of the First paper exit unit.
12) Remove the screws, and remove the first paper exit unit.
8) Open the manual paper feed tray, and, remove the right door.
(3)
(1)
(2)

13) Remove the paper exit drive unit. (4) Second paper exit unit
1) Remove the job separator.

14) Remove the belt, the shift gear pulley, the SP pin and the bear-
ing.
3) Remove the harness of the second paper exit unit.

15) Remove the delivery roller holder and the shifter PG unit. 外す
16) Remove the shifter frame unit R, and remove the shifter bot- 4) Remove the right cover bottom and the right cover door.
tom frame unit.

5) Remove the screws, and remove the second paper exit unit. E. PWB section
No. Contents
1 MFP PWB
2 PCU PWB
(1) MFP PWB

1) Remove the clamps, and remove the FFC.
6) Remove the screws, and remove the sub roller unit.
7) Remove the E ring, the SP pin, and gears 2) Remove the screws, and remove the MFPC cover.
8) Remove the screws, and remove the upper paper exit PG. 3) Remove all harnesses and screws of the MFP PWB.
Then, remove the MFP PWB.

(2) PCU PWB 4) Remove the screws, and remove the Key PWB.
1) Remove all harnesses and screws of the PCU PWB.
Then, remove the PCU PWB.
5) Remove the FFC, the harnesses and the screws. Then,

remove the LVDS PWB.
(3) Operation panel PWB

1) Remove the screws fixing the operation panel unit.
F. Optical frame unit section

No. Contents
1 Optical frame unit
(1) Optical frame unit

2) Remove the DFFC and the harness.
1) Remove the right cover and the left cover.
2) Remove the screws at the left side of the optical frame.
3) Remove the screws at the right side of the optical frame.

3) Remove the earth and the harness , and remove the USB I/F
PWB.

4) Remove the FCCs and the harness from the optical unit to the 4) Remove the paper exit tray.
SCNcnt PWB. Then, remove the optical frame unit.
G. LSU section
5) Disconnect the harness of the LSU unit and the clamps.
No. Contents
1 LSU unit
(1) LSU unit

1) Open the front cover.
2) Remove the screws fixing the paper exit tray.
6) Remove the screws fixing the LSU unit. Then, remove the LSU
unit.
3) Open the tray and remove the left cover.

1 : ‘15/Aug.
H. Tray paper feed section/Paper transport
section
No. Contents
1 Main drive unit
2 Paper feed clutch
3 PS roller
4 PIN sensor
(1) Main drive unit

1) Remove the flywheel.
6) Remove the temperature humidity sensor.
2) Remove the power unit and the duplex motor.

7) Remove the harness from the cable saddles.
3) Remove the drum earth plate and the E-ring. Then, remove 8) Remove the connectors.
the PS clutch.
4) Remove the lift up motor. 9) Remove the DUP motor.
5) Remove the second drive unit.

1 : ‘15/Aug.
10) Remove the main drive unit. 3) Open the front door and remove the PS knob.
4) Remove the left E-ring.
(2) Paper feed clutch

1) Remove the paper feed clutch from the main drive unit.
5) Remove the PS roller
1）
2）
(3) PS roller
1) Remove the drum earth plate and the E-ring. Then, remove
the PS clutch. 3）
(4) PIN sensor

1) Remove the connector. And remove the harness.
2) Open the right door and remove the PS right bottom guide PG.
2) Remove the PS unit.

3) Remove the PIN sensor detection lever. Remove the connec- I. Tray paper feed section/Paper transport
tor, then, remove the PIN sensor. section
No. Contents
1 Tray pick up roller/ Tray paper feed roller/ Tray separation
roller
2 Tray paper feed drive unit
(1) Tray pick up roller/ Tray paper feed roller/ Tray

separation roller
1) Open the tray.
2) Remove the tray pick up roller, the tray paper feed roller and
the tray separation roller.
3) Remove the tray separation roller is fixed, the dent part of the
clutch has to be fit with the tray separation roller.

(2) Tray paper feed drive unit 2) Remove the tray transportation roller by removing the gears as
1) Remove the harness of the tray paper feed drive unit, and shown in the figure.
remove the tray paper feed drive unit.
Ĭ ĭ
(3) Tray transport clutch/Tray paper feed clutch

1) Remove harnesses of the clutch and the E-rings. Then,
remove the tray transport clutch and the tray paper feed clutch J. Bypass tray section
with caring the locking positions of the clutches.
No. Contents
1 Bypass tray unit
(1) Bypass tray unit

1) Remove the bypass tray unit.
(4) Tray transport roller

1) Remove the tray transport clutch, the tray paper feed clutch
and the gears. (2) Bypass tray paper feed roller
1) Remove the service cover.

2) Remove the resin E-ring, and remove the bypass tray paper 4) Remove the separation roller cover.
feed roller.
(3) Bypass tray separation roller

1) Remove the tray arms.
5) Remove the separation roller unit.
6) Remove the E-ring, and remove the paper feed roller.
2) Remove the bypass tray.
(4) Bypass tray paper feed clutch

1) Remove the E-ring, and remove the bypass tray paper feed
clutch.
3) Remove the bypass frame unit.

K. Power section 2) Remove the power switch.
No. Contents (1)

1 High voltage PWB
2 PCU PWB
3 Power switch
(2)
(1) High voltage PWB

(1)
1) Remove all harnesses to the power unit, and remove the
power unit.
L. Developing section
No. Contents
1 Developer
2 Toner filter unit
4 DV blade
5 Toner sensor
(1) Developer
(2) PCU PWB Remove the harness of developer cartridge from the developer
1) Remove all harnesses to the PCU PWB, and remove the PCU cover.
PWB.
Remove the developer cover from the developer cartridge.
(3) Power switch

1) Remove the harnesses to the power switch with pressing the
harnesses inside.

1 : ‘15/Aug.
Turn the MG roller to discharge developer. DV side sheet F/ DV side sheet R attachment reference
Molt 0 0
Molt
edge edge
reference reference
0.3 0.3
0.5 0 0 0.5
Projection edge Projection edge
reference reference
(4) DV blade
DV blade attachment reference
Toner cartridges must be installed to execute this setting (Toner [Cross-section]

1
density control reference value setting) Bump 0
Because of the structure of this machine, if SIM25-2 is executed reference
without the toner cartridges installed, the waste toner transport pipe
of the process UN may be locked. 0.5
(2) Toner filter unit

With the guide AS (cover) removed, replace it.
When replacing, clean the guide AS.
0.5 0
Rib reference
(5) Toner sensor
* Clean the sensor only after removing used DV when replacing
DV.
* Without removing the MG roller, clean the sensor surface with
waste cloth in the arrow direction to remove toner.
(3) DV side sheet F/ DV side sheet R

M. Process section (2) Main charger holder unit
1) Remove the main charger holder unit.
No. Contents
1 Drum unit
3 Cleaning blade
(1) Drum unit

1) Rotate and remove the drum fixing plate. Then, remove the
drum unit.
Ĭ
(3) Cleaning blade
ĭ
1) Remove the cleaning blade.
2) After removing the OPC drum, apply stearic acid powder

(UKOG-0312FCZZ) to the whole surface of the OPC drum.
3) After attaching the OPC drum to the OPC drum frame, use the
black protect sheet or copy paper, and manually rotate the
OPC drum two turns in the forward direction to remove stearic
acid powder applied to the OPC drum surface.
(4) Separation pawl unit

1) Remove the separation pawl unit.
- Do not touch the OPC drum surface except for the both ends
(5mm) of the OPC drum.
- Any section of the OPC drum may be touched from above the
black protect sheet, but do not touch too strongly.

1 : ‘15/Aug.
N. Others (3) Paper empty sensor
1) Remove the Desk PE actuator.
No. Contents
1 Main motor
4 Paper exit fan / Ozone filter (Only North America)
5 DV cooling duct
6 Lift up motor
(1) Main motor 1)

2)
3)
2) Remove the paper empty sensor from the Paper feed frame.
1)
2) Remove the harness of the main motor, and remove the main
motor.
2)
(4) Paper exit fan

1) Remove the delivery tray right.
(2) Tray open/close sensor

1) Remove the sensor cover. Then, remove the harness of the
tray open/close sensor, and remove the tray open/close sen-
sor. 2) Open the manual paper tray, and remove the right door.
(3)
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)

1 : ‘15/Aug.
3) Remove the right sub cabinet. 7) Remove the ozone filter, and remove the paper exit fan.
(Only in the North America)
(5) DV cooling duct

Ĭ
5) Remove the connector cover, and remove the connectors.
6) Remove the paper exit fan duct, and remove the paper exit
fan. (Forwarding place except the North America)

4) Remove the paper exit tray. 7) Remove the screws of the DV cooling duct and remove the DV
cooling duct.
5) Remove the main front cabinet left.
(6) Lift up motor

6) Remove the connector of the harness and screws of the DV

cooling duct unit. Then, remove the DV cooling duct.
2) Disconnect the harness of the lift up motor and screws of the

lift up motor. Then, remove the lift up motor.

[10] DISASSEMBLY AND
ASSEMBLY
1. Disassembly and Assembly table
Unit Parts Contents
A. Side door section/Duplex transport 1 Transfer unit
section 2 Transfer roller
3 Transfer discharge plate
B. Scanner section 1 Table glass, SPF glass
2 Scanner unit
4 Rails
6 Lens, CCD
C. Fusing section 1 Fusing unit
2 Thermostat
3 Thermistor
4 Fusing PG
6 Heater lamp
7 Cleaning felt
9 Heat roller
10 Pressure roller
D. Paper exit section 1 Ozone filter
2 Cooling fan
4 Second paper exit unit
E. PWB section 1 MFP PWB
2 PCU PWB
F. Optical frame unit section 1 Optical frame unit
G. LSU section 1 LSU unit
H. Tray paper feed section/Paper 1 Main drive unit
transport section 2 Paper feed clutch
3 Separation roller
4 PIN sensor
5 PS roller
I. Tray paper feed section/Paper 1 Tray pick up roller/ Tray paper feed roller/ Tray separation roller
transport section 2 Tray paper feed drive unit
J. Bypass tray section 1 Bypass tray unit
K. Power section 1 High voltage PWB
2 PCU PWB
3 Power switch
L. Developing section 1 Developer
2 Toner filter unit
4 DV blade
5 Toner sensor
M. Process section 1 Drum unit
3 Cleaning blade
N. Others 1 Main motor
4 Paper exit fan
5 DV cooling duct
6 Lift up motor

1 : ‘15/Aug.
2. Disassembly and assembly of each
unit F side(35cpm)
1
A. Side door section/Duplex transport section
(1)
No. Content
1 Transfer roller unit
2 Transfer roller (2)
3 Transfer discharge plate (1)
(1) Transfer roller unit

R side
Open the bypass tray and remove the side door.
(3)
* When the transfer roller unit is fixed to the right door unit, check
that the high pressure spring of the transfer roller unit fits with the
right door unit.
(1) (3) Transfer discharge plate
Remove the transfer discharge plate holder from the pawl.
(2)
Remove the transfer roller unit.
(2)
(3)
Remove the transfer discharge plate holder and the transfer dis-
(3) charge plate.
(1)
(2) Transfer roller

Open the pawls. Remove the transfer roller unit. Then, remove the
E-ring, the TC roller collar, the transfer roller gear, the transfer roller
bearing R and the pin from the transfer roller.
F side(26/31cpm )
(1)
(2)
(1)

(4) Duplex transport part B. Scanner section
Remove the rail inner unit.
No. Name
1 Table glass, SPF glass
2 Scanner unit
4 Rails
6 Lens, CCD
(1) Table glass, SPF glass

1) Remove the glass holder. and the table glass. Remove the
table glass, and the SPF glass.
Remove the side door reinforcing plate.
2) Clean the both surfaces of the table glass, and the SPF glass.
(2) Scanner unit

1) Remove the RSPF unit/ OC cover if they are fixed to the
machine.
2) Remove the operation panel unit.
3) Remove the table glass and the SPF glass.
Remove the side door auxiliary roller. 4) Remove the right cover, the left cover and the rear cabinet.
5) Remove the scanner unit.

(3) Drive belt, Drive wire (5) Mirror, Reflector, Scanner lamp
1) Remove the table glass. 1) Remove the table glass.
2) Check the tension of the drive belt and the drive wire. Check to 2) Clean the No. 2 mirror, and the No. 3 mirror.
confirm that the drive wire in the winding pulley is wound with-
out clearance.
3) Clean the reflector, the scanner lamp, and the No. 1 mirror.
OK NG
Wind the drive wire in the sequence of 1 to 7 as shown in the

figure below and fix it.
When winding the drive wire around the pulley, shift the mirror
unit to the vicinity of the home position, and wind 7 turns as
shown in the figure, and fix the 8th turn with a screw. Then
wind two turns furthermore around the pulley.
(6) Lens, CCD

2) Remove the dark box, and the cover.
(4) Rails
2) Grease each rail.
Be careful not to allow grease to come in contact with drive

wires.
If grease contacts drive wires, clean wires thoroughly.
3) Clean the lens, and the CCD.

(7) LED PWB, LED driver PWB C. Fusing section
No. Contents
2) Shift the lamp unit to the notch section of the scanner base
1 Fusing unit
plate.
2 Thermostat
3 Thermistor
4 Fusing PG
6 Heater lamp
7 Cleaning felt
9 Heat roller
10 Pressure roller
(1) Fusing unit

1) Remove the right sub cabinet.
3) Remove the lamp guide. Disconnect the connector from the

LED driver PWB.
1) Remove the connectors of the fusing unit.
4) Remove the scanner lamp, and the LED PWB. Disconnect the
connector from the LED PWB.
1) Pull the right side part of the fusing unit shown in the figure
5) Remove the harness holder, and remove the flat cable from
the LED driver PWB. Remove the LED driver PWB.


1) Take out the fusing unit from the left side. (4) Fusing PG
1) Remove the fusing PG.
(2) Thermostat
1) Remove the thermostat cover. 1) When the fusing PG is fixed, check the position of the fusing
PG by seeing the scale on the fusing unit.
1) Remove the harnesses of the heater lamp and remove the

thermostat.
(5) Lower separation pawl

1) Remove the spring and remove the lower separation pawl.
(3) Thermistor
1) Remove the thermistor.
Į
Ĭ

(6) Heater lamp (7) Cleaning felt
1) Remove the harnesses of the heater lamp. 1) Remove the fusing cleaning plate unit.
1) Remove the screws fixing the upper fusing PG.

1) Remove the cleaning felt.
1) Remove the Front/Rear lamp fixing plates. (8) Upper separation pawl
1) Remove the upper separation pawl.
1) Remove the heat lamp.

(9) Heat roller D. Paper exit section
1) Remove the heat roller by removing the parts in order as
shown in the figure. No. Contents
1 Ozone filter
2 Cooling fan
1 4 Second paper exit unit
2
3 (1) Ozone filter
5
4
1
2) Remove the ozone filter.

(10) Pressure roller
1) Remove the High voltage holder.
(2) Cooling fan

1) Remove the harnesses from the power unit.
2) Remove the pressure roller.
Ĭ
ĭ

2) Remove the HV PWB. (3) First paper exit unit
1) Remove the paper holding arm.
3) Disconnect the harness and remove the cooling fan with the
fan duct.
2) Remove the paper full actuator.
4) Remove the cooling fan from the fan duct.
3) Remove the paper exit tray right cabinet.
4) Remove the screw for adjusting the tension.

5) Remove the upper paper exit cover. 9) Remove the right sub cabinet.
11) Remove the right front rear stay.
7) Remove the harness of the First paper exit unit.
12) Remove the screws, and remove the first paper exit unit.
8) Open the manual paper feed tray, and, remove the right door.
(3)
(1)
(2)

13) Remove the paper exit drive unit. (4) Second paper exit unit
1) Remove the job separator.

14) Remove the belt, the shift gear pulley, the SP pin and the bear-
ing.
3) Remove the harness of the second paper exit unit.

15) Remove the delivery roller holder and the shifter PG unit. 外す
16) Remove the shifter frame unit R, and remove the shifter bot- 4) Remove the right cover bottom and the right cover door.
tom frame unit.

5) Remove the screws, and remove the second paper exit unit. E. PWB section
No. Contents
1 MFP PWB
2 PCU PWB
(1) MFP PWB

1) Remove the clamps, and remove the FFC.
6) Remove the screws, and remove the sub roller unit.
7) Remove the E ring, the SP pin, and gears 2) Remove the screws, and remove the MFPC cover.
8) Remove the screws, and remove the upper paper exit PG. 3) Remove all harnesses and screws of the MFP PWB.
Then, remove the MFP PWB.

(2) PCU PWB 4) Remove the screws, and remove the Key PWB.
1) Remove all harnesses and screws of the PCU PWB.
Then, remove the PCU PWB.
5) Remove the FFC, the harnesses and the screws. Then,

remove the LVDS PWB.
(3) Operation panel PWB

1) Remove the screws fixing the operation panel unit.
F. Optical frame unit section

No. Contents
1 Optical frame unit
(1) Optical frame unit

2) Remove the DFFC and the harness.
1) Remove the right cover and the left cover.
2) Remove the screws at the left side of the optical frame.
3) Remove the screws at the right side of the optical frame.

3) Remove the earth and the harness , and remove the USB I/F
PWB.

4) Remove the FCCs and the harness from the optical unit to the 4) Remove the paper exit tray.
SCNcnt PWB. Then, remove the optical frame unit.
G. LSU section
5) Disconnect the harness of the LSU unit and the clamps.
No. Contents
1 LSU unit
(1) LSU unit

6) Remove the screws fixing the LSU unit. Then, remove the LSU
unit.

1 : ‘15/Aug.
H. Tray paper feed section/Paper transport
section
No. Contents
1 Main drive unit
2 Paper feed clutch
3 PS roller
4 PIN sensor
(1) Main drive unit

6) Remove the temperature humidity sensor.
2) Remove the power unit and the duplex motor.

7) Remove the harness from the cable saddles.
3) Remove the drum earth plate and the E-ring. Then, remove 8) Remove the connectors.
the PS clutch.
4) Remove the lift up motor. 9) Remove the DUP motor.
5) Remove the second drive unit.

1 : ‘15/Aug.
10) Remove the main drive unit. 3) Open the front door and remove the PS knob.
4) Remove the left E-ring.
(2) Paper feed clutch

1) Remove the paper feed clutch from the main drive unit.
5) Remove the PS roller
1）
2）
(3) PS roller
1) Remove the drum earth plate and the E-ring. Then, remove
the PS clutch. 3）
(4) PIN sensor

1) Remove the connector. And remove the harness.
2) Open the right door and remove the PS right bottom guide PG.
2) Remove the PS unit.

3) Remove the PIN sensor detection lever. Remove the connec- I. Tray paper feed section/Paper transport
tor, then, remove the PIN sensor. section
No. Contents
1 Tray pick up roller/ Tray paper feed roller/ Tray separation
roller
2 Tray paper feed drive unit
(1) Tray pick up roller/ Tray paper feed roller/ Tray

separation roller
1) Open the tray.
2) Remove the tray pick up roller, the tray paper feed roller and
the tray separation roller.
3) Remove the tray separation roller is fixed, the dent part of the
clutch has to be fit with the tray separation roller.

(2) Tray paper feed drive unit 2) Remove the tray transportation roller by removing the gears as
1) Remove the harness of the tray paper feed drive unit, and shown in the figure.
remove the tray paper feed drive unit.
Ĭ ĭ
(3) Tray transport clutch/Tray paper feed clutch

1) Remove harnesses of the clutch and the E-rings. Then,
remove the tray transport clutch and the tray paper feed clutch J. Bypass tray section
with caring the locking positions of the clutches.
No. Contents
1 Bypass tray unit
(1) Bypass tray unit

1) Remove the bypass tray unit.
(4) Tray transport roller

1) Remove the tray transport clutch, the tray paper feed clutch
and the gears. (2) Bypass tray paper feed roller
1) Remove the service cover.

2) Remove the resin E-ring, and remove the bypass tray paper 4) Remove the separation roller cover.
feed roller.
(3) Bypass tray separation roller

1) Remove the tray arms.
5) Remove the separation roller unit.
6) Remove the E-ring, and remove the paper feed roller.
2) Remove the bypass tray.
(4) Bypass tray paper feed clutch

1) Remove the E-ring, and remove the bypass tray paper feed
clutch.
3) Remove the bypass frame unit.

K. Power section 2) Remove the power switch.
No. Contents (1)

1 High voltage PWB
2 PCU PWB
3 Power switch
(2)
(1) High voltage PWB

(1)
1) Remove all harnesses to the power unit, and remove the
power unit.
L. Developing section
No. Contents
1 Developer
2 Toner filter unit
4 DV blade
5 Toner sensor
(1) Developer
(2) PCU PWB Remove the harness of developer cartridge from the developer
1) Remove all harnesses to the PCU PWB, and remove the PCU cover.
PWB.
Remove the developer cover from the developer cartridge.
(3) Power switch

1) Remove the harnesses to the power switch with pressing the
harnesses inside.

1 : ‘15/Aug.
Turn the MG roller to discharge developer. DV side sheet F/ DV side sheet R attachment reference
Molt 0 0
Molt
edge edge
reference reference
0.3 0.3
0.5 0 0 0.5
Projection edge Projection edge
reference reference
(4) DV blade
DV blade attachment reference
Toner cartridges must be installed to execute this setting (Toner [Cross-section]

1
density control reference value setting) Bump 0
Because of the structure of this machine, if SIM25-2 is executed reference
without the toner cartridges installed, the waste toner transport pipe
of the process UN may be locked. 0.5
(2) Toner filter unit

With the guide AS (cover) removed, replace it.
When replacing, clean the guide AS.
0.5 0
Rib reference
(5) Toner sensor
* Clean the sensor only after removing used DV when replacing
DV.
* Without removing the MG roller, clean the sensor surface with
waste cloth in the arrow direction to remove toner.
(3) DV side sheet F/ DV side sheet R

M. Process section (2) Main charger holder unit
1) Remove the main charger holder unit.
No. Contents
1 Drum unit
3 Cleaning blade
(1) Drum unit

1) Rotate and remove the drum fixing plate. Then, remove the
drum unit.
(3) Cleaning blade

1) Remove the moquette F/R.
2) After removing the OPC drum, apply stearic acid powder

(UKOG-0312FCZZ) to the whole surface of the OPC drum.
CAUTION: If it disturbs the blade movement, replace it and attach

new one.
2) Remove the cleaning blade.
3) After attaching the OPC drum to the OPC drum frame, use the
black protect sheet or copy paper, and manually rotate the
OPC drum two turns in the forward direction to remove stearic
acid powder applied to the OPC drum surface.
(4) Separation pawl unit

ĭ 1) Remove the separation pawl unit.
Ĭ
- Do not touch the OPC drum surface except for the both ends
(5mm) of the OPC drum.
- Any section of the OPC drum may be touched from above the
black protect sheet, but do not touch too strongly.

1 : ‘15/Aug.
N. Others (3) Paper empty sensor
1) Remove the Desk PE actuator.
No. Contents
1 Main motor
4 Paper exit fan / Ozone filter (Only North America)
5 DV cooling duct
6 Lift up motor
(1) Main motor 1)

2)
3)
2) Remove the paper empty sensor from the Paper feed frame.
1)
2) Remove the harness of the main motor, and remove the main
motor.
2)
(4) Paper exit fan

1) Remove the delivery tray right.
(2) Tray open/close sensor

1) Remove the sensor cover. Then, remove the harness of the
tray open/close sensor, and remove the tray open/close sen-
sor. 2) Open the manual paper tray, and remove the right door.
(3)
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)

1 : ‘15/Aug.
3) Remove the right sub cabinet. 7) Remove the ozone filter, and remove the paper exit fan.
(Only in the North America)
(5) DV cooling duct

Ĭ
5) Remove the connector cover, and remove the connectors.
6) Remove the paper exit fan duct, and remove the paper exit
fan. (Forwarding place except the North America)

4) Remove the paper exit tray. 7) Remove the screws of the DV cooling duct and remove the DV
cooling duct.
5) Remove the main front cabinet left.
(6) Lift up motor

6) Remove the connector of the harness and screws of the DV

cooling duct unit. Then, remove the DV cooling duct.
2) Disconnect the harness of the lift up motor and screws of the

lift up motor. Then, remove the lift up motor.

MX-M316N
[11] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS Service Manual
1.Operation panel
A.Mechanism relation diagram
LVDS PWB
LCD
KEY PWB
USB I/F PWB
B.Operational descriptions
The operation panel unit is composed of the LCD unit, the LVDS PWB,
the USB I/F PWB, and the KEY PWB.
It displays the machine operation. It is provided with the USB I/F which
is used for the firmware update, USB print, and Scan to USB.
In addition, the USB I/F line is provided inside the operation panel to
connect with the keyboard and the IC card reader.
MX-M316N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 11 – 1

2. RSPF section (31opm)
(1)Outline
SCOV
SPFM
SPPD2
SRRC
12 SPRS
3
1
SPUC
11
4 13
2 SPPD1 SPPD3 SPPD4
5
SPWS
SOCD
6 8 SPLS1
10 9 SPLS2
7
Signal name Name Function/Operation

SCOV RSPF cover open/close detector Detects open/close of the RSPF cover.
SOCD RSPF open/close sensor Detects open/close of the RSPF unit.
SPFM RSPF transport motor Transports a document.
SPPD1 Document transport sensor 1 Detects paper pass.
SPPD4 Document transport sensor 4 Detects paper exit and switchback.
SPRS Paper exit roller pressure control solenoid Controls ON/OFF of the transport power of the paper exit roller. (Releases the paper exit roller
(RSPF) pressure when reversing paper.)
SPUC Paper feed clutch Controls the paper feed roller. (Controls the timing of paper feed.)
SRRC Registration roller clutch Controls the registration roller. (Controls the timing of document transport.)
SPLS1 Paper size detector 1 Detects the document length in the RSPF paper feed tray.
SPLS2 Paper size detector 2 Detects the document length in the RSPF paper feed tray.
SPWS Document size detector Detects the document width.

1 Transport auxiliary roller Reduces friction between a document and the paper guide to transport the document smoothly to the
registration roller.
2 Registration roller (Drive) Transports a document to the transport roller 2. / Controls the transport timing of the document and adjusts the
document scanning timing.
3 Registration roller (Idle) Apply a pressure to a document and the registration roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to
the document.
4 Transport roller 3 (Idle) Apply a pressure to a document and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to
the document.
5 Transport roller 3 (Drive) Transports a document transported from the document scanning section to the paper exit roller.
6 Transport roller 2 (Idle) Apply a pressure to a document and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to
the document.
7 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports a document transported from the registration roller to the document scanning section.
8 Paper exit roller (Idle) Apply a pressure to a document and the paper exit roller to provide the transport power of the paper exit roller to
the document.
9 Paper exit roller (Drive) Discharges a document. Switchbacks the document and transports it to the registration roller when scanning the
back surface.
10 Document reverse gate Reverses a document when scanning images on the back surface.
11 Document pickup roller Feeds a document to the paper feed roller.
12 Paper feed roller Feeds a document to the transport section. Makes a warp on paper between the registration roller and this roller
to correct the start position of document skew and document image scan.
13 Separation roller Separates a document to prevent double-feeding.

B. Operational descriptions
(1) Document size detection (3) RSPF paper feed and transport operations
Size detection on the document tray a. Paper feed operation
The document width is detected with the RSPF document width sen- The transport motor is turned ON and the power of the transport
sor (SPWS), and the document length is detected with the RSPF doc- motor is transmitted to the pickup roller by turning ON the paper feed
ument length sensors (SPLS1, SPLS2). The document size is judged clutch.
from the document width and the document length according to the
The pickup roller descends to pickup the top document and feed it to
table below. the paper feed roller.
Document length sensor The paper feed roller feeds a document to the transport section.
Document size
SPLS1 SPLS2 At that time, the document is separated by the separation roller to pre-
AB series A5 OFF OFF vent double-feeding.
B5 OFF OFF
b. Single face scanning
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF
The lead edge of the fed document is aligned (registration) by the reg-
A4 OFF OFF
istration roller, and passed through transport roller 1 to the document
B5R ON OFF
scanning section, where images are scanned.
A4R ON OFF
8.5" x 13" ON ON Then the document is passed through transport roller 2 to the paper
B4 ON ON exit roller.
A3 ON ON The rollers (the registration roller, transport rollers 1 and 2, the paper
11" x 17" ON ON exit roller) in the transport section are driven by the transport motor.
8.5" x 14" ON ON The paper exit roller (drive pulley) is pressed by the paper exit roller
8.5" x 13.4" ON ON pressure control solenoid.
8.5" x 13.5" ON ON
When the read edge of the document passes the scanning section, the
Inch series 8.5" x 5.5" OFF OFF
both rollers are brought into close contact to supply the power for
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF
paper exit.
A4 OFF OFF
11" x 8.5"R ON OFF
8.5" x 13" ON ON 1) Document set (Document empty sensor ON)
8.5" x 14" ON ON
A3 ON ON
11" x 17" ON ON
8.5" x 13.4" ON ON
RSPF unit
2) Paper feed start (1st sheet)

The pick-up roller descends. (The transport motor is booted. And
the paper feed clutch is ON.)
3073
30,3
30,3
3) Registration operation (1st sheet)

(Registration clutch ON)
(When a certain time passes after turning ON the registration
clutch, the paper feed clutch is turned OFF.)
(2) Document scanning
The document scanning mode is available in 400dpi and 600dpi.
Resolution Document transport speed

400dpi 186mm/sec
600dpi 124mm/sec
4) Scanning start (1st sheet)

5) Paper feed start (2nd sheet) c. Duplex scanning
Images on the document surface are scanned, and detection of the
rear edge of the document by sensor SPPD3 triggers the following.
That is, when the rear edge of the document passes the reverse gate,
the transport motor is reversed.
Due to the above operation, the paper exit roller is reversed to switch-
back the document, returning it to the registration roller section and
aligning (registration) the document.
Then the transport motor is rotated normally to transport the document
6) Scanning complete (1st sheet)/Registration operation (2nd sheet) to the scanning section, scanning images on the back surface.
(When a certain time passes after turning ON the registration To reset the page order of the documents, the following operations are
clutch, the paper feed clutch is turned OFF.) made which are triggered by the detection of the rear edge of the doc-
ument. That is, when the rear edge of the document passes the
reverse gate, the transport motor is reversed.
to the paper exit section and discharge it.
When a duplex document is scanned, the document lead edge section
7) Scanning start (2nd sheet) and the rear edge section intersect. At that timing, the paper exit roller
pressure release solenoid is turned OFF to make a gap between the
paper exit roller (drive) and the paper exit roller (idle).
During the time from when the document rear edge passes the scan-
ning section to when it is switch backed and send to the registration
roller section, the paper exit roller pressure release solenoid is turned
ON to keep the paper exit roller (drive) and the paper exit roller (idle) in
contact.
1) Document set (Document empty sensor ON)
8) Paper exit complete (1st sheet)

Pick-up roller descending
9) Scanning complete (2nd sheet)
3) Registration operation (1st sheet, front surface)
10) Paper exit complete (2nd sheet)
4) Scanning start (1st sheet, front surface)
11) Pick-up roller lifting up

(After completion of a job, the paper feed clutch is ON, then, the
paper exit motor is rotated reversely at a low speed for a certain
time to lift the pickup roller.)
5) After completion of scanning, the reverse follower roller is
pressed. (Solenoid ON)
6) After stopping the operation, reversing is started.

14) Scanning start (Second sheet)
7) After reversing, registration operation is executed.
15) After passing the scanning section, the reverse follower roller is
pressed.
8) After turning ON the PS clutch, the reverse follower roller pres-

sure is released.
16) After discharge (First sheet), the reverse follower roller pressure
is released.
9) Scanning start (First sheet, back surface)

pressed.
11) After stopping the operation, reversing is started.
sure is released.

3. RSPF section (56opm)
(1)Paper feed section
SPPD2
SPM
SCOV
2 1
SPPD1
SPED
3
SPLS1
SPLS2

1 Pick-up roller Picks up a document and feeds it to the paper feed roller.
2 Paper feed roller Performs the paper feed operation of documents.
3 Separation roller Separate a document to prevent against double-feed.

SCOV Upper cover open/close sensor Detects open/close of the RSPF upper cover
SPED Document sensor Detects document empty in the RSPF paper feed tray.
SPLS1 Paper size detector 1 Detects the document length in the RSPF paper feed tray
SPLS2 Paper size detector 2 Detects the document length in the RSPF paper feed tray
SPM RSPF paper feed motor Feeds a document
SPPD1 RSPF paper pass sensor 1 Detects paper feed and the document size in random paper feed
SPPD2 RSPF paper pass sensor 2 Detects paper pass

(2)Transport section
SRRC
SPFM
SPPD3 SPRS
1
2
SOCD
SPPD5
4
3

1 Registration roller (Drive) Transports a document to the transport roller 2. Controls the transport timing of the document and adjusts the
document scanning timing
2 Transport roller 3 (Drive) Transports a document transported from the document scanning section to the paper exit roller
3 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports a document transported from the registration roller to the document scanning section
4 Paper exit roller (Drive) Discharges a document. Switchbacks the document and transports it to the registration roller when scanning
the back surface

SOCD RSPF open/close sensor Detects open/close of the RSPF unit
SPFM RSPF transport motor Transports a document
SPPD3 Document transport sensor 3 Detects paper pass
SPPD4 Document transport sensor 5 Detects paper exit and switchback
SPRS Paper exit roller pressure control solenoid Controls ON/OFF of the transport power of the paper exit roller
SRRC Registration roller clutch Controls the registration roller (Controls the timing of document transport)
Document length sensor
Document size
SPLS1 SPLS2
(1)Document size detection AB series A5 OFF OFF
Size detection on the document tray B5 OFF OFF
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF
The document width is detected by the document width sensor
A4 OFF OFF
(SPWS), and the document length is detected by the document length
B5R ON OFF
sensors (SPLS1, SPLS2). The document size is judged from the docu-
A4R ON OFF
ment width and the document length as shown in the table below.
8.5" x 13" ON ON
When, however, mixed sizes of documents are loaded on the tray, the
B4 ON ON
maximum size is detected.
A3 ON ON
11" x 17" ON ON
Inch series 8.5" x 5.5" OFF OFF
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF
A4 OFF OFF
11" x 8.5"R ON OFF
8.5" x 13" ON ON
8.5" x 14" ON ON
A3 ON ON
11" x 17" ON ON

(Registration clutch ON)
clutch, the paper feed clutch is turned OFF.)
3073
30,3
30,3
4) Scanning start (1st sheet)
(2) Document scanning

The document scanning mode is available in 400dpi and 600dpi. 5) Paper feed start (2nd sheet)
Resolution Document transport speed

400dpi 279mm/sec
600dpi 186mm/sec
(3) RSPF paper feed and transport operations

a. Paper feed operation
The transport motor is turned ON and the power of the transport
motor is transmitted to the pickup roller by turning ON the paper feed 6) Scanning complete (1st sheet)/Registration operation (2nd sheet)
clutch.
The pickup roller descends to pickup the top document and feed it to clutch, the paper feed clutch is turned OFF.)
the paper feed roller.
The paper feed roller feeds a document to the transport section.
At that time, the document is separated by the separation roller to pre-
vent double-feeding.
b. Single face scanning
The lead edge of the fed document is aligned (registration) by the reg-
istration roller, and passed through transport roller 1 to the document
scanning section, where images are scanned.
7) Scanning start (2nd sheet)
Then the document is passed through transport roller 2 to the paper
exit roller.
The rollers (the registration roller, transport rollers 1 and 2, the paper
exit roller) in the transport section are driven by the transport motor.
The paper exit roller (drive pulley) is pressed by the paper exit roller
pressure control solenoid.
When the read edge of the document passes the scanning section, the
both rollers are brought into close contact to supply the power for
paper exit. 8) Paper exit complete (1st sheet)
1) Document set (Document empty sensor ON)
9) Scanning complete (2nd sheet)

The pick-up roller descends. (The transport motor is booted. And
the paper feed clutch is ON.)
3) Registration operation (1st sheet)

10)Paper exit complete (2nd sheet)
4) Scanning start (1st sheet, front surface)
11) Pick-up roller lifting up

(After completion of a job, the paper feed clutch is ON, then, the
paper exit motor is rotated reversely at a low speed for a certain
time to lift the pickup roller.)

pressed. (Solenoid ON)
c. Duplex scanning
Images on the document surface are scanned, and detection of the
rear edge of the document by sensor SPPD3 triggers the following.
That is, when the rear edge of the document passes the reverse gate,
the transport motor is reversed. 6) After stopping the operation, reversing is started.
to the scanning section, scanning images on the back surface.
To reset the page order of the documents, the following operations are
made which are triggered by the detection of the rear edge of the doc-
ument. That is, when the rear edge of the document passes the 7) After reversing, registration operation is executed.
reverse gate, the transport motor is reversed.
to the paper exit section and discharge it.
When a duplex document is scanned, the document lead edge section 8) After turning ON the PS clutch, the reverse follower roller pres-
and the rear edge section intersect. At that timing, the paper exit roller sure is released.
pressure release solenoid is turned OFF to make a gap between the
paper exit roller (drive) and the paper exit roller (idle).
During the time from when the document rear edge passes the scan-
ning section to when it is switch backed and send to the registration
roller section, the paper exit roller pressure release solenoid is turned
ON to keep the paper exit roller (drive) and the paper exit roller (idle) in
contact.
1) Document set (Document empty sensor ON) 9) Scanning start (First sheet, back surface)

Pick-up roller descending
pressed.
3) Registration operation (1st sheet, front surface)

11)After stopping the operation, reversing is started.
sure is released.
14) Scanning start (Second sheet)
15) After passing the scanning section, the reverse follower roller is
pressed.
16) After discharge (First sheet), the reverse follower roller pressure
is released.

4.Scanner section
MHPOS
4 7
MIRM
6
2
7 3
6
Signal Name Function/Operation

name
MHPOS Scanner home position sensor Detects the scanner home position.
MIRM Scan motor Drives the scanner unit. (scan, return operations)

1 CCD PWB Scans document images and performs A/D conversion of the scanning signal.
2 Scanner lamp drive PWB Drives the scanner lamp
3 Lens Reduces a document image (light) and project it to the CCD.
4 1st mirror Leads a document image to the lens.
5 2nd mirror
6 Light guide bar Converges the scanner lamp lights and radiates onto the document.
7 LED PWB Generates the scanner lamp lights.

(1)General
This section performs the following operations.
1) Light is radiated onto the document by the scanner lamp and the
reflected image is scanned by the 3line (RGB) CCD elements to be
converted into analog image signals.
2) The analog image signals are converted into 10-bit digital signals
by the A/D converter.
3) The digital image signals are sent to the SCNcnt PWB for image
processing.
(2)Detailed descriptions
a. Optical section drive

The optical section is driven as follows: The drive power is transmitted
from the scanner motor (MIRM) through the belt to the drive pulley/
wire, and the copy lamp unit and the mirror base which are attached to
the wire are driven.
The scanner motor (MIRM) is controlled with the signals sent from the
MCU PWB.
b. Scanner lamp drive R

The scanner lamp is driven by the scanner lamp drive voltage which is G
generated by the LED drive PWB with the control signals sent from the B
SCNcnt PWB.
(Image data for 1 line)
c. Image scan and color separation
Light is radiated onto the document by the scanner lamp and the
reflected image is scanned by the 3line (RGB) CCD elements to be
converted into analog image signals.
R G B
The color components are extracted into R, G, B by the three kinds of Red component Green component Blue component
CCD elements (R, G, B). image data image data image data
The red CCD extracts the red component of an image, the green CCD
extracts the green component, the blue CCD extracts the blue compo- d. Image signal A/D conversion
nent. This operation is called color separation. 1) The image signal (analog) for each of R, G, and B is converted
The CCD element is apparently seen as one unit, but it includes the into 10bit digital signal by the A/D converter.
four kinds of elements (R, G, B). Each color pixel has 10bit information.
The CCD element scans the document in the main scanning direction. 2) The 10bit digital image signals of R, G, B are sent to the image
Scanning in the sub scanning direction is made by shifting the scanner process section.
unit with the scanner motor.
The document images are optically reduced by the lens and reflected
to the CCD.
The scan resolution is 600 dpi. CCD PWB
Analog IC
CCD
AFE ADC LVDS
R
G
B
R,G,B Color filter Buffer
Timing
Generator
CCD Elements
e. Zooming operation
Zooming in the sub scanning direction is performed by changing the
3LINES CCD UNIT
scanning speed in the sub scanning direction.
Zooming in the main scanning direction is not made optically, but per-
formed by the image process technology (software).

5. Manual paper feed section
A. Mechanism relation diagram
MM
MPFC
MPED
1
2
Signal name Name Function and operation

Drives the most of the driving parts except the duplex section, the toner section and
MM Main motor
the scanner sections.
MPED Paper empty detector (Manual paper feed tray) Detects paper empty. (Manual paper feed tray)
MPFC Paper feed clutch (Manual paper feed tray) Controls the paper feed roller ON/OFF.
No. Name Function and operation

1 Paper feed roller Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
2 Separation roller Apply the pressure to the paper feed roller in reverse direction and prevents the paper
from feeding it in layered condition.
Only the top sheet of paper is fed from the paper stack on the manual
bypass tray, the feed roller is pressed against the paper surface and
sent to the transport section.
The feed roller transports paper to registration section. Against the
paper, by applying a force in the direction opposite to the feed roller
from below, separation rollers are prevented double feeding of the
paper. On / OFF control of the feed roller is carried out by the Manual
Feed Clutch
This model does not have an automatic paper size detection function
in Multi-purpose tray.

6. Paper registration section
MM
RRC
MPWD
2
PIN

Drives the most of the driving parts except the duplex section, the toner section and the
MM Main motor
scanner sections.
MPWD Paper width detection sensor Detects the width of the paper.
PIN P-IN sensor Detects the entrance of the paper in front of the registration roller.

1 Resist roller (Drive) The Resist Roller (Drive) synchronizes the paper timing to the image on the Transfer Belt. A
buckle is created to eliminate any skew in the paper. The paper is then driven to the Transfer
section where the image is correctly timed for transfer onto the paper.
2 Resist roller (Idle) The Resist Roller (Idle) puts pressure on the back side of the paper allowing the Drive roller
to move the paper to the transfer section after proper buckle timing has occurred.
B. Operational description
The resist roller set controls the synchronization of the Image on the
Transfer Belt to the Timing of the paper making its way to the Primary
and Secondary Transfer section. Start stop movement is controlled by
the PS Clutch. Drive for the Registration roller comes from Main motor.

7. Paper feed tray section
MM
C1PUC
C1LUD
C1PED C1LUM
2
3

Drives the most of the driving parts except the duplex section, the toner section and the
MM Main motor
scanner sections.
Paper feed tray 1 upper limit detector Detects the upper limit of the paper feed tray 1, and maintains the contact pressure between
C1LUD
paper on the top and the paper pickup roller to provide stable paper feed power.
Paper feed tray 1 lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 1) Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray 1, and maintains the contact pressure between
C1LUM
paper on the top and the paper pickup roller to provide stable paper feed power.
Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1) Controls ON/OFF of the rollers (the paper pickup roller, the paper feed roller, the paper
C1PUC
transport roller 2) in the paper feed tray 1 section.
C1PED Paper feed tray 1 paper empty detector Detects paper empty in the paper feed tray 1.

1 Paper pickup roller (Paper feed tray 1) Picks up paper on the top and feeds it to the paper feed roller.
2 Paper feed roller (Paper feed tray 1) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
3 Paper separation roller (Paper feed tray 1) Separates paper to prevent double-feed.
B. Paper lifting operation D. Paper feed operation

Set paper in the paper feed tray and insert the paper feed tray into the The paper feed motor (CPFM) is turned ON, and then the paper feed
machine. The lift plate lifts up. clutch (CPUC1) is turned ON.
Paper is lifted by the lift motor (CLUM). The power of the paper feed motor (CPFM) is transmitted through the
When the paper feed tray 1 upper limit detector (CLUD1) detects the paper feed clutch (CPUC1) to the paper pickup roller and the paper
top of paper, the lift motor (CLUM) stops and the contact pressure feed roller.
between paper on the top and the paper pickup roller becomes the The paper pickup roller descends to pick up paper on the top and feed
proper level when paper is picked up. it to the paper feed roller.
When the paper remaining quantity is decreased, the lift plate lifts up The paper feed roller feeds paper to the paper transport section.
in each case to maintain the contact pressure between paper on the At that time, the separation roller rotates to prevent double-feed.
top and the paper pickup roller at the proper level when paper is
picked up.
C. Paper size detection operation

This model does not have a function to detect the paper size in the
cassette.
The paper size in the cassette is changed on operation panel.

8. Paper exit section
POM
OSM
POGS
SHPOS
FUFM
POD1
3
2
4

FUFM Paper exit cooling fan Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section.
OSM Offset motor Offsets (shifts) paper.
POD1 Paper exit detector 1 Detects paper transport from the fusing section.
POM Paper exit motor Drives the roller in the paper exit section.
SHPOS Shifter home positions sensor Detects the shifter home position.

1 Paper exit roller (drive) To exit paper onto the exit tray and perform switch back operations when in duplex mode.
To apply pressure to a paper with the paper exit roller (Drive), to give a feeding force of the exit roller to
2 Paper exit roller (idle)
a paper.
3 Fusing rear roller (drive) Transport the paper from the fusing unit to the paper exit unit.
To apply pressure to a paper with the paper exit roller (Drive), to give a feeding force of the exit roller to
4 Fusing rear roller (idle)
a paper.
5 Discharge Brush2 To discharge static generated in the paper exit section.
B. Paper exit operation

The paper transported from the fusing section is sent from transport
roller to paper exit roller, and then discharged to the inner tray.
When the paper is discharged to the right tray: The paper is trans-
ported to paper exit roller, and the paper exit motor is reversed. Then
the paper is passed over the right paper exit gate through paper exit
roller to the right tray.

9. Duplex section
ADUM

ADUM Duplex motor Drives the rear fusing roller and the paper exit roller with the duplex model.

1 Paper feed roller (Idle) Applies pressure to the back of the paper for drive to the Lower Duplex Transport Rollers
Drive Roller in upper Duplex section that transports paper to the Lower transport rollers in the Duplex
2 Paper feed roller (Drive)
Section.
B. Operational description
The switched back paper which comes from paper exit section goes to
ADU section. The paper feed rollers are driven by the duplex motor
transporting the paper to the registration section

10. OPC drum section
MM
8 5
2
2
3
6
1
7
4

MM Main motor Drives the most of the driving parts except the duplex section, the toner section and the scanner sections.

1 OPC drum Forms electrostatic latent images by laser beams.
2 Drum separation pawl Separates paper from the drum.
3 Sub blade (Cleaning seal) Prevents against toner leakage from the cleaner section.
4 Screen grid Helps to charge the OPC drum evenly with electric charges provided from the main charger.
5 Saw-teeth charger Applies a high voltage to charge the OPC drum.
6 Waste toner transport screw Waste toner in the OPC drum unit is transported to the waste toner collection section.
7 Cleaning blade Cleans remaining toner on the OPC drum.
8 Waste toner transport pipe Transports toner from the cleaner unit to the waste toner box in the toner cartridge front section.

The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main charger, 3) After transfer operation, remaining toner is removed by the clean-
then laser image beams are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the ing blade.
laser (writing) unit to form electrostatic latent images.
1) The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main charger.
Main corona unit
High voltage unit
Screen grid
CTL
CGL
Residual toner removed from the OPC drum surface is trans-
ported to the waste toner box section in the toner cartridge by the
Aluminum
waste toner transport screw.
layer OPC drum
4) The whole surface of the OPC drum is discharged.
The main charger grid is provided with the screen grid. The OPC
drum is charged at a voltage virtually same as the voltage applied Laser beam
to the screen grid.
2) LED lights are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the laser unit
to form latent electrostatic images. CLT CLT
CGL CGL
layer layer
Laser beam Aluminum Aluminum
After completion of the job, laser beams are radiated onto al the
surface of the OPC drum.
When laser beams are radiated onto the CGL of the OPC drum,
positive and negative charges are generated.
OPC drum Positive charges generated in CGL are attracted to the negative
OPC drum charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other hand, negative
CTL
CGL charges are attracted to positive charges in the aluminum layer of
layer the OPC drum.
Aluminum
Therefore, positive and negative charges are balanced out on the
OPC drum surface and in the aluminum layer, reducing positive
When LED lights are radiated to the OPC drum CGL, negative
and negative charged to decrease the surface voltage of the OPC
and positive charges are generated.
drum.
Positive charges generated in CGL are attracted to the negative
charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other hand, negative
charges are attracted to positive charges in the aluminum layer of
the OPC drum.
Therefore, positive charges and negative charges are balanced
out on the OPC drum and in the aluminum layer, reducing positive
and negative charges to decrease the OPC drum surface voltage.
Electric charges remain at a position where laser beam are not
radiated.
As a result, latent electrostatic images are formed on the OPC
drum surface.

11. Toner supply section
TNM

TNM Toner motor Drives the toner cartridge.
The toner transport screw in the toner cartridge is driven by the toner motor to supply toner to the developing unit.
The toner transport screw in the toner cartridge is turned ON/OFF by the toner motor. The toner density in the developing unit is detected by the toner
density sensor. When the density falls below the specified level, the toner motor is turned ON to supply toner in the toner cartridge to the developing
unit. When the toner density reaches the specified level, the toner motor turns OFF to stop supply of toner to the developing unit. With the above pro-
cess, the toner density in the developing unit is maintained at a fixed level.

12. Developing section
MM
TCS
2
2

TCS Toner sensor Detects the toner density in the developing unit.

1 Developing roller Forms electrostatic latent images on the OPC drum into visible images.
2 Stirring roller Stirring roller Stirs toner and developer to charge toner negatively by friction.
3 Toner filter Prevents toner splash and vacuum.

B. Developing operations
Electrostatic latent images formed on the OPC drum surface by the
laser (writing) unit (laser image beams) are converted into visible
images by toner.
layer
Aluminum CGL
CTL
Drum
-400V
Toner in the developing unit is stirred by the mixing roller.

When toner is stirred, it is negatively charged by mechanical friction.
The developing bias voltage (negative) is applied to the developing
roller.
Negatively charged toner is attracted and attached to the area on the
OPC drum where negative voltage is reduced by exposure.
On the other hand, the negative voltage at an area where exposure is
not made is higher than the developing bias voltage, and toner is not
attached.

1 : ‘15/Aug.
13. Transfer section
5
MM 4 3
35cpm
26/31cpm
5
4
3

Drives the most of the driving parts except the duplex section, the toner section and the scanner
MM Main motor
sections.

1 Transfer roller Transfers toner images from the OPC drum surface to paper.
Apply the negative voltage to the paper which the positive voltage is applied to and discharge the
2 Discharge plate
paper.
3 TR bearing (F/R) Transfer roller bearing
4 Transfer roller collar Transfer roller collar
5 TR gear Transfer roller drive gear

B. Transfer operation
The toner image on the photo conductor is transferred to the paper by
applying the positive high voltage to the transfer roller.
0HOTOCONDUCTOR/0#DRUM
$ISCHARGEPLATE
4RANSFERROLLER
4RANSFERMODE #LEANINGMODE
#ONSTANTCURRENT
C. Cleaning operation
The unnecessary toner on the transfer roller is moved to the photo
conductor by changing the polar character of the transfer roller to the
negative high voltage type. Then, the unnecessary toner is trans-
ported to the waste toner section by the cleaning blade of the photo
conductor.
0HOTOCONDUCTOR/0#DRUM
$ISCHARGEPLATE
4RANSFERROLLER
4RANSFERMODE #LEANINGMODE
#ONSTANTCURRENT

14. Fusing section
MM
TH_MY
TH_US
TS_UM 2
1
2
TS_UM
2 3
HL_PR 3
2
HLout

HL_PR Heater lamp control relay Turns ON/OFF the control of the heater relay.
HLout Heater lamp Turns ON/OFF the heater lamp.
TH_MY Thermistor UM Regulates Heat Roller Temperature at the end of the Heat Roller.
TH_US Thermistor US Regulates Heat Roller Temperature at center of the Heat Roller.
Fusing roller overheat protection. Cuts off power supply to heat lamp when over heat condition is
TS_UM Thermostat UM
determined.

1 Heat roller Applies heat and pressure to toner on paper to fuse it on paper.
2 Upper separation pawl Mechanically separates paper which was not naturally separated from the heat roller (heating).
3 Pressure roller Presses toner on paper to fuse.
4 Lower separation pawl Mechanically separates paper which was not naturally separated from the heat roller (heating).
B. Fusing unit drive C. Heater lamp drive

The driving of fuser unit is; the driving force is transported to fuser The surface temperature of the heat roller detected by the thermistor is
roller, thru the Main motor (MM) and connection gears, based on the sent to the PCU.
controlling signal from PCU. When the temperature is lower than the specified level, the heater
lamp ON signal is sent from the PCU to the heater lamp drive circuit on
the HL PWB.
The power triac in the heater lamp drive circuit is turned on, and the
0#5 -- AC power is supplied to the heater lamp, lighting the lamp and heating
the heat roller.
To prepare for an abnormally high temperature of the heat roller, the
thermostat is provided for safety.
When the thermostat is opened, the power supply (AC line) to the
heater lamp is cut off.

D. Fusing operation
Toner on paper is heated and pressed to be fused by the heat roller.
Heat Roller
Pressure Roller
The heater lamp is in the heat roller, which heats the heat roller to fuse
toner onto paper.
The pressure roller is made of silicon rubber because of the following
reasons and purpose.
1) Paper is separated. (Since the heat roller is of higher hardness,
the pressure roller is deformed to separate paper toward the heat
roller.)
2) The nip quantity is increased to increase heat capacity for paper.
3) By pressing paper with the flexible roller, toner is fused without
deformation.
E. Fusing temperature control

The temperature sensor is provided at the center of the heat roller.
The roller temperature is detected by the thermistor sensor, and the
heater lamp is controlled so that the temperature is maintained at the
specified level.

1 : ‘15/Aug.
15.Fan and Filter section
The machine is provided with the following fan to discharge air from the process section and cool the fusing section and the power unit.

OZFM Ozone fan Cools the developing unit generates the ozone from the main charger unit.
PSFM Power supply unit cooling fan Cools the power supply unit.
LSUFM LSU cooling fan Cools the LSU and the Developing unit
FUFM Paper exit cooling fan Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section.
The machine is provided with the following filter to remove ozone generated in the process section.

1 Ozone filter Absorbs ozone generated in the image process section.
2*1 Exhaust Ozone filter Take in an odor to exhaust.
1
*1:Destination North America and Mexico only
LSUFM
FUFM(TFM)
2 PSFM
OZFM
1

[12]
MX-M316N
䛆㻻㼜㼠㼕㼛㼚䛇㻶㻼㻺㻒㻺㻙㼙㼛㼐㼑㼘䠖㼟㼠㼐䈜㻝㻌㻻㼚㼘㼥㻌㻟㻝㼛㼜㼙㻌㻹㼛㼐㼑㼘㻌䈜㻞㻌㻻㼚㼘㼥㻌㻡㻢㼛㼜㼙㻌㻹㼛㼐㼑㼘㻌
RSPF Unit
䈜㻝 SPFC STMPS SPPD1 SOCD
SPRS SPLS1 SPPD2 SCOV

1. Block diagram
䛆㻻㼜㼠㼕㼛㼚䛇 SPFM SPLS2 SPPD3 SPED
Right Derivery Unit Derivery 1 Unit 䈜㻞 SPUM SPWS SPPD4 SPRC
PDGS2
PDGS2 POD1
POD1
A. System block diagram
TFD3 SHPOS RSPF DRV PWB

POD3 POGS1
POM Scanner Unit
䛆㻻㼜㼠㼕㼛㼚䛇䈜㻶㻼㻺㻦㼟㼠㼐 OSM 䛆㻻㼜㼠㼕㼛㼚䛇
Derivery 2 Unit TFD1 HUD_RA CCD PWB PNC
POD2 FUFM1 ADUM TNM TH_RA LEDPWB OC Switch Audior
TFD2 POSD TM_Count TCS RRC ORS-LED 䛆㻻㼜㼠㼕㼛㼚䛇
DSW_POC CRUM PSPS LED DRV PWB SCN PWB ORS-PD WH_SCN
MIRM Operation Panel Unit
Manual Paper Unit

ELECTRICAL SECTION
MHPS
㼀㼛㼡㼏㼔
MPWD MPFC
㻼㼍㼚㼑㼘
LVDS PWB
MPED MTOP1
MPLD1 MTOP2 DSW_R MM PSFM 㻸㻯㻰㻌㼁㼚㼕㼠
OZFM
㻮㻸
㻷㻱㼅㻌㻼㼃㻮
Fuser Unit Paper Feed 1st Unit
㼁㻿㻮㻌㻯㻺
TH_UM C1SS HV-PWB
㻼㼃㻮
TH_US C1LUD C1PUC
MFPc PWB
C1PED PPD1 䛆㻻㼜㼠㼕㼛㼚䛇 PCU PWB 䛆㻻㼜㼠㼕㼛㼚䛇䛆㻻㼜㼠㼕㼛㼚䛇䈜㻶㻼㻺㻌㻲㻼㻦㼟㼠㼐
HL_UM 䛆㻻㼜㼠㼕㼛㼚䛇䈜㻶㻼㻺㻦㼟㼠㼐 C1LUM CoinVender HDD(250GB)

FAX Unit
HL_US WH_CS1
(x1)
LSU Unit
䛆㻻㼜㼠㼕㼛㼚䛇䛆㻻㼜㼠㼕㼛㼚䛇䛆㻻㼜㼠㼕㼛㼚䛇䈜㻶㻼㻺㻒㻟㻝㻯㻼㻹㻦㼟㼠㼐䛆㻻㼜㼠㼕㼛㼚䛇
Paper Feed 4th Unit Paper Feed 3rd Unit Paper Feed 2nd Unit
LD PWB FAX Unit
(x1)
CS PWB(A) CS PWB(B) CS PWB(A)
CPFM PM
C4PFD C4SS C3PFD C3SS C2PFD C2SS LSUFM
C4LUD C4PUC C3LUD C3PUC C2LUD C2PUC 䛆㻻㼜㼠㼕㼛㼚䛇
C4PED C3PED C2PED
DSW C4
DSW_C4 C4LUM DSW
DSW_C3
C3 C
C3LUM
3LUM DSW_C2
DSW C2 C
C2LUM
2LUM Inner Finisher 㻭㼕㼞㻌㻼㼡㼞㼕㼒㼕㼑㼞
䛆㻻㼜㼠㼕㼛㼚䛇䈜㻶㻼㻺㻦㼟㼠㼐 PTRC1 䛆㻻㼜㼠㼕㼛㼚䛇䈜㻶㻼㻺㻦㼟㼠㼐 PTRC1 䛆㻻㼜㼠㼕㼛㼚䛇䈜㻶㻼㻺㻦㼟㼠㼐 PTRC2
MX-M316N ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 – 1

WH_CS4 WH_CS3 WH_CS2 AC IN
Service Manual
䛆㻻㼜㼠㼕㼛㼚䛇䈜㻶㻼㻺㻦㼟㼠㼐
WH PWB
WH Switch
Power Supply Unit
Main Switch
AC IN Reactor 䈜200V
NOVA-E PCU Connecting Diagram
*** See the Circuit diagrams for more details Right paper exit Unit䠄Optional)
B. PCU PWB
SCAN Cnt PWB Inner Finisher
TFD3; Right Pout

Tray Full Sensor
POGS2; Pout
Gate Solenoid2
POD3; Right
Pout sensor
TFD2; 2nd POUT
Tray Full Sensor
POD2; 2nd Pout
sensor
DSW_POC; Pout
Cover sensor
MTOP1䠖Multi feed tray Position Sensor䠍 CPLD Writer
CN51
MTOP2䠖Multi feed tray Position Sensor2 CN1 CN3 CN4 CN6 CN46
SHPOS; Shifter HP Sensor
POD1;Pout Sensor WH-PWB
TFD1; Tray Full Sensor CN54
FUFM ; FuserUN Cooling Fan Motor

CN43 Coin
PIC Writer PCU-PWB Vender
OSM ; Shifter-Motor
CN27 CN9
POM ; Paper Output Motor
POGS1 ; Pout Gate Solenoid1 Reset Power

Reset IC CPU
H8S/2373 I 2C Bus
POSD ; POUT Switching Pass Detector CN47
EEPROM
CN36
TH_UM/TH_US; Fuser Thermister 64kbits Debug/Log MFP-PWB
(x2 Analog)
CN8 Control
PSPS ; Paper SeParate Solenoid CN38
CN10
OZFM ; Ozon Fan Motor
CN33
TM-Counter CN12
Expanded
p CPLD Polygon-Motor
InterLock SW CN22 I/O ASIC
0)
ADUM ; Auto Duplex Motor
㻹㼍㼕㼚㻌㼡㼚㼕㼠㻌㼜㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㼒㼑㼑㼐㻌㼘㼛㼍㼐 CN49 POF PIC CN55 LSU FAN Motor LD-PWB
C1PUC ; Cassette1 Pick Up Clutch
RRC ; Resist Roller Clutch LSU-UN
C1LUM䠖Lift Up Motor CN48
Data Bus(0..15)
Address Bus(0..20)
PPD1; Paper Pass Detect Sensor SRAM
㻰㼂㻌㼁㼚㼕㼠 CN50 1Mbits Flash ROM
TCS; Toner Control Sensor 16Mbits CN45 PSFM ; PowerSupplyUN Cooling Fan Motor
(72pinDIMM socket)
Main Cassette Unit HV Unit
C1SS; Cassette Detector
C1PED ; Paper Empty CN53

C1LUD ; Lift Up Detector CN32 CN35 CN37 CN14 CN52 CN16 CN44
Manual Paper Feed Unit Cassette Unit䚷(Type䠖A)

Temp/Humidity CRUM MPLD1; MFT Paper Length Sensor 1
Sensor MPWD; MFT Paper Width Sensor(Analog) CS Relay PWB(A)
MPED; Multi Paper tray Empty sensor Power Supply
APPD1; ADU Paper Pass Sensor C2PFD ; Paper Feed Detector
MPFC; Multi feed tray PickUp Clutch DSW_C2 ; Door Detector Toner-Motor
C2PED ; Paper Empty
C2LUD ; Lift Up Detector
㻻㼜㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㻯㼍㼟㼟㼑㼠㼠㼑㻌 Unit䚷(Type䠖A) 㻻㼜㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㻯㼍㼟㼟㼑㼠㼠㼑㻌 Unit (Type䠖B) C2SS ; Casette Detector
CPFM ; Casette Paper Feed Motor C2PUC; Pick Up Clutch MM; MAIN-Motor
C2LUM ; Lift Up Motor
CS Relay PWB 㻔㻮㻕 PTRC2:Desk vertical transport clutch2
CS Relay PWB (A)
C3PFD ; Paper Feed Detector

C4PFD ; Paper Feed Detector DWS_C3 ; Door Detector
DSW_C4 ; Door Detector C3PED ; Paper Empty
C4PED ; Paper Empty C3LUD ; Lift Up Detector
C4LUD ; Lift Up Detector C3SS ; Casette Detector
C4SS ; Casette Detector C3PUC ; Pick Up Clutch
C4PUC ; Pick Up Clutch C3LUM ; Lift Up Motor
C4LUM ; Lift Up Motor PTRC1:Desk vertical transport clutch1
1
1
+%%#4&4GCFGT
㻺㻻㼂㻭㻙㻱䚷㻹㻲㻼㼏䠖㻺㻭㻿㻴㻵㻾㻭㻌㻮㼘㼛㼏㼗㻌㻰㼕㼍㼓㼞㼍㼙 ,20Ჴ126

/:'%:'%
185ᲴᲧ
*&&
)$ 75$*QUV
,20Ჴ56&
: ‘15/Aug.
185Ჴ126
6[RG#%0
(TQPV
㻺㻭㻿㻴㻵㻾㻭㻌㻾㼑㼢㻞㻚㻜㻛㻟㻚㻜 3.0Gbps
75$
75$*QUV
9KTGNGUU.#0 6[RG#%0
USB2.0 Host USB2.0 Host
#FCRVGT
4GCT 480Mbps 480Mbps

126
C. MFP control PWB
5NKFG59 5&*%)$ 5#6#%0 2%+G 75$%0 .%&2CPGN

%NQEM)GPGTCVQT 5%729$
.8&529$
5&
5QEMGV (#0 &&41P$QCTF
%0 )$
SATA gen2
DDR3-800 3.0Gbps
(1ch)
UART
75$*7$
RQTV
43.97MHz
LDVS(LCD)
LDVS(Scan)
39.322MHz
SDHC Class6 &&4

52+5& 29/ 5#6#+(
6MB/sec +(
CN Update 75$+( USB2.0 Host

)2+1
*QUV 480Mbps
(2&.+0- LDVS(LCD)
.%&%+(
.#0,CEM (LAN waiting state ON) 6TCUOKVVGT 43.97MHz
4, 1Gbps
5%7%0
(2&.+0- LDVS(Scan)
5%0+(
'VJGT2*; GMII 'VJGT/#% 4GEKGXGT 39.322MHz
)
UART
%0
LDVS(LD)17.88ϳMHz LD I/F
5%7
.&%0 (1ch)
75$&GXKEG USB2.0 Device 75$ 75$+( HSYNC
6[RG$%0 480Mbps $WU5YKVEJ &GXKEG Reus .57+(
ͤOnly Rev3.0 MPU I/F
UART(1ch) 7#46

EJ
ASIC 2%729$
nFAX12_PIN_INT +06

EJ
INT(WakeUp) +06

EJ
+06 POF
INT(Sleep) +06 (LAN waiting state OFF)
EJ

EJ
+%
EJ I2C
%QPVTQNNGT 95kHz
nFAX12_PIC_INT 2+%
+%
EJ I2C /KEQP
46%
&GDWI%0 %QPVTQNNGT 360kHz

'VJGT
+%
EJ I2C ''241/
%QPVTQNNGT 360kHz MD
GMII

'VJGT/#% 7#46 2%+G+( 2%+G+( .QECN$WU Local㻌 Bus
2%7/QVJGT%0
%2.&
)
EJ
NCPG
NCPG +(
&UWD%0

4+%2%+
#KT%NGCPGT
è%*0,20
UART
45% UART(1ch)
.GXGN%QPXGTVGT PCIe㻌 x4㻌 gen1
2.5Gbps 54#/ (NCUJ&+// (NCUJ&+//
/DKV 5QEMGV
&5-QRV
5GTKCN%0 UART(1ch)

8GPFGT UART UART
5GTKCN%0 UART(1ch)

&GDWI
(#:
UV
%0
(#:
PF UART(2ch)
%0 $QCTFVQ$QCTF%QPPGEVQT
D. Scanner control PWB
24.576
3.3Ｖ
1.8Ｖ
CCD-Ｆ
(Main unit) Tr
10V Tr
Tr
AFE/TG
Tr CPUCLK
3line color CCD
Tr SCNcnt
Tr AFE_CS 19.576MHz CLK
Rx FPD Link ｃｌｋ

RGB 35bit
LSU-mother
10Ｖ/5Ｖ/3Ｖ SCN LVDS IC

ASIC Tx
3.3Ｖ 28bit
シリアル2系統 1.2Ｖ Image data
CS3
RSPF UN
12→10Ｖ CTRL_A10V
12→5Ｖ CTRL_A5V
5→3.3Ｖ CTRL_A3.3V
5VO
CPUCLK
Mirror.
24V MOTOR
MOTOR
DRIVER
24V
5VN F-ROM
151 and other ICs LED LED E2PROM
(ONboard)
24V
5VN CS0orCS6
sensors other than SPEED
MHPsensor
5VN
5VPWM
OCSW
5VN CS2 CS0
SRAM F-ROM
LSU- mothe
CPU
5VO RSPF Power
H8S/2373
SPED 5VPWM uart and others
LSU- mothe
HC151
SEL_A/B/C
Each sensor
5VN
LVDS PWB ORS LED

24V
Touch Panel
analog
・LCD Detection
PNL_SEL0
SCN
ASIC
Auditor(TBD)
CCFT CPU
CCFT_CPU PNL SEL0
PNL_SEL0
/CCFT
ＬＣＤ nLCD_DISP
CPLD ( ON/OFF )
Ｒｘ
Image data 28bit
DCDC 5VN
3.3V 5V
24V LCD Power
原稿サイズ受光
LED LED 24V 5VN
/KEYIN
KEY CON LSU- mothe
5VPWM 5VPWM
3.3V
5VO
NINFO_LED
10 keys and others NPWRSW
POW_LED
WU_LED 5VO
NWU_KEY
5VO
Buzzer /BZR 24V
24V Power
supply
LED Drive
LED Matrix
Circuit 12V 12V
12V
INFO_LED(FAX reception LED)
3.3V
WU_KEY (Reset Key) 3.3V
WU_LED (Reset Key)
POW_LED(Main Power LED)
5VN
PWRSW(Software SW) 5V
SC_ACK ＰＣＵ
PCU_REQ
USB CN PWB

2. Power line diagram
A.AC power line diagram
(1) 100V

(2) 120V

(3) 200V

㻿㻯㻺㼏㼚㼠㻌㻼㼃㻮㻣㻚㻜㻌㻵㻺㻯㻴㻌㻼㻭㻺㻱㻸㻌㼁㻺
㻝㻞㼂㻣㻚㻜㻌㻻㻼㻌㻼㼃㻮㻔㻷㻱㼅㻌㻼㼃㻮㻕
㻮㼆㻾
㻝㻞㼂
㻞㻠㼂㻞㼃㼁㼋㻷㻱㼅㻔㻾㼑㼟㼑㼠㻌㼗㼑㼥㻕㻼㻯㼁㻌㻼㻵㻯㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘
㻛㻮㼆㻾㻼㼃㻾㻿㼃㻔㻿㼛㼒㼠㻿㼃㻕㻼㻯㼁㻌㻼㻵㻯㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘
㻡㼂㻻㻡㼂㻻㼃㼁㼋㻸㻱㻰㻌㻔㻾㼑㼟㼑㼠㻌㼗㼑㼥㻌㻸㻱㻰㻕㻼㻯㼁㻌㻼㻵㻯㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘
㻡㼂㻻㼋㻰㼡㼠㼥㻼㻻㼃㼋㻸㻱㻰㻔㻹㼍㼕㼚㻌㼜㼛㼣㼑㼞㻌㻸㻱㻰㻕㻼㻯㼁㻌㻼㻵㻯㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘
㻡㼂㻺㻟㻚㻟㼂㻵㻺㻲㻻㼋㻸㻱㻰㻔㻲㻭㼄㻌㼞㼑㼏㼑㼜㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㻸㻱㻰㻕㻼㻯㼁㻌㻼㻵㻯㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘
㻡㼂㻺㻷㻱㼅㻯㻻㻺
㻡㼂㻺㼟㼑㼞㼕㼑㼟㻌㼟㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞㻭㻺㼅㻌㻷㻱㼅

㻟㻚㻟㼂㻣㻚㻜㻌㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻯㼀㻾㻸㼋㻭㻟㻚㻟㼂
㻭㻟㻚㻟㼂㻡㼂㻻
㻞㻠㼂
㻟㻚㻟㼂㻸㻰㻻㻸㻱㻰㻌㻰㻾㻵㼂㻱㻾㻮㼍㼏㼗㼘㼕㼓㼔㼠
㻾㻿㻼㻲㻌㻰㻾㻵㼂㻱㻾㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻯㻯㻰㻌㻼㼃㻮㻡㼂㻻㼋㻰㼡㼠㻰㻲㼛㼜㼑㼚㻛㼏㼘㼛㼟㼑㻼㻯㼁㻌㻼㻵㻯㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㻡㼂㻺㻟㻚㻟㼂㼋㻸㻯㻰
㻝㻚㻞㼂㻸㻰㻻㻸㻯㻰㻔㻣㻚㻜㻕
㻼㻻㻲㼋㻿㻯㻺㻔㻼㻯㼁㻌㻼㻵㻯㻴㻤㻿㻸㻰㻻㻸㻰㻻㻰㼛㼏㼡㼙㼑㼚㼠㻌㼟㼑㼠㻌㼟㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞㻼㻯㼁㻌㻼㻵㻯㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㻟㻚㻟㼂
㻰㻯㻰㻯㻡㼂㻺㻸㻰㻻㼀㼛㼡㼏㼔㻌㼜㼍㼚㼑㼘
㻯㼀㻾㻸㼋㻭㻝㻜㼂
B.AC power system diagram
㻝㻚㻤㼂㻡㼂㻺㻌series sensor

㻝㻞㼂㻭㻝㻜㼂㻭㻝㻜㼂
㻸㻰㻻㻭㻟㻚㻟㼂㻟㻚㻟㼂
㻭㻡㼂㻭㻡㼂
㻸㻰㻻㻟㻟㼂 series sensor
㻟㻚㻟㼂

㻯㼀㻾㻸㼋㻭㻡㼂㻞㻠㼂㻼㻰㻻㻾㻿㻸㻱㻰㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻞㻠㼂㻞㻞㻠㼂㻼㻰㻌㼏㼘㼡㼠㼏㼔㻘㻌
㻞㻠㼂㻼㻰
㻲㻱㼀
㻿㻼㻲㻹㻌
㻡㼂㻻㻡㼂㻻㼋㻰㼡㼠㼥㻯㼀㻾㻸㼋㻞㻠㼂㻼㻰
㼀㼞㼍㼚㼟㼜㼛㼞㼠㻌㼙㼛㼠㼛㼞㻻㻾㻿㻙㻼㻰㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻹㻵㻾㻹
㻹㻲㻼㻯㻌㻼㼃㻮㻭㻾㻹㻥㻺㻱㼀㼃㻻㻾㻷㻌㻛㻌㼁㻿㻮㻿㼏㼍㼚㼚㼑㼞㻌㼙㼛㼠㼛㼞
㻼㻻㻲㼋㻹㻲㻼㻯㻔㻼㻯㼁㻌㻼㻵㻯㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㻕
㻟㻚㻟㼂㼋㻻㻺
㻭㻾㻹㻝㻝㻾㻱㻽㼋㻼㻵㻯㻔㻼㻯㼁㻌㻼㻵㻯㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㻕㻰㻯㻰㻯
㼁㻭㻾㼀㻝㻚㻤㼂㼋㻻㻺㻲㻭㼄㼁㻺
㻾㻱㻽㼋㻼㻵㻯㼋㻵㻺㼀㻔㻼㻯㼁㻌㻼㻵㻯㻌㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㻕㻰㻯㻰㻯
㻝㻚㻞㻣㼂㼋㻻㻺㻲㻭㼄㻌㻹㻭㻵㻺㻌㻼㼃㻮㻸㻵㼁㻌㻼㼃㻮㻸㻱㻰㻌㻰㻵㼂㻌㻸㻱㻰㻌㻼㼃㻮㻙㻲
㻰㻯㻰㻯㻲㻭㼄㼋㼃㼁㻼㻔㻼㻵㻯㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㻕
㻡㼂㻻㻡㼂㻻㻡㼂㻻
㻼㻵㻯
㻟㻚㻟㼂㼋㻱㻯㻻㻡㼂㻴㻰
㻰㻯㻰㻯㻴㻰㻰㻔㻞㻚㻡㻎㻕
㻸㻱㻰㻌㻼㼃㻮㻙㻾
㻝㻚㻡㼂㼋㻱㻯㻻
㻰㻯㻰㻯㼁㻿㻮㼋㼂㻮㼁㻿㼁㻿㻮
㻜㻚㻣㻡㼂㼋㻱㻯㻻
㻰㻯㻰㻯㻔㻯㻭㻾㻰㻌㻾㼑㼍㼐㼑㼞㻛㻲㼞㼛㼚㼠㼁㻿㻮
㻰㻯㻌㻼㼃㻮㻝㻚㻞㻣㼂㼋㻱㻯㻻㻛㻷㻱㼅㻮㻻㻭㻾㻰㻕
㻡㼂㻸㻰㻯㻰㻯㻡㼂㻸
㻡㼂㻸㻡㼂㻸
㻞㻠㼂㻝㻞㻠㼂㻝
䛆㻲㻭㼄㼁㻺䛇
㻙㻶㼍㼜㼍㼚
㻟㻚㻟㼂㻟㻚㻟㼂
㻳㻙㻭㼞㼞㼍㼥㻲㼕㼞㼟㼠㻌㼘㼕㼚㼑㻌㻦㻌㻿㼀㻰
㻵㻺㼀㻡㼂㻿㻴㻣㻣㻜㻢㻿㼑㼏㼛㼚㼐㻌㼘㼕㼚㼑䠖㻻㻼㼀
㻝㻚㻥㼂
㻰㻯㻰㻯
㻝㻚㻤㼂
㻰㻯㻰㻯㻙㻻㼢㼑㼞㼟㼑㼍㼟
㻡㼂㻻㼋㻰㼡㼠㼥㻸㻰㻌㻼㼃㻮㻲㼕㼞㼟㼠㻌㼘㼕㼚㼑㻌㻦㻌㻻㻼㼀
㻼㻯㼁㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻵㻺㼀㻡㼂㻵㻺㼀㻡㼂㻔㻡㼂㼋㻸㻰㻕
㻟㻙㼠㼑㼞㼙㼕㼚㼍㼘㻌
㻾㼑㼓
㻸㻰
㻲㻱㼀㻞㻠㼂㻝㼃㻴㻌㻼㼃㻮㻶㼍㼜㼍㼚䠖㻿㼀㻰㻸㻿㼁㻲㻹

㻡㼂㻻㻡㼂㻻㻻㼢㼑㼞㼟㼑㼍㼟䠖㻻㻼㼀㻸㻿㼁㼒㼍㼚
㻼㻵㻯
㻞㻠㼂㻝
㻼㻹䠄㻮㻸㻹㻕
㻼㼛㼘㼥㼓㼛㼚㻌㼙㼛㼠㼛㼞
$ 㻲㼁㻲㻹
㻞㻠㼂㻝㻞㻠㼂㻝㻞㻠㼂㻝
㻲㼡㼟㼑㼞㻌㼏㼛㼛㼘㼕㼚㼓㻌㼒㼍㼚
㻞㻠㼂㻝㻌㼒㼍㼚㻘㻌㼏㼘㼡㼠㼏㼔㻘㻌㼟㼛㼘㼑㼚㼛㼕㼐
㻻㻼㼀㻵㻻㻺

㻞㻠㼂㻝㻰㻱㻿㻷㻼㻿㻲㻹
㻼㼛㼣㼑㼞㻌㼏㼛㼛㼘㼕㼚㼓㻌㼒㼍㼚
㻯㻻㻵㻺㻌㼂㻱㻺㻰㻻㻾㻻㼜㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㻯㼍㼟㼟㼑㼠㼑㻌㻵㻛㻲㻌㻼㼃㻮䠄㻞㼚㼐㻌䠅㻟㼞㼐㻘㻠㼠㼔㻌㻰㻱㻿㻷
㻡㼂㻺
㻶㼍㼜㼍㼚䠖㻿㼀㻰
$ 㻻㼢㼑㼞㼟㼑㼍㼟䠖㻻㻼㼀
㻔㻻㼜㼠㼕㼛㼚㻕㼀㻺㻹
㻞㻠㼂㻞㻞㻠㼂㻝㼀㼛㼚㼑㼞㻌㼙㼛㼠㼛㼞
㻡㼂㻺㻻㼆㻲㻹
+/$&5< 㻹㻹㻻㼦㼛㼚㼑㻌㼒㼍㼚
㻞㻠㼂㻝㻹㼍㼕㼚㻌㼙㼛㼠㼛㼞
㻰㻿㼃㻡㼂㻺㼟㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞㼟㻯㻝㻸㼁㻹
㻴㻸㼋㻼㻾㻴㻸㼋㻼㻾㻵㻺㼀㻞㻠㼂㻵㻺㼀㻞㻠㼂㻯㻞㻸㼁㻹㻭㻰㼁㻹㻸㼕㼒㼠㻌㼡㼜㻌㼙㼛㼠㼛㼞
㼀㼞
㼀㻲㻱㼀
㻸㼕㼒㼠㻌㼡㼜㻌㼙㼛㼠㼛㼞㻭㻰㼁㼙㼛㼠㼛㼞
㻞㻠㼂㻝㻴㼂㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻟㻚㻟㼂㻟㻚㻟㼂㻞㻠㼂㻝㼏㼘㼡㼠㼏㼔
㻻㻿㻹
㻵㻺㼀㻞㻠㼂㻿㼔㼕㼒㼠㼑㼞㻌㼙㼛㼠㼛㼞
㻴㻤㻿㻵㻛㻻㻌㻭㻿㻵㻯㻯㻼㻸㻰
㻡㼂㻺㻡㼂㻺
㻼㻻㻹
㻡㼂㻺㻼㼍㼜㼑㼞㻌㼑㼤㼕㼠㻌㼞㼑㼢㼑㼞㼟㼑㻌㼙㼛㼠㼛㼞
㻲㼃㻔㻲㼞㼛㼙㻌㻰㻯㻌㻼㼃㻮㻕㻼㻻㻲㻔㼀㼛㻌㻼㻯㼁㻼㻵㻯㻕㻡㼂㻺㼟㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞㼟
㻝㻞㼂㻝㻞㼂㼁㼟㼑㼐㻌㼕㼚㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㻞㻙㼟㼜㼑㼑㼐㻌㼏㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㻌㻲㻭㻺㻚
㻟㻚㻟㼂㼟㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞㼟
㻰㻯㻯㻺㼀㻞㻰㻯㻯㻺㼀㻝
㻻㻼㼀㻵㻻㻺
㻻㻲㻲㼋㻯㻺㼀㻾㼅㼋㻯㻺㼀㻡㼂㻺

㻔㻼㻯㼁㻌㻼㻵㻯㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㻕㻔㻼㻯㼁㻌㻼㻵㻯㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㻕㻞㻠㼂㻞㻲㻵㻺㻵㻿㻴㻱㻾
㻵㻺㼀㻱㻾㻸㻻㻯㻷㻌㻿㼃
㻔㻲㻿㻿㼃㻕
PCU PWB MFPC PWB
CN10 CN46
A. LSU section
NC 1 28 NC
NC 2 27 NC
BD_HSYNC 3 26 BD_HSYNC
D-GND 4 25 D-GND
nREQ_PIC_INT 5 24 NREQ_PIC_INT
MPU_INTRO_N 6 23 MPU_INTRO_N
nRES_PIC 7 22 NRST_PIC
MPU_PRINTST_N 8 21 MPU_PRINTST_N
nPOF_MFPC 9 20 NPOF_MFPC
3. Actual wiring chart
LAN_CNT 10 19 WOLAN_ON
PICVPPON PICVPPON
nWU_FAX
11
12
18
17 NWU_FAX12_LAN
LD PWB
PHDR-12VS-2 PHDR-12VS-2
RXD_PIC 13 16 RXD_PIC
MPU_SIF_RxD 14 15 MPU_SIF_RX CN52 JP1
TXD_PIC 15 14 TXD_PIC D-GND 1 2 GND
MPU_SIF_TxD 16 13 MPU_SIF_TX BD_HSYNC_N 2 1 nBD
nCLR_PIC 17 12 NCLR_PIC LDD_LDEN1_N 3 3 nENB
MPU_SIF_CLK 18 11 MPU_SIF_CLK LDD_SH1_N 4 8 nS/H
nREQ_PIC 19 10 NREQ_PIC D-GND 5 9 GND
MPU_SIF_RST 20 9 MPU_SIF_RST LDD_LDERR_N 9 4 nLDERR
PWM(PGC) 21 8 PICPGC_RSVPWM LVDS_LD1P 6 RD RD 7 DT_P
nCTS_PCU 22 7 nCTS_PCU LVDS_LD1M 8 WH WH 5 DT_N
RxD_PCU 23 6 RXD_PCU D-GND 7 SH SH 6 GND
RTS_PCU 24 5 nRTS_PCU D-GND 10 (NC)
TxD_PCU 25 4 TXD_PCU D-GND 11 (NC)
RES_PCU 26 3 nRES_PCU D-GND 12 (NC)
D-GND 27 2 D-GND
D-GND 28 1 D-GND
B12B-PHDSS-B
28FMZ-BT 28FMZ-BT
CN12
LD_DA 4 10 VREF
D-GND 2 11 GND
INT5V 1 12 VCC
2-292173-5(AMP) B12B-PHDSS-B

/PM_CLK 6 1 POLYCLK
/PM_LD 5 2 /LOCK
/PM_D 8 3 /START
D-GND 3 4 GND PM
24V 7 5 24V
NC 9 179228-5
NC 10
PHDR-10VS-2
B10B-PHDSS-B
CN55 AMP292156-3
LSUFMOUT 1 3 LSUFMOUT 1
GND 2 1 GND 3
LSUFM_LD 3 2 LSUFM_LD 2 LSUFM
B03B-PASK-1 179228-3 179228-3
PAP-03V-S
LCD7.0 Unit
MFPC PWB SCN CNT PWB LVDS PWB
CN2 FPC
LCD module
CN4 CN1 GND 40
GND 1 41 GND GND 39
nLCD_DISP 2 40 nLCD DISP NC 38
GND 3 39 LCDSEL1_10H 3.3V_LCD 37
CN_LCDSEL0 4 38 LCDSEL0_43H 3.3V_LCD 36
GND 5 37 GND 3.3V_LCD 35
LCD_A3_P 6 36 LCD_A3_P 3.3V_LCD 34
LCD_A3_N 7 35 LCD_A3_M NC 33
GND 8 34 GND ENAB 32
LCD_CLK_P 9 33 LCD_CLK_P HSYNC 31
CN45 PHDR-30VS-1 PHDR-16VS-2 CN5 LCD_CLK_N 10 32 LCD_CLK_M VSYNC 30
GND 11 31 GND CK 29
SCANDATA0- 1 16 SCANDATA_0N LCD_A2_P 12 30 LCD_A2_P GND 28
SCANDATA0+ 3 15 SCANDATA_0P LCD_A2_N 13 29 LCD_A2_M B727
B. Operation section
DGND 2 14 GND GND 14 28 GND B626

SCANDATA1- 7 13 SCANDATA_1N LCD_A1_P 15 27 LCD_A1_P B525
SCANDATA2- 13 9 SCANDATA_2N LCD_A0_P 18 24 LCD_A0_P B222
SCANCLKOUT- 19 5 SCANCLKOUT_N CN_nCCFT 21 21 /CCFT G719
SCANCLKOUT+ 21 3 SCANCLKOUT_P CN_nXL(X2) 22 20 /XL_X2_SDA G618
DGND 20 6 GND CN_YH(Y2) 23 19 YH_Y2_SCL G517
SCANDATA3- 25 1 SCANDATA_3N CN_nYL(Y1) 24 18 /YL_Y1_INT G416
SCANDATA3+ 27 2 SCANDATA_3P CN_XH(X1) 25 17 XH_X1_CS G315
DGND 26 4 GND GND 26 16 GND G214
(NC) 8 +3.3V +5V_LVDS 27 15 5V G113
+5V_LVDS 28 14 5V G012
B16B-PHDSS-B +5V_LVDS 29 13 5V R711
+5V_LVDS 30 12 5V R610
GND 31 11 GND R5 9
GND 32 10 GND R4 8
+24V_LVDS 33 9 24V R3 7
+24V_LVDS 34 8 24V R2 6
CN11 +24V_LVDS 35 7 24V R1 5
DGND 29 SH SH 16 GND +24V_LVDS 36 6 24V R0 4
LCD_DATA3+ 30 PK PK 13 LCD_A3_P GND 37 5 GND U/D 3
LCD_DATA3- 28 WH WH 14 LCD_A3_M GND 38 4 GND L/R 2
DGND 23 SH SH 10 GND GND 39 3 GND GND 1
LCD_CLK+ 24 PK PK 11 LCD_CLK_P GND 40 2 GND FH12A-40S-0.5SH(55)
LCD_CLK- 22 WH WH 12 LCD_CLK_M GND 41 1 GND
DGND 17 SH SH 9 GND 20555-041E CN3 FPC
FX16M2-41S-0.5SV FX16M1-41P-HC
LCD_DATA2+ 18 PK PK 7 LCD_A2_P XH(X1)1
LCD_DATA2- 16 WH WH 8 LCD_A2_M /YL(Y1)
2
DGND 11 SH SH 4 GND /XL(X2)
3 TOUCH PANEL
LCD_DATA1+ 12 PK PK 5 LCD_A1_P YH(Y2)
4
LCD_DATA1- 10 WH WH 6 LCD_A1_M 52271-0469
DGND 5 SH SH 3 GND
LCD_DATA0+ 6 PK PK 1 LCD_A0_P
LCD_DATA0- 4 WH WH 2 LCD_A0_M CN4
B30B-PHDSS-B (NC) 15 CN_LCDSEL0 S3B-PH-SM4-TB
VLED+ 1
(NC) 17 CN_nSCU_RES_REQ (NC) 2 (NC) BACK LIGHT
VLED- 3
(NC) 27 SOCD
CN35 (NC) 31 (NC)
nLCD_DISP 8 19 nLCD_DISP
nRES_SCN 7 21 CN_nRES_SCN PHR-6 BHSMR-02VS / BHSR-02VS-1
TXD_SCN 5 23 CN_RXD_MFPC 1 VLED+ 1
RXD_SCN 3 25 CN_TXD_MFPC 6 GND 2 VLED- 2
nRTS_SCN 6 24 CN_nCTS_MFPC 5 PD
nCTS_SCN 4 26 CN_nRTS_MFPC 4 5V
DGND 9 34 GND 3 PDSEL2
DGND 10 (NC) 22 CN_nPOF 2 PDSEL1
ORS-PD PWB
DGND 1 (NC) 28 +5VO 1 PDSEL0
DGND 2 (NC) 29 SPED B6P-PH-K-S
18 GND
B10B-PHDSS-B 20 +5VPWM
PHDR-10VS-2 (NC) 30 CN_nPCU_REQ
(NC) 32 CN_nSC_ACK KEY PWB
(NC) 33 GND CN13 CN1
+5VO 1 (NC) (NC) 7 NC
PHDR-34VS-1 B34B-PHDSS-B +5VO 2 9 /BZR

CN_nHOME_KEY 3 (NC) 8 GND
CN_BZR 4 4 SEG0LEDBPR
CN_nHOME_LED 5 (NC) 2 /F2G0
GND 6 (NC) 1 /F1D2
GND 7 (NC) 11 3.3V_EXT
GND 8 (NC) 6 SEG2D0
+5V9 (NC) 5 SEG1LEDCPR
GND 10 3 /F3G1
CN_PD 11 10 /KEYIN
+5V12 GHR-11V-S
BM11B-GHS-TBT
CN_PDSEL2 13
CN_PDSEL1 14
CN_PDSEL0 15
GND 16
CN_nOPELED_F0 17 (NC)
CN_OPELED_SEG0 18
CN_nOPELED_F2 19
PCU PWB CN_nOPELED_F1 20
+3.3V 21
CN_OPELED_SEG2 22
CN_OPELED_SEG1 23
CN_nOPELED_F3 24
+5V25 (NC)
CN_nKEYIN 26 CN2
B26B-PHDSS-B PHDR-26VS-1 1 GND
2 POW_LED
3 nPWRSW
4 WU_LED
5 nWU_KEY
6 ERROR_LED
GHR-07V-S 7 DATA_LED
CN6 BM07B-GHS-TBT
nPOF_SCN 1
+5VO_DUTY 2
nSPED 3
D-GND 4
+5VO 11 SMP-07V-NC/SMR-07V-N
D-GND 7 3 GND 3
nPOW_LED 8 4 POW_LED 4 Operation panel unit
nPWR_SW 5 1 nPWRSW 1
nWU_LED 9 5 WU_LED 5
nWU_KEY 6 2 nWU_KEY 2
nERR_LED 12 6 ERROR_LED 6
nINFO_FAX_L10 7 DATA_LED 7
B12B-PHDSS-B PHDR-12VS-2
CN-15
SCN CNT PWB CN-3 CN-2 CCD PWB
12 GND GND 1 50 GND
11 GND GND 2 49 GND
10 +24V GND 3 48 GND
9 +5VO GND 4 47 GND
8 +24V GND 5 46 GND
7 +5V_RSPF GND 6 45 GND
6 +12V GND 7 44 GND
5 +5V GND 8 43 GND
4 +3.3V GND 9 42 GND
3 +3.3V CN_TG_CS 10 41 GND
2 GND CN_AFE_SDO 11 40 SDO_C
1 GND AFE_SDIO 12 39 SDI_C
B12B-PHDSS AFE_SCLK 13 38 SCLK_C
AFE_CS 14 37 CS_C
CN_RES_CCDAD 15 36 RESET_C
GND 16 35 GND
A3.3V 17 34 +3.3V_IN
A3.3V 18 33 +3.3V_IN
A3.3V 19 32 +3.3V_IN
A3.3V 20 31 +3.3V_IN
A3.3V 21 30 +3.3V_IN
CN-14 A3.3V 22 29 +3.3V_IN
1 CN_SPPD1 GND 23 28 GND
C. Scanner, RSPF section
2 CN_SPPD2 A5V 24 27 +5V_IN

3 CN_SPFM_A A5V 25 26 +5V_IN
4 CN_SPFM_XA A5V 26 25 +5V_IN
5 CN_SPFM_B GND 27 24 GND
6 CN_SPFM_XB A10V 28 23 +10V_IN
7 CN_SPFMO1 A10V 29 22 +10V_IN
8 CN_SPM_A GND 30 21 GND
9 CN_SPM_XA CN_TA_N 31 20 TX0N
10 CN_SPM_B CN_TA_P 32 19 TX0P
11 CN_SPM_XB GND 33 18 GND
12 CN_SPMO1 CN_TB_N 34 17 TX1N
13 CN_SPRS CN_TB_P 35 16 TX1P
14 CN_STMPS GND 36 15 GND
15 CN_SRRC CN_TC_N 37 14 TX2N
16 CN_SRRS CN_TC_P 38 13 TX2P
17 CN_SPWS GND 39 12 GND
18 CN_SEL_A CN_TCLK_N 40 11 TXSYNCN
19 CN_SEL_B CN_TCLK_P 41 10 TXSYNCP
20 CN_SEL_C GND 42 9 GND
21 CN_SEL_OUT CN_TD_N 43 8 TX3N
22 CN_SPPD4 CN_TD_P 44 7 TX3P
23 CN_SPFMO2 GND 45 6 GND
24 CN_SPPD3 CN_TE_N 46 5 TX4N
25 (NC) CN_TE_P 47 4 TX4P
26 +5V CCD_SEL2 48 3 GND(CCD_SEL2)

27 CN_SPED CCD_SEL1 49 2 GND(CCD_SEL1)

28 CN_SOCD GND 50 1 GND
B28B-PHDSS FH48-50S-0.5SV FH48-50S-0.5SV
CN-10
MHPS 1 3 MHPS
GND 2 2 GND
+5V 3 1 +5V MHPS
B3B-PH-K-S PHR-3 EHR-3 VHPLG217L5A-1
CN-7
MIM_XA 1 1 MIM_XA
MIM_B 2 2 MIM_B
MIM_A 3 3 MIM_A MIM
MIM_XB 4 4 MIM_XB
B4B-PH-K-S PHR-4 PHR-4 B4B-PH-SM4-TB

CN-1 LED PWB-F
SM03B-GHS
LED DRV PWB 1 LED_anode
S6B-PH-K-S 2 (N.C.)
LED_anode 1 3 LED_cathode
GND 2 GHR-03V-S
CN-16 LED_cathode/ 3
(NC) 1 CN_AU_PNC LED_anode/ 4
(NC) 2 CN_AU_COPY GND 5
(NC) 3 CN_AU_CA CN-8 LED_cathode 6
(NC) 4 CN_AU_READY CN-1 LED PWB-R
+24VPD 1 1 24V_IN PHR-6 SM03B-GHS
(NC) 5 CN_AU_AUD +24VPD 2 2 24V_IN 1 LED_anode
AUDITOR (NC) 6 +5V CL_ON 3 3 LAMP_ON/OFF 2 (N.C.)
(NC) 7 GND GND 4 4 GND 3 LED_cathode
(OPTION) (NC) 8 +24V GND 5 5 GND
(NC) 9 CN_COL GHR-03V-S
(NC) 10 CN_AU_TC 5597-05CPB7F 5597-05APB
(NC) 11 +24V
12 CN_AU_nPNC-a
13 GND
B13B-PH-K-S
PHR-13 CN-17 179228-3 175489-3
+5V 1 1 5V
GND 2 2 /OCSW
/OCSW 3 3 GND
OCSW
+24V 4
CN_nSIZE_LED1 5
CN_nSIZE_LED2 6
B6B-PH-K-S PHR-6 +24V
CN_nSIZE_LED1
CN-2 CN_nSIZE_LED2 ORS LED PWB
(NC) 1 3.3V GND
(NC) 2 GND
(NC) 3 CPU_RXD
(NC) 4 CPU_TXD SRA-21T-4 F-GND
(NC) 5 RXD_MFPC
(NC) 6 TXD_MFPC
BM06B-GHS-TBT
Manual paper feed tray unit
PCU PWB
CN51 PALR-04VF/PAP-04V-S 292250-2
/MTOP1 2 1 /MTOP1 1 1 /MTOP1
DGND 3 2 DGND 2 2 DGND MTOP1
179228-2 292250-2
/MTOP2 1 3 /MTOP2 3 1 /MTOP2
DGND 4 4 DGND 4 2 DGND MTOP2
B4B-PH-K-S PHR-4 179228-2
CN37 PALR-06VF/PAP-06V-S AMP292130-3

/MPLD1 1 1 /MPLD1 1 1 /MPLD1
PAP-05V-E / PALR-05VF-E CN49 DGND 2 2 D-GND 2 2 DGND
INT24V 1 1 INT24V 1 1 INT24V MPLD1_5V 3 3 MPLD1_5V 3 3 MPLD_5V
MPLD1
/ADUMA 2 2 /ADUMA 2 2 /ADUMA 179228-3
/ADUMB 3 3 /ADUMB 3 3 /ADUMB
ADUM /ADUMXA 4 4 /ADUMXA 4 4 /ADUMXA S3B-PH-K-S
/ADUMXB 5 5 /ADUMXB 5 5 ADUMXB/ MPWD_3.3V 4 4 3.3V 4 1 3.3V
MPWD 5 5 MPWD 5 2 MPWD
DGND 6 6 D-GND 6 3 DGND MPWD
6 C1LUM_D# PHR-3
C1LUM_D 2 7 C1LUM_D#
PGND 1 8 DGND
C1LUM PHR-2 CZHR-06V-S/BU06P-TZ-S/CZHR-06V-S AMP292130-3
/MPED 7 1 /MPED 6 1 /MPED
SMR-02V-N / SMP-02V-NC DGND 8 2 DGND 5 2 DGND
1 24V 1 9 24V MPED_5V 9 3 MPED_5V 4 3 MPED_5V MPED
2 /C1PUC 2 10 /C1PUC 179228-3
C1PUC
/APPD1 10 4 /APPD1 3 (NC) Manual paper tray unit
DGND 11 5 D-GND 2 (NC)
SMR-02V-N / SMP-02V-NC APPD1_5V 12 6 APPD1_5V 1 (NC)
1 24VCL 1 11 24V
2 /RRC 2 12 /RRC SMP-02V-NC / SMR-02V-N
RRC PHR-12 B12B-PH-K-S 24V 13 1 24V 1
/MPFC 14 2 /MPFC 2
B14B-PHDSS PHDR-14VS-2
MPFC
D. Drive, Manual feed, DV, Tray 1 section, FAN
292132-7 CN52
PS unit DV unit
24V 1 9 INT24V
GND 2 8 PGND BU04P−TR−P−H(D)(LF)(SN) B4B-PH-K-S
NC 3 7 PGND CN50 3 DVSET 2 1
CLK 4 6 /MM_CLK 24V 6 2 24VCL 3 2
MM ON/OFF 5 5 /MMD TCS 5 1 TCS 4 3 TCS
CW/CCW 6 4 CW/CCW# DGND 4 4 DGND 1 4
LD 7 3 /MM_LD PHNR-04-H PHNR-04-H PHR-4
179228-7
AMP292130-3
/PPD1 3 1 /PPD1
2 TNM_D DGND 2 2 DGND
1 PGND PPD1_5V 1 3 PPD1_5V PPD1(PIN)
TNM PHR-9-R B9B-PH-K-R B6B-PH-K-S PHR-6 179228-3
CN48
1 PSFM_V Paper feed unit
2 PSFM_LD1
PSFM 3 D-GND
XAP-03V-1 B03B-XASK-1 CN53 AMP292130-3

C1PED 9 1 C1PED
DGND 8 2 D-GND
C1PED_5V 7 3 C1PED_5V C1PED
179228-3
AMP292130-3
C1LUD 6 1 C1LUD
GND 5 2 D-GND
CN33
C1LUD_5V 4 3 C1LUD_5V
C1LUD
AMP292130-3 179228-3
TM_COUNT 1 6 (TM_COUNT)
D-GND 2 5 DGND AMP292130-3
TM COUNT 5VLED 3 4 5VN /C1SS 3 1 /C1SS
179228-3 DGND 2 2 DGND
C1SS_5V 1 3 C1SS_5V C1SS
AMP292156-3 B9B-PH-K-S PHR-9 179228-3
1 OZFMOUT 3 3 OZFMOUT
2 OZFM_LD 2 2 OZFM_LD
OZFM 3 DGND 1 1 DGND
179228-3 179228-3 PHR-6 B6B-PH-K-S
Toner cartridge
CN35
3.3V 1 3 3.3V
CRM_DT 2 1 CRM_SDA
CRM_CLK 3 2 CRM_SCL CRUM
DGND 4 4 GND
B4B-PH-K-E PHR-4-BL TSHR-04V-K
S4B-PH-K-S CN32
+5V 1 1 5VN
HUD_RA 2 2 HUD_RA
HUD_RA/TH_RA GND 3 3 DGND
TH_RA 4 4 TH_RA
PHR-4 PHR-4 B4B-PH-K-S
PCU PWB
MX-TR17
Delivery unit CN1 PALR-06VF/PAP-06V-S AMP292130-3
POD3 11 1 POD3 1 1 POD3
AMP292130-3 CN43 DGND 10 2 DGND 2 2 DGND
SHPOS 1 A-14 SHPOS POD3_5V 9 3 POD3_5V 3 3 POD3_5V POD3
GND 2 A-13 DGND 179228-3
SHPOS 5VNPD 3 A-12 SHPOS_5V
179228-3 AMP292130-3
TFD3 8 4 TFD3 4 1 TFD3
AMP292130-3 DGND 7 5 DGND 5 2 DGND
POD1 1 A-11 POD1 TFD3_5V 6 6 TFD3_5V 6 3 TFD3_5V TFD3
GND 2 A-10 DGND 179228-3
POD1 5VLED 3 A-9 POD1_5V
179228-3 PALR-03VF/PAP-03V-S XARR-03VF/XAP-03V-1
24V 5 1 24V 1 1 24V 1
AMP292156-3 /POGS2a 4 2 /POGS2a 2 2 /POGS2a 2
1 FUFM_V 3 A-8 FUFM_V# /POGS2b 3 3 /POGS2b 3 3 /POGS2b 3 POGS2
2 GND 2 A-7 DGND
TFM 3 FUFM_LD1 1 A-6 FUFM_LD1
179228-3 179228-3 POUT2A_DET 2
A-5 (NC) DGND 1
XAP-03V-1/XARR-03VF A-4 (NC) B11B-CZHK-B-1
1 24V 1 A-3 24V CZHR-11V-S
2 /POGS1a 2 A-2 /POGS1a
POGS1 3 /POGS1b 3 A-1 /POGS1b
CZHR-14V-S
AMP292156-6
6 (NC) 1 B-14 (NC)
5 24V 2 B-13 OSM_INT24V
4 /B 3 B-12 /OSMXB
OSM 3 /A 4 B-11 /OSMXA
2 B 5 B-10 /OSMB
1 A 6 B-9 /OSMA
179228-6 179228-6
AMP292130-3
TFD1 1 B-8 TFD1
D-GND 2 B-7 DGND
TFD1 5VN 3 B-6 TFD1_5V
179228-3
PAP-05V-E / PALR-05VF-E
1 INT24V 1 B-5 POM_INT24V
2 POMA 2 B-4 /POMA
3 POMB 3 B-3 /POMB
POM 4 /POMA 4 B-2 /POMXA
5 /POMB 5 B-1 /POMXB
CZHR-14V-S B28B-CZWHK-V-B-1
E. Paper exit (1st, 2nd, Right), ILSW, Finisher, CV section
AMP292130-3 179228-3 CN3

POD2 1 10 POD2
DGND 2 9 DGND
POD2 POD2_5V 3 8 POD2_5V
7 TFD2
6 DGND CN22
AMP292130-3 5 TFD2_5V 24V 1 24V
TFD2 1 4 DSW_POC DGND 2 (NC)
DGND 2 3 DGND INT24V 3 INT24V Interlock switch
TFD2 TFD2_5V 3 2 POUT2B_DET B3P-VH VHR-3N
179228-3 1 DGND

CZHR-10V-S B10B-CZHK-B-1
292250-2
DSW_POC 1
CN38 SMP-02V-NC / SMR-02V-N
DSW-POC DGND 2 24VCL 1 1 24VCL 1
179228-2 /PSPS 2 2 /PSPS 2
B2B-XH-A-E XHP-2 PSPS
Job separator
MX-TR18 SMR-02V-N CN9
1 To PCU PWB 24V 1
2 CN11 DGND 2
Dsub15pin
/CV_COPY 3
JAC-15P-3/JAC-15S-3
/CV_COUNT 4
1 PGND 1
CN46 /CV_START 5
2 +24V 2
/CV_CA 6
3 /FIN_CRDY 3 1 TxD_FIN
/CV_CLCOPY 7
4 FIN_STS 4 2 RxD_FIN
/CV_COLOR1 8
5 /RES 5 3 /DTR_FIN
/CV_STAPLE 9
6 N.C 6 4 /DSR_FIN TO COIN VENDOR
/CV_COLOR0 10
7 N.C 7 5 RES_FIN
/CV_DUPLEX 11
8 N.C 8 (N.C) 6 /TRC_FIN
TO Finisher 5VN 12
9 N.C 9 7 RES_FINin
/CV_SIZE0 13
10 N.C 10 8 5VN
/CV_SIZE1 14
11 /FIN_SRDY 11 (N.C) 9 DGND
/CV_SIZE2 15
12 FIN_CMD 12 B9B-PH-K-S /CV_SIZE3 16
13 +5V 13
14 /FIN_DET 14 B16B-PNDZS
15 F-GND 15 PHR-9
F-GND
SRA-21T-3
PCU PWB
PS PWB CN44
(NC) 10 PSFM_V#
(NC) 9 PSFM_LD2 CN45 B11B-PH-K-S
CN14 (NC) 8 DGND INT24V 1 11 INT24V MHV 1 MHV
10 GND PS-187(Red)
DCCNT1 1 7 nRY_CNT DGND 2
DCCNT2 2 6 nOFF_CNT DVBS_PWM/ 3 9 DVBS PWM
FW 3 5 FW DVBS_REM/ 4 8 DVBS REM
HLOUT_1 4 4 HL_UM_out THV-_REM/ 5 7 THV- REM
HLOUT_2 5 3 HL_US_out THV_REM/ 6 6 THV REM GB GB
DGND 6 2 DGND DHV_REM/ 7 5 DHV REM
/HL_PR 7 1 HL_PR TCDA# 8 4 TCDA#
B7B-PH-K-S PHR-7 PHR-10 B10B-PH-K-S GBS_PWM/ 9 3 GB PWM
SMP-02V-NC MHV_REM/ 10 2 MHV REM THV 1 THV
PS-187(White) SPS-01T-187
1 24V2 24V 11 1 24V
2 P-GND TO Finisher B11B-PH-K-S 11CK-6H-P 11CK-6H-P
CN11 CN16
24V1 1 1 24V B2P-VH
24V2 2 DHV DHV
VHR-2N SPS-01T-187
24V2 3 (NC)
P-GND 4 2 DGND HV
P-GND 5 (NC)
P-GND 6 DVBS (To DV Drawer)
B6P-VH-B VHR-6N
3 12V
4 DGND
CN12
+12V 1
+12V 2
+5VN 3 5 5VN
+5VN 4
+3.3V 5 7 3.3V
+3.3V 6 8 3.3V
+3.3V 7
D-GND 8 9 DGND
D-GND 9 10 DGND
F. DC power supply section, High voltage section
D-GND 10 (NC)
D-GND 11
D-GND 12
D-GND 13
B13B-PASK-1 PAP-13V-S
CN13
5VL 1
5VL 2
5VO 3 6 +5VO
D-GND 4 (NC) VHR-10N B10P-VH-B
D-GND 5
D-GND 6
B06B-PASK-1 PAP-06V-S

MFPC PWB
CN47
1 DGND
2 +5VL
3 +5VL
4 DGND
VHR-4N B4P-VH
SCN CNT PWB

CN1
1 24V2
2 12V
3 D-GND
4 5VN
5 3.3V
6 D-GND
VHR-6N B6P-VH
PCU PWB WH PWB
Japan : Standard Japan : Standard
Other : Option Other : Option
CN54 PAP-03V-S PAP-02V-S CN3
WH_24V 1 CN5 Neutral_WH 1 ELR-02V / ELP-02V
(NC) 2 (NC) 1 WH_CNT (N.C) 2 (NC) 2 WH-N(SCAN) 2
/WH_CNT 3 2 24V Live_WH 3 1 WH-L(SCAN) 1 WH-SCN
B03B-PASK-1 B02B-PASK-1 B2P3-VH VHR-3N
Scanner unit
CN1 CN4
1 Live_WH Neutral_WH 1
(NC) 2 (N.C) (N.C) 2 (NC)
PS PWB 3 Neutral_WH Live_WH 3
VHR-3N-BK B2P3-VH-BK B2P3-VH VHR-3N ELP-02V/ELR-02VF
2 Live-WH 2
CN2 1 Neutral-WH 1 WH-CS1
1 Live-WH
(NC) 2 (N.C) 1st paper tray unit
3 Live-WH
VHR-3N-R
B2P3-VH-R
ELP-02V/ELR-02VF ELP-02V/ELR-02VF
CN4 WH 2 Live-WH 2 2 Live-WH 2
Neutral-WH 3 1 Neutral-WH 1 1 Neutral-WH 1 WH-CS2
(NC) 2 (NC)
Live-WH 1 2nd paper tray unit
B2P3-VH-B VHR-3N BK 172074-7 or PS-187-R
1 Live-WH
ELP-02V/ELR-02VF
1 Live-WH 2 Live-WH 2
172074-1 or PS-187 1 Neutral-WH 1
100V series AC cord Dehumidify heater SW

Japan : Standard / Other : Option
CN1
1 Live
2 (NC)
3 Neutral
VLP-03V B03P-VL
G. AC power supply section, Fusing section
SRA-51T-4
CN5
Live-PCI 1 (NC)
(NC) 2 (NC)
CN1 Neutral-PCI 3 (NC)
Live 1 Live B2P3-VH-BK
F-GND 2 (NC)
Neutral 3 Neutral
VLP-03V
B03P-VL
INLET
SRA-51T-4
CN10
LiveR-out 1
200V series AC cord (NC) 2 (NC)
LiveR-in 3
Reactle
B2P3-VH-B-E
Thermostat1 Fusing unit
CN2
200V series only
PS-250
SW OUT (NEUTRAL) 1 4 Neutral-out D1.25-M3(Ni) D1.25-M3(Ni)
PS-250
SW OUT (LIVE) 1 2 Live-out
Thermostat2
SW IN (LIVE) 1 1 Live-in CN6 VLR-02V/VLP-02V D1.25-M3(Ni) D1.25-M3(Ni)

PS-250-R(RED) HEATER(L) 1 1 LIVE1 1
SW IN (NEUTRAL) 1 3 Neutral-in HEATER(L) 2 2 HL-OUTPUT1 2
PS-250-R(RED) VLP-04V B04P-VL B02P-VL VLP-02V
AC SW CN7 VLR-03V/VLP-03V
Heater lamp1
Neutral HL out1 1 1 LIVE2 1
(NC) 2 (NC) (NC) 2 N.C 2 (NC)
Neutral HL out2 3 3 HL-OUTPUT2 3 Heater lamp2
B2P3-VH-RD VHR-3N-R
PCU PWB CN36 03CK-6H-PC /BU03P-TR-P-H/PHNR-3-H AMP292130-3

POSD 7 3 POSD 1 1 POSD
DGND 6 2 DGND 2 2 D-GND
POSD_5V 5 1 POSD_5V 3 3 5VNPD POSD
04CK-6H-PC /BU04P-TR-P-H/PHNR-4-H
TH_UM 4 4 TH_UM 1
DGND 3 3 DGND 2 Thermistor main
TH_US 2 2 TH_US 3
DGND 1 1 DGND 4
B7B-PH-K-S 07CK-6H-PC
Thermistor sub
H. Tray 2, Tray 3, Tray 4 section
2nd paper tray unit

(MX-M266FP/MX-M316FP/MX-M316G/MX-M266N/MX-M316N/MX-M315N/MX-M315U : Standard)
PCU PWB (MX-M265N/MX-M265U : Option(MX-CS12))
Option Cassete I/F PWB

B28B-PUDSS-1(CN14) PUDP-28V-S B28B-PUDSS-1(CN5) B24B-PUDSS-1(CN9)
P-GND 1 1 P-GND P-GND 1
24V 2 2 24V 24V 2
5VN 3 3 5V 5V 3
24V 4 4 24V 24V 4
NC 5 5 NC LUM4 5
(C2LUM) 6 6 LUM2 NC 6
(PTRC2) 7 7 TRCL2 (Y2) 7
(C2PUC) 8 8 PCL2 PCL4 8
NC 9 9 NC (Y3) 9
(C4LUM) 10 10 LUM4 LUM3 10
(C4PUC) 11 11 PCL4 TRCL3 11
(Y2) 12 12 (Y2) CSSELA# 12
(C3LUM) 13 13 LUM3 NC 13
(Y3) 14 14 (Y3) CSSELB# 14
(CASSELA) 15 15 CSSELA# PCL3 15
(PTRC1) 16 16 TRCL3 CSSELC# 16
(CASSELB) 17 17 CSSELB# BI# 17
NC 18 18 NC AI# 18
(CASSELC) 19 19 CSSELC# /BI# 19
(C3PUC) 20 20 PCL3 /AI# 20
(CPFMA) 21 21 AI# OPCASSEL 21
(CPFMB) 22 22 BI# D-GND 22
(CPFMXA) 23 23 /AI# D-GND 23
(CPFMXB) 24 24 /BI# D-GND 24
(Y1) 25 25 (Y1)
OPCASSEL 26 26 OPCASSEL
D-GND 27 27 D-GND
D-GND 28 28 D-GND
PUDP-28V-S
B3B-PH-K-S(CN3)
/PCL2 1
Tray 2 paper feed
NC 2
24V 3 clutch
B3B-PH-K-K(BK)(CN2)
/TRCL2 1
Tray 2 vertical
NC 2
24V 3 transport clutch
5V DF11-4DS-2C
1 5V Tray 2
2 PPD2 transport
B8B-PH-K-S(CN8) PHR-8 3 D-GND detector
D-GND 1 179228-3
PPD2 2 1 5V Tray 2 paper
5V 3 2 PAP2 empty
PAP2 4 3 D-GND detector
DRS2 5 179228-3
LUD2 6 179228-2
NC 7 1 DRS2 Tray 2 door
NC 8 2 D-GND detection SW
1 5V
Tray 2 upper
2 LUD2
limit detector
3 D-GND
179228-3
D-GND DF11-6DS-2C
B3B-PH-K-E(BL)(CN7)
CSS2 1
NC 2 1 CSS2 Tray 2 presence
D-GND 3 2 D-GND detection SW
PHR-3-BL 179228-2
B3B-PH-K-R(RD)(CN1)
LUM2D 1
NC 2 2 LUM2D
Tray 2 lift motor
P-GND 3 1 P-GND
03CK-6H-P 02CK-6H-P

MFPC PWB
CZHR-06V-S
1 Shield4
2 DGND4
3 D4+
4 D4- OPTION
[USB Hub] 5 VBUS4
CN43 (NC) 6 (NC)
SHIELD4 15
DGND4 14
D4+ 13
D4- 12
VBUS4 11
SHIELD3 10 (NC)
DGND3 9 (NC)
D3+ 8 (NC)
D3- 7 (NC)
USB Connector PWB
VBUS3 6 (NC) USB-A
SHIELD1 5 1 Shield1 Shield1 -
DGND1 4 2 DGND1 DGND1 4
D1+ 3 3 D1+ D1+ 3
D1- 2 4 D1- D1- 2
USB
VBUS1 1 5 VBUS1 VBUS1 1
BM15B-GHS-TBT(LF)(SN) GHR-15V-S PAP-05V-S B05B-PASK-1
I. USB, FAX, PCI, HDD section
F-GND F-GND
SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4
PCU PWB
CN41 CN47
INT5V 1 8 INT5V
D-GND 2 7 DGND
D-GND 3 6 DGND
24V_FAX 4 5 24V
5V0_FAX 5 4 5VO
3R3V_FAX 6 3 3.3V
3R3V_FAX 7 2 3.3V
3R3V_FAX 8 1 3.3V
B8B-PH-K-S-B PHR-8 PHR-8 B8B-PH-K-S
HDD
CN29 CN22 SATA SIGNAL&POWER
1 GND DGND 1 1 GND

2 GND SATA_TXP 2 2 SATA_TXP
3 +3.3V_F SATA_TXN 3 3 SATA_TXN
4 +3.3V_F DGND 4 4 GND
5 nCNCT_FAX SATA_RXN 5 5 SATA_RXN
6 FAXD_TXD_N SATA_RXP 6 6 SATA_RXP
7 FAXD_TXD_P DGND 7 7 GND
8 +5V_(off) 6SAT07P-328B-B5 (NC) 1 3.3V
9 nRES_FAX (NC) 2 3.3V
10 FAXCS_TXD_P CN50 (NC) 3 3.3V
To 2nd FAX 11 FAXCS_TXD_N DGND 1 4 DGND
12 GND 5 DGND
13 FAXD_RXD_N 6 DGND
(Option) 14 FAXD_RXD_P +5VHD 2 7 +5VHD
15 GND 8 +5VHD
16 FAXCS_RXD_P 9 +5VHD
17 FAXCS_RXD_N DGND 3 10 DGND
18 +5V_(off) PAP-03V-S 11 DGND
B03B-PASK
19 GND 12 DGND
20 nFAXD_RTS (NC) 13 +12V
21 GND (NC) 14 +12V
22 nFAXD_CTS (NC) 15 +12V
23 FLVPP
24 nFAXCS_RTS
25 +5V_A
26 nFAXCS_CTS
27 +3.3V_F
28 +24V
(HD14 only)
29 +3.3V_F
30 GND
31 PGND
B31B-CSRK(L)(SN)
RSPF DRIVER PWB
CN G PHR-6R PHR-6 SPUM
SPUMA/ 1 6 SPUMA/
+24VPD_SPUM 2 5 +24VPD _SPUM
SPUMA 3 4 SPUMA
SPUMB 4 3 SPUMB
+24VPD_SPUM 5 2 +24VPD _SPUM
SPUMB/ 6 1 SPUMB/
SCN-CNT PWB B6B-PH-K-R
CN15 PHR-12 PHDR-34VS-1 CN A CN F PHR-6 PHR-6R SPF㹋

GND 1 34 GND2 SPFMA/ 1 6 SPFMA/
GND 2 33 GND2 +24VPD_SPFM 2 5 +24VPD_SPFM
3.3V 3 (NC) 8 +3.3V SPFMA 3 4 SPFMA
3.3V 4 7 +5V SPFMB 4 3 SPFMB
5V 5 6 +24VPD +24VPD_SPFM 5 2 +24VPD_SPFM
12V 6 (NC) 5 +24VPD SPFMB/ 6 1 SPFMB/
5VB 7 2 GND2 B6B-PH-K-S
24VPD 8 1 GND2
5VO 9 3 SPPD1
24VPD 10 4 SPPD2 179228-3
GND 11 9 SPFMA CN B PHR-12 SPED
GND 12 10 SPFMA/ SPED 1 1 SPED
B12B-PHD-SS 11 SPFMB GND2 2 2 GND2
J. RSPF (56opm) section
12 SPFMB/ +5V SPED 3 3 +5V SPED

13 SPFMO1 +5VPD 4
14 SPRMA SPPD1 5
15 SPRMA/ GND2 6 179228-3(BLACK)
16 SPRMB +5VPD 7 SPPD1
17 SPRMB/ SPPD5 8 1 +5VPD
18 SPRMO1 GND2 9 2 SPPD1
19 SPRS +24VPD SCOV 10 3 GND2
CN14 PHDR-28VS-1 20 STMPS GND2 11
SPPD1 1 21 SRRC +24V SCOV SW 12
SPPD2 2 22 SPFC B12B-PH-K-S 179228-3(BLACK)
SPFMA 3 23 SPWS SPPD2
SPFMA/ 4 24 SELA 1 +5VPD
SPFMB 5 25 SELB 2 SPPD5
SPFMB/ 6 26 SELC 3 GND2
SPFMO1 7 27 SSELO
SPMA 8 28 -
SPMA/ 9 29 -
SPMB 10 30 SPPD3 PS-187/SPS-01T-187
SPMB/ 11 31 SPPD4 SCOV
SPMO1 12 32 +5VPD 2 +24VPD SCOV
SPRS 13 B34-PHDSS-B 1 SCOV SW
STMPS 14 SRA-21T-4
SRRC 15 SRA-21T-4
SPFC 16
SPWS 17
SELA_ 18
SELB_ 19
SELC_ 20 CN E PHR-5
SSELO 21 (+24VPD SPFC) 1 SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4
SPPD4 22 (SPFC/) 2
SPFMO2 23 (NC) +24VPD SPRS 3
SPPD3 24 SPRS/ 4
SPPD5 25 (NC) CN I N.C. 5
+5VPD 26 4 SPED/ B5B-PH-K-S SMP-02V-NC / SMR-02V-N
SPED 27 3 N.C(SOCD/) 1 +24VPD SPRS 1
SOCD 28 2 +5VO 2 SPRS/ 2 SPRS
B28-PHDSS-B 1 +5VB
PHR-4 B4B-PH-K-S
CN C PHR-8 SMP-02V-BC / SMR-02V-B

+24VPD SRRC 1 1 +24VPD SRRC 1
SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-3 SRRC/ 2 2 SRRC/ 2 SRRC
+5VPD 3
SPPD3 4
GND2 5
SOCD 6 179228-3(BLACK)
GND2 7 SMP-06V-NC / SMR-06V-N SPPD3
+5V SOCD 8 1 +5VPD 1 1 +5VPD
B8B-PH-K-S 2 SPPD3 2 2 SPPD3
3 GND2 3 3 GND2
4 SOCD 4
5 GND2 5
6 +5V SOCD 6 179228-3
SOCD
1 SOCD
2 GND2
SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4 3 +5V SOCD

CN D PHDR-10VS-2
(+5VPD) 1
+5VPD 2 SRA-21T-4
N.C. 3
SPPD4 4
(GND2) 5 SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4
GND2 6 179228-3(BLACK)
GND2 7 SPPD4
STMPU 8 1 +5VPD
STMPS/ 9 2 SPPD4
+24VPD STMPS 10 3 GND2
B10B-PHDSS-B
179228-4 179228-4
1 GND2 4 SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4 (OPTION)
2 STMPU 3
3 STMPS/ 2
4 +24VPD STMPS 1 STMPS
292254-4
179228-3
CN H PHR-10 SPLS1
+5V_SPLS1 1 3 +5VPD SPLS1
SPLS1 2 1 SPLS1
GND2 3 2 GND2
GND2 4
SPLS2 5
+5V_SPLS2 6 179228-3
AVCC 7 SPLS2
SPWS 8 2 GND2
GND2 9 1 SPLS2
N.C. 10 3 +5VPD SPLS2
B10B-PH-K-S
SMP-03V-NC / SMR-03V-N SPWS

1 AVCC 1 BL AVCC
2 SPWS 2 BR SPWS
3 GND2 3 GY GND2
CN15
B12B-PHDSS
GND 12
GND 11
24V 10 RSPF DRIVER PWB
5VO 9
24V 8
5VB 7
12V 6 (NC)
5V 5 CN-A
3.3V 4 B34B-PHDSS
3.3V 3 (NC) 1 GND CN-F
GND 2 2 GND B6B-PH-K-S SPFM
GND 1 3 SPPD1 /SPFMAout 1 6 SPFMA/
4 SPPD2 24VPD_SPFM 2 5 +24VPD_SPFM
CN14 5 24VPD SPFMAout 3 4 SPFMA
B28B-PHDSS 6 24VPD SPFMBout 4 3 SPFMB
SPPD1 1 7 5V 24VPD_SPFM 5 2 +24VPD_SPFM
SPPD2 2 8 3.3V /SPFMBout 6 1 SPFMB/
SPFMA 3 9 SPFMA
SPFMA/ 4 10 SPFMA/
SPFMB 5 11 SPFMB
SPFMB/ 6 12 SPFMB/ CN-B 179228-3
SPFMO1 7 13 SPFMO1 B12B-PH-K-S SPED
SPMA 8 (NC) (NC) 14 SPUMA SPED 1 1 SPED
SPMA/ 9 (NC) (NC) 15 SPUMA/ GND 2 2 GND2
SPMB 10 (NC) (NC) 16 SPUMB 5VB SPED 3 3 +5V SPED
SPMB/ 11 (NC) (NC) 17 SPUMB/ 5VPD 4
SPMO1 12 (NC) (NC) 18 SPUMO1 SPPD1 5
SPRS 13 19 SPRS GND 6 6-179228-3(BLACK)
K. RSPF (31opm) section
STMPS 14 20 STMPS 5VPD 7 SPPD1

SRRC 15 21 SRRC SPPD2 8 1 +5VPD
SRRS 16 22 SPFC GND 9 2 SPPD1
SPWS 17 23 SPWS 24VPD 10 3 GND2
SELA_ 18 24 SELA GND 11 (NC)
SELB_ 19 25 SELB DSW_24VPD 12
SELC_ 20 26 SELC 6-179228-3(BLACK)
SSELO 21 27 SELOUT SPPD2
SPPD4 22 (NC) 28 - 1 +5VPD
SPFMO2 23 (NC) (NC) 29 - 2 SPPD2
SPPD3 24 30 SPPD3 3 GND2
(NC) 25 (NC) 31 SPPD4
5VPD 26 32 5VPD
SPED 27 33 GND
SOCD 28 34 GND
PS-187/SPS-01T-187
(NC)
SCOV
2 +24VPD SCOV
1 SCOV SW
SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4
SCAN CONTROL PWB
CN-I
B4B-PH-K-S
1 5VB SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4
2 5VO
(NC) 3 SOCD
4 SPED
SMP-02V-BC / SMR-02V-B
CN-E 1 +24VPD SPUC 1
B5B-PH-K-S 2 SPUC/ 2 SPUC
SRA-21T-3 SAA-21T-3.5L 24VPD 1
/SPFC 2
24VPD 3
/SPRS 4
(NC) 5 (NC)
SMP-02V-NC / SMR-02V-N
1 +24VPD SPRS 1
2 SPRS/ 2 SPRS
CN-C
B8B-PH-K-S SMP-02V-BC / SMR-02V-B
24VPD 1 1 +24VPD SRRC 1
/SRRC 2 2 SRRC/ 2 SRRS
5VPD 3
SPPD3 4
GND 5
SOCD 6 6-179228-3(BLACK)
GND 7 SMP-06V-NC / SMR-06V-N SPPD3
5V SOCD 8 1 +5VPD 1 1 +5VPD
2 SPPD3 2 2 SPPD3
3 GND2 3 3 GND2
4 SOCD 4
5 GND2 5
6 +5V SOCD 6 179228-3
SOCD

1 SOCD
2 GND2
SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4 3 +5V SOCD
CN-D
B10B-PHDSS-B
5VPD 1 (NC)
5VPD 2
(NC) 3 (NC)
SPPD4 4
GND 5 (NC) SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4
GND 6 6-179228-3(BLACK)
GND 7 (NC) SPPD4
STMPU 8 (NC) 1 +5VPD
/STMPS 9 (NC) 2 SPPD4
24VPD STMPS 10 (NC) 3 GND2
CN-H 179228-3
B10B-PH-K-S SPLS1
5V_SPLS1 1 3 +5VPD SPLS1
SPLS1 2 1 SPLS1
GND 3 2 GND2
GND 4
SPLS2 5
5V_SPLS2 6 179228-3
AVCC(3.3V) 7 SPLS2
SPWS 8 2 GND2
GND 9 1 SPLS2
(NC) 10 (NC) 3 +5VPD SPLS2
SMP-03V-NC / SMR-03V-N SPWS

1 AVCC 1 BL AVCC
2 SPWS 2 BR SPWS
3 GND2 3 GY GND2
MX-M316N
[13] OTHERS Service Manual
1. VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING

A. HDD/SD card memory map
(1) HDD partition
Option HDD installed
HDD size = 160GB (Actual size 149GB)
offset
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 [GB]
(GB)
Outer
tracks 0 [I-1] 14GB
10
20 [I-2] 72GB
30
40
50
60
70
80 [I-3] 1GB [I-4] 1GB [L-1] 1GB

Not used
90 [S-1] 2.5GB [S-2] [S-3] 2GB Not used [S-4] 2GB Not used
0.5GB
100 [S-5] 16GB
110 [S-6] 4GB [S-7] 2GB Not used
120 [S-8] 16GB Not used
130 [S-9] 6GB
Inner 140 [S-10] 8GB [L-2] 1GB

tracks
[GB]
(2) HDD data contents

No. File system Stored data NOTE

I-1 Image data Image data (ERDH/Temporary storage) 1000 documents, 3000 images
I-2 Image data Image data (Document filing) 3000 documents, 20000 images
I-3 Image data Not available Not used
I-4 Image data FAX/Internet Fax receive images
L-1 Not available System storage data (Address book, image send system registration data (sender's
information, meta data, etc.), FSS collection data)
S-1 Universal Download font
User macro
Database system file
System log
System setting data (Backup)
S-2 Universal Document filing (Database)
Job log (Database)
Job completion list
S-3 Universal Not available Not used
S-5 Universal Spool area for printer
S-6 Universal Application work area (User file used in USB direct print)
S-9 Universal Data backup when installing DSK (User data (Address book, account information))
S-10 Universal e-manual
Watermark
L-2 Universal Not available Not used
MX-M316N OTHERS 13 – 1
(3) SD card partition
SD card size = 4GB (Actual size 3.6GB)
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 [MB]
0 [L-101] 500MB [S-101] 500MB
1 [S-102] 500MB [S-105] [S-103] 924MB

100MB
[I-101] 1GB
2
[GB]
Option HDD uninstalled

SD card size = 8GB (Actual size 7.2GB)
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 [MB]
0 [L-101] 500MB [S-101] 200MB [S-102] 200MB [S-105]

100MB
1 [S-103] 924MB
[S-104]
2 [I-101] 500MB [I-102] 500MB
200MB
3
5 [I-103] 4GB
[GB]
(4) SD card data contents


L-101 Not available ICU firmware (Boot/Main)
Boot animation
Boot (CN Update mode)
ARM9 firmware
lang.sfu (language data)
graph.sfu (Animation data)
S-101 Universal font
web help
spdl
Option FontROM
S-102 Universal Same as above (Mirror)
S-105 Universal Setting value data file (System setting/SIM setting data (Image quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW)
S-103 Universal Key operator setting storage data
IMS job management data
FAX reception data (For power shut off and paper empty)
FEP leaning data (Japanese/Chinese)
Firmware update data (differential between new and old)
Account management information
I-101 Image data FAX/Internet Fax receive images (for backup) (HDD 1-4 area data backup)

L-101 Not available ICU firmware (Boot/Main)
Boot animation
Boot (CN Update mode)
ARM9 firmware
lang.sfu (language data)
graph.sfu (Animation data)
S-101 Universal font
web help
spdl
Option FontROM
S-102 Universal S-101 area data backup (mirror)
S-105 Universal Setting value data file (System setting/SIM setting data (Image quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW)
S-103 Universal Key operator setting storage data
IMS job management data
FAX reception data (For power shut off and paper empty)
FEP leaning data (Japanese/Chinese)
Firmware update data (differential between new and old) (For FSS)
Account management information/User authentication data
System log
S-104 Universal S-105 area data backup (mirror)
I-101 Image data FAX/Internet Fax receive images
I-102 Image data FAX/Internet Fax receive images (Backup) Not used when an option
I-103 Image data ERDH work HDD is installed.
2. Necessary steps when replacing the PWB, HDD and the SD Card
A. MFP substrate replacement procedure (work flow)
CAUTION: Registered user information will not be recovered if the MFP PWB is affected by U2-05 trouble. (*1)
1) Attach the flash ROM, the memory, the EEPROM, the SD card etc. of the MFP PWB on the service parts MFP PWB and install it to the main unit.
CAUTION: Ground your body with grounding band during the work.
2) When U2 trouble occurs, use SIM16 to cancel it.
3) Set as follows after restarting the main unit.
At this timing, F6-21 may occur. Whether it may occur or not, go to execute procedure 1.
(1) Set the appropriate country code by Sim66-02 (clear the software switches related to FAX).
CAUTION: Make sure to execute even if the fax option is not installed on the machine.
B. Procedures necessary for HDD replacement

Note for HDD replacement
• Data of the following list are saved in the HDD of the complex machine. If the HDD operates normally and data backup is possible before replace-
ment, perform data backup and then replace the HDD.
• If the HDD does not operate normally, data cannot be backed up.
• The HDD replacement procedures with a broken HDD differs from that with a normal HDD.
Contents of this chapter
• HDD storage data and backup
• Replacement procedures when HDD storage data can be backed up
• Replacement procedures when HDD storage data cannot be backed up due to breakdown of HDD
• Reinstall and update procedures of Operation Manual data saved in HDD
• Reinstall and update procedures of watermark data.
(1) HDD storage data and backup
Some HDD storage data can be backed up, and some other data cannot. Some HDD storage data can be reinstalled, and some other storage data
cannot.
If the HDD operates normally before replacement and data can be backed up, back up the data before replacement of the HDD referring to the HDD
storage data list. Then reinstall the data after replacement of the HDD.
a. HDD storage data list
Before installation After installation Enable/ Enable/

Data reinstall Reinstall
No. Data kind (When shipping (After use by Disable of Backup means Disable of
procedures operator
from the factory) users) data backup data reinstall
1 e-Manual Available Available Disable *1 Enable Sim49-3 Service
2 Address book Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
Device cloning / Device cloning /
Storage backup Storage backup
3 Image send series Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
registration data (Sender’s Device cloning / Device cloning /
information, meta data, etc.) Storage backup Storage backup
4 User authentication Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 Enable Sim56-2 Service
Account management
5 Japanese FEP dictionary Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
(Learning)
6 Chinese FEP dictionary Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
(Learning)
7 JOB LOG Not available Available Enable Perform with Disable —
WEB PAGE.
8 JOB completion list Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
9 New N/A (FSS) information Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
10 User font (Added) Not available Available Disable Not available Enable Perform with Service
WEB PAGE. or User
11 User macro Not available Available Disable Not available Enable Perform with
WEB PAGE.
12 Document filing Not available Available Enable Perform with Enable Perform with
WEB PAGE. WEB PAGE.
13 Some of system setting Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
data Device cloning / Device cloning /
Storage backup Storage backup
14 Watermark Available Available Disable *2 Enable Sim49-5 Service
15 FAX reception data Not available Available Enable Sim66-62 Disable — —
*1: The e-Manual cannot be backed up, but can be reinstalled by using Sim49-3 and USB memory.
*2: Watermark data cannot be backed up, but can be reinstalled by using Sim49-5 and USB memory.
(2) Replacement procedures when HDD data can be (3) Replacement procedures when the HDD storage data
backed up cannot be backed up due to breakdown
a. Work contents and procedures a. Display when HDD breakdown
When a trouble occurs in the HDD, the error code display of E7-03 is
When a new HDD
popped up.
(blank HDD, service part) is When a used HDD
Procedures used, or when a HDD which (used in the same In this case, the main power must be turned OFF and the HDD must
is normal but a program model) is used * be replaced.
error occurs in it is used.
b. Work contents and procedures
Step 1 Back up the HDD storage data before replacement.
(Servicing) When a new HDD
Use SIM56-2 or the device cloning, or the storage backup (blank HDD, service part) is When a used HDD
function to backup the data. (Back up the data to the USB Procedures used, or when a HDD which (used in the same
memory.) is normal but a program model) is used *
(Backup enable data: HDD storage data list No. 2, 3, 4 error occurs in it is used.
(Address book, Image send series registration data, User
Step 1 Install a HDD to the machine, Install a HDD to the
authentication data))
and boot the complex machine. machine, and boot the
Step 2 Back up the HDD storage data before replacement. (User  Formatting is automatically complex machine.
or servicing) performed.
Back up the data to PC with Web page.
Step 2 The trouble code, U2-05,
(Backup enable data: HDD storage data list No. 7, 10, 14
is displayed. -> Cancel
(Document filing data, JOB LOG data))
with SIM16.
Step 3 When there are some FAX or Internet Fax data, use
Step 3 Since a blank HDD is Use Sim62-1 to format
SIM66-62 to backup the image data from the SD card to
automatically formatted, there the HDD.
the USB memory. (The backup image data are of PDF file
is no need to perform
type, and cannot be restored to the machine. The backup
formatting procedure with SIM.
data are given to the user.)
Step 4 When there are some FAX or Internet Fax data, use
Step 4 Replace the HDD.
SIM66-62 to backup the image data from the SD card to
Step 5 Boot the complex machine. Boot the complex the USB memory. (The backup image data are of PDF file
 Formatting is automatically machine. type, and cannot be restored to the machine. The backup
performed. data are given to the user.)
Step 6 The trouble code, U2-05, Step 5 Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The
is displayed. -> Cancel memory is cleared in order to keep compliance between
with SIM16. the HDD data and the image related memory and to
Step 7 Since a blank HDD is Use SIM62-1 to format prevent malfunctions. (The memory must be cleared not
automatically formatted, there the HDD. only in the FAX model but in the scanner and the Internet
is no need to perform Fax models.)
formatting procedure with SIM. Step 6 Use SIM49-3 to install the manual data to the HDD.
Step 8 Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The Step 7 The trouble code, U2-60, is displayed. -> Use SIM49-5 to
memory is cleared in order to keep compliance between install the watermark data to the HDD. -> After booting the
the HDD data and the image related memory and to machine, use SIM16 to cancel the "U2-60" trouble.
prevent malfunctions. (The memory must be cleared not
only in the FAX model but in the scanner and the Internet With the above procedures, the HDD is reset to the state of factory
Fax models.) shipping.
Step 9 Use SIM49-3 to install the manual data to the HDD.
Step 10 The trouble code, U2-60, is displayed. -> Use SIM49-5 to
install the watermark data to the HDD. -> After booting the
machine, use SIM16 to cancel the "U2-60" trouble.
Step 11 Import the data backed up in Step 1.
Use SIM56-2, or the device cloning, or the storage backup
to import.
(Import enable data: HDD storage data list No. 2, 3, 4
(Address book, Image send series registration data, User
authentication data))
Step 12 Import the data backed up with the Web page function in
Step 2.
Import enable data: Document filing data, User font, Use
macro
(The JOB LOG data can be backed up but cannot be
imported.)
(4) Reinstall and update procedures of the HDD storage (5) Watermark data reinstall and update procedures
Operation Manual data 1) Obtain the watermark data.
1) Obtain the Operation Manual data. Download the watermark data from the utility menu on the web
Download the Operation Manual data from the utility menu on the site (Tech-DS home page).
web site (Tech-DS home page). Copy the downloaded files to the USB device without changing
Copy the downloaded files to the USB device without changing the file hierarchy.
the file hierarchy. NOTE: When data are uploaded from the USB memory to the
To upload to the complex machine, files of "**_pdf_fax.idx" and HDD, if there are some data in the HDD, the files in the
"**_pdf.idx" and "version.txt" as well as the Operation Manual data memory are compared with the files in the HDD and only
(**.pdf) are required. When the downloaded files are copied with- the files which satisfy the following conditions are written
out changing the file hierarchy, these files also are copied. into the HDD.
NOTE: When data are uploaded from the USB memory to the • The file size is different.
HDD, if there are some data in the HDD, the files in the • The time stamp is different.
memory are compared with the files in the HDD and only • The file exists only in the USB memory.
the files which satisfy the following conditions are written
into the HDD.
• The file size is different.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
• The time stamp is different. 7(67 &/26(
:$7(50$5.83'$7(>XVEEG@
• The file exists only in the USB memory. ',5!)2/'(5 ),/(
),/( ',5!)2/'(5
CAUTION: The data backed up with SIM56-2 must not be installed to ',5!:0
another machine. If installed, the adjustment data will be

overwritten and a trouble may be generated.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21
7(67 12 &/26(
(0$18$/83'$7(>XVEEG@
',5!)2/'(5 ),/(
),/( ',5!)2/'(5
',5!0$18$/
3) Insert the USB memory into the machine.

• When the USB memory is not inserted, "INSERT A STORAN-
GEE-MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK] button is
pressed, the screen shifts to the folder select menu 1.
4) Select the folder of the watermark data. (The screen shifts to the
watermark data install menu.)
5) Press [EXECUTE] button.
3) Insert the USB memory into the machine.
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttons are
• When the USB memory is not inserted, "INSERT A STORAN- changed from gray-out to active display.
GEE-MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK] button is
6) When [YES] button is pressed, the selected watermark data are
pressed, the screen shifts to the folder select menu 1.
installed.
4) Select the folder of the Operation Manual data. (The screen shifts
When install is completed, "COMPLETE" is displayed. In case of
to the Operation Manual data install menu.)
an abnormality, "ERROR" is displayed.
5) Press [EXECUTE] button.
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttons are
changed from gray-out to active display.
6) When [YES] button is pressed, the selected Operation Manual is
installed.
When install is completed, "COMPLETE" is displayed. In case of
an abnormality, "ERROR" is displayed.
C. Procedures necessary for SD card replacement
(1) SD card data and backup
Some SD card storage data can be backed up, and some data cannot. Some SD card storage data can be reinstalled, and some data cannot.
If the SD card operates normally before replacement and data can be backed up, back up the data before replacement of the SD card referring to the
storage data list. Then reinstall the data after replacement of the SD card.
The SD card includes the following data.
SD card backup
Partition Enable/Disable Enable/Disable Data reinstall

Stored data Backup means
number of data backup of data reinstall procedures
L-101 ICU firmware data ICU firmware (Boot/Main) Disable Enable SIM49-1
lang.sfu (BOOT cannot be
graph.sfu installed again.)
Boot animation
Boot (CN)
ARM9 firmware
S-101 ICU firmware fixed data font Disable Enable SIM49-1
(Pre-install) web help Disable Enable SIM49-1
spdl Disable Enable SIM49-1
Option FontROM Disable Enble SIM49-1
S-102 ICU firmware fixed data Same as above Disable Enable SIM49-1
(Mirror)
S-105 System data Setting value data file (System Disable SIM56-2 Enable SIM56-2
setting/SIM setting data (Image
quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW)
S-103 User data System setting data Enable sim56-02 Enable SIM56-2
Key operator custom setting data Enable System setting - Enable System setting -
(Data changed from the default) data backup - data backup -
device cloning device cloning
FEP learning data (Japanese/ Disable Disable
Chinese)
Firmware update data (differential Disable Disable
between new and old) (For FSS)
Account management information/ Enable sim56-02 Enable SIM56-2
User authentication data
Home screen customize data Enable System setting - Enable System setting -
data backup - data backup -
I-101 FAX reception data FAX/Internet Fax reception image Enable SIM66-62 Disable
data
1) Use SIM56-02 to backup the SD card data to the USB memory. 8) Restore the data backed up in procedure 2) by using the device
2) When the operation panel home screen has been customized, cloning function.
backup the SD card data by using the device cloning function. CAUTION: When replacing the SD card, be sure to use only the speci-
3) When there are some FAX/Internet Fax data received, use fied SD card supplied as a service part.
SIM66-62 to backup the image data to the USB memory in the The firmware required for booting must be included in
PDF file type, and give the PDF file to the user. (The data cannot the SD card used in this machine. The commercially
be restored to the machine.) available SD cards have no such data.
4) Replace the SD card with a new one.
NOTE: MEMO: When U2-40 error occurs, if the error cannot be can-
5) Upgrade the firmware to the latest version. celed by SIM16, or when E7-07 error occurs, there may be
6) Use SIM66-10 to clear the image send memory. (This is in order some trouble in the SD card.
to obtain consistency between the HDD data and the image CAUTION: The data backed up with SIM56-2 must not be installed to
related memory.)
another machine. If installed, the adjustment data will be
7) Use SIM56-02 to restore the data backed up in procedure 1). overwritten and a trouble may be generated.
SD card backup
Partition Enable/Disable of Enable/Disable Data reinstall

Stored data Backup means
number data backup of data reinstall procedures
L-101 ICU firmware data ICU firmware (Boot/Main) Disable Enable SIM49-1
lang.sfu (BOOT cannot be
graph.sfu installed again.)
Boot animation
Boot (CN)
ARM9 firmware
S-101 ICU firmware fixed data font Disable Enable SIM49-1
(Pre-install) web help Disable Enable SIM49-1
spdl Disable Enable SIM49-1
Option FontROM Disable Enable SIM49-1
S-102 ICU firmware fixed data Same as above Disable Enable SIM49-1
(Mirror)
S-105 System data Setting value data file (System Disable SIM56-2 Enable SIM56-2
setting/SIM setting data (Image
quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW)
S-103 User data System setting data Enable sim56-02 Enable SIM56-2
Key operator custom setting data Enable System setting - Enable System setting -
(Data changed from the default) data backup - data backup -
FAX reception data (For power Disable Disable
shut off and paper empty)
FEP learning data (Japanese/ Disable Disable
Chinese)
Firmware update data (differential Disable Disable
between new and old) (For FSS)
Account management information/ Enable sim56-02 Enable SIM56-2
User authentication data
Home screen customize data Enable System setting - Enable System setting -
Address Data Enable System setting - Enable System setting -
storage backup storage backup
data
data (Backup)
1) Use SIM56-02 to backup the SD card data to the USB memory. CAUTION: When replacing the SD card, be sure to use only the speci-
2) When the address book has been registered, use the storage fied SD card supplied as a service part.
backup function to backup the address book data. The firmware required for booting must be included in
3) When the operation panel home screen has been customized, the SD card used in this machine. The commercially
backup the SD card data by using the device cloning function. available SD cards have no such data.
4) When there are some FAX/Internet Fax data received, use NOTE: When U2-40 error occurs, if the error cannot be canceled by
SIM66-62 to backup the image data to the USB memory in the SIM16, or when E7-07 error occurs, there may be some trou-
PDF file type, and give the PDF file to the user. (The data cannot ble in the SD card.
be restored to the machine.) CAUTION: The data backed up with SIM56-2 must not be installed to
5) Replace the SD card with a new one. another machine. If installed, the adjustment data will be
6) Upgrade the firmware to the latest version. overwritten and a trouble may be generated.
7) Use SIM66-10 to clear the image send memory.
8) Use SIM56-02 to restore the data backed up in procedure 1).
9) Restore the address book data backed up in the procedure 2). By
using the storage backup function.
10) Restore the data backed up in procedure 3) by using the device
cloning function.
3. HDD/SD card SIM format operation
The relations between SIM62/66 and formatted (deleted) data are as follows:
*1: Physical format ("0" is written to the all area.)
*2: Logical format (Only the management area is initialized.)
*3: Nothing is done.
SIM66-10 FAX image memory clear SIM62-8 Hard disk format (Excluding the system area)
HDD HDD
Partition Partition
Partition Partition
number number
I-1 ERDH work + Temporary storage *3 I-1 ERDH work + Temporary storage *1
I-2 Document filing data (Standard + User) *3 I-2 Document filing data (Standard + User) *1
I-4 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *2 I-4 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *1
L-1 System storage data *3 L-1 System storage data *3
S-1 User data 1 *3 S-1 User data 1 *1
S-10 Pre-install data (e-manual/ Watermark) *3 S-10 Pre-install data (e-manual/ Watermark) *3
S-2 Application #1 (Job log data) *3 S-2 Application #1 (Job log data) *1
S-3 Redial information of the address book *3 S-5 Printer spooler *1
S-5 Printer spooler *3 S-6 Application work *1
S-6 Application work *3 S-9 DSK data save *1
S-9 DSK data save *3
SD Card
SD Card
Partition
Partition
Partition number
Partition
number I-101 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *1
I-101 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *2 L-101 ICU firmware *3
L-101 ICU firmware *3 S-101 ICU firmware fixed data (Pre-install) *3
S-101 ICU firmware fixed data (Pre-install) *3 S-102 ICU firmware fixed data (Mirror) *3
S-102 ICU firmware fixed data (Mirror) *3 S-103 User data 2 *1
S-103 User data 2 *3 S-105 System data (System setting/ SIM setting data *3
S-105 System data (System setting/ SIM setting data *3 (Image quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW)
(Image quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW)
SIM62-10 Job complete list (Job log data) delete
SIM62-1 Hard disk format HDD
HDD
Partition
Partition
Partition number
Partition
number I-1 ERDH work + Temporary storage *3
I-1 ERDH work + Temporary storage *1 I-2 Document filing data (Standard + User) *3
I-2 Document filing data (Standard + User) *1 I-4 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *3
I-4 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *1 L-1 System storage data *3
L-1 System storage data *1 S-1 User data 1 *3
S-1 User data 1 *1 S-10 Pre-install data (e-manual/ Watermark) *3
S-10 Pre-install data (e-manual/ Watermark) *3 S-2 Application #1 (Job log data) *2
S-2 Application #1 (Job log data) *1 S-5 Printer spooler *3
S-5 Printer spooler *1 S-6 Application work *2
S-6 Application work *1 S-9 DSK data save *3
SD Card
SD Card
Partition
Partition
Partition number
Partition
number I-101 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *3
L-101 ICU firmware *3 L-101 ICU firmware *3
S-101 ICU firmware fixed data (Pre-install) *3 S-101 ICU firmware fixed data (Pre-install) *3
S-102 ICU firmware fixed data (Mirror) *3 S-102 ICU firmware fixed data (Mirror) *3
S-105 System data (System setting/ SIM setting data *3 S-103 User data 2 *3
(Image quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW) S-105 System data (System setting/ SIM setting data *3
S-103 User data 2 *1 (Image quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW)
I-101 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *1
SIM62-11 Document filing data delete
HDD
Partition
Partition
number
I-1 ERDH work + Temporary storage *2
I-2 Document filing data (Standard + User) *2
L-1 System storage data *3
S-1 User data 1 *3
S-10 Pre-install data (e-manual/ Watermark) *3
S-2 Application #1 (Job log data) *3
S-5 Printer spooler *2
S-6 Application work *3
SD Card
Partition
Partition
number
L-101 ICU firmware *3
S-101 ICU firmware fixed data (Pre-install) *3
S-102 ICU firmware fixed data (Mirror) *3
S-103 User data 2 *3
S-105 System data (System setting/ SIM setting data *3
SIM62-13 Hard disk format (Manual area only)

HDD
Partition
Partition
number
I-1 ERDH work + Temporary storage *3
I-2 Document filing data (Standard + User) *3
L-1 System storage data *3
S-1 User data 1 *3
S-10 Pre-install data (e-manual/ Watermark) *2
S-2 Application #1 (Job log data) *3
S-5 Printer spooler *3
S-6 Application work *3
SD Card
Partition
Partition
number
L-101 ICU firmware *3
S-101 ICU firmware fixed data (Pre-install) *3
S-102 ICU firmware fixed data (Mirror) *3
S-103 User data 2 *3
S-105 System data (System setting/ SIM setting data *3
4. SERVICE WEB PAGE
A. General
The following functions are available on the Hidden Web Page exclusively used for the serviceman.
Menu/Item Function and content

Password Setting Used to set the password to enter the Hidden Web Page exclusively used for the serviceman.
Output of Test Page Used to print out the test page (system setting contents).
Font/Form Download Used to download Font/Form.
Font/Form of PCL and PostScript, macro, and other resources are downloaded to the HDD and controlled.
(PS, PCL5 only)
Device Cloning Used to import/export the system setting information in XML format. By importing the export file to the other device, the
setting values and setting contents of the device can be copied to another device. This function is useful to set the same
setting to two or more machines efficiently.
Filing Data Backup Used to import/export the document filing data in the unit of folder.
User Control Used to shift to the user mode. After log in, the screen is shifted to the setting screen of user management.
User Control 2 Used to set the Pages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation Group by authority of the serviceman.
(Select among preset items.)
Job Log Save Job Log Used to save the Job Log.
View Job Log Used to display the Job Log.
Update of Firmware Used to update the firmware version.
Syslog*1 Administration Settings Used to set the Log Type. (Set to the default.)
Storage/Send Settings Keep all the items selected.
Save/ Delete Syslog Used to save or delete the log data.
View Syslog Used to display the log data.
*1: This may be useful for troubleshooting when a trouble occurs. When submission of the log data file is requested in order to troubleshoot,
use the log file save mode to export the log data file to the client PC.
5. Details and operation procedures
A. Procedures to enter the Hidden Web page C. Output of Test Page
exclusively used for the serviceman
1) Boot a browser program.
2) Enter the specified
URL (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/service_login.html) and enter the ser- MX-XXXX
vicing page menu.

Default password: "service"
MX-XXXX
1) Click "Print" button of an item or report to be printed.

When there is a list of items for selection, select one of the items
in the pull-down menu list, and click "Print" button.
The list is printed out.
D. Font/Form Download
NOTE: The password can be optionally changed in the Password Set- MX-XXXX
ting menu.
If the password is changed and forgotten, use SIM24-31 to
reset the password to the default.
B. Password Setting
MX-XXXX
(1) Download of Font, Form, and Macro

1) Select "Resource Type" from the pull-down menu list.
(Example: PCL/PostScript Font/Form or Macro)
2) Click "Refer" button to select a target file.
3) Click "Download" button.
4) Click "Submit" (registration) button.
The file is downloaded to the HDD.
The list of the downloaded files and the use percentage of the
HDD are displayed.
(2) Delete of downloaded font
Procedures to delete a file separately
1) Select a file to be deleted from the list of the downloaded files,
* The password can be optionally changed in the following proce-
and click "Delete" button.
dures.
2) Check that the confirmation message is displayed, and press Yes
1) Enter a new password.
key.
2) Enter the new password again to make confirmation.
The file in the HDD is deleted.
(3) Procedures to delete all the files at a time
1) Click "Initialize" button.
2) Check that the confirmation message is displayed, and press OK
key.
NOTE: By the Write-Protect Setting function, the downloaded files can
be set to write protect.
E. Device Cloning G. User Control 1
MX-XXXX MX-XXXX
1) Enter the password to log in.

Default Password: admin
The screen is shifted to the setting menu of user management.
(1) Export
H. User Control 2
1) Select an item to be backed up.
2) Click "Execute" button.
Specify the save position of the file, and save the file.
(File name: *****.bin)
MX-XXXX
When the password is set, the set password must be entered
when importing.
(2) Import
1) Import from a file: Click "Refer" button to select the back-up file.
(File name: *****.bin)
2) Click "Execute" button to execute import.
If the password is set when exporting, the password must be
entered.
3) Reboot the machine.
F. Filing Data Backup
1) Select the Pages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation Group.
(The Pages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation Group must
be set in advance.)
MX-XXXX
(Example of use)
The use sets the conditions for servicing work by using the Pages
Limit Group and the Favorite Operation Group functions in
advance, and the serviceman selects the set conditions in this
mode for servicing work.
I. Job Log
(1) Save Job Log
MX-XXXX
(1) Export
1) Select the folder to be backed up.
The list display conditions can be specified by changing the index
and the number of display items on the pull-down menu.
Specify the save position of the file, and save the file. (File name:
*****.bin)
3) Click "Update" button.
(2) Import
1) Click "Refer" button to select a target file. (File name: *****.bin)
The target file is imported. 1) Click "Save" button, and specify the save position of the Job Log
3) Click "Update" button. to save it.
(2) View Job Log
MX-XXXX
1) Select a Jog Log item to be displayed. (In the default setting, all
the items are selected. Remove check marks of the items which
are not to be displayed.)
2) Click "Show" (display) button.
The Jog Log is displayed.
J. Update of Firmware
MX-XXXX
1) Click "Refer" button to select a firmware file.

2) After selecting a firmware file, click "Execute" button.
The firmware data are sent to the machine, and update of the
firmware is processed.
During the process, the message of "Firmware Update, now process-
ing..." is displayed.
K. Syslog (3) Save/ Delete Syslog
There are following functions in the Syslog mode.
This function is provided to acquire the detailed Syslog to troubleshoot
when a trouble occurs.
When submission of the log data file is requested for troubleshooting, MX-XXXX
use the log file save mode to export the log data file to the client PC.
Syslog Administration Settings Log Type Setting (Set to the default.)

Storage/Send Settings Set all the items selected.
Save/ Delete Syslog Log data save, delete
View Syslog Log data display
MX-XXXX
When saving the Syslog, click "Save" button and specify the save
position and save it.
When deleting, click "Delete" button.
Check to confirm that the confirmation message is displayed, and
press OK key.
(4) View Syslog
MX-XXXX
(1) Administration Settings/ Log Type Setting

Set to the default.
MX-XXXX
1) Select a Syslog item to be displayed.

2) Click "Show" button.
The Syslog is displayed.
L. FSS (Field Support System) Setting

(2) Storage/Send Settings 1) Set the following items.
Keep all the items selected. • Use Proxy Server: Yes/No
• Setting of Scheduled Polling: Allow/Inhibit
• Interval of Scheduled Polling: 1 - 60 min
• Setting of Manual Polling: Allow/Inhibit
MX-XXXX
• Status Notification: On/Off
2) Click the Submit (Registration) button.
MX-XXXX
6. TOOL LIST
Name Part code Note
SIT chart UKOG-0280FCZZ/UKOG-0280FCZ1
Gray test chart UKOG-0162FCZZ
Color image density sensor calibration jig UKOG-0318FCZZ
Kynar powder UKOG-0123FCZZ For transfer belt
Grease (HANARL FL-955R) UKOG-0299FCZZ
Conduction grease (FLOIL GE-676) UKOG-0012QSZZ Other shaft
Grease (FLOIL G-313S) UKOG-0307FCZZ
Grease (JFE552) UKOG-0235FCZZ
Stearic acid powder UKOG-0312FCZZ OPC drum
Grease (FLOIL GP-501MR) UKOG-0013QSZZ RSPF paper feed roller shaft
Grease (MOLYKOTE X5-6020) UKOG-0158FCZZ
Grease (MOLYKOTE BR-2 Plus) UKOG-0097FCZZ
LEAD-FREE SOLDER
The PWB’s of this model employs lead-free solder. The “LF” marks indicated on the PWB’s and the Service Manual mean “Lead-Free” solder.
The alphabet following the LF mark shows the kind of lead-free solder.
Example:
<Solder composition code of lead-free solder>
Solder composition Solder composition Solder composition code

code (Refer to the Sn-Ag-Cu a
Lead-Free table at the right.)
Sn-Ag-Bi
b
Sn-Ag-Bi-Cu
a
Sn-Zn-Bi z
5mm Sn-In-Ag-Bi i
Sn-Cu-Ni n
Sn-Ag-Sb s
Bi-Sn-Ag-P p
Bi-Sn-Ag
(1) NOTE FOR THE USE OF LEAD-FREE SOLDER THREAD

When repairing a lead-free solder PWB, use lead-free solder thread.
Never use conventional lead solder thread, which may cause a breakdown or an accident.
Since the melting-point of lead-free solder thread is about 40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder thread, the use of the
exclusive-use soldering iron is recommended.
(2) NOTE FOR SOLDERING WORK

Since the melting-point of lead-freeCOPYRIGHT © XXXX
solder is about 220°C, which BYSHARP
is about CORPORATION
40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder, and its soldering
capacity is inferior to conventional one, it is apt to keep the soldering iron in contact with the PWB for longer time. This may cause land
separation or may exceed the heat-resistive temperature ALLofRIGHTS
components. Use enough care to separate the soldering iron from the PWB when
RESERVED.
completion of soldering is confirmed.
Since lead-free solder includes a greater quantity of tin, the iron tip may corrode easily. Turn ON/OFF the soldering iron power frequently.
If different-kind solder remains on the soldering iron tip, it is melted together with lead-free solder. To avoid this, clean the soldering iron
tip after completion of soldering work. No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in
If the soldering iron tip is discolored black during soldering work, clean and file the tip with steel wool or a fine filer.
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without
prior written permission of the publisher.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY REPLACEMENT
(Danish) ADVARSEL !
Lithiumbatteri – Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri
af samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren.
(English) Caution !
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to manufacturer’s instructions.
(Finnish) VAROITUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan
tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden
mukaisesti.
(French) ATTENTION
Il y a danger d’explosion s’ il y a remplacement incorrect
de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du
même type ou d’un type équivalent recommandé par
le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux
instructions du fabricant.
(Swedish) VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent
typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens
instruktion.
(German) Achtung
Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien.
Als Ersatzbatterien dürfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ oder
vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden.
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom
Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL

(For USA, CANADA)
“BATTERY DISPOSAL”
THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY
(MANGANESS DIOXIDE) MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY
THAT MUST BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. REMOVE THE
BATTERY FROM THE PRODUCT AND CONTACT YOUR
LOCAL ENVIRONMENTAL AGENCIES FOR INFORMATION
ON RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL OPTIONS.
“TRAITEMENT DES PILES USAGÉES”

CE PRODUIT CONTIENT UNE PILE DE SAUVEGARDE DE
MÉMOIRE LITHIUM PRIMAIRE (DIOXYDE DE MANGANÈSE)
QUI DOIT ÊTRE TRAITÉE CORRECTEMENT. ENLEVEZ LA
PILE DU PRODUIT ET PRENEZ CONTACT AVEC VOTRE
AGENCE ENVIRONNEMENTALE LOCALE POUR DES
INFORMATIONS SUR LES MÉTHODES DE RECYCLAGE ET
DE TRAITEMENT.
#/092)'(4 © "9 3(!20 #/20/2!4)/.
!LL RIGHTS RESERVED
0RODUCED IN *APAN FOR ELECTRONIC $ISTRIBUTION
.O PART OF THIS PUBLICATION MAY BE REPRODUCED
STORED IN A RETRIEVAL SYSTEM OR TRANSMITTED
IN ANY FORM OR BY ANY MEANS
ELECTRONIC MECHANICAL PHOTOCOPYING RECORDING OR OTHERWISE
WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THE PUBLISHER
4RADEMARK ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
v -ICROSOFT¤ 7INDOWS¤ 7INDOWS¤ 7INDOWS¤ -E 7INDOWS .4¤
7INDOWS¤ 7INDOWS¤ 80 7INDOWS¤ 6ISTA 7INDOWS¤ 7INDOWS ¤
7INDOWS¤ 7INDOWS ¤ 3ERVER 7INDOWS3ERVER
¤
¤ 3ERVERAND )NTERNET %XPLORERARE
7INDOWS ¤ REGISTERED TRADEMARKS OR
TRADEMARKS OF -ICROSOFT #ORPORATION IN THE 53!AND OTHER COUNTRIES
v 0OST3CRIPT IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF !DOBE 3YSTEMS )NCORPORATED
v -ACINTOSH -AC /3 !PPLE4ALK %THER4ALK ,ASER 7RITER AND 3AFARI ARE REGISTERED
TRADEMARKS OR TRADEMARKS OF !PPLE #OMPUTER )NC
v )"- 0#!4 AND 0OWER 0# ARE TRADEMARKS OF )NTERNATIONAL "USINESS -ACHINES
#ORPORATION
v !CROBAT¤ 2EADER #OPYRIGHT¤ !DOBE 3YSTEMS )NCORPORATED !LL RIGHTS
RESERVED !DOBE THE !DOBE LOGO !CROBAT AND THE !CROBAT LOGO ARE TRADEMARKS OF
!DOBE 3YSTEMS )NCORPORATED
v 0#, IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF THE (EWLETT 0ACKARD #OMPANY
v 3HARPDESK IS A TRADEMARK OF 3HARP #ORPORATION
v !LL OTHER TRADEMARKS AND COPYRIGHTS ARE THE PROPERTY OF THEIR RESPECTIVE OWNERS
SHARP CORPORATION
Business Solutions
CS Promotion Center
First Edition : April 2015
Latest edition: June 2016

Sharp MX m266n SM

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Sharp MX m266n SM

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

1 : ‘15/Aug. 2 : ‘16/Jun.

NOTE FOR SERVICING

[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

[2] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

[5] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

[6] SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

[7] TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

[8] FIRMWARE UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

[9] MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

[10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

[11] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

[12] ELECTRICAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

[13] OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

This document has been published to be used

NOTE FOR SERVICING [6] SIMULATION

2. Warning for servicing

MX-M316N NOTE FOR SERVICING - i

* Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium

* Place of much dust

* Place near a wall

11-13/16" * When repairing or replacing an electronic part, perform the

* Unstable or irregular surface

MX-M316N NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii

7. Screw tightening torque

MX-M316N NOTE FOR SERVICING - iii

MX-PK11 MX-PF10 MX-FX11 MX-FWX1 AR-SU1 MX-FR48U

MX-USX1 MX-USX5 MX-US10 MX-US50 MX-USA0 MX-AMX1

MX-AMX2 MX-AMX3 MX-HD14 MX-EB13 MX-FR50U MX-HD15

MX-M316N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 1

2 MX-RP19 MX-VR12 MX-RP20

MX-TR18 MX-M315U MX-M265U MX-M356U

MX-PB16 MX-PK11 MX-PF10 MX-NSX1 MX-FX11 MX-FWX1

AR-SU1 MX-FR48U MX-USX1 MX-USX5 MX-US10 MX-US50

MX-USA0 MX-AMX1 MX-AMX2 MX-AMX3 MX-HD14 MX-EB13

MX-M316N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 2

—: Connection not allowed

MX-M316N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 3

Max. range AB: 416x293mm (600dpi: 9826dot x 6920dot)

Random feeding Enabled

(2) Extra paper capacity

Paper type Paper feed tray Manual feed tray

Paper Feeding Section

*1: Supported envelop types:

AB system (mm) Inch system (inch)

Output Location Center Job Separator Right Side

(2) Size of paper which can be discharged

*1: Supported Envelop types:

AB System (mm) Inch System (inch)

Long size paper (bypass tray only): support up to 1,200mm by Sim

I. Operation panel L. Warm-up time

*1: Memory expansion is not available

Memory area Boot/Program area

4. Image send function B. Support system

*1: Except for FTP, Desktop, SMB, USB memory, Broadcast.

* Broadcast transmission is allowed. (Monochrome only)

Mode FAX Mode FAX

(12) Record Size (16) Sound settings

Mode FAX Mode Item FAX

*1: Since scan/Internet Fax/Fax uses the common address book,

B. Europe, Australia and New Zealand

C. Asia and Hong Kong

UTE $˖ %˖ ˖ 35,17(5)$;'9%

2) Select an item to be checked. ˷̚ ˹

TS_ A COPY Developing bias 0 - 650 320 320 320 $˖ %˖ ˖ 7&3/$,1'3;:

ON DVB set value in a ˷ ̚ ˹ &˖ ˖ 7&3/$,163;1

B PRINTER Developing bias 0 - 650 250 250 250 *˖ ˖ 7&+($9<:

DVB set value in a +˖ ˖ 7&+($9<1

print job (Toner ,˖ ˖ 7&+($9<1

˷ ̚ ˹ &˖ ˖ 7&3/$,163;1

SIM50-28. 6(78335,17$'- 5(68/7